imageCLASS
LBP247dw / LBP246dw
User
's Guide
USRMA-8778-00 2023-06 en Copyright CANON INC. 2023
Contents
About the Machine .......................................................................................................................................
2
Supported Functions and Options .............................................................................................................................. 3
Cassette Feeding Module-AH .................................................................................................................................. 5
System Options .................................................................................................................................................... 6
Registering License (Touch Panel Model) ........................................................................................................... 7
System Manager ID and PIN ...................................................................................................................................... 9
Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access ............................................................................................................... 10
Names of Parts and Their Functions ......................................................................................................................... 12
Front Side .......................................................................................................................................................... 13
Rear Side ........................................................................................................................................................... 15
Interior .............................................................................................................................................................. 16
Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................................... 17
Multi-purpose Tray ............................................................................................................................................. 21
Paper Drawer ..................................................................................................................................................... 22
Usable Paper ........................................................................................................................................................... 23
Precautions When Handling Paper ........................................................................................................................ 27
Specications .......................................................................................................................................................... 28
Basic Specications ............................................................................................................................................. 29
Print Specications ............................................................................................................................................. 31
Network Specications ........................................................................................................................................ 34
Security and Management Function Specications .................................................................................................. 35
Supported Environment ...................................................................................................................................... 40
Recommended Functions ........................................................................................................................................ 41
Cost Savings ...................................................................................................................................................... 42
Making Operations More Ecient ......................................................................................................................... 43
Setting Up .......................................................................................................................................................... 45
Conguring the Default Settings (Setup Guide) (Touch Panel Model) ......................................................................... 46
Conguring the Default Settings (Setup Guide) (Black and White LCD Model) ............................................................ 50
Setting Up the Network ........................................................................................................................................... 53
Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN ........................................................................................................................... 55
Connecting to a Wired LAN .................................................................................................................................. 57
Connecting to a Wireless LAN ............................................................................................................................... 58
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Using the Router Button (Push Button Mode) .................................................... 61
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Entering a PIN Code (WPS PIN Code Mode) ....................................................... 63
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Searching for a Router (Access Point Setup Method) ........................................... 66
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method) ........................................................ 69
Setting IPv4 Addresses ........................................................................................................................................ 74
Setting IPv6 Addresses ........................................................................................................................................ 78
Conguring Your Machine for Your Network Environment ....................................................................................... 80
Manually Conguring the Ethernet Settings ..................................................................................................... 81
I
Conguring DNS ..........................................................................................................................................
82
Conguring SMB .......................................................................................................................................... 85
Conguring WINS ......................................................................................................................................... 86
Conguring SNMP ........................................................................................................................................ 87
Conguring SNTP ......................................................................................................................................... 90
Conguring SLP Communication .................................................................................................................... 92
Checking the Network Status and Settings ............................................................................................................. 94
Installing Software and Drivers to the Computer .................................................................................................... 100
Basic Operations ........................................................................................................................................ 102
Turning ON and OFF the Machine .......................................................................................................................... 103
Turning ON the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 104
Turning OFF the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 105
Restarting the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 108
Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep Mode) ........................................................................................................... 110
Using the Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................... 112
Screens Displayed on the Control Panel ............................................................................................................... 113
[Home] Screen ........................................................................................................................................... 116
[Status Monitor] Screen ............................................................................................................................... 119
How to Operate the Control Panel (Touch Panel Model) ......................................................................................... 122
How to Operate the Control Panel (Black and White LCD Model) ............................................................................. 125
Entering Characters .......................................................................................................................................... 127
Customizing the [Home] Screen ......................................................................................................................... 131
Rearranging the Buttons and Renaming the Tabs (Remote UI) (Touch Panel Model) ............................................ 133
Logging In to the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 136
Loading Paper ....................................................................................................................................................... 138
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer .................................................................................................................... 139
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray ............................................................................................................. 144
Preparations and Orientation for Loading Envelopes ............................................................................................ 147
Orientation for Loading Paper with a Logo .......................................................................................................... 149
Specifying the Paper Size and Type ..................................................................................................................... 153
Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Paper Drawer ..................................................................................... 154
Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray ............................................................................. 158
Registering a Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray .................................................. 162
Registering Non-standard Size Paper (Custom Paper) ..................................................................................... 166
Hiding Unused Paper Sizes .......................................................................................................................... 168
Using the Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function .................................................................................... 170
Inserting and Removing a USB Memory Device ...................................................................................................... 171
Change of the Default Settings (Touch Panel Model) ............................................................................................... 173
Changing the Default Settings (Touch Panel Model) .............................................................................................. 174
Adjusting the Sound Volume ................................................................................................................................. 175
Adjusting the Volume ........................................................................................................................................ 176
[Volume Settings] Screen ................................................................................................................................... 177
II
Printing .............................................................................................................................................................. 179
Printing Preparations ............................................................................................................................................ 181
Preparing to Print from a Computer .................................................................................................................... 182
Conguring a Printer Port (Windows) ............................................................................................................ 185
Setting Up a Print Server ................................................................................................................................... 188
Preparations for Using Universal Print ................................................................................................................. 191
Registering the Machine to Cloud Service ...................................................................................................... 192
Registering the Machine to the Computer ..................................................................................................... 195
Preparing to Print from a USB Memory Device (Touch Panel Model) ........................................................................ 196
Preparing to Receive and Print I-Faxes ................................................................................................................ 197
Printing from a Computer ..................................................................................................................................... 199
Registering Non-standard Size Paper to the Computer (Custom Size) ...................................................................... 202
Printing a Document Secured with a PIN (Secure Print) ......................................................................................... 204
Changing the Time Period That Print Data with a PIN (Secure Data) Is Saved ...................................................... 208
Enabling Secure Print in a Printer Driver (macOS) ........................................................................................... 209
Printing with Universal Print .............................................................................................................................. 210
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print) (Touch Panel Model) ..................................................... 211
Screen for Selecting Files in USB Memory Device (Touch Panel Model) ..................................................................... 213
Memory Media Print Settings (Touch Panel Model) ............................................................................................... 214
Receiving and Printing I-Faxes ............................................................................................................................... 218
Changing the Print Settings of the Received I-Fax ................................................................................................. 219
Canceling Printing ................................................................................................................................................ 220
Viewing the Print Job Status and Log ..................................................................................................................... 223
Linking with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................ 226
Preparations for Linking with Mobile Devices ......................................................................................................... 227
Preparations for Direct Connection ..................................................................................................................... 228
Preparations for Using AirPrint ........................................................................................................................... 231
Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine ........................................................................................................... 234
Connecting a Mobile Device via Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) ................................................................... 235
Connecting a Mobile Device Directly to the Machine (Direct Connection) ................................................................. 236
Using a Dedicated Application to Print (Canon PRINT Business) .............................................................................. 240
Using AirPrint Application to Print Data ................................................................................................................. 241
Printing from an Android Device ............................................................................................................................ 244
Printing from Chromebook or Other Device with Chrome OS .................................................................................. 246
Security .............................................................................................................................................................. 248
Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator ...................................................................................... 249
Authenticating Users and Managing Groups .......................................................................................................... 251
Authenticating Users and Managing Groups with Department ID (Department ID Management) ............................... 252
Registering a Department ID and PIN ........................................................................................................... 254
Enabling Department ID Management .......................................................................................................... 256
Setting the Department ID and PIN on a Computer ........................................................................................ 257
Conrming Usage by Department ID ............................................................................................................ 259
III
Protecting the Network
........................................................................................................................................ 260
Setting the Firewall ........................................................................................................................................... 261
Changing the Port Number ................................................................................................................................ 264
Using a Proxy ................................................................................................................................................... 265
Using TLS ........................................................................................................................................................ 267
Using IPSec ...................................................................................................................................................... 269
Using IEEE 802.1X ............................................................................................................................................. 273
Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate ...................................................................................................... 275
Generating a Key and Certicate .................................................................................................................. 276
Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate .................... 278
Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate from an SCEP Server ............................................ 281
If an Error Is Displayed in the Certicate Issuance Request Status .............................................................. 286
Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Obtained from an Issuing Authority ....................................... 288
Verifying a Received Certicate with OCSP ..................................................................................................... 290
Preventing Leaking Information ............................................................................................................................ 291
Restricting Use of Memory Media ....................................................................................................................... 292
Restricting Use from a Mobile Device .................................................................................................................. 294
Restricting Printing ........................................................................................................................................... 295
Restricting Printing from a Computer to Secure Print ...................................................................................... 296
Preventing Unauthorized Use ................................................................................................................................ 297
Restricting Use of Remote UI ............................................................................................................................. 298
Preventing Connection to Computer via USB Port ................................................................................................. 301
Conguring LPD, RAW, or WSD ........................................................................................................................... 302
Disabling HTTP Communication ......................................................................................................................... 304
Restricting Use of the Control Panel (Black and White LCD Model) .......................................................................... 305
Applying a Security Policy ...................................................................................................................................... 306
Security Policy Items ......................................................................................................................................... 308
Managing the Machine ........................................................................................................................ 313
Setting the Date and Time ..................................................................................................................................... 314
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ............................................................................................ 315
Starting Remote UI ........................................................................................................................................... 316
Portal Page of Remote UI .................................................................................................................................. 319
Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI ........................................................................................................... 321
Monitoring the Usage ........................................................................................................................................... 323
Checking the Number of Printed Pages (Check Counter) ........................................................................................ 324
Printing and Viewing Reports and Lists ................................................................................................................ 326
Changing the Report and List Print Settings ................................................................................................... 329
Importing and Exporting the Settings .................................................................................................................... 330
Updating the Firmware (Touch Panel Model) .......................................................................................................... 333
Updating the Firmware (Black and White LCD Model) ............................................................................................. 336
Initializing the Settings and Data .......................................................................................................................... 339
IV
Settings Menu Items .............................................................................................................................. 344
[Preferences] ........................................................................................................................................................ 345
[Display Settings] .............................................................................................................................................. 347
[Timer/Energy Settings] ..................................................................................................................................... 351
[Network] ........................................................................................................................................................ 355
[Wireless LAN Settings] ............................................................................................................................... 361
[TCP/IP Settings] ......................................................................................................................................... 363
[External Interface] ........................................................................................................................................... 374
[Accessibility] ................................................................................................................................................... 375
[Volume Settings] ............................................................................................................................................. 377
[Adjustment/Maintenance] ................................................................................................................................... 379
[Adjust Image Quality] ...................................................................................................................................... 380
[Special Processing] .................................................................................................................................... 382
[Maintenance] .................................................................................................................................................. 387
[Function Settings] ................................................................................................................................................ 388
[Common] ....................................................................................................................................................... 390
[Paper Feed Settings] .................................................................................................................................. 391
[Print Settings] ........................................................................................................................................... 393
[Printer] .......................................................................................................................................................... 394
[Printer Settings] ........................................................................................................................................ 395
[PDL Selection (Plug and Play)] ..................................................................................................................... 413
[Receive] ......................................................................................................................................................... 414
[Common Settings] ..................................................................................................................................... 415
[E-Mail Settings] ......................................................................................................................................... 416
[Access Files] (Touch Panel Model) ...................................................................................................................... 417
[Common Settings] (Touch Panel Model) ....................................................................................................... 418
[Management Settings] ......................................................................................................................................... 421
[User Management] .......................................................................................................................................... 423
[Device Management] ....................................................................................................................................... 425
[License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware] ..................................................................................... 428
[Remote UI Settings] ................................................................................................................................... 430
[Data Management] .......................................................................................................................................... 431
[Security Settings] ............................................................................................................................................. 433
[Authentication/Password Settings] .............................................................................................................. 435
Settings that Can Be Imported and Exported .......................................................................................................... 436
[Preferences] ................................................................................................................................................... 437
[Adjustment/Maintenance] ................................................................................................................................ 442
[Function Settings] ............................................................................................................................................ 443
[Management Settings] ..................................................................................................................................... 446
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 449
Cleaning the Machine ........................................................................................................................................... 451
Cleaning the Surface of the Machine ................................................................................................................... 452
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 453
V
Replacing Consumables
......................................................................................................................................... 454
Replacing the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................................................................ 455
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables ................................................................................................ 460
List of Consumables .......................................................................................................................................... 461
Adjusting the Print Quality and Position ................................................................................................................ 463
Adjusting the Print Density ................................................................................................................................ 464
Adjusting the Print Position ............................................................................................................................... 466
Moving the Machine ............................................................................................................................................. 469
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................... 473
Paper Jams ........................................................................................................................................................... 474
Paper Jams Inside the Machine ........................................................................................................................... 476
Paper Jams in a Paper Source ............................................................................................................................. 481
Paper Jams That Occur Repeatedly ..................................................................................................................... 483
Problems with Printing Results .............................................................................................................................. 485
Toner Smudges and Splatters Appear ................................................................................................................. 487
Streaks Appear ................................................................................................................................................. 488
Printing Is Uneven ............................................................................................................................................ 490
Printed Paper Is Blank ....................................................................................................................................... 492
Smudge Marks Appear on the Edge of Printouts ................................................................................................... 493
Text or Images Are Blurry .................................................................................................................................. 494
Printouts Have Ghost Images ............................................................................................................................. 496
Printouts Are Faded .......................................................................................................................................... 498
The Edge of the Page Is Not Printed .................................................................................................................... 500
The Background Is Generally Dark ...................................................................................................................... 501
White Spots Appear .......................................................................................................................................... 502
Smudge Marks Appear on the Back Side of Printouts ............................................................................................ 504
Printouts Are Skewed ........................................................................................................................................ 505
The Printed Barcode Cannot be Scanned ............................................................................................................. 506
Paper and Paper Feeding Problems ........................................................................................................................ 507
Paper Creases .................................................................................................................................................. 508
Paper Curls ...................................................................................................................................................... 510
Paper Is Not Fed or Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together ..................................................................................... 511
Setting Up ............................................................................................................................................................ 512
The Machine Connected via WSD Port Is Not Displayed During Driver Installation .................................................... 513
Cannot Connect to Wireless LAN ......................................................................................................................... 514
Network ............................................................................................................................................................... 515
Cannot Switch to Wireless LAN ........................................................................................................................... 516
Cannot Find the Print Server to Connect to .......................................................................................................... 518
Cannot Connect to a Shared Printer .................................................................................................................... 519
Cannot Find the IP Address of the Machine .......................................................................................................... 520
AirPrint Does Not Work ..................................................................................................................................... 521
Printing ................................................................................................................................................................ 522
Cannot Print .................................................................................................................................................... 523
VI
Cannot Print (Wireless LAN) .........................................................................................................................
524
Cannot Print (Wired LAN) ............................................................................................................................. 526
Cannot Print (USB Connection) ..................................................................................................................... 528
Cannot Print (via Print Server) ...................................................................................................................... 529
Printing Is Slow ................................................................................................................................................ 530
Management Functions and Environment Settings ................................................................................................ 531
Cannot Access Remote UI .................................................................................................................................. 532
Changing the Volume of the Conrmation Sound and Warning Tone ...................................................................... 533
Changing the Time Until Sleep Mode .................................................................................................................. 534
Lost Department ID or PIN for the Administrator .................................................................................................. 535
Checking the Items That Can Be Congured on the Machine and Their Settings ....................................................... 536
A Message Appears ............................................................................................................................................... 537
An Error Code Is Displayed ..................................................................................................................................... 554
If the Problem Persists .......................................................................................................................................... 559
Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................... 562
Manuals of the Machine ........................................................................................................................................ 563
Using the User's Guide .......................................................................................................................................... 564
Manual Display Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 566
Operation Examples When Using a Computer ........................................................................................................ 567
Environmental Information, Regulations, and Standards ........................................................................................ 577
Notice .................................................................................................................................................................. 584
Trademarks and Copyrights ................................................................................................................................... 585
Third-party Software ............................................................................................................................................. 587
VII
About the Machine
About the Machine ............................................................................................................................................
2
Supported Functions and Options ........................................................................................................................ 3
Cassette Feeding Module-AH ............................................................................................................................ 5
System Options ................................................................................................................................................. 6
Registering License (Touch Panel Model) ................................................................................................... 7
System Manager ID and PIN ................................................................................................................................. 9
Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access ....................................................................................................... 10
Names of Parts and Their Functions .................................................................................................................. 12
Front Side ....................................................................................................................................................... 13
Rear Side ........................................................................................................................................................ 15
Interior ........................................................................................................................................................... 16
Control Panel .................................................................................................................................................. 17
Multi-purpose Tray ......................................................................................................................................... 21
Paper Drawer ................................................................................................................................................. 22
Usable Paper ........................................................................................................................................................ 23
Precautions When Handling Paper ................................................................................................................. 27
Specications ....................................................................................................................................................... 28
Basic Specications ......................................................................................................................................... 29
Print Specications ......................................................................................................................................... 31
Network Specications ................................................................................................................................... 34
Security and Management Function Specications ......................................................................................... 35
Supported Environment ................................................................................................................................. 40
Recommended Functions .................................................................................................................................... 41
Cost Savings ................................................................................................................................................... 42
Making Operations More Ecient .................................................................................................................. 43
About the Machine
1
About the Machine
9665-000
Befor
e using the machine, check the basic information of the machine such as the supported functions and options,
names of each part, and specications of the functions. Also consider the management system of the machine and
measures against security risks.
Basic Information
The supported functions and options vary depending on the model. Check the list for details.
You can also check the specications of the options.
Supported Functions and Options(P. 3)
Check the names of parts, usable paper, and specications of functions, as needed.
Names of Parts and Their Functions(P. 12)
Usable Paper(P. 23)
Specications(P
. 28)
Information Required for Management Functions
When using the management functions, use the System Manager ID and PIN to log in.
The preset System Manager ID and PIN vary depending on the model.
System Manager ID and PIN(P. 9)
When using the machine in a network envir
onment, check the examples of measures to prevent
unauthorized access, and consider implementing these.
Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access(P. 10)
Useful Tips
Intr
oduces recommended functions useful for digitizing documents, reducing costs, and making operations
more ecient.
Recommended Functions(P. 41)
About the Machine
2
Supported Functions and Options
9665-001
User
's Guide (this manual) describes all functions of the model series including the machine.
Some of the functions listed in User's Guide may not be available depending on your model. Use the table below to
see which functions and options are supported by your model.
Supported Functions(P. 3)
Supported Options(P. 4)
Supported Functions
: Supported : Not supported
Function LBP247dw LBP246dw
Print
2-sided Printing
Memory Media Print
Wired LAN connection
Wireless LAN connection
USB connection
Remote UI
Keys and certicates
Linking with mobile devices
Display
Touch panel Black and white LCD
Default System Manager ID
7654321 Not specied
Default System Manager PIN
7654321 Not specied
Department ID Management
Application Library
Toner Replenishment Service
uniFLOW Online Express
About the Machine
3
● For details about the types of available drivers, see the Canon website for your country or r
egion, or see the
supplied User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
https://global.canon/en/support/
Supported Options
You can use various options to suit your purpose.
● Adding a paper dr
awer
Cassette Feeding Module-AH(P. 5)
● Cr
eating barcodes
Barcode Printing Kit(P. 6)
: Supported : Not supported
Option LBP247dw LBP246dw
Cassette Feeding Module-AH
Barcode Printing Kit
About the Machine
4
Cassette Feeding Module-AH
9665-002
When fr
equently using paper of varying sizes or types or when loading large quantities of paper at a time, install the
optional Cassette Feeding Module-AH. This option reduces the work of loading paper.
For how to install Cassette Feeding Module-AH, see "Setup Guide."
Manuals of the Machine(P. 563)
◼ Specications
Paper size Maximum: 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm)
Minimum: 4 1/8" x 5 7/8" (105.0 mm x 148.0 mm)
Paper basis weight 16 lb Bond to 32 lb Bond (60 g/m² to 120 g/m²)
Number of paper sources and paper capacity
*1
Paper drawer x 1
550 sheets (21 lb Bond (80 g/m²)), 640 sheets (17 lb Bond (64 g/m²))
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
15 3/4" x 14" x 5 1/8" (399 mm x 356 mm x 131 mm)
Weight Approx. 8.4 lb (3.8 kg)
*1
V
aries depending on the installation environment and paper to be used.
About the Machine
5
System Options
9665-003
By installing the system options, you can boost performance of the machine.
Barcode Printing Kit(P. 6)
Barcode Printing Kit
You can use Barcode Printing Kit to create barcodes in various formats.
For details about using the Barcode Printing Kit, see the Barcode Printing Guide at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
* To use Barcode Printing Kit, you must obtain a license key and register it to the machine. Registering License
(T
ouch Panel Model)(P. 7)
* To print barcodes, you must enable use of PCL.
[Personality](P. 399)
About the Machine
6
Registering License (Touch Panel Model)
9665-0C8
Depending on the system option, you may have to obtain a license k
ey and register it to the machine to start the
system option.
Step 1: Obtaining a License Key(P. 7)
Step 2: Registering the License Key(P. 7)
Step 1: Obtaining a License Key
From a Web browser on a computer, access the following URL and follow the procedure on the screen to obtain a
license key.
http://www.canon.com/lms/license/
To obtain the license key, you must have the License Access Number and serial number of the machine. Prepare that
information in advance.
Checking the License Access Number
Check the number in the License Access Number Certicate that is supplied with the package of the option.
How to Look Up the Serial Number
[Home] screen on the control panel [Status Monitor] [Device Information] [Serial Number]
● Y
ou can also check this information using Remote UI from a computer.
Managing the Machine from a
Computer (Remote UI)(P
. 315)
● You can also check this information on the label on the back of the machine.
Step 2: Registering the License Key
Use the control panel to register the license key. You cannot register the license key using Remote UI from a computer.
Administrator privileges are required.
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Management Settings] [License/Other] [Register License].
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
About the Machine
7
3
Conrm the message, and pr
ess [OK].
4
Enter the license key, and press [Apply].
➠ Registr
ation starts. When registration is completed, the message [Installation is complete. Changes will be
effective after the main power is turned OFF and ON.] is displayed.
5
Press [Close].
6
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The license is r
egistered.
About the Machine
8
System Manager ID and PIN
9665-005
The machine has a System Manager Mode for vie
wing and changing important settings.
When System Manager ID and System Manager PIN are set, only those users who know this information are able to
log into System Manager Mode.
For LBP247dw
The System Manager ID and System Manager PIN are set in advance as follows:
System Manager ID 7654321
System Manager PIN 7654321
● When
the System Manager Mode login screen appears, enter the above ID and PIN to log in if the default
settings have not been changed. To log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode, you must change the
System Manager PIN from the default setting.
● Change the default settings to protect the information, and allow only certain administrators to know this
information.
For LBP246dw
The System Manager ID and System Manager PIN are not set.
System Manager Mode is disabled, allowing anyone to see and change important settings. Set the System
Manager ID and System Manager PIN to protect the information, and allow only certain administrators of
this information.
For details about how to change and set the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN, see the following:
Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 249)
About the Machine
9
Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access
9665-006
Be sur
e to read this section before using the machine in a network environment.
Printers and multifunction machines can provide various useful functions when connected to a network. However,
because this also creates risks of unauthorized access and eavesdropping over the network, measures against security
risks are essential.
This section provides examples of measures against unauthorized access that you can implement during setup when
using the machine in a network environment.
Using a Private IP Address(P. 10)
Using a PIN to Protect Information(P. 10)
Precautions When Using Remote UI(P. 11)
● Ther
e are additional measures against security risks you can implement on the machine, such as restricting
communication with a rewall and using TLS encrypted communication to prevent eavesdropping and
tampering. Take the necessary measures according to your usage environment.
Security(P. 248)
Using a Private IP Address
Ther
e are two types of IP addresses: a global IP address, which is used for connecting to the Internet, and a private IP
address, which is used in a local area network such as a company LAN.
If a global IP address is assigned to the machine, the machine can be accessed by users on the Internet. Thus, the risk
of information leakage due to unauthorized access from external network increases.
On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned to the machine, access to the machine is restricted to only users
on your local area network. Therefore, it reduces the risk of unauthorized access compared to an assigned global IP
address.
Basically, assign a private IP address to the machine.
A private IP address is used in one of the following ranges.
Ranges for Private IP Addresses
● From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
● From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
● From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
For details about how to assign and conrm the IP address, see the following:
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
If you want to assign a global IP addr
ess to the machine, you can create an environment to prevent outside access,
such as by using a rewall, to reduce the risk of unauthorized access. Contact your network administrator about how
to implement network security.
Using a PIN to Protect Information
By setting up a PIN to pr
otect the information stored in the machine, you can reduce the risk of information leakage or
unauthorized use if a malicious third party attempts to gain unauthorized access.
You can set a PIN to the functions indicated below. Only users who know the PIN can use these functions and access
the information on the machine.
Remote UI
About the Machine
10
You can require the user to enter the Remote UI Access PIN when using Remote UI.
Setting the PIN to Use for Remote UI(P. 298)
System Manager ID
Y
ou can require the user to enter the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN, when changing any
important settings.
Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 249)
Precautions When Using Remote UI
● Do not access other websites when using Remote UI.
● After using Remote UI, be sure to log out and close your browser.
About the Machine
11
Names of Parts and Their Functions
9665-007
Fr
ont Side
Check these parts on the front when operating the machine.
Front Side(P. 13)
● Use the contr
ol panel to operate the machine and congure the settings.
Control Panel(P. 17)
● Load printing paper into the follo
wing paper sources:
Multi-purpose Tray(P. 21)
Paper Drawer(P. 22)
Rear Side
Check the r
ear parts when installing and connecting the machine and when clearing paper jams.
Rear Side(P. 15)
Interior
Check the interior of the machine when clearing paper jams.
Interior(P. 16)
About the Machine
12
Front Side
9665-008
USB port (for USB devices)
Y
ou can connect a commercial USB memory device or USB keyboard.
Front cover
Open when r
eplacing toner cartridge or when a paper jam occurs inside the machine.
Lift handles
Hold the lift handles when mo
ving the machine.
Ventilation slots
Air inside the machine is r
eleased through the ventilation slots to cool down the inside of the machine.
Do not place objects next to the ventilation slots, as this can prevent ventilation.
Multi-purpose tray
T
o temporarily use paper not loaded in the paper drawer, load it in the multi-purpose tray.
Multi-purpose
T
ray(P. 21)
Output tray
Printed paper is ejected to the output tr
ay.
About the Machine
13
Paper stopper
Open the paper stopper to pr
event paper from falling out of the output tray.
Power switch
T
urns the power of the machine ON and OFF.
Turning ON and OFF the Machine(P. 103)
Paper drawer
Load paper you usually use into the paper dr
awer.
Paper Drawer(P. 22)
Control panel
Use the display and k
eys to operate the machine and conrm the operations and status.
Control
Panel
(P. 17)
● T
o ensure ecient use of the machine, regularly clean the surface.
Cleaning the Surface of the Machine(P. 452)
About the Machine
14
Rear Side
9665-009
Rear cover
Open the r
ear cover when a paper jam occurs inside the machine.
Ventilation slots
Air inside the machine is r
eleased through the ventilation slots to cool down the inside of the machine.
Do not place objects next to the ventilation slots, as this can prevent ventilation.
Rating label
This label shows the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine.
Power socket
Connect the po
wer cord to the power socket.
USB port (for USB devices)
Y
ou can connect a commercial USB memory device or USB keyboard.
USB port (for computer connection)
You can connect a computer to the USB port using a commercial USB cable.
LAN port
Y
ou can connect the machine to a wired LAN using a commercial Ethernet cable connected to the LAN port.
About the Machine
15
Interior
9665-00A
Check the interior of the machine when clearing paper jams. Paper Jams(P. 474)
Transport guide (rear)
If a paper jam occurs inside the machine, lift the fr
ont of the transport guide and remove the paper.
Transport guide (front)
If a paper jam occurs inside the machine, lift the r
ear of the transport guide and remove the paper.
2-sided transport guide
If a paper jam occurs during 2-sided printing, push this guide do
wn and remove the paper.
About the Machine
16
Control Panel
9665-00C
Use the contr
ol panel to operate the machine and congure the settings.
Control Panel of Touch Panel Model(P. 17)
Control Panel of Black and White LCD Model(P. 18)
Control Panel of Touch Panel Model
If the display is dicult to see, adjust the angle of the contr
ol panel, as shown on the
right.
Display
Displays the scr
eens for operating the functions, usage, messages, and other information. This touch panel
can be operated by directly touching the screen with your nger.
Using the Control Panel(P. 112)
Sound Volume key ( )
Adjusts the volume. Adjusting the Volume(P. 176)
Energy Saver key ( )
Puts the machine into sleep mode to r
educe power consumption. In sleep mode,
lights up yellow-green.
Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep Mode)(P. 110)
About the Machine
17
Data indicator
Blinks when an oper
ation is being performed, such as during printing, and lights up when data is waiting to
be processed.
Error indicator
Blinks or lights up when a paper jam or other err
or occurs.
Home key ( )
Displays the [Home] scr
een.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
Stop key ( )
Cancels an oper
ation being executed.
Control Panel of Black and White LCD Model
Display
Displays the scr
eens for operating the functions, usage, messages, and other information.
Using the
Contr
ol Panel(P. 112)
Home key ( )
Displays the [Home] scr
een.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
Back key ( )
Returns you to the pr
evious screen.
Numeric keys ( to )
Enter numbers or char
acters.
Entering Characters Using the Control Panel (Black and White LCD
Model)(P
. 128)
About the Machine
18
Uppercase/lowercase/numeric key ( )
Changes the char
acter type.
Data indicator
Blinks when an oper
ation is being performed, such as during printing, and lights up when data is waiting to
be processed.
Error indicator
Blinks or lights up when a paper jam or other err
or occurs.
Energy Saver key ( )
Puts the machine into sleep mode to r
educe power consumption. In sleep mode,
lights up yellow-green.
Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep Mode)(P. 110)
Status Monitor key ( )
Check the information of the machine, usage and logs, network settings, and err
or information.
[Status
Monitor] Scr
een of the Black and White LCD Model(P. 120)
ID key ( )
Pr
ess after entering the ID and PIN to log in when Department ID Management and the System Manager ID
is enabled. After you nish using the machine, press this key again to log out.
Logging In to the
Machine
(P. 136)
Clear key ( )
Deletes the enter
ed numbers and text.
Stop key ( )
Cancels printing and other oper
ations.
Symbol key ( )
Enter symbols. Entering Characters Using the Control Panel (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 128)
Left key ( )
Returns to the previous screen. Press when entering text to move the cursor to the left.
Up key ( )
Selects the item abo
ve and increases the value on a slider.
Right key ( )
Mo
ves to the next screen. Press when entering text to move the cursor to the right.
Down key ( )
Selects the item belo
w and decreases the value on a slider.
About the Machine
19
OK key ( )
Conrms the settings and selected details.
About the Machine
20
Multi-purpose Tray
9665-00E
Load paper that you will tempor
arily use in the multi-purpose tray.
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose
T
ray(P. 144)
Paper guides
Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper to pr
operly place the paper.
Paper tray
Pull out the paper tr
ay when loading paper.
Extension tray
Open and use this tray when loading large paper sizes.
Lock release lever
Mo
ve the paper guides while pressing the lock release lever.
About the Machine
21
Paper Drawer
9665-00F
Load paper that you usually use into the paper dr
awer.
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 139)
Paper guides
Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper to pr
operly place the paper.
Lock release lever
Mo
ve the paper guides while pressing the lock release lever.
Remaining paper display
Sho
ws the amount of paper remaining. The indicator moves down as the amount of paper decreases.
About the Machine
22
Usable Paper
9665-00H
The sizes and types of paper that can be used on the machine ar
e shown below.
Usable Paper Sizes(P. 23)
Usable Paper Types(P. 24)
Unusable Paper(P. 26)
● Pr
ecautions must be taken when handling and storing paper.
Precautions When Handling Paper(P. 27)
Usable Paper Sizes
: Usable : Not usable
Paper Size Paper Drawer 1
Paper Drawer 2
*1
Multi-purpose Tray
Automatic 2-sided Printing
*2
A4
*3*4
B5
A5
*5
A6
Legal (LGL)
*3
Letter (LTR)
*3*4
Statement (STMT)
Executive (EXEC)
Ocio
*3
Ocio (Br
azil)
*3
Ocio (Me
xico)
*3
Letter (Government)
*3
Legal (Government)
*3
About the Machine
23
Paper Size Paper Drawer 1
Paper Drawer 2
*1
Multi-purpose Tray
Automatic 2-sided Printing
*2
Foolscap/Folio
*3
Foolscap (Australia)
*3
Legal (India)
*3
3x5inch
Envelope No.10 (COM10)
Envelope Monarch
Envelope C5
Envelope DL
Custom Paper Size
*6
*6
*7
*8
*1
The optional Cassette Feeding Module-AH
*2
Automatically prints on both sides without having to r
eload the paper.
*3
Enables printing of received I-Faxes.
*4
Enables printing of reports and lists.
*5
Enables loading of paper in the portrait or landscape orientation.
*6
You can use a custom size from 4 1/8" x 5 7/8" (105.0 mm x 148.0 mm) to 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm).
*7
You can use a custom size from 3" x 5" (76.2 mm x 127.0 mm) to 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm).
*8
You can use a custom size from 8 1/4" x 11" (210.0 mm x 279.4 mm) to 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm).
Usable Paper Types
Y
ou can use non-chlorine paper.
: Usable : Not usable
Paper Type Paper Weight Paper
Dr
awer 1
Paper
Drawer 2
*1
Multi-
purpose
Tray
Automatic 2-
sided Printing
*2
Thin 1
*3
16 lb Bond (60 g/m²)
Plain 1
*3*4
17 lb Bond to 19 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 74
g/m²)
Plain 2
*3*4
20 lb Bond to 23 lb Bond (75 g/m² to 89
g/m²)
About the Machine
24
Paper Type Paper Weight Paper
Dr
awer 1
Paper
Drawer 2
*1
Multi-
purpose
Tray
Automatic 2-
sided Printing
*2
Plain 3
*4
24 lb Bond to 28 lb Bond (90 g/m² to 105
g/m²)
Heavy 1 29 lb Bond to 32 lb Bond (106 g/m² to 120
g/m²)
Heavy 2 33 lb Bond to 39 lb Bond (121 g/m² to 149
g/m²)
Heavy 3 40 lb Bond to 73 lb Cover (150 g/m² to 199
g/m²)
Recycled 1
*3*4
17 lb Bond to 19 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 74
g/m²)
Recycled 2
*3*4
20 lb Bond to 23 lb Bond (75 g/m² to 89
g/m²)
Labels
Color
*3*4
17 lb Bond to 19 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 74
g/m²)
Letterhead 1 17 lb Bond to 19 lb Bond (61 g/m² to 74
g/m²)
Letterhead 2 20 lb Bond to 23 lb Bond (75 g/m² to 89
g/m²)
Letterhead 3 24 lb Bond to 28 lb Bond (90 g/m² to 105
g/m²)
Letterhead 4 29 lb Bond to 32 lb Bond (106 g/m² to 120
g/m²)
Letterhead 5 33 lb Bond to 39 lb Bond (121 g/m² to 149
g/m²)
Letterhead 6 40 lb Bond to 73 lb Cover (150 g/m² to 199
g/m²)
Bond 1 16 lb Bond to 19 lb Bond (60 g/m² to 74
g/m²)
Bond 2 20 lb Bond to 27 lb Bond (75 g/m² to 104
g/m²)
Bond 3 28 lb Bond to 31 lb Bond (105 g/m² to 120
g/m²)
About the Machine
25
Paper Type Paper Weight Paper
Dr
awer 1
Paper
Drawer 2
*1
Multi-
purpose
Tray
Automatic 2-
sided Printing
*2
Envelope
*5
*1
The optional Cassette Feeding Module-AH
*2
Automatically prints on both sides without having to r
eload the paper.
*3
Enables printing of received I-Faxes.
*4
Enables printing of reports and lists.
*5
When you specify a custom size, [Envelope 1] and [Envelope 2] are displayed for the paper type. If you cannot print
properly with [Envelope 1], such as due to the toner coming off, try using [Envelope 2].
Unusable Paper
Before printing, check whether the paper to use is suitable. Do not use the following types of paper, as they can
cause paper jams or printing err
ors:
● Wrinkled, creased, curled, torn, or damp paper
*1
● Thin straw paper, very thin paper, coarse paper, glossy paper
● Paper with glue or other adhesive sticking out or label paper whose back side can be easily peeled off
● Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer, back side of paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
*1
Printing on damp paper may cause steam to be emitted fr
om the output area or water droplets to adhere to the
output part, but this does not indicate a malfunction. This is because the water contained in the paper evaporates due to
the heat generated when the toner xes to the paper. This is more likely to occur when the room temperature is low.
About the Machine
26
Precautions When Handling Paper
9665-00J
T
o prevent paper jams and other errors and ensure beautiful printing, you must take precautions when handling and
storing paper.
To maintain the quality of printed paper, pay attention when storing and gluing paper.
◼ Handling and Storing Paper
Acclimating the Paper to the Usage Environment
Before using the paper in the machine, be sure to fully acclimate the paper to the environment where the
machine is located. Immediately using paper stored in a location with a different temperature or humidity
can cause paper jams or printing errors.
Storing Paper Before Use
● It is recommended that you use paper as soon as possible after opening the package. Any remaining
paper should be wrapped in the original package and stored on a at surface.
● To protect the paper from moisture or dryness, keep the paper wrapped in its package until use.
● Do not store the paper so that it curls or folds.
● Do not store the paper vertically, and do not stack too much paper.
● Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place with high humidity, dryness, or a drastically different
temperature or humidity compared to the usage environment.
◼ Storing and Gluing Printed Paper
Storing Paper
● Store the paper on a at surface.
● Do not store the paper together with items made of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) such as a clear folder. The
toner may melt, causing the paper to stick to the PVC material.
● Do not store the paper folded or creased. Toner may peel off.
● Do not store the paper in a place with high temperature.
● When storing the paper for a long period of time (two years or longer), store in a binder or similar item.
● Storing the paper for a long period of time can cause a discoloration of the paper, resulting in a
discoloration of printed images.
Precautions When Gluing Printed Paper
● Always use insoluble adhesives.
● Before applying adhesive, perform a test using an unneeded printout.
● Allow glued paper to fully dry before stacking.
About the Machine
27
Specications
9665-00K
Specications ar
e subject to change for product improvement, and the contents may be updated depending on
products released in the future. For details about product information, see the Canon website.
https://global.canon/
Specications of Main Unit
Basic Specications(P
. 29)
Specications of Functions
Print Specications(P
. 31)
Network Specications(P
. 34)
Security and Management Function Specications(P
. 35)
Operating Environment and Supported Software and Servers
Supported Environment(P. 40)
◼ See Also
Specications of Options
Y
ou can check the compatibility of options and their specications.
Supported Options(P. 4)
About the Machine
28
Basic Specications
9665-00L
Type Desktop
Color Supported Black and White
Print Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Number of Tones 256
Paper Size Maximum: 8 1/2" x 14" (216.0 mm x 355.6 mm)
Minimum (paper dr
awer): 4 1/8" x 5 7/8" (105.0 mm x 148.0 mm)
Minimum (multi-purpose tray): 3" x 5" (76.2 mm x 127.0 mm)
Paper Type and Weight
Usable Paper(P. 23)
Warm-up time
*1
After powering ON
14.0 seconds or less
After r
ecovering from sleep mode
4.0 seconds or less
First Print Time
(Letter)
Approx. 4.9 seconds
Continuous Print Speed
*2
(Letter)
42.0 sheets/minute
Paper Feeding System and Paper Capacity
*3
Paper Drawer x 1
250 sheets (17 lb Bond (64 g/m²), 21 lb Bond (80 g/m²))
Multi-purpose T
ray
100 sheets (17 lb Bond (64 g/m²), 21 lb Bond (80 g/m²))
Output System and Output Capacity
*3
Output Tray
150 sheets (18 lb Bond (68 g/m²))
Power supply AC 110 V - 127 V, 5.7 A, 60 Hz
Power Consumption
*1
Maximum Power Consumption
1,180 W or less
During Sleep Mode
Approx. 0.9 W (USB, wired LAN, or wireless LAN connection)
About the Machine
29
With Power Turned OFF
0.1 W or less
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
LBP247dw
17 1/4" x 14 3/4" x 12 1/4" (438 mm x 373 mm x 312 mm)
LBP246dw
15 3/4" x 14 3/4" x 9 7/8" (399 mm x 373 mm x 249 mm)
Weight
(Not including toner cartridges)
LBP247dw
Appr
ox. 20.1 lb (9.1 kg)
LBP246dw
Approx. 19.2 lb (8.7 kg)
Maximum Occupancy Space LBP247dw
20 1/2" x 34 3/4" x 17 3/8" (520 mm x 881 mm x 440 mm)
LBP246dw
15 3/4" x 34 3/4" x 14 7/8" (399 mm x 881 mm x 378 mm)
* Pr
ovide a space of at least 4" (100 mm) around the machine.
Memory Capacity RAM: 1 GB
Usage Environment Temperature: 50 °F to 86 °F (10 °C to 30 °C)
Humidity: 20% to 80% RH (no condensation)
*1
May vary depending the usage envir
onment and usage conditions.
*2
Print speed is measured based on internal testing using Letter size paper printed with 100% print ratio to original on
one-sided paper. Internal testing involved continuously printing the same one page of content on plain paper. Print
speed may vary depending on paper type, paper size or paper feeding direction.
The device may automatically pause or slow down in order to adjust printer condition such as controlling temperature of
a certain unit or limiting impact to image quality during continuous printing.
*3
May vary depending on the installation environment and paper to be used.
About the Machine
30
Print Specications
9665-00R
UFR II Printer Function(P. 31)
PS Printer Function(P. 31)
PCL Printer Function(P. 32)
Memory Media Print Function(P. 33)
UFR II Printer Function
Type Internal
Print Size Usable Paper(P. 23)
Continuous Print Speed Same as "Continuous Print Speed" for main unit
Basic Specications(P
. 29)
Resolution Data Processing
1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) UFR II
Protocol Supported TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, IPP, IPPS, FTP, WSD
Resident Fonts None
Interface USB
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wir
ed LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
PS Printer Function
Model Type Internal
Print Size Usable Paper(P. 23)
Continuous Print Speed Same as "Continuous Print Speed" for main unit
Basic Specications(P
. 29)
Resolution Data Processing
About the Machine
31
1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL)
Adobe
®
PostScript
®
3
TM
Protocol Supported TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, IPP, IPPS, FTP, WSD
Resident Fonts 136 Roman
Interface USB
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wir
ed LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
PCL Printer Function
Type Internal
Print Size Usable Paper(P. 23)
Continuous Print Speed Same as "Continuous Print Speed" for main unit
Basic Specications(P
. 29)
Resolution Data Processing
1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) PCL6, PCL5
Protocol Supported TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, IPP, IPPS, FTP, WSD
Resident Fonts LBP247dw
93 Roman, 10 Bitmap fonts, 2 OCR fonts, Barcode fonts
*1
LBP246dw
45 Roman, 10 Bitmap fonts
Interface USB
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wir
ed LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
About the Machine
32
*1 Requires optional Barcode Printing Kit.
Memory Media Print Function
Printable Formats PDF, TIFF/JPEG
About the Machine
33
Network Specications
9665-00S
◼ Common
Protocol Supported TCP/IP
Fr
ame type: Ethernet II
Print applications: LPD, Raw, IPP, IPPS, FTP, WSD, Mopria, AirPrint, Windows10 Mobile Print,
Windows11 Mobile Print
◼ Wir
ed LAN
Interface 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T (RJ-45)
◼ Wir
eless LAN
Standard IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
Transmission Method IEEE 802.11b (Modulation system: DS-SS)
IEEE 802.11g (Modulation system: OFDM method)
IEEE 802.11n (Modulation system: OFDM method)
Communication Mode Infrastructure Mode
Access Point Mode
Security
(Encryption Method)
Infrastructure Mode
128 (104) / 64 (40) bit WEP
WP
A-PSK (TKIP / AES-CCMP)
WPA2-PSK (TKIP / AES-CCMP)
WPA-EAP (AES-CCMP)
WPA2-EAP (AES-CCMP)
Access Point Mode
WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)
Setup Method WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup
About the Machine
34
Security and Management Function Specications
9665-00U
Firewall(P. 35)
IPSec(P. 35)
Keys and Certicates(P
. 36)
Denition of "
Weak Encryption"(P. 37)
TLS(P. 38)
Firewall
● Up to 16 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specied for both IPv4 and IPv6.
● Up to 32 MAC addresses can be specied.
IPSec
IPSec of the machine conforms to RFC2401, RFC2402, RFC2406, and RFC4305.
Operating system of connected device Windows 8.1
Windo
ws 10
Windows 11
Connection mode Transport mode
Key exchange protocol IKEv1 (main mode)
Authentication method
Pr
e-shared key
Digital signature
Hash algorithm (and key length)
HMAC-SHA1-96
HMAC-SHA2 (256 bits or 384 bits)
Encryption algorithm (and key length)
3DES-CBC
AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, 256 bits)
Key exchange algorithm/group (and key length)
Die-Hellman (DH)
Group 14 (2048 bits)
ECDH-P256 (256 bits)
ECDH-P384 (384 bits)
About the Machine
35
ESP Hash algorithm
HMA
C-SHA1-96
Encryption algorithm (and key length)
3DES-CBC
AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, 256 bits)
Hash/encryption algorithm (and key length)
AES-GCM (128 bits, 192 bits, 256 bits)
AH Hash algorithm
HMA
C-SHA1-96
● IPSec supports communication to a unicast addr
ess (single device).
Keys and Certicates
The follo
wing keys and certicates are supported:
◼ Self-generated Key and Self-signed Certicate or CSR
Public key algorithm (and key length) RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 4096 bits)
DSA (1024Bits, 2048Bits, 3072Bits)
ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)
Certicate signatur
e algorithm
RSA: SHA-1
*1
, SHA-256, SHA-384
*2
, SHA-512
*2
DSA: SHA-1
*1
ECDSA: SHA-1
*1
, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512
Certicate thumbprint algorithm SHA1
*1
Available only when installed b
y using the Remote UI.
*2
SHA384-RSA and SHA512-RSA are available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more.
◼ Key and Certicate or CA Certicate for Installation
Format Key
PK
CS#12
*1
CA certicate
About the Machine
36
X.509 DER format/PEM format
File extension Key
".p12" or ".pfx"
CA certicate
".cer
" or ".pem"
Public key algorithm (and key length) RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 4096 bits)
DSA (1024 bits, 2048 bits, 3072 bits)
ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)
Certicate signature algorithm
RSA: SHA-1
*2
, SHA-256, SHA-384
*3
, SHA-512
*3
DSA: SHA-1*
2
ECDSA: SHA-1
*2
, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512
Certicate thumbprint algorithm SHA1
*1
Requir
ements for the certicate contained in a key are pursuant to CA certicates.
*2
Available only when installed by using the Remote UI.
*3
SHA384-RSA and SHA512-RSA are available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more.
● The machine does not support use of a certicate r
evocation list (CRL).
Denition of "
Weak Encryption"
When [Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.] or [Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption] in [Encryption Settings] is set to [On], the
use of the following algorithms is prohibited.
[Encryption Settings](P. 433)
Hash MD4, MD5, SHA-1
HMAC HMAC-MD5
Common key encryption RC2, RC4, DES
Public key encryption RSA encryption (512 bits/1024 bits)
RSA signatur
e (512 bits/1024 bits)
DSA (512 bits/1024 bits)
DH (512 bits/1024 bits)
About the Machine
37
● Even when [Pr
ohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.] or [Prohibit Key/Cert. with Weak Encryption] in [Encryption
Settings] is set to [On], the hash algorithm SHA-1, which is used for signing a root certicate, can be used.
TLS
The follo
wing combinations of the TLS version and algorithm are usable:
: Usable : Not usable
Algorithm TLS Version
TLS 1.3 TLS 1.2 TLS 1.1 TLS 1.0
Encryption Algorithm
AES-CBC (256bit)
AES-CBC (128bit)
AES-GCM (256bit)
AES-GCM (128bit)
3DES-CBC
CHACHA20-POLY1305
Key Exchange Algorithm
RSA
ECDHE
X25519
Signature Algorithm
RSA
ECDSA
HMAC Algorithm
SHA1
SHA256
About the Machine
38
Algorithm TLS Version
TLS 1.3 TLS 1.2 TLS 1.1 TLS 1.0
SHA384
About the Machine
39
Supported Environment
9665-00W
Operating Environment(P. 40)
Supported Software and Servers(P. 40)
Operating Environment
AirPrint Operating Environment Using AirPrint Application to Print Data(P. 241)
Remote UI Operating Environment
*1
Windows
Micr
osoft Edge
Google Chrome
macOS
Safari 11
Google Chrome
Android
Google Chrome
UC Browser
iOS
Safari 11
UC Browser
*1
Y
ou must set your Web browser to enable cookies and use JavaScript.
Supported Software and Servers
I-Fax Receiving Server Software Microsoft Exchange Server 2013
Micr
osoft Exchange Server 2016
Microsoft Exchange Server 2019
Lotus Domino R7.0
Qpopper 4.1.0
About the Machine
40
Recommended Functions
9665-00X
This section intr
oduces recommended functions that can be useful for your purpose and help you solve problems,
such as to save paper and power, and improve operations.
Cost Savings(P. 42) Making Operations More Ecient(P
. 43)
Canon strives to be environmentally and energy conscious in all aspects of its operations.
Click her
e to learn about the ways in which Canon is helping to protect the environment.
About the Machine
41
Cost Savings
9665-0C9
This machine can help you save costs on paper and po
wer.
Saving Paper
Saving Paper When Printing
Y
ou can print on both sides of the paper, and print multiple pages on one
sheet of paper.
Printing from a Computer(P. 199)
Preparing to Print from a USB Memory Device (Touch Panel Model)
(P
. 196)
Changing the Print Settings of the Received I-Fax(P. 219)
Restricting and Managing the Number of Sheets of Paper
You can allocate a Department ID to each user or group to manage the number of pages printed per
Department ID
.
Authenticating Users and Managing Groups with Department ID (Department ID Management)(P. 252)
Saving Ener
gy
You can congur
e the machine to enter sleep mode when not in use to save energy. The power of the machine
does not turn OFF, so it can quickly resume operations.
Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep Mode)(P. 110)
About the Machine
42
Making Operations More Ecient
9665-010
Y
ou can print data even in an environment where a computer cannot be used. For the touch panel model, you can
customize the control panel to make operations more ecient and reduce the amount of time using the machine.
Printing Data Without Using a Computer
Printing Data from a Smartphone or Tablet
Y
ou can print data from a mobile device connected to the machine while using
an application. The machine supports direct connection for easy connection
setup without having to use a wireless LAN router.
Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 226)
Using a USB Memory Device
Y
ou can insert a USB memory device into the machine to display the data in
the USB memory device on the control panel and print it on the machine.
Preparing to Print from a USB Memory Device (Touch Panel Model)
(P
. 196)
Easy Touch Panel Operations
Customizing the Control Panel for Greater Usability
Y
ou can rearrange the buttons on the [Home] screen for greater usability.
Customizing the [Home] Screen(P. 131)
Y
ou can change the default settings that are treated as standard
when you use a function.
Change of the Default Settings (Touch Panel Model)(P. 173)
Changing the Default Settings (Touch Panel Model)(P. 174)
One-touch Operation of Useful Functions
Use the Application Libr
ary to quickly execute an operation (such as "Print
regular document" or "View consumables information") with a single touch of
a button.
To use this function, you must click [Application Library] on the Portal Page of
Remote UI, and congure the application.
Portal Page of Remote
UI(P
. 319)
For more information, see the manual of the Application Library at the online
manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
Through the toner replenishment service, new toner cartridges are
automatically deliver
ed to you before your existing toner cartridge is used up.
* Use of the toner replenishment service requires prior registration with
select retailers. This service is only available in certain countries.
About the Machine
43
Setting Up
Setting Up .............................................................................................................................................................
45
Conguring the Default Settings (Setup Guide) (Touch Panel Model) ............................................................. 46
Conguring the Default Settings (Setup Guide) (Black and White LCD Model) ............................................... 50
Setting Up the Network ...................................................................................................................................... 53
Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN ..................................................................................................................... 55
Connecting to a Wired LAN ............................................................................................................................. 57
Connecting to a Wireless LAN ......................................................................................................................... 58
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Using the Router Button (Push Button Mode) ...................................... 61
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Entering a PIN Code (WPS PIN Code Mode) ......................................... 63
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Searching for a Router (Access Point Setup Method) ............................ 66
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method) .......................................... 69
Setting IPv4 Addresses ................................................................................................................................... 74
Setting IPv6 Addresses ................................................................................................................................... 78
Conguring Your Machine for Your Network Environment ............................................................................. 80
Manually Conguring the Ethernet Settings ............................................................................................ 81
Conguring DNS ...................................................................................................................................... 82
Conguring SMB ...................................................................................................................................... 85
Conguring WINS .................................................................................................................................... 86
Conguring SNMP ................................................................................................................................... 87
Conguring SNTP .................................................................................................................................... 90
Conguring SLP Communication ............................................................................................................. 92
Checking the Network Status and Settings ..................................................................................................... 94
Installing Software and Drivers to the Computer ........................................................................................... 100
Setting Up
44
Setting Up
9665-011
After installing the machine, congur
e the required settings to enable use of the functions by performing the following
steps.
Steps 1 and 2 are the machine settings.
Step 3 is the setting for using the machine from a computer. Congure this setting for each computer using the
machine.
Step 1
When you turn ON the machine for the rst time, the screen (Setup Guide) for setting the
items required for using the machine is displayed. Congure the settings by following the
instructions on the screen.
Conguring the Default Settings (Setup Guide) (Touch Panel Model)(P. 46)
Conguring the Default Settings (Setup Guide) (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 50)
Step 2
Congure the network settings not included in the Setup Guide.
If you did not connect to the network using the Setup Guide, do that during this step.
Setting Up the Network(P. 53)
Step 3
Install the software required to use the machine and printer driver on your computer.
Installing Software and Drivers to the Computer(P. 100)
◼ See Also
Implementing Measur
es to Prevent Unauthorized Access
It is important to provide measures against security risks when using the machine in a network environment.
Check examples of measures that you can take with the machine.
Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access(P. 10)
Checking Available Functions
The functions available on the machine vary depending on the model. Check the functions that ar
e available
on your model.
Supported Functions and Options(P. 3)
Conguring the Settings Requir
ed to Use the Functions of the Machine
Additional settings may be required depending on your model. For details about the settings required for
each function, see the following:
Printing Preparations(P. 181)
Preparations for Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 227)
Importing Settings Data fr
om Another Machine
You can share settings data with other machines to save time on conguring the settings. You can export
data from another machine of the same model to a computer and import that data to the machine so as to
share the settings.
Importing and Exporting the Settings(P. 330)
Setting Up
45
Conguring the Default Settings (Setup Guide) (T
ouch
Panel Model)
9665-012
When you turn ON the machine for the rst time, the scr
een (Setup Guide) for setting the items required for using the
machine is displayed. Congure the settings using the procedure below by following the instructions on the screen.
Step 1: Setting the Display Language and Country or Region(P. 46)
Step 2: Setting the Date and Time(P. 46)
Step 3: Setting Remote UI(P. 47)
Step 4: Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 47)
Step 5: Conguring Settings for T
oner Replenishment Service(P. 48)
Step 6: Viewing an Overview of the Application Library and Setup Method(P. 48)
● These settings can only be congur
ed one time using the Setup Guide when starting the machine for the
rst time. To change the settings congured with the Setup Guide at a later time, set the items in Steps 1 to
5 individually. For the details of each setting, see the following.
Setting the Date and Time(P. 314)
Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 249)
Setting the PIN to Use for Remote UI(P. 298)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
Step 1: Setting the Display Language and Country or Region
Set the language displayed on the contr
ol panel screen and reports to be printed. Next, set the country or region
where the machine is used.
1
On the [Language] screen, select the display language.
2
Press [Yes].
➠ The display language is set, and the [Select Country/Region] scr
een is displayed.
Depending on the country or region, the [Select Country/Region] screen is not displayed and the [Time
Zone] screen is displayed. When the [Time Zone] screen is displayed, proceed to "Step 2: Setting the Date
and Time."
Step 2: Setting the Date and Time(P. 46)
3
On the [Select Country/Region] screen, select the country or region.
➠ The country or region is set, and the [Time Zone] screen is displayed.
Step 2: Setting the Date and Time
The date and time ar
e used as the reference for the functions using date and time information, and therefore, they
need to be set accurately.
Setting Up
46
1
On the [Time Zone] screen, select your time zone.
Set the time zone (UTC
*1
) and Daylight Saving Time accor
ding to the region where this machine is installed.
*1 The UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) is a coordinated universal time that is standard for all parts of the
world. Internet-based communication relies on the UTC being set correctly.
2
On the [Current Date/Time Settings] screen, enter the date and time, and press
[Apply].
➠ The time and date ar
e set, and the Remote UI conrmation screen is displayed.
Step 3: Setting Remote UI
With Remote UI, you can use a W
eb browser on a computer to check the operation status of the machine, change the
settings, and perform other operations.
Set the System Manager ID and Remote UI Access PIN to prevent unauthorized access to the machine.
1
On the Remote UI conrmation scr
een, press [Yes].
To use System Manager Mode to view and change important settings, set the System Manager ID. System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
To set the System Manager ID at a later time, press [No] and proceed to 2.
When Setting the System Manager ID
On the [Congur
e System Manager Mode] screen, press [Yes], and set the System Manager ID and PIN by
following the instructions on the screen.
● Set the System Manager ID and PIN by specifying any number. You cannot set an ID or PIN consisting of
all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."
● Specify any number other than "7654321" for the System Manager PIN. You cannot set a PIN consisting of
all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."
2
On the [Congur
e General User Mode] screen, press [Yes].
Restrict the use of Remote UI to only those users who know the Remote UI Access PIN.
3
Enter the Remote UI Access PIN, and press [Apply].
Specify any number. You cannot set a PIN consisting of all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."
4
Enter the PIN again, and press [Apply].
➠ After the message [Settings congur
ed.] appears, the screen for conrming the wireless LAN connection is
displayed.
Step 4: Connecting to a Wireless LAN
Connect to the network using wir
eless local area network (LAN).
1
On the screen for conrming the wir
eless LAN connection, press [Yes].
Setting Up
47
● If the machine is not connected to a wir
eless LAN, press [No], and proceed to "Step 5: Conguring Settings
for Toner Replenishment Service."
Step 5: Conguring Settings for T
oner Replenishment
Service(P. 48)
● When connecting to a wired LAN, congure the wired LAN connection settings after exiting the Setup Guide.
Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN(P. 55)
2
Select the Wireless LAN connection type, and connect to the Wireless LAN.
➠ When the connection to the wir
eless LAN is completed, the Toner Replenishment Service confirmation
screen is displayed.
Depending on your wireless LAN router, the connection type and security standards may vary. Check for a
connection type and security standard that are supported by both the wireless LAN router and the machine,
and then establish a connection according to the connection type. For the standards and procedure, see the
following:
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
Step 5: Conguring Settings for T
oner Replenishment Service
You can congure settings for toner replenishment service. Through toner replenishment service, new toner
cartridges are automatically delivered to you before your existing toner cartridges are used up.
* Use of the toner replenishment service requires prior registration with select retailers. This service is only available in
certain countries.
* This service can be set up through [Toner Delivery Settings] displayed on the [Home] screen.
[Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
1
On the conrm scr
een of toner replenishment service, press [Next].
2
Press [Accept].
If you press [Do Not Accept], the screen for conguring settings for toner r
eplenishment service is skipped
and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 6.
3
Press [OK].
➠ The [Application Libr
ary] screen is displayed.
● If connecting to the server fails, try conguring the settings again through [Connect to Server/Verify
Connection with Server] in [Toner Delivery Settings].
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
Step 6: Viewing an Overview of the Application Library and Setup Method
1
On the [Application Library] screen, you can see a description of each function.
● Pr
ess [See More Info.] to see an overview of each function in the Application Library. Press [About Remote UI]
to see the setup method of the Application Library.
● For more information, see the manual of the Application Library. You can display the manual by pressing
[User's Manual] and scanning the displayed QR code with a mobile device.
2
Press [End].
Setting Up
48
Conguring the Default Settings (Setup Guide) (Black
and White L
CD Model)
9665-0CA
When you turn ON the machine for the rst time, the scr
een (Setup Guide) for setting the items required for using the
machine is displayed. Congure the settings using the procedure below by following the instructions on the screen.
Step 1: Setting the Display Language and Country or Region(P. 50)
Step 2: Setting the Date and Time(P. 50)
Step 3: Setting Remote UI(P. 51)
Step 4: Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 51)
Step 5: Conguring Settings for T
oner Replenishment Service(P. 52)
● These settings can only be congur
ed one time using the Setup Guide when starting the machine for the
rst time. To change the settings congured with the Setup Guide at a later time, set the items in Steps 1 to
4 individually. For the details of each setting, see the following.
Setting the Date and Time(P. 314)
Setting the PIN to Use for Remote UI(P. 298)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
Step 1: Setting the Display Language and Country or Region
Set the language displayed on the contr
ol panel screen and reports to be printed. Next, set the country or region
where the machine is used.
1
On the [Language] screen, select the display lamguage and press
.
2
Select [Yes], and then press
.
➠ The display language is set, and the [Select Country/Region] scr
een is displayed.
Depending on the country or region, the [Select Country/Region] screen is not displayed and the [Time
Zone] screen is displayed. When the [Time Zone] screen is displayed, proceed to "Step 2: Setting the Date
and Time."
Step 2: Setting the Date and Time(P. 50)
3
On the [Select Country/Region] screen, select the country or region, and press .
➠ The country or region is set, and the [Time Zone] screen is displayed.
Step 2: Setting the Date and Time
The date and time ar
e used as the reference for the functions using date and time information, and therefore, they
need to be set accurately.
1
On the [Time Zone] screen, select your time zone and press
.
Setting Up
50
Set the time zone (UTC
*1
) and Daylight Saving Time according to the region where this machine is installed.
*1 The UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) is a coordinated universal time that is standard for all parts of the
world. Internet-based communication relies on the UTC being set correctly.
2
On the [Current Time Set.] screen, enter the date and time, and press
.
➠ The time and date ar
e set, and the Remote UI conrmation screen is displayed.
Step 3: Setting Remote UI
With Remote UI, you can use a Web browser on a computer to check the operation status of the machine, change the
settings, and perform other operations.
Set the Remote UI Access PIN for using Remote UI to prevent unauthorized access to the machine.
1
On the Remote UI conrmation scr
een, select [<Yes>] and press
.
To set the Remote UI Access PIN at a later time, select [No] press proceed to "Step 4: Connecting to
a Wir
eless LAN."
Step 4: Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 51)
2
Conrm the message
press conrm the message select [Yes] press .
➠ The [Remote UI Access PIN] scr
een is displayed.
Restrict the use of Remote UI to only those users who know the Remote UI Access PIN.
3
Enter the Remote UI Access PIN, and press
.
Specify any number. You cannot set a PIN consisting of all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."
4
Enter the PIN again, and press .
➠ After the message [Settings applied.] appears, the scr
een for conrming the wireless LAN connection is
displayed.
Step 4: Connecting to a Wireless LAN
Connect to the network using wireless local area network (LAN).
1
On the screen for conrming the wir
eless LAN connection, select [Yes] and press
.
● If the machine is not connected to a wir
eless LAN, select [No] and press
. The settings congur
ed in the
Setup Guide are applied.
● When connecting to a wired LAN, congure the wired LAN connection settings after exiting the Setup Guide.
Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN(P. 55)
2
Select the Wireless LAN connection type, and connect to the Wireless LAN.
➠ When the connection to the wir
eless LAN is completed, the settings congured in the Setup Guide are
applied.
When you exit the Setup Guide, the [Home] screen is displayed.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
Setting Up
51
Depending on your wireless LAN router, the connection type and security standards may vary. Check for a
connection type and security standar
d that are supported by both the wireless LAN router and the machine,
and then establish a connection according to the connection type. For the standards and procedure, see the
following:
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
Step 5: Conguring Settings for Toner Replenishment Service
You can congure settings for toner replenishment service. Through toner replenishment service, new toner
cartridges are automatically delivered to you before your existing toner cartridges are used up.
* Use of the toner replenishment service requires prior registration with select retailers. This service is only available in
certain countries.
* This service can be set up through [Toner Delivery Set.] displayed on the [Home] screen. [Home] Screen(P. 116)
1
On the conrm scr
een of toner replenishment service, press
.
2
Press .
If you press , the screen for conguring settings for toner r
eplenishment service is skipped and the
settings congured in the Setup Guide are applied.
When you exit the Setup Guide, the [Home] screen is displayed.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
3
Press .
➠ The settings congur
ed in the Setup Guide are applied.
When you exit the Setup Guide, the [Home] screen is displayed.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
● If connecting to the server fails, try conguring the settings again thr
ough [Connect to Server/Verify
Connection] in [Toner Delivery Set.].
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
Setting Up
52
Setting Up the Network
9665-013
T
o operate the machine from a computer or to connect to a server, you must connect the machine to a network.
Use the procedure below to connect the machine to a network and congure the settings of the machine according to
the network environment.
Administrator privileges are required to set up the network.
Depending on the model, the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN may be set by default.
System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
● Connecting the machine to a network without pr
oper security measures may leak information from the
machine to third parties.
Protecting the Network(P. 260)
◼ Pr
eparing to Set Up the Network
● Provide an Ethernet cable and router according to the usage environment of the machine.
● Check the information of the network environment used by the machine and the required network settings. For
details, contact the network administrator.
● Check that the computer and router to be used in the network are properly connected, and complete the network
settings. For details on the connection method, see the manuals of the devices or contact the manufacturer.
◼ Network Settings Procedure
Step 1
Select whether to use wired or wireless LAN and connect to the network.
T
o connect to a Wired LAN
Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN(P. 55)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 57)
T
o connect to a Wireless LAN
Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN(P. 55)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
Step 2
Set the IP address.
● By default, when the machine connects to a wir
ed or wireless LAN, an IP address is obtained
automatically and set to the machine.
● To use a specic IP address, set this manually.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
* When setting an IP addr
ess manually, you cannot use the control panel to congure some
IPv6 address settings. It is recommended to use the control panel to set the IPv4 address, and
then use Remote UI to set the IPv6 address.
Setting Up
53
Step 3
Congure the settings of the machine according to the network environment, as needed.
Conguring Your Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 80)
* You cannot use the control panel to congure some of the settings. It is recommended that
you congure the settings using Remote UI in Step 3
◼ Checks after Conguring the Network Settings
Check that the machine is pr
operly connected to the network.
Check the IP address and MAC address of the machine and other information, as needed.
Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 94)
Setting Up
54
Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN
9665-014
Set whether to connect the machine to the network using a wir
ed or wireless LAN.
If you want to switch from wired LAN to wireless LAN, you can make the setting during the procedure for connecting
to wireless LAN.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
* Y
ou cannot connect to a wired LAN and wireless LAN at the same time.
Use the control panel to congure the settings. On the control panel, you can also congure the settings by pressing
[Menu] in the [Home] screen
[Preferences]. You cannot congur
e the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
Administrator privileges are required.
Touch Panel Model(P. 55)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 55)
Touch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [ ] (wired LAN) or [ ] (wireless LAN) in the [Home]
scr
een.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
➠ The [Network] scr
een is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].
System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
2
Press [Select Wired/Wireless LAN].
3
Select [Wired LAN] or [Wireless LAN].
➠ The message [Settings congur
ed.] appears.
Next, connect to the wired or wireless LAN.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 57)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
When Switching between Wired and Wireless LAN
● Any installed drivers must be uninstalled and then r
einstalled.
For details about uninstalling and installing drivers, see the driver manual at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
Black and White LCD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen and press
. [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
Setting Up
55
2
Press [Preferences]
[Network] [Select Wired/Wireless LAN] .
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press . System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
3
Select [Wired LAN] or [Wireless LAN] and press
.
➠ The message [Settings applied.] appears.
Ne
xt, connect to the wired or wireless LAN.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 57)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
When Switching between Wired and Wireless LAN
● Any installed drivers must be uninstalled and then r
einstalled.
For details about uninstalling and installing drivers, see the driver manual at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
Setting Up
56
Connecting to a Wired LAN
9665-015
Connect a computer to the machine via a r
outer. Use an Ethernet cable to connect the machine to the router.
1
Connect an Ethernet cable to the machine and router.
➠ For the touch panel model, when the machine is connected to the wir
ed LAN, [
] appears on the [Home]
scr
een and screen of each function.
Insert the connector all the way into the port until it clicks in place.
2
Wait a few minutes.
➠ By default, the IP addr
ess is set automatically.
To use a specic IP address, set this manually.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
Setting Up
57
Connecting to a Wireless LAN
9665-016
Connect a computer to the machine via a wir
eless LAN router (access point).
Depending on your wireless LAN router, the connection type and security standards may vary. Check for a connection
type and security standard that are supported by both the wireless LAN router and the machine, and then establish a
connection according to the connection type.
Depending on the connection type, you must enter the security information of the wireless LAN router.
Checking the Connection Types and Security Standards Supported by the Machine(P. 58)
Wireless LAN Router Information Required for Connection(P. 59)
Connect with a Secure Network Environment
● The r
adio waves used for wireless communication can reach beyond walls and other obstructions within a
certain range. Therefore, connecting the machine to a network without proper security measures may leak
personal data and other information to third parties. Connect the machine to a wireless LAN at your own
discretion and responsibility.
Protecting the Network(P. 260)
Reducing Power Consumption
● When Po
wer Save Mode is enabled, the machine regularly enters the power save state according to the
signal transmitted by the wireless LAN router.
[Power Save Mode](P. 362)
Checking the Connection Types and Security Standards Supported by the
Machine
◼ Connection T
ype
Connect using a type that is supported by your wireless LAN router. To specify the authentication, encryption, or other
security method in detail, use the manual setup method to connect.
The following connection types are supported by the machine:
Push Button Mode (WPS)
If the wireless LAN router has the above symbol on the package or the button of the device, you can easily
connect b
y pressing the button.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Using the Router Button (Push Button Mode)(P. 61)
WPS PIN Code Mode
If you are using a WPS router that does not support the push button mode, enter the PIN code to connect.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Entering a PIN Code (WPS PIN Code Mode)(P. 63)
* If the wir
eless LAN router is set up to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to connect with WPS. In
this case, use the manual setup method to connect.
Setting Up
58
Access Point Setup Method
Search for the wireless LAN router from the machine, and enter the network key manually to connect.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Searching for a Router (Access Point Setup Method)(P. 66)
When you connect with the access point setup method, the following authentication and encryption methods
ar
e set:
● WEP authentication method: Open System
● Encryption for WPA/WPA2: AES-CCMP or TKIP is set automatically according to the selected wireless LAN
router.
To specify a different authentication or encryption method, use the manual setup method to connect.
Manual Setup Method
In addition to the SSID and network key, manually enter all the wireless LAN settings such as the authentication
and encryption methods to connect.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method)(P. 69)
◼ Security Standar
ds
The wireless LAN of the machine supports the security standards below. For details on whether your wireless LAN
router supports these standards, see the manual of the wireless LAN router or contact the manufacturer.
● WEP
● WPA-PSK
● WPA2-PSK
● WPA-EAP
● WPA2-EAP
Wireless LAN Router Information Required for Connection
When connecting with the access point setup method or the manual setup method, you must set the information
below.
This information is listed on the main unit of the wireless LAN router. For details, see the manual of the wireless LAN
router or contact the manufacturer.
SSID
This is the name used to identify the wireless LAN router. This may be listed as the access point name or
network name.
Network Key
This is the keyword used for data encryption or the password used for network authentication. This may be
listed as the encryption key, WEP key, WPA/WPA2 passphrase, or pre-shared key (PSK).
Security Standards
These are required when connecting with the manual setup method. Check the following information:
Security Standards
● WEP
● WPA-PSK
● WPA2-PSK
● WPA-EAP
● WPA2-EAP
WEP Authentication Method
● Open System
Setting Up
59
● Shar
ed Key
Encryption for WPA/WPA2
● TKIP
● AES-CCMP
● IEEE 802.1X Authentication
Setting Up
60
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Using the Router
Button (Push Button Mode)
9665-017
If your wir
eless LAN router supports WPS push button mode, you can easily set up a connection simply by using the
control panel of the machine and the button on the wireless LAN router.
Administrator privileges are required to connect to a wireless LAN.
Touch Panel Model(P. 61)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 62)
Touch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Wireless LAN Settings] in the [Home] screen.
[Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
➠ The [Select Network] scr
een is displayed.
● If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].
System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
● If the message [Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?] appears, press [Yes].
● If the message [Could not nd the access point.] appears, press [Close].
2
Press [Other Connections].
3
Press [WPS Push Button Mode].
➠ The machine starts sear
ching for an access point.
4
After the search for an access point starts, press the button on the wireless LAN
r
outer within two minutes.
Press the button within two minutes. (Depending on the wireless LAN router, you may have to press and hold
the button.)
* For details on ho
w to operate the button, see the manual of your wireless LAN router.
5
When [Connected.] appears on the control panel, press [Close].
➠ When the machine is connected to the wir
eless LAN, [
] appears on the [Home] screen and screen of
each function.
6
Wait a few minutes.
➠ By default, an IP addr
ess is set automatically.
To use a specic IP address, set this manually.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
Setting Up
61
If an Error Message Appears during Operation and a Connection Cannot Be Established
● Pr
ess [Close], and repeat the procedure starting from Step 2.
Black and White LCD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Wireless LAN Set.] in the [Home] screen and press .
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
➠ The [Select Network] scr
een is displayed.
● If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press
. System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
● If the message [Enable the wireless LAN?] appears, select [Yes] and press
.
● If the message [Cannot nd the access point.] appears, pr
ess
.
2
Select [Other Connections] and press
.
3
Select [WPS Push Button Mode] and press .
➠ The machine starts sear
ching for an access point.
4
After the search for an access point starts, press the button on the wireless LAN
r
outer within two minutes.
Press the button within two minutes. (Depending on the wireless LAN router, you may have to press and hold
the button.)
* For details on ho
w to operate the button, see the manual of your wireless LAN router.
5
When [Connected.] appears on the control panel, press
.
➠ When the machine is connected to the wir
eless LAN, [
] appears on the [Home] screen.
6
Wait a few minutes.
➠ By default, an IP addr
ess is set automatically.
To use a specic IP address, set this manually.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
If an Error Message Appears during Operation and a Connection Cannot Be Established
● Pr
ess
, and repeat the procedure starting from Step 2.
Setting Up
62
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Entering a PIN Code
(WPS PIN Code Mode)
9665-018
When the wir
eless LAN router supports WPS PIN code mode, you can establish a connection by registering a PIN code
generated on the machine to the wireless LAN router. Use a computer to register the PIN code.
Administrator privileges are required to connect to a wireless LAN.
Touch Panel Model(P. 63)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 64)
Touch Panel Model
Required Preparations
● Access the wir
eless LAN router from a computer, and enable registration of a WPS PIN code.
* For details on how to register a WPS PIN code, see the manual of your wireless LAN router.
1
On the control panel, press [Wireless LAN Settings] in the [Home] screen. [Home]
Screen(P. 116)
➠ The [Select Network] screen is displayed.
● If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
● If the message [Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?] appears, press [Yes].
● If the message [Could not nd the access point.] appears, press [Close].
2
Press [Other Connections].
3
Press [WPS PIN Code Mode].
➠ A PIN code is gener
ated.
Once this screen is displayed, you must register the WPS PIN code to the wireless LAN router within 10
minutes.
Setting Up
63
4
Access the wireless LAN router from a computer, and register the WPS PIN code to
the r
outer.
5
When [Connected.] appears on the control panel, press [Close].
➠ When the machine is connected to the wir
eless LAN, [
] appears on the [Home] screen and screen of
each function.
6
Wait a few minutes.
➠ By default, an IP addr
ess is set automatically.
To use a specic IP address, set this manually.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
If an Error Message Appears during Operation and a Connection Cannot Be Established
● Press [Close], and repeat the procedure starting from Step 2.
Black and White LCD Model
Required Preparations
● Access the wir
eless LAN router from a computer, and enable registration of a WPS PIN code.
* For details on how to register a WPS PIN code, see the manual of your wireless LAN router.
1
On the control panel, select [Wireless LAN Set.] in the [Home] screen and press
.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
➠ The [Select Network] scr
een is displayed.
● If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press
. System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
● If the message [Enable the wireless LAN?] appears, select [Yes] and press
.
● If the message [Cannot nd the access point.] appears, pr
ess
.
2
Select [Other Connections] and press
.
3
Select [WPS PIN Code Mode] and press .
➠ A PIN code is gener
ated.
Setting Up
64
Once this screen is displayed, you must register the WPS PIN code to the wireless LAN router within 10
minutes.
4
Access the wireless LAN router from a computer, and register the WPS PIN code to
the r
outer.
5
When [Connected.] appears on the control panel, press
.
➠ When the machine is connected to the wir
eless LAN, [
] appears on the [Home] screen.
6
Wait a few minutes.
➠ W
ait a few minutes. By default, an IP address is set automatically.
To use a specic IP address, set this manually.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
If an Error Message Appears during Operation and a Connection Cannot Be Established
● Press , and repeat the procedure starting from Step 2.
Setting Up
65
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Searching for a Router
(Access Point Setup Method)
9665-019
Search for a wireless LAN router (access point) to which to connect, and enter the network key.
When you connect with the access point setup method, the follo
wing authentication and encryption methods are
set:
● WEP authentication method: Open System
● Encryption for WPA/WPA2: AES-CCMP or TKIP is set automatically according to the selected wireless LAN router.
To specify a different authentication or encryption method, use the manual setup method to connect.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method)(P. 69)
Administrator privileges are required to connect to a wireless LAN.
Touch Panel Model(P. 66)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 67)
Touch Panel Model
Required Preparations
● Pr
epare the information of the wireless LAN router (SSID or network key) to which you want to connect, and
keep it close by.
Wireless LAN Router Information Required for Connection(P. 59)
● When connecting to a wir
eless LAN router supporting WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP for the security standard, set
IEEE 802.1X.
Using IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
1
On the control panel, press [Wireless LAN Settings] in the [Home] screen. [Home]
Screen(P. 116)
➠ The [Select Network] screen is displayed.
● If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
● If the message [Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?] appears, press [Yes].
● If the message [Could not nd the access point.] appears, check that the router is discoverable.
Cannot
Connect to Wir
eless LAN(P. 514)
2
Select the SSID of the wireless LAN to which you want to connect.
Setting Up
66
➠ The Network Ke
y input screen is displayed.
When selecting the SSID of the wireless LAN router supporting WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP for the security
standard, the message [To connect, the values congured in IEEE 802.1X Settings will be applied.] appears.
Press [OK], and proceed to Step 4.
If you cannot find the wireless LAN router to which you want to connect, check that the router is
discoverable.
Cannot Connect to Wireless LAN(P. 514)
3
Enter the network key, and press [Apply].
4
When [Connected.] is displayed on the control panel, press [Close].
➠ When the machine is connected to the wir
eless LAN, [
] appears on the [Home] screen and screen of
each function.
5
Wait a few minutes.
➠ By default, an IP addr
ess is set automatically.
To use a specic IP address, set this manually.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
If an Error Message Appears during Operation and a Connection Cannot Be Established
● Pr
ess [Close], check the information (SSID or network key) of the wireless LAN router to which you want to
connect, and repeat the procedure starting from Step 2.
Black and White LCD Model
Required Preparations
● Pr
epare the information of the wireless LAN router (SSID or network key) to which you want to connect, and
keep it close by.
Wireless LAN Router Information Required for Connection(P. 59)
● When connecting to a wir
eless LAN router supporting WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP for the security standard, set
IEEE 802.1X.
Using IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
1
On the control panel, select [Wireless LAN Set.] in the [Home] screen and press .
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
➠ The [Select Network] scr
een is displayed.
● If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press
. System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
● If the message [Enable the wireless LAN?] appears, select [Yes] and press
.
● If the message [Cannot nd the access point.] appears, check that the r
outer is discoverable.
Cannot
Connect to Wir
eless LAN(P. 514)
Setting Up
67
2
Select the SSID of the wireless LAN to which you want to connect, and press
.
➠ The Network Ke
y input screen is displayed.
When selecting the SSID of the wireless LAN router supporting WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP for the security
standard, the message [IEEE 802.1X Settings values will be applied to connect.] appears. Press
, and
proceed to Step 4.
If you cannot find the wireless LAN router to which you want to connect, check that the router is
discoverable. Cannot Connect to Wireless LAN(P. 514)
3
Enter the network key, and press [<Apply>] .
4
Press [Yes]
.
5
When [Connected.] is displayed on the control panel, press .
➠ When the machine is connected to the wir
eless LAN, [
] appears on the [Home] screen.
6
Wait a few minutes.
➠ By default, an IP addr
ess is set automatically.
To use a specic IP address, set this manually.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
If an Error Message Appears during Operation and a Connection Cannot Be Established
● Pr
ess
, check the information (SSID or network key) of the wireless LAN router to which you want to
connect, and r
epeat the procedure starting from Step 2.
Setting Up
68
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details
(Manual Setup Method)
9665-01A
Y
ou can connect to a wireless LAN router by manually entering all information of the router such as the SSID, network
key, and security settings.
Administrator privileges are required to connect to a wireless LAN.
Touch Panel Model(P. 69)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 71)
Touch Panel Model
Required Preparations
● Pr
epare the information of the wireless LAN router to which you want to connect, and keep it close by.
Wireless LAN Router Information Required for Connection(P. 59)
● When connecting to a wir
eless LAN router supporting WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP for the security standard, set
IEEE 802.1X.
Using IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
1
On the control panel, press [Wireless LAN Settings] in the [Home] screen. [Home]
Screen(P. 116)
➠ The [Select Network] screen is displayed.
● If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
● If the message [Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?] appears, press [Yes].
● If the message [Could not nd the access point.] appears, press [Close].
2
Press [Other Connections].
3
Press [Manually Enter Network Name (SSID)].
➠ The SSID input scr
een is displayed.
4
Enter the SSID, and press [Apply].
➠ The [Security Settings] scr
een is displayed.
5
Select the security standard, and set the authentication and encryption.
When using WEP
1
Press [WEP].
Setting Up
69
➠ The [802.11 Authentication] scr
een is displayed.
2
Select the authentication method.
[Open System]
Uses open authentication.
* When you select this authentication method, an authentication err
or occurs when connected to a
wireless LAN router that uses a shared key. The machine setting changes to [Shared Key] at this time, and
an attempt to reconnect to the router is made.
[Shared Key]
Uses an encryption key for the password.
3
Select an encryption key that is not registered, and press [Register].
➠ The encryption k
ey input screen is displayed.
4
Enter the network key, and press [Apply].
➠ The encryption k
ey is registered to the [Select Encryption Key] screen.
5
Select a registered encryption key, and press [Connect].
When Using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
1
Press [WPA/WPA2-PSK].
➠ The [WP
A/WPA2 Encryption Method] screen is displayed.
2
Select the encryption method.
➠ The encryption k
ey input screen is displayed.
When you select [Auto], AES-CCMP or TKIP is set automatically according to the wireless LAN router to
which you want to connect.
3
Enter the network key, and press [Apply].
When Using WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP
Pr
ess [WPA/WPA2-EAP]
[OK].
When Not Using a Security Standard
Pr
ess [None].
6
When [Connected.] is displayed on the control panel, press [Close].
➠ When the machine is connected to the wir
eless LAN, [
] appears on the [Home] screen and screen of
each function.
Setting Up
70
7
Wait a few minutes.
➠ By default, an IP addr
ess is set automatically.
To use a specic IP address, set this manually.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
If an Error Message Appears during Operation and a Connection Cannot Be Established
● Pr
ess [Close], check the information of the wireless LAN router to which you want to connect, and repeat the
procedure starting from Step 2.
Black and White LCD Model
Required Preparations
● Pr
epare the information of the wireless LAN router to which you want to connect, and keep it close by.
Wireless LAN Router Information Required for Connection(P. 59)
● When connecting to a wir
eless LAN router supporting WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP for the security standard, set
IEEE 802.1X.
Using IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
1
On the control panel, select [Wireless LAN Set.] in the [Home] screenand press .
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
➠ The [Select Network] screen is displayed.
● If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press . System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
● If the message [Enable the wireless LAN?] appears, select [Yes] and press
.
● If the message [Cannot nd the access point.] appears, select [Close] and pr
ess
.
2
Select [Other Connections] and press .
3
Select [Manually Enter Network Name] and press .
➠ The SSID input scr
een is displayed.
4
Enter the SSID, select [<Apply>], and press
.
➠ The [Security Settings] scr
een is displayed.
5
Select the security standard, and set the authentication and encryption.
Setting Up
71
When using WEP
1
Select [WEP] and press .
➠ The [802.11 Authentication] scr
een is displayed.
2
Select the authentication method.
[Open System]
Uses open authentication.
* When you select this authentication method, an authentication err
or occurs when connected to a
wireless LAN router that uses a shared key. The machine setting changes to [Shared Key] at this time, and
an attempt to reconnect to the router is made.
[Shared Key]
Uses an encryption key for the password.
3
Select [Edit Encryption Key] and press
.
4
Select an encryption key that is not registered, and press .
➠ The encryption k
ey input screen is displayed.
5
Enter the network key, select [<Apply>], and press
.
➠ The encryption key is registered to the [Encryption Key] screen.
6
Select [Select Encryption Key] and press
.
7
Select a registered encryption key, and press .
When Using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
1
Select [WPA/WPA2-PSK] and press
.
➠ The [WPA/WPA2 Encryption] screen is displayed.
2
Select the encryption method and press
.
➠ The encryption key input screen is displayed.
When you select [Auto], AES-CCMP or TKIP is set automatically according to the wireless LAN router to
which you want to connect.
3
Enter the network key, select [<Apply>], and press .
When Using WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP
Select [WP
A/WPA2-EAP] and press
.
When Not Using a Security Standard
Select [None] and pr
ess
.
Setting Up
72
6
Select [Yes] and press
.
7
When [Connected.] is displayed on the control panel, press .
➠ When the machine is connected to the wir
eless LAN, [
] appears on the [Home] screen.
8
Wait a few minutes.
➠ By default, an IP addr
ess is set automatically.
To use a specic IP address, set this manually.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
If an Error Message Appears during Operation and a Connection Cannot Be Established
● Press , check the information of the wireless LAN router to which you want to connect, and repeat the
pr
ocedure starting from Step 2.
Setting Up
73
Setting IPv4 Addresses
9665-01C
The machine
's IPv4 address can either be assigned automatically using DHCP or entered manually.
By default, the IPv4 address is set automatically when connected to a wired or wireless LAN, but you can set it or
change it manually according to your usage environment and purpose.
This section describes how to congure the settings using the control panel.
You can also set the IPv4 address using Remote UI from a computer after it has been set on the machine.
Managing
the Machine fr
om a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 315)
Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
Touch Panel Model(P. 74)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 75)
Touch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings] [IP Address
Settings].
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
3
Set the IP address.
When Manually Setting the IP Address
1
Press [Auto Acquire].
➠ The [IP Addr
ess Settings (Auto Acquire)] screen is displayed.
2
Set [Auto Acquire] to [Off], and press [Apply]
[OK].
➠ The [IP Addr
ess Settings] screen is displayed.
3
Press [Manually Acquire].
➠ The IP addr
ess input screen is displayed.
4
Enter the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address, and press [Apply].
Setting Up
74
When Assigning an IP Address Automatically
1
Press [Auto Acquire].
➠ The [IP Addr
ess Settings (Auto Acquire)] screen is displayed.
2
Set [Auto Acquire] to [On].
3
Congure the Auto Acquir
e setting, as needed.
[Select Protocol]
Normally, set to [DHCP]. However, when [DHCP] is set in an environment where DHCP cannot be used,
the machine will continue to conrm Auto Acquire in the network, creating unnecessary communication.
When not using DHCP, set this to [Off].
[Auto IP]
Normally, set to [On]. Although priority is given to the IP address allocated with DHCP, if there is no
response from DHCP, Auto IP will be used.
4
Press [Apply].
4
Press [OK].
5
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Perform a connection test to check whether the IPv4 address is correctly congured.
Checking the
Network Status and Settings(P. 94)
Checking the Currently Set IP Address
● On the scr
een in Step 3, press [Check Settings] to check the current IP address setting. If the IP address is
displayed as "0.0.0.0," it is not correctly congured.
If the IP Address Is Changed after Installing the Printer Driver
● In Windows, you must add a new port.
Conguring a Printer Port (Windo
ws)(P. 185)
If you do not know which port is being used, see the following:
Viewing the Printer Port(P. 574)
● In macOS, you must r
e-register the machine on the Mac. For details about registering the machine, see the
manual of the driver at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
* If you are using DHCP to automatically obtain the IP address of the machine, the IP address may be changed
automatically.
Black and White LCD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press
. [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
Setting Up
75
2
Press [Preferences]
[Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings]
[IP Address Settings] .
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press
. System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
3
Set the IP address.
When Manually Setting the IP Address
1
Select [Auto Acquire] and press
.
➠ The [Auto Acquir
e] screen is displayed.
2
Press [Select Protocol]
[Off] .
3
Press [Auto IP] [Off] .
4
Select [<Apply>] and press .
➠ The [IP Addr
ess Settings] screen is displayed.
5
Select [Manually Acquire] and press
.
➠ The IP addr
ess input screen is displayed.
6
Enter the IP address and press
.
7
Enter the subnet mask and press .
8
Enter the gateway address and press .
When Assigning an IP Address Automatically
1
Select [Auto Acquire] and press
.
➠ The [Auto Acquir
e] screen is displayed.
2
Congure the Auto Acquir
e setting, as needed.
[Select Protocol]
Normally, set to [DHCP]. However, when [DHCP] is set in an environment where DHCP cannot be used,
the machine will continue to conrm Auto Acquire in the network, creating unnecessary communication.
When not using DHCP, set this to [Off].
[Auto IP]
Normally, set to [On]. Although priority is given to the IP address allocated with DHCP, if there is no
response from DHCP, Auto IP will be used.
3
Select [<Apply>] and press
.
Setting Up
76
4
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Perform a connection test to check whether the IPv4 address is correctly congured.
Checking the
Network Status and Settings(P
. 94)
Checking the Currently Set IP Address
● On the scr
een in Step 3, select [Check Settings] and press
to check the current IP address setting. If the
IP addr
ess is displayed as "0.0.0.0," it is not correctly congured.
If the IP Address Is Changed after Installing the Printer Driver
● In Windows, you must add a new port.
Conguring a Printer Port (Windo
ws)(P. 185)
If you do not know which port is being used, see the following:
Viewing the Printer Port(P. 574)
● In macOS, you must r
e-register the machine on the Mac. For details about registering the machine, see the
manual of the driver at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
* If you are using DHCP to automatically obtain the IP address of the machine, the IP address may be changed
automatically.
Setting Up
77
Setting IPv6 Addresses
9665-01E
In an IPv6 environment, you can set the following IPv6 addresses and use them at the same time.
● Link-Local Addr
ess
An address that can only be used within the same link. It cannot be used to communicate with devices beyond
a router.
A link-local address is automatically set when usage of IPv6 addresses is enabled.
● Stateless Address
An address that is generated automatically using the network prex provided by the router and the MAC
address of the machine.
This address is discarded when the machine is restarted or turned ON.
● Manual Address
An address that is entered manually by specifying the IP address, prex length, and default router address.
● Stateful Address
An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings. You
cannot use the control panel to congure some of the settings.
[IPv6 Settings](P. 366)
Administr
ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
Required Preparations
● Set an IPv4 addr
ess to the machine.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings]
[IPv6 Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit IPv6 Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
In [IP Address Settings], select the [Use IPv6] checkbox.
5
Set the IPv6 address to use.
When Using a Stateless Address
Select the [Use Stateless Addr
ess] checkbox.
When Using a Manual Address
Select the [Use Manual Addr
ess] checkbox, and enter the IP address, prex length, and default router
address.
* You cannot enter a multicast address (address starting with "ff").
Setting Up
78
When Using a Stateful Address
Select the [Use DHCPv6] checkbo
x.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Perform a connection test to check whether the IPv6 address is correctly congured.
Checking the
Network Status and Settings(P
. 94)
If the IP Address Is Changed after Installing the Printer Driver
● Y
ou must add a new port.
Adding a Port(P. 185)
Setting Up
79
Conguring Y
our Machine for Your Network
Environment
9665-01F
The size and congur
ation of a network vary depending on the purpose and usage. The machine is equipped with a
variety of technologies to support many environments.
Congure the settings of the machine according to your network environment, as needed.
Manually Conguring the Ethernet Settings(P
. 81)
Conguring DNS(P
. 82)
Conguring SMB
(P. 85)
Conguring WINS
(P. 86)
Conguring SNMP
(P. 87)
Conguring SNTP
(P. 90)
Conguring SLP Communication
(P. 92)
◼ See Also
To reduce the threat of unauthorized access and eavesdropping, it is recommended to congure the security settings
according to your network environment.
Protecting the Network(P. 260)
Using the Machine in a Network with IEEE 802.1X Authentication
● When connecting the machine to a network that uses IEEE 802.1X authentication, you must congur
e the
settings on the machine such as the authentication method managed by the authentication server.
Using
IEEE 802.1X
(P. 273)
Setting Up
80
Manually Conguring the Ethernet Settings
9665-01H
By default, when the machine connects to a wir
ed LAN, the Ethernet communication mode and Ethernet type are
detected automatically, and these can be used without changes. Depending on the usage environment, you may have
to change the Ethernet settings to suit the settings of peripheral devices.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.
[Ethernet Driver Settings](P. 358)
Administr
ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings] [Ethernet Driver Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Ethernet Driver Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Clear the [Auto Detect] checkbox.
5
Select the communication mode.
Normally, select [Full Duplex]. When the network router is set to half duplex communication, select [Half
Duple
x].
6
Select the Ethernet type, and click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings are applied.
Setting Up
81
Conguring DNS
9665-01J
When using the machine in an envir
onment with Domain Name System (DNS), congure the DNS server information
and DHCP option settings.
In an environment without DNS, you can congure multicast DNS (mDNS) to use the DNS function. mDNS is used by
Bonjour and other software.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings. You
cannot use the control panel to congure some of the settings.
[TCP/IP Settings](P. 363)
Administr
ator privileges are required. Depending on the item to be congured, you may have to restart the machine.
Required Preparations
● When conguring DNS for IPv6, congur
e the setting to use an IPv6 address.
Setting IPv6
Addr
esses(P. 78)
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings]
[IPv4 Settings] or [IPv6 Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit IPv4 Settings] scr
een or [Edit IPv6 Settings] screen is displayed.
4
In [DHCP Option Settings], congur
e the DHCP option settings.
If you are not conguring the DHCP option settings, pr
oceed to Step 5.
Select the checkboxes of the items to enable.
[Acquir
e Host Name] (IPv4 only)
Obtains a host name (Option 12) from the DHCP server.
[DNS Dynamic Update] (IPv4 only)
The DHCP server automatically updates the information (Option 81) corresponding to the host name in place of
the machine.
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
Obtains a DNS server address (Option 6 for IPv4, Option 23 for IPv6) from the DHCP server.
[Acquire Domain Name]
Obtains a domain name (Option 15 for IPv4, Option 24 for IPv6) from the DHCP server.
[Acquire WINS Server Address] (IPv4 only)
Obtains a WINS server address (Option 44) from the DHCP server.
[Acquire POP Server Address] (IPv4 only)
Obtains a POP3 server address (Option 70) from the DHCP server.
Setting Up
82
5
In [DNS Settings], set the DNS server information.
● For details about the setting information, contact your pr
ovider or network administrator. You can also refer
to the computer settings.
Viewing the Network Connection Information of the Computer(P. 572)
● If you ar
e not conguring the DNS server information, proceed to Step 6.
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP addr
ess of the DNS server.
* For IPv6, you cannot enter a multicast address (address starting with "ff").
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
When using a secondary DNS server, enter the IP address of that server.
* For IPv6, you cannot enter a multicast address (address starting with "ff").
[Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4] (IPv6 only)
Select the checkbox to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.
To set the IPv6 host name and domain name individually, clear this checkbox, and enter [Host Name] and
[Domain Name].
[Host Name]
Enter the host name to register in the DNS server using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
[Domain Name]
Enter the domain name to which the machine belongs using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
Input example:
example.com
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the checkbox to automatically update the DNS records when the corresponding information of the host
name and IP address is changed in a DHCP environment, for example.
To Specify the Type of Address to Register to the DNS Server (IPv6 only)
Depending on the type of address you want to register, select the [Register Manual Address], [Register
Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless Address] checkbox.
To Specify the Interval between Updates
In [DNS Dynamic Update Interval], enter the interval at which to automatically update this information.
6
In [mDNS Settings], congur
e the mDNS settings.
If you are not conguring the mDNS settings, pr
oceed to Step 7.
For IPv4
T
o use mDNS, select the [Use mDNS] checkbox, and enter the mDNS name.
For IPv6
To use mDNS, select the [Use mDNS] checkbox, and select whether to use the same mDNS name as IPv4.
● To use the mDNS name set with IPv4 also with IPv6, select the [Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]
checkbox.
● To congure the mDNS name of IPv6 individually, clear the [Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]
checkbox, and enter the mDNS name.
7
Click [OK].
Setting Up
83
Conguring SMB
9665-01K
The Server Message Block (SMB) communication pr
otocol is used to enable the machine as a shared printer on the
network. Depending on the network environment, you may have to set the computer name and workgroup name of
the machine
Setting the Computer Name and Workgroup Name
Set the computer name used to identify the machine in a network and the workgroup name to identify the group that
the machine belongs to.
Congure these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to congure the
settings.
Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings] [Computer Name/Workgroup Name Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Computer Name/W
orkgroup Name Settings] screen is displayed.
4
Enter the computer name and workgroup name of the machine, and click [OK].
Enter using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
In an Environment with WINS
● Select the [Use NetBIOS] checkbo
x.
● You cannot register names that start with an asterisk (*) to the WINS server.
5
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Setting Up
85
Conguring WINS
9665-01L
When using the machine in a network envir
onment that uses both NetBIOS and TCP/IP, congure Windows Internet
Name Service (WINS) to convert the NetBIOS name to an IP address.
To enable WINS, specify the WINS server. WINS cannot be used in an IPv6 environment.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.
[WINS Settings](P. 370)
Administr
ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
Required Preparations
● Set the computer name and workgr
oup name.
Setting the Computer Name and Workgroup
Name(P
. 85)
● Prepare the IPv4 address of the WINS server and keep it close by.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings]
[WINS Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit WINS Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Select the [WINS Resolution] checkbox.
5
Enter the IPv4 address of the WINS server, and click [OK].
If the IP address of the WINS server is obtained from a DHCP server, the obtained IP address has priority.
Conguring DNS(P
. 82)
6
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings are applied.
Setting Up
86
Conguring SNMP
9665-01R
Simple Network Management Pr
otocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a
network by accessing a Management Information Base (MIB). Congure these settings according to the purpose of
use and environment of the machine.
The machine supports SNMPv1 and SNMPv3. You can also use both at the same time. Trap notication is not
supported.
When SNMP management software is installed on the network, you can use the software to congure, monitor, and
control the machine remotely from a computer. For more information, see the manual of the software you are using.
SNMPv1
SNMPv1 denes the scope of communication using information called a "community name." As the
community name is sent to the network in plain text, the security of the network is vulnerable. To ensure
network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3. When SNMPv1 is disabled, you will not be able to use
some functions such as obtaining information from the machine using the printer driver.
SNMPv3
SNMPv3 communicates using user information for SNMPv3. This protocol enables you to congure the
authentication and encryption in the user information to monitor and control communication devices on the
network with a solid security system.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.
However, the control panel can only be used to enable or disable SNMPv1 and SnMPv3.
[SNMP Settings](P. 357)
Administr
ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
Required Preparations
● T
o congure SNMPv3, you must enable TLS. Using TLS(P. 267)
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings] [SNMP Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit SNMP Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
In [SNMPv1 Settings], set SNMPv1.
To Enable SNMPv1
1
Select the [Use SNMPv1] checkbox.
2
Congure the community
.
● You can set MIB Access Permission (permission to read/write to MIB objects) for each community.
● When using both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3, it is recommended to set MIB Access Permission to [Read
Only]. When setting SNMPv1 to [Read/Write] (full-access permission), you can perform nearly all
operations, and therefore, you are not able to use the solid security features of SNMPv3.
Setting Up
87
To Congur
e the Community Name
Select the [Use Community Name 1] or [Use Community Name 2] checkbox, and congure the
community name and MIB Access Permission.
Enter the community name using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
To Congure a Dedicated Community
Dedicated Community is a preset community for Canon Device Management software.
To use Dedicated Community, select the [Use Dedicated Community] checkbox, and congure MIB Access
Permission.
* For details, see the manual of the software you are using.
To Disable SNMPv1
Clear the [Use SNMPv1] checkbo
x.
5
In [SNMPv3 Settings], congur
e SNMPv3.
To Enable SNMPv3
1
Select the [Use SNMPv3] checkbox.
2
In [User Settings 1], [User Settings 2], or [User Settings 3], select the [Enable User] checkbox.
3
Congure the user.
[User Name]
Enter the user name using single-b
yte alphanumeric characters.
[MIB Access Permission]
Set the read/write permission to MIB objects for each specied user.
To allow both read and write, select [Read/Write].
[Security Settings]
Select whether to enable or disable authentication and encryption.
[Authentication Algorithm]
When [Authentication On/Encryption On] or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] is selected in [Security
Settings], select the authentication algorithm according to the usage environment.
To set a password, select the [Set/Change Password] checkbox, and enter the same password in both
[Authentication Password] and [Conrm] using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
[Encryption Algorithm]
When [Authentication On/Encryption On] is selected in [Security Settings], select the encryption algorithm
according to the usage environment.
To set a password, select the [Set/Change Password] checkbox, and enter the same password in both
[Encryption Password] and [Conrm] using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
To Disable SNMPv3
Clear the [Use SNMPv3] checkbo
x.
Setting Up
88
6
In [Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings], select whether to obtain
the printer management information.
To regularly obtain printer management information from the machine, such as protocols and ports, select
the [Acquir
e Printer Management Information from Host] checkbox.
7
Click [OK].
8
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Changing the Port Number
● T
o change the port number of the SNMP server, see the following:
Changing the Port Number(P. 264)
Setting Up
89
Conguring SNTP
9665-01S
T
o obtain time information from the time server on the network, congure Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP).
When SNTP is congured, the time server is checked at specied intervals to adjust the time and maintain the correct
time on the machine.
The machine supports both an NTP server (NTPv3) and SNTP server (SNTPv3 and v4).
Congure these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to congure the
settings.
Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
Required Preparations
● The time is adjusted based on the UT
C (Coordinated Universal Time), so specify the time zone setting.
Setting the Date and Time(P. 314)
● Pr
epare the IP address of the NTP or SNTP server and keep it close by.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings]
[SNTP Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit SNTP Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Select the [Use SNTP] checkbox.
5
In [NTP Server Name], enter the IP address of the NTP/SNTP server.
When using a DNS server, you can enter the host name or FQDN instead of the IP address.
Input e
xample:
ntp.example.com
6
In [Polling Interval], enter the interval at which to check the server and adjust the
time.
7
Click [OK].
8
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Setting Up
90
Testing Communication with the NTP or SNTP Server
● T
est communication using the following procedure: If the machine is correctly communicating with the
server, [OK] appears in [NTP Server Check Result].
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode click [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings]
[SNTP Settings] [Check NTP Server].
* This tests the communication status and does not adjust the time.
Setting Up
91
Conguring SLP Communication
9665-01U
When using the machine in an envir
onment using a Service Location Protocol (SLP) with software installed to perform
communication, congure the SLP communication settings, as needed.
* See the manual of the software to determine the settings that need to be congured.
Congure these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to congure the
settings.
Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
Required Preparations
● Pr
epare the port number used for SLP communication with the software and keep it close by.
● Check the number of routers the SLP communication packets will traverse.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings]
[Multicast Discovery Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Multicast Disco
very Settings] screen is displayed.
4
Select the [Respond to Discovery] checkbox, enter the scope name, and click [OK].
For the scope name, enter the name of the scope to which the machine belongs using single-byte
alphanumeric char
acters.
5
Click [Network Settings]
[Sleep Mode Notication Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Sleep Mode Notication Settings] scr
een is displayed.
6
Select the [Notify] checkbox.
A notication of the power status of the machine is sent to the software. This helps reduce unneeded
communication during sleep mode and power consumption.
7
Conguring Sleep Mode Notications
[Port Number]
Enter the port number used for SLP communication with the softwar
e.
[Number of Routers to Traverse]
Enter the maximum number of routers that SLP communication packets can traverse.
[Notication Interval]
Enter the interval at which notications are sent about the power status of the machine.
Setting Up
92
Checking the Network Status and Settings
9665-01W
Y
ou can perform a connection test with devices in the network to check whether the machine is correctly connected to
the network.
The IP address of the machine and the MAC address information are needed to use Remote UI and congure the
rewall settings. Check these current settings.
Checking Whether the Machine Can Connect to Network Devices(P. 94)
Viewing the IP address set to the machine(P. 95)
Viewing the MAC Address of the Wired LAN(P. 96)
Viewing the MAC Address and Connection Information of the Wireless LAN(P. 97)
● If the IP addr
ess is displayed as "0.0.0.0," it is not correctly congured. Set the IP address again.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
● Connecting the machine to a switching hub, for e
xample, may prevent connection to the network even when
the IP address is correctly congured. In this case, set a wait time until machine starts communicating and
try connecting again.
[Wait Time for Conn. at Startup] or [Waiting Time for Connection at Startup]
(P
. 358)
● You can print the System Manager Data List to view the network settings.
Printing and Viewing Reports
and Lists(P
. 326)
Checking Whether the Machine Can Connect to Network Devices
In the W
eb browser of the computer connected to the network, enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the machine. If the
Remote UI login screen is displayed, the machine is properly connected to the network.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
When using an IPv4 addr
ess, you can use the following procedure to send a ping command from the control panel to
check whether the machine can connect to a network device.
Touch Panel Model(P. 94)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 95)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
Required Preparations
● Pr
epare the IPv4 address of a device in the network to which you want to connect and keep it close by.
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings] [PING
Command].
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].
System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
Setting Up
94
3
Enter the IPv4 address of a network device, and press [Apply].
➠ If the machine is corr
ectly connected to the network, [Received response from the host.] appears.
◼ Black and White LCD Model
Required Preparations
● Pr
epare the IPv4 address of a device in the network to which you want to connect and keep it close by.
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press . [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Preferences]
[Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings]
[PING Command] .
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press . System Manager
ID and PIN(P. 9)
3
Enter the IPv4 address of a network device, and press .
➠ If the machine is corr
ectly connected to the network, [Received response from host.] appears.
Viewing the IP address set to the machine
Y
ou can view the setting of IP address set to the machine such as the IPv4 address and the IPv6 address.
This section describes how to view the IP address using the control panel.
You can also check this information using Remote UI from a computer.
Managing the Machine from a Computer
(Remote UI)(P. 315)
Touch Panel Model(P. 95)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 96)
◼ Touch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen or other location.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
➠ The [Status Monitor] scr
een is displayed.
2
Press [Network Information]
[IPv4] or [IPv6].
3
View the setting.
Setting Up
95
For IPv6, select the item you want to view, and the setting of that item will be displayed.
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
1
Press
on the control panel.
➠ The [Status Monitor] scr
een is displayed.
2
Press [Network Information]
[IPv4] or [IPv6] .
3
View the setting and press .
Viewing the MAC Address of the Wired LAN
Y
ou can view the MAC address set to the machine when the machine is connected to the wired LAN.
This section describes how to view this information using the control panel.
You can also use Remote UI from a computer to view the MAC address.
Managing the Machine from a Computer
(Remote UI)
(P. 315)
Administrator privileges are required.
Touch Panel Model(P. 96)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 97)
◼ Touch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen. [Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Preferences] [Network] [Ethernet Driver Settings].
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].
System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
Setting Up
96
3
View the MAC address.
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press
. [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Preferences]
[Network] [Ethernet Driver Settings] .
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press . System Manager
ID and PIN(P. 9)
3
View the MAC address.
Viewing the MAC Address and Connection Information of the Wireless LAN
In addition to the MA
C address and connection information of the wireless LAN when the machine is connected to the
wireless LAN, you can also view the security settings.
This section describes how to view this information using the control panel.
You can also check this information using Remote UI from a computer.
Managing the Machine from a Computer
(Remote UI)
(P. 315)
Administrator privileges are required.
Touch Panel Model(P. 97)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 98)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Wireless LAN Settings] in the [Home] screen.
[Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
➠ The [Select Network] scr
een is displayed.
Setting Up
97
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
2
Press [Connection Set.]
[Connection Information].
3
View the MAC address and the settings.
● Pr
ess [Latest Error Information] to display error information related to the wireless LAN connection.
● Press [Security Settings] to display the WEP or WPA/WPA2-PSK details.
Viewing Information with the [Status Monitor] Screen
● Y
ou can also view the wireless LAN status and error information with the following procedure:
On the control panel, [Home] or other location [Status Monitor] [Network Information]
[Network Connection Type].
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Wireless LAN Set.] in the [Home] screen and press
.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
➠ The [Select Network] scr
een is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press
. System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
2
Press [Connection Settings]
[Connection Information] .
3
View the MAC address and the settings.
Setting Up
98
● Select [Latest Err
or Information] and press
to display error information related to the wireless LAN
connection.
● Select [Security Settings] and pr
ess
to display the WEP or WPA/WPA2-PSK details.
Viewing Information with the [Status Monitor] Screen
● Y
ou can also view the wireless LAN status and error information with the following procedure:
on the control panel [Network Information] [Network Connection Method]
[Connection Information] .
Setting Up
99
Installing Software and Drivers to the Computer
9665-01X
Install the r
elated software and drivers to the computer that will use the functions of the machine.
Install any options to the machine before installing the software and drivers.
Installation Procedure
Check the operating environment via the Canon website for your country/region, and download and install the
latest softwar
e and drivers.
https://global.canon/en/support/
* If the machine is supplied with a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM, you can also use this to install the software and
drivers.
For details about the installation method, see the manual of the software or driver at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
Precautions and Limitations
Operating Environment
● Depending
on the operating system, your computer may not support some software or drivers. For the
latest information on the supported operating systems, see the Canon website.
https://global.canon/en/support/
● Depending on the model and usage environment, some functions of the software or drivers may not be
available.
When the Firewall Settings of the Machine Are Congured
The computer that will be used with the machine must be allowed to communicate with the machine. If the
computer is not allowed to communicate with the machine, you will not be able to install the software and
drivers or use the functions of the machine.
Setting the Firewall(P. 261)
If the IP Addr
ess of the Machine Is Changed after Installing the Printer Driver
● In Windows, you must add a new port.
Conguring a Printer Port (Windo
ws)(P. 185)
If you do not know which port is being used, see the following:
Viewing the Printer Port(P. 574)
● In
macOS, you must re-register the machine on the Mac. For details about registering the machine, see
the manual of the driver at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
* If you are using DHCP to automatically obtain the IP address of the machine, the IP address may be
changed automatically.
Using the Functions of the Machine without Installing Software or Drivers (macOS)
● Y
ou can use AirPrint standard equipped in macOS to print data from a computer without installing software
or drivers.
Using AirPrint Application to Print Data(P. 241)
Setting Up
100
Basic Operations
Basic Operations ............................................................................................................................................
102
Turning ON and OFF the Machine .................................................................................................................... 103
Turning ON the Machine .............................................................................................................................. 104
Turning OFF the Machine ............................................................................................................................. 105
Restarting the Machine ................................................................................................................................ 108
Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep Mode) ................................................................................................... 110
Using the Control Panel .................................................................................................................................... 112
Screens Displayed on the Control Panel ....................................................................................................... 113
[Home] Screen ....................................................................................................................................... 116
[Status Monitor] Screen ......................................................................................................................... 119
How to Operate the Control Panel (Touch Panel Model) ............................................................................... 122
How to Operate the Control Panel (Black and White LCD Model) .................................................................. 125
Entering Characters ...................................................................................................................................... 127
Customizing the [Home] Screen ................................................................................................................... 131
Rearranging the Buttons and Renaming the Tabs (Remote UI) (Touch Panel Model) ............................. 133
Logging In to the Machine ................................................................................................................................ 136
Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 138
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer .............................................................................................................. 139
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray ...................................................................................................... 144
Preparations and Orientation for Loading Envelopes ................................................................................... 147
Orientation for Loading Paper with a Logo ................................................................................................... 149
Specifying the Paper Size and Type .............................................................................................................. 153
Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Paper Drawer .......................................................................... 154
Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray .................................................................. 158
Registering a Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray .................................... 162
Registering Non-standard Size Paper (Custom Paper) ........................................................................... 166
Hiding Unused Paper Sizes .................................................................................................................... 168
Using the Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function ......................................................................... 170
Inserting and Removing a USB Memory Device .............................................................................................. 171
Change of the Default Settings (Touch Panel Model) ...................................................................................... 173
Changing the Default Settings (Touch Panel Model) ..................................................................................... 174
Adjusting the Sound Volume ............................................................................................................................ 175
Adjusting the Volume ................................................................................................................................... 176
[Volume Settings] Screen .............................................................................................................................. 177
Basic Operations
101
Basic Operations
9665-01Y
This chapter describes the basic oper
ations common to all functions of the machine and how to understand the screen
layout.
Managing and Saving Power
You can turn OFF the power to conserve energy or when cleaning and restart the machine to apply the
settings.
You can use sleep mode to reduce power consumption.
Turning ON and OFF the Machine(P. 103)
Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep Mode)(P. 110)
Using the Oper
ational Panel
Use the control panel to perform the functions such as Memory Media Print (touch panel model) and Secure
Print, and to congure the settings of the machine.
How to Operate the Control Panel (Touch Panel Model)(P. 122)
How to Operate the Control Panel (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 125)
When the login scr
een is displayed, enter the required login information to continue operations.
Logging In to the Machine(P. 136)
Loading Paper
Load printing paper into the paper dr
awer or multi-purpose tray according to your usage.
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Using a USB Memory De
vice
When exchanging data between a USB memory device and the machine, handle the device properly to
prevent damage to the device and errors.
Inserting and Removing a USB Memory Device(P. 171)
Customizing Functions and Settings
Y
ou can change the settings for easier and more convenient use of the machine.
Change of the Default Settings (Touch Panel Model)(P. 173)
Adjusting the Volume(P. 176)
Basic Operations
102
Turning ON and OFF the Machine
9665-020
Be sur
e to use the power switch to manually turn ON the power of the machine.
In addition to using the power switch, you can turn OFF the power and restart the machine using Remote UI from a
computer.
You can also congure the machine to turn OFF automatically on days and times when not in use.
Turning ON the Machine(P. 104)
Turning OFF the Machine(P. 105)
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
Basic Operations
103
Turning ON the Machine
9665-021
T
o turn ON the machine, press the power switch on the front.
1
Make sure that the power plug is inserted into a power outlet.
2
Press the power switch.
➠ The start scr
een is displayed on the control panel.
Changing the Screen that Appears at Startup
● After the po
wer is turned ON and the start screen is displayed, the [Home] screen is displayed by default.
You can congure the setting to display another function screen.
[Default Screen After Startup/
Restoration] or [Default Screen after Startup/Restoration](P. 347)
Basic Operations
104
Turning OFF the Machine
9665-022
In addition to using the po
wer switch on the front of the machine, you can also turn OFF the power using Remote UI
from a remote location. You can also congure the machine to turn OFF automatically on days and times when not in
use.
Turning OFF the machine deletes any data waiting to be printed.
Turning OFF the Machine Using the Power Switch(P. 105)
Turning OFF the Machine Using Remote UI(P. 105)
Setting the Days of the Week and Time to Automatically Turn Off the Machine(P. 106)
● The r
eceived data saved in the memory remains stored without being deleted even if the machine is turned
OFF.
Turning OFF the Machine Using the Power Switch
1
Press the power switch.
➠ The contr
ol panel turns off, and the power turns OFF.
It may take a few minutes until the power turns OFF. Do not unplug the power cord until the power turns
OFF.
Turning ON the Machine Again
● W
ait at least 10 seconds after turning OFF the power before turning ON the machine.
Turning OFF the Machine Using Remote UI
Administr
ator privileges are required to turn OFF the machine using Remote UI.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Device Management]
[Remote Shutdown].
Basic Operations
105
➠ The [Remote Shutdo
wn] screen is displayed.
4
In [Device Status], check that there are no functions operating, and then click
[Ex
ecute].
➠ The shutdown conrmation message appears.
5
Click [OK].
➠ A scr
een indicating that the machine is being shut down is displayed, and then the power is turned OFF.
When the power is turned OFF, Remote UI is disconnected.
Setting the Days of the Week and Time to Automatically Turn Off the
Machine
Congur
e these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to congure the
settings.
Administrator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Timer Settings]
[Edit].
➠ The [Edit Timer Settings] screen is displayed.
4
Select the [Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer] checkbox.
5
Enter a time for each day of the week you want to turn OFF the machine.
If you selected 12-hour format for the time display, select [AM] or [PM] after entering the time.
6
Click [OK].
Basic Operations
106
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
7
Log out from Remote UI.
Cases When the Power Will Not Turn OFF at a Specied Time
● In the follo
wing cases, the power of the machine will not turn OFF at the specied time:
- When the data indicator on the control panel is lit or blinking
Control Panel(P. 17)
-
When the [Menu] screen or Check Counter screen is displayed on the control panel
- When importing or exporting data
- When updating the rmware
● One minute after the specied time, the power will turn OFF or the operation will be retried. The machine
will retry to power OFF up to 10 times at 1-minute intervals. If the machine does not power OFF, the power
will remain ON for that day.
Basic Operations
107
Restarting the Machine
9665-023
When you mak
e changes to the settings of the machine, you may have to restart the machine to apply the changes
depending on the setting.
When you change the settings using either the control panel or Remote UI, you can restart the machine using the
power switch or Remote UI.
Restarting the machine deletes any data waiting to be printed.
Restarting the Machine Using the Power Switch(P. 108)
Restarting the Machine Using Remote UI(P. 108)
● The r
eceived data saved in the memory remains stored without being deleted even if the machine is
restarted.
Restarting the Machine Using the Power Switch
1
Press the power switch.
➠ The control panel turns off, and the power turns OFF.
It may take a few minutes until the power turns OFF.
2
Wait at least 10 seconds after turning OFF the power before pressing the power
switch.
➠ The machine starts up.
Restarting the Machine Using Remote UI
Administr
ator privileges are required to restart the machine using Remote UI.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Restart Device].
Basic Operations
108
➠ The [Restart De
vice] screen is displayed.
4
In [Device Status], check that there are no functions operating, and then click
[Ex
ecute].
➠ A restart conrmation message appears.
5
Click [OK].
➠ A scr
een indicating that the machine is being restarted is displayed, and then the machine is restarted.
When the machine is restarted, Remote UI is disconnected.
Basic Operations
109
Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep Mode)
9665-024
Sleep mode r
educes power consumption by pausing certain operations inside the machine.
On the control panel, press [
( )] to enter sleep mode. Control Panel(P. 17)
When the machine is in sleep mode, ( ) lights yellow-green.
◼ Exiting Sleep Mode
Perform any of the following operations:
● Pr
ess any key on the control panel.
● Tap the display.
◼ Conguring Auto Sleep Time
Auto Sleep Time automatically places the machine into sleep mode if no oper
ations are performed after a certain
period of time or at a specied time. In addition to being able to set the time when the machine enters sleep mode,
you can also congure the machine to exit sleep mode at a specied time.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.
[Timer/Energy Settings](P. 351)
1
Log in to Remote UI.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Timer Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Timer Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Set Auto Sleep Time or the time to exit sleep mode.
When Setting the Time until Sleep Mode
Enter the time in [Set Time].
* It is r
ecommended to use the default setting to eciently save power.
[Auto Sleep Time](P. 353)
When Entering Sleep Mode at a Specied Time
Select the [Use Auto Sleep Daily Timer] checkbo
x, and enter a time.
If you selected 12-hour format for the time display, select [AM] or [PM] after entering the time.
When Exiting Sleep Mode at a Specied Time
Select the [Use Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings] checkbo
x, and enter a time.
If you selected 12-hour format for the time display, select [AM] or [PM] after entering the time.
5
Click [OK].
Basic Operations
110
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
6
Log out from Remote UI.
● The machine does not enter sleep mode in the follo
wing cases:
- When the data indicator on the control panel is lit or blinking
Control Panel(P. 17)
-
When the [Menu] screen, a paper jam or other error message
*1
, or Direct Connection SSID or network key
display screen is displayed on the control panel
- When the machine is performing an adjustment, cleaning, or other operation
- When the machine is importing, exporting, or processing data via an external device, such as a USB
memory device or computer
*1
The machine may enter sleep mode depending on the message.
Basic Operations
111
Using the Control Panel
9665-025
Use the contr
ol panel to change the settings of the machine and use the functions such as Memory Media Print
(touch panel model) and Secure Print.
Main Instructions
Check how to use the buttons and items displayed on the control panel, how to enter text, and how to display
the various screens.
Screens Displayed on the Control Panel(P. 113)
How to Operate the Control Panel (Touch Panel Model)(P. 122)
How to Operate the Control Panel (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 125)
Entering Characters(P. 127)
Making the [Home] Scr
een Easier to Use
You can add shortcut buttons for frequently used functions and rearrange the buttons.
Customizing the [Home] Screen(P. 131)
Regarding the Handling of the Touch Panel Display
● Do not pr
ess the touch panel display too hard. Doing so may break the touch panel display.
● Do not use an object with a sharp end, such as a mechanical pencil or ballpoint pen. Doing so may scratch
the surface of the touch panel display or break it.
● Placing objects on the display or wiping the display may cause the touch panel to react and lead to a
malfunction.
Basic Operations
112
Screens Displayed on the Control Panel
9665-026
The follo
wing are the main screens of the control panel.
[Home] Screen
This screen is displayed when you press [ ] on the control panel. By default, the [Home] screen is displayed
after the po
wer is turned ON and immediately after the startup screen closes, and immediately after logging in.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
Touch Panel Model
Black and White LCD Model
[Status Monitor] Screen
This screen is displayed when you press [Status Monitor] on the [Home] screen and other locations or press
on the control panel. Use this screen to check the information of the machine, usage and logs, network settings,
and err
or information.
[Status Monitor] Screen(P. 119)
Touch Panel Model
Black and White LCD Model
[Menu] Screen
This screen is displayed when you press [Menu] on the [Home] screen. Use this screen to congur
e the various
settings of the machine.
When the System Manager ID is set, the login screen may be displayed when certain items are selected. Only
users who know the System Manager ID and PIN can log in and change the settings.
Touch Panel Model
Black and White LCD Model
Basic Operations
113
Message Display
Messages are displayed on the screen when errors occur and the machine is out of paper or toner in the toner
cartridge.
If a tr
oubleshooting solution is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions to solve the problem.
If a troubleshooting solution is not displayed, check the cause and solution by referring to the message or error
code.
A Message Appears(P. 537)
An Error Code Is Displayed(P. 554)
Display example:
● When an Err
or Occurs
Touch Panel Model
Black and White L
CD Model
● When a Message Appears on the Scr
een
If the message is too long to display at once, it may be separated into smaller segments and displayed
alternately.
Touch Panel Model
Basic Operations
114
Black and White L
CD Model
Changing the Screen Display
● Y
ou can change the control panel display such as by changing the display language and units, and show or
hide messages.
[Display Settings](P. 347)
● Y
ou can invert screen colors and adjust the brightness to make the screen easier to view.
[Accessibility]
(P
. 375)
Clearing the Settings Automatically
● By default, if no operations are performed after a certain period of time, the settings being congured on
the screen are cleared, and the [Home] screen is displayed. You can change the time until the settings are
cleared and the screen that is displayed after.
[Auto Reset Time](P. 352)
[Function After Auto Reset](P. 353)
Basic Operations
115
[Home] Screen
9665-0CC
This scr
een is displayed when you press [
] on the control panel.
[Home] Screen of the Touch Panel Model(P. 116)
[Home] Screen of the Black and White LCD Model(P. 118)
[Home] Screen of the Touch Panel Model
The status of the machine and the login information are constantly displayed at the top and bottom of the screen for
quick viewing and operations, as needed.
The function and setting buttons are displayed on separate tabs in the middle of the screen. Select a tab or ick the
screen left or right to change the displayed function and setting buttons. Press these buttons to perform functions and
change settings.
You can rearrange the buttons and change the tab names. Rearranging the Buttons and Renaming the Tabs
(Remote UI) (T
ouch Panel Model)(P. 133)
* By default, the [General] to [Custom 6] tabs are displayed.
◼ Status of the Machine and Login Information
[
]
Displays the r
emaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge.
[Check Counter]
You can check the total number of printed pages.
Checking the Number of Printed Pages (Check Counter)
(P
. 324)
[Log Out]
This is displayed when the user is logged in. Press this to log out after completing operations on the machine.
Logging In to the Machine(P. 136)
[
]
Displays the logged in user name or Department ID
.
[
] / [ ]
When connected to a wir
ed LAN, [
] is displayed. When connected to a wireless LAN, [ ] is displayed.
Pr
ess this icon to switch between using a wired LAN or wireless LAN to connect the machine to the network.
Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN(P. 55)
[Status Monitor]
Y
ou can check the information of the machine, usage and logs, network settings, and error information.
[Status
Monitor] Scr
een(P. 119)
Basic Operations
116
◼ Function and Setting Buttons
[Memory Media Print]
Prints les fr
om a USB memory device.
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print)
(T
ouch Panel Model)(P. 211)
[Secure Print]
Prints data tempor
arily saved in the memory of the machine.
Printing a Document Secured with a
PIN (Secur
e Print)(P. 204)
[Menu]
Congur
e the various settings of the machine.
Settings Menu Items(P. 344)
[Paper Settings]
Set the paper size and type to use, and r
egister frequently used paper.
Specifying the Paper Size and
T
ype(P. 153)
[Mobile Portal]
Connect mobile de
vices to the machine.
Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine(P. 234)
[Home Screen Settings]
Add shortcut buttons to the [Home] scr
een and rearrange the buttons.
Rearranging the Buttons
(T
ouch Panel Model)(P. 131)
[Update Firmware]
Updates the rmwar
e via the Internet.
Updating the Firmware (Touch Panel Model)(P. 333)
[Wireless LAN Settings]
Connects a computer to the machine via a wir
eless LAN router (access point).
Connecting to a
Wir
eless LAN by Searching for a Router (Access Point Setup Method)(P. 66)
[Toner Delivery Settings]
Y
ou can congure settings for toner replenishment service. Use of the toner replenishment service
requires prior registration with select retailers. This service is only available in certain countries.
[uniFLOW Online Setup]
Installs applications for uniFL
OW Online and uniFLOW Online Express.
For details about uniFLOW Online and uniFLOW Online Express, see the Canon website.
https://global.canon/
Basic Operations
117
In addition to the above function and setting buttons, this screen also displays Application Library buttons.
Application Libr
ary enables you to perform operations with one touch.
To use this function, you must click [Application Library] on the Portal Page of Remote UI, and congure the
application.
Portal Page of Remote UI(P. 319)
For mor
e information, see the manual of the Application Library at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
[Home] Screen of the Black and White LCD Model
The status of the machine is displayed at the top and bottom of the screen for quick viewing and operations, as
needed.
◼ Status of the Machine
[
]
When connected to a wir
eless LAN, [
] is displayed.
[ ]
Displays the r
emaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge.
◼ Function and Setting Buttons
[Menu]
Congure the various settings of the machine.
Settings Menu Items(P. 344)
[Paper Settings]
Set the paper size and type to use, and r
egister frequently used paper.
Specifying the Paper Size and Type(P. 153)
[Secur
e Print]
Prints data temporarily saved in the memory of the machine.
Printing a Document Secured with a PIN (Secure
Print)(P
. 204)
[Mobile Portal]
Connect mobile devices to the machine.
Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine(P. 234)
[Display Or
der (Home)]
You can change the display order of the items on the [Home] screen.
Changing the Display Order of the Items
(Black and White L
CD Model)(P. 131)
[Wireless LAN Set.]
Connects a computer to the machine via a wireless LAN router (access point).
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by
Sear
ching for a Router (Access Point Setup Method)(P. 66)
[Toner Delivery Settings]
You can congure settings for toner replenishment service. Use of the toner replenishment service requires prior
registration with select retailers. This service is only available in certain countries.
[Update Firmware]
Updates the rmware via the Internet.
Updating the Firmware (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 336)
Basic Operations
118
[Status Monitor] Screen
9665-0CE
Use this scr
een to check the information of the machine, usage and logs, network settings, and error information. You
can also use this screen to remove USB memory devices from the machine.
[Status Monitor] Screen of the Touch Panel Model(P. 119)
[Status Monitor] Screen of the Black and White LCD Model(P. 120)
[Status Monitor] Screen of the Touch Panel Model
Press [Status Monitor] on the [Home] screen and other locations.
[Error Information/Notication]
Y
ou can check the information of errors that occur on the machine. Take troubleshooting measures according to the
error details.
A Message Appears(P. 537)
An Error Code Is Displayed(P. 554)
[De
vice Information]
[Paper Information]
Check the remaining amount of paper for each paper source.
[Cartridge Information]
Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge.
Other internal parts may reach the end of their lifetime before the toner runs out.
[Secure Print Memory Usage]
Check to see how much memory is used by the Secure Print data temporarily saved to the memory of the
machine.
[Version Information]
Displays the rmware version information of the machine.
[Serial Number]
Displays the serial number of the machine.
[Print Job]
Displays the copy or print processing status and log.
Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 223)
[RX Job]
Displays the status and log of r
eceived I-Faxes.
[Network Information]
[IPv4]
Basic Operations
119
Check the IPv4 address and other settings. Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
[IPv6]
Check the IPv6 addr
ess and other settings.
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
[Network Connection T
ype]
Check whether the machine has a wired or wireless connection.
Displays the connection status and error information when connected by wireless LAN.
[Direct Connection Information]
Displays the connection status when directly connected to a device.
[IEEE 802.1X Error Information]
Displays the details of errors that occur with IEEE 802.1X authentication.
[Rmv. Mem. Media]
Displayed when a USB memory device is connected. Press to remove the USB memory device.
Removing the USB
Memory De
vice(P. 172)
[IP Address]
Displays the IPv4 address of the machine by default. You can also hide this.
[Display IP Address](P. 350)
[Status Monitor] Screen of the Black and White LCD Model
Press on the control panel.
[IPv4]
Displays the IPv4 addr
ess of the machine by default. You can also hide this.
[Display IP Address](P. 350)
[Err
or Information/Notication]
You can check the information of errors that occur on the machine. Take troubleshooting measures according to the
error details.
A Message Appears(P. 537)
An Error Code Is Displayed(P. 554)
[De
vice Status]
[Paper Information]
Check the remaining amount of paper for each paper source.
[Cartridge Level]
Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge.
Other internal parts may reach the end of their lifetime before the toner runs out.
[Check Toner Cartridge Name]
Check the toner cartridge name.
[Remove Memory Media]
Displayed when a USB memory device is connected. Press to remove the USB memory device.
Removing the
USB Memory De
vice(P. 172)
[Check Counter]
Basic Operations
120
Check the total number of printed pages. Checking the Number of Printed Pages (Check Counter)(P. 324)
[Secur
e Print Memory Usage]
Check to see how much memory is used by the Secure Print data temporarily saved to the memory of the
machine.
[Version Information]
Displays the rmware version information of the machine.
[Serial Number]
Displays the serial number of the machine.
[Print Job]
Displays the print processing status and log.
Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 223)
[RX Job]
Displays the status and log of r
eceived I-Faxes.
[Network Information]
[IPv4]
Check the IPv4 address and other settings.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
[IPv6]
Check the IPv6 addr
ess and other settings.
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
[Network Connection Method]
Check whether the machine has a wir
ed or wireless connection.
Displays the connection status and error information when connected by wireless LAN.
[Direct Connection Information]
Displays the connection status when directly connected to a device.
[IEEE 802.1X Error Information]
Displays the details of errors that occur with IEEE 802.1X authentication.
Basic Operations
121
How to Operate the Control Panel (Touch Panel Model)
9665-029
The contr
ol panel uses a touchscreen. Directly touch your nger to the buttons and items displayed on the screen to
operate them.
Basic Touchscreen Operations (Tapping, Flicking, and Dragging)(P. 122)
Selecting Tabs and Items(P. 123)
Scrolling the Screen(P. 123)
Set the value using the [+] and [-] buttons or the slider.(P. 124)
To prevent accidental operations or damage to the control panel, avoid the following:
● Pr
essing too hard with your ngers
● Pressing with a sharp tip, such as a ngernail, ballpoint pen, or pencil
● Operating with wet or dirty hands
● Operating with an object on the display
Basic Touchscreen Operations (Tapping, Flicking, and Dragging)
T
apping
Gently touch the screen with your ngertip and quickly release. Do this when selecting items and performing
operations.
In the User's Guide, "press" and "select" refer to the tapping operation.
Flicking
T
ouch the screen and ick your ngertip. The screen moves in the direction you icked your nger. For
example, the [Home] screen moves to the tab in the direction you icked your nger.
Dragging
Mo
ve your ngertip while touching the screen, and release it at the desired position. You can scroll lists and
move the area you are touching to a desired position.
Basic Operations
122
Selecting Tabs and Items
When you tap a tab, the screen for the selected tab is displayed.
When you tap an item name or button, the item can be selected. The selected screen is displayed, or the selected
function is performed.
To Cancel a Selection
Dr
ag your ngertip touching the screen away from the selected item or button and release it.
To Return to the Previous Screen
Tap [
].
Scrolling the Screen
When the scroll bar appears on the screen, it indicates that there are items or information that cannot be completely
displayed on the screen. Flick or drag to scroll the screen in the direction you moved your ngertip.
Release your nger from the screen, and in a few seconds, the scroll bar will disappear. Touch the screen to display the
scroll bar again.
Basic Operations
123
Set the value using the [+] and [-] buttons or the slider.
Tap the [+] and [-] buttons to adjust the value. When the slider is displayed as shown below, you can drag it to the left
or right to adjust the value.
Basic Operations
124
How to Operate the Control Panel (Black and White LCD
Model)
9665-0CF
Use the k
eys on the control panel to set the various functions and check the settings.
Scrolling the Screen(P. 125)
Moving to the Next or Previous Screen(P. 125)
Conrming a Selected Item
(P. 125)
Using the Slider to Set Values(P. 125)
Scrolling the Screen
When the scroll bar appears on the screen, it indicates that there are items or information that cannot be completely
displayed on the screen. Use or to scroll the screen in the direction pressed. The currently selected item is
inverted.
Moving to the Next or Previous Screen
T
o move to the next screen, press
or . To return to the previous screen, press or .
Conrming a Selected Item
T
o conrm a selected item, press
.
Using the Slider to Set Values
To adjust the value, press or .
Basic Operations
125
Basic Operations
126
Entering Characters
9665-0CH
Enter alphanumeric char
acters using the keyboard and numeric keys on the control panel.
You can also enter characters using a commercial USB keyboard connected to the machine.
Entering Characters Using the Control Panel (Touch Panel Model)(P. 127)
Entering Characters Using the Control Panel (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 128)
Entering Characters Using a USB Keyboard(P. 129)
Entering Characters Using the Control Panel (Touch Panel Model)
You can enter letters, numbers, and symbols using the control panel.
The type of characters that you can enter may be limited depending on the item.
If the value input range is limited, the value that you can enter is displayed in parentheses ( ) next to the input eld.
Changing the Character Type
Select [a] or [1/#] for the type of char
acter to enter.
You cannot change the character type for items whose character type is limited.
Entering Characters and Spaces
Tap the character or symbol to enter.
Press [
] or [ ] to show characters that are not visible on the screen.
T
o enter uppercase characters, tap [
].
T
o enter a space, tap [Space]. You can also enter a space by moving the cursor to the end of the characters
and tapping [
].
Deleting Char
acters
Tap [
] to delete one character.
T
ap and hold [
] to continuously delete characters.
Mo
ving the Cursor
Tap [
] or [ ].
Entering Numbers Using the Numeric Ke
ys
The numeric keys appear for items that only allow numbers.
Basic Operations
127
Tap the numbers on the numeric keys to enter a value.
T
o delete a number, tap [
].
When [ ] and [ ] are displayed, you can tap these to move the cursor.
● When [+] and [-] or a slider appears instead of the k
eyboard or numeric keys, tap or drag these to set the
value.
Set the value using the [+] and [-] buttons or the slider.(P. 124)
Entering Characters Using the Control Panel (Black and White LCD Model)
Y
ou can enter letters, numbers, and symbols using the control panel.
The type of characters that you can enter may be limited depending on the item.
If the value input range is limited, the value that you can enter is displayed in parentheses ( ) on the screen.
Changing the Character Type
Pr
ess
to change the character type in the order of uppercase letters (A), lowercase letters (a), and
numbers (12).
Y
ou can also press [Entry Mode]
to select the character type.
Y
ou cannot change the character type for items whose character type is limited.
Entering Characters, Spaces, and Symbols
Enter char
acters and symbols using the numeric keys. The following are the usable keys and characters that
can be entered:
You can enter a space by moving the cursor to the end of the characters and pressing
.
When [Entry Mode] is set to [aA] and you pr
ess
, symbols are displayed.
Key A a 12
@ . - _ / 1
ABC abc 2
DEF def 3
GHI ghi 4
Basic Operations
128
Key A a 12
JKL jkl 5
MNO mno 6
PQRS pqrs 7
TUV tuv 8
WXYZ wxyz 9
(Not available) 0
(space) -.*#!",;:^`_=/|'?$@%&+\~()[]{}<> (Not available)
Deleting Characters
Pr
ess
to delete one character.
Pr
ess and hold
to continuously delete characters.
Mo
ving the Cursor
Press
or .
Entering Numbers
Pr
ess
or . You can also use the numeric keys to enter numbers when is displayed on the screen.
● When the slider is displayed, pr
ess
or to set the value. Using the Slider to Set Values(P. 125)
Entering Characters Using a USB Keyboard
Y
ou can enter characters in the same way as a computer by connecting a commercial USB keyboard to the USB port on
the front or back of the machine.
Front Side(P. 13) / Rear Side(P. 15)
* Y
ou can still enter characters using the control panel when a USB keyboard is connected to the machine.
The connected USB keyboard can be disconnected from the machine at anytime. You do not need to cancel the
connection rst.
● [Backspace], [Home], [End], and other k
eys may not be usable. Pressing an unusable key does not enter a
character.
● Depending on the display language, some characters may not be entered correctly.
● Depending on the type of USB keyboard, it may not operate properly.
Basic Operations
129
Customizing the [Home] Screen
9665-02C
Y
ou can quickly select frequently used functions from the [Home] screen of the control panel.
Rearranging the Buttons (Touch Panel Model)(P. 131)
Changing the Display Order of the Items (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 131)
Rearranging the Buttons (Touch Panel Model)
You can rearrange the buttons on the [Home] screen and move buttons to other tabs.
This section describes how to change the display order using the control panel.
You can also change the display order using Remote UI from a computer. You can also rename tabs using Remote UI.
Rearranging the Buttons and Renaming the Tabs (Remote UI) (Touch Panel Model)(P. 133)
Administr
ator privileges are required.
1
Press and hold any button on the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].
System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
2
Check the message, and press [Yes].
➠ The [Rearr
ange and Congure Buttons] screen is displayed.
3
Drag the button you want to rearrange, and release it at the desired location.
When you drag a button to another tab, the button moves to that tab. You cannot move a button to a tab
when the maximum number of buttons for that tab has been r
eached.
4
Press [Apply].
➠ The location of the buttons on the [Home] scr
een is changed.
Changing the Display Order of the Items (Black and White LCD Model)
Rearr
ange the items on the [Home] screen so that you can operate frequently used items more quickly.
Basic Operations
131
Rearranging the Buttons and Renaming the Tabs
(Remote UI) (T
ouch Panel Model)
9665-02E
Y
ou can use Remote UI from a computer to reorder the buttons on the [Home] screen and rename the tabs.
Changing the Button Display Order(P. 133)
Renaming the Tabs(P. 134)
Changing the Button Display Order
Administrator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Display Settings].
➠ The [Display Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
In [Rearrange and Congur
e Display Settings for Home Screen Buttons], select [Edit
in Button View] or [Edit in List View].
● T
o change the display order by dragging the buttons, click [Edit in Button View].
● To change the display order using the list of button names, click [Edit in List View].
5
Rearrange the buttons.
When Rearranging the Buttons by Dragging Them
Dr
ag the button you want to rearrange, and release it at the desired location.
Basic Operations
133
When Rearranging the Buttons Using the List of Button Names
Click [
] or [ ] next to the name of the button you want to rearrange to move the button up or down.
Click [ ] to move a button to another tab.
6
Click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
7
Log out from Remote UI.
Renaming the Tabs
Rename the tabs using Remote UI fr
om a computer. You cannot use the control panel to rename the tabs.
Administrator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration].
Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
Basic Operations
134
3
Click [Display Settings]
[Edit] in [Home Screen Tab Names].
➠ The [Edit Home Scr
een Tab Names] screen is displayed.
4
Select the checkbox of the tab you want to rename, and enter the name.
5
Click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
6
Log out from Remote UI.
Basic Operations
135
Logging In to the Machine
9665-02F
When the login scr
een is displayed on the control panel, enter the required login information to perform
authentication. When authentication is successful, the screen changes, and you can continue operations.
Touch Panel Model(P. 136)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 136)
Touch Panel Model
When Department ID Management is set up, the following login screen is displayed. Enter the Department ID to log in.
If a PIN is set, enter the PIN.
When the System Manager ID is set, the login screen is displayed for operations that require administrator privileges.
Enter the System Manager ID and PIN to log in.
1
Enter the Department ID or System Manager ID.
2
Enter the PIN.
If a PIN is not set, you can skip this step. Proceed to Step 3.
3
Press [Log In].
➠ When authentication is successful, the [Home] scr
een or other screen is displayed.
4
When you have completed your operations, press [Log Out].
Black and White LCD Model
When Department ID Management is set up, the follo
wing login screen is displayed. Enter the Department ID to log in.
If a PIN is set, enter the PIN.
When the System Manager ID is set, the login screen is displayed for operations that require administrator privileges.
Enter the System Manager ID and PIN to log in.
Basic Operations
136
1
Select [Department ID], and press
.
2
Enter the Department ID or System Manager ID and press .
3
Select [PIN], and press .
If a PIN is not set, you can skip this step. Proceed to Step 5.
4
Enter the PIN, and press
.
5
Press .
➠ When authentication is successful, the [Home] scr
een or other screen is displayed.
6
When you have completed your operations, press
.
Basic Operations
137
Loading Paper
9665-02H
T
o ensure print quality, conrm the usable paper and how to handle and store paper, and prepare the appropriate
paper for use with the machine.
Usable Paper(P. 23) / Precautions When Handling Paper(P. 27)
Load the pr
epared paper in the machine, and then congure the paper size and type settings.
Loading Paper in the Machine
Load paper you usually use into the paper drawer, which can hold large amounts of paper.
To temporarily use paper not loaded in the paper drawer, load it in the multi-purpose tray.
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 139)
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 144)
When using envelopes or paper with logos, be car
eful of the orientation of the loaded paper and which side
is face up.
Preparations and Orientation for Loading Envelopes(P. 147)
Orientation for Loading Paper with a Logo(P. 149)
Paper Settings
T
o ensure quality printing and prevent paper jams, the paper size and type must be set correctly according to
the loaded paper.
Specifying the Paper Size and Type(P. 153)
Basic Operations
138
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
9665-02J
Load paper you usually use into the paper dr
awer, which can hold large amounts of paper.
The setting method varies depending on the size of the paper to be loaded.
When Loading A4, B5, Legal, or Letter Size Paper
Load paper using the standard size method.
Loading Standard Size Paper(P. 139)
When Loading A5 Size Paper
The setting method varies depending on the orientation of the paper to be loaded.
Landscape orientation (A5)
Portrait orientation (A5R)
Loading Non-standard Size Paper(P. 141)
Loading Standard Size Paper(P. 139)
When Loading A6 Size Paper
Load paper in portr
ait orientation using the non-standard size method.
Loading Non-standard Size Paper(P. 141)
When Loading Custom Size Paper
Load paper using the non-standar
d size method.
Loading Non-standard Size Paper(P. 141)
● Load paper using the same pr
ocedure even when using the optional Cassette Feeding Module-AH.
Loading Standard Size Paper
Y
ou can load paper correctly by aligning the paper guides on the paper drawer with the markings.
When using paper with logos, be careful of the orientation of the loaded paper and which side is face up.
Orientation for Loading Paper with a Logo(P. 149)
1
Pull out the paper drawer.
Always hold the paper drawer with both hands and pull it out gently. If you pull the drawer out with only one
hand, it may be too heavy to hold, causing it to fall and be damaged.
2
Align the paper guides with the size of the paper to be loaded.
Basic Operations
139
1
While pressing the lock release lever, move the paper guide.
2
Align the projections on the paper guides with the size markings of the paper to be loaded.
Paper guides that are aligned but too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or a paper jam.
3
Fan the paper and align the edges.
Fan the paper in small batches, and align the edges by tapping the paper on a at surface a fe
w times.
4
Load the paper with the print side face down.
● Align the paper with the paper guide on the r
ear edge of the paper drawer.
● Make sure the loaded paper does not exceed the load limit line (
). If it exceeds the load limit line, there
may be misfeeds or a paper jam.
When Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-sided Printing)
Flatten the edge of the paper to remove any curls, and load the paper with the back (unprinted) side face down.
Basic Operations
140
● Y
ou can use only paper printed with this machine.
● You cannot print on a side that has been previously printed on.
● If the printouts look faded, adjust the image quality.
[Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)](P. 382)
5
Load the paper drawer into the machine.
➠ By default, the Paper Settings conrmation scr
een is displayed.
[Notify to Check Paper Settings]
(P
. 426)
6
Set the paper size and type, as needed.
Setting the Paper Size and Type for the
Paper Drawer(P. 154)
By default, the paper size and type of the paper drawer are set to LTR and Plain 2. When paper of a different
size or type is loaded, change the paper settings.
Loading Non-standard Size Paper
Y
ou can load paper correctly by aligning the paper guides on the paper drawer with the paper.
When using paper with logos, be careful of the orientation of the loaded paper and which side is face up.
Orientation for Loading Paper with a Logo(P. 149)
1
Pull out the paper drawer.
Always hold the paper drawer with both hands and pull it out gently. If you pull the drawer out with only one
hand, it may be too heavy to hold, causing it to fall and be damaged.
2
Slide the paper guides to the outside.
While pressing the lock release lever, move the paper guides.
3
Fan the paper and align the edges.
Basic Operations
141
Fan the paper in small batches, and align the edges by tapping the paper on a at surface a fe
w times.
4
Load the paper with the print side face down.
● Load the paper against the fr
ont side of the paper drawer.
● Make sure the loaded paper does not exceed the load limit line (
). If it exceeds the load limit line, there
may be misfeeds or a paper jam.
When Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-sided Printing)
Flatten the edge of the paper to remove any curls, and load the paper with the back (unprinted) side face down.
● Y
ou can use only paper printed with this machine.
● You cannot print on a side that has been previously printed on.
● If the printouts look faded, adjust the image quality.
[Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)](P. 382)
5
Align the paper guides with the width and length of the paper.
● While pressing the lock release lever, align the paper guides with the width and length of the paper.
● Paper guides that are aligned but too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or a paper jam.
6
Load the paper drawer into the machine.
➠ By default, the Paper Settings conrmation scr
een is displayed.
[Notify to Check Paper Settings]
(P
. 426)
Basic Operations
142
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray
9665-02K
T
o temporarily use paper not loaded in the paper drawer, load it in the multi-purpose tray.
You can load paper correctly by aligning the paper guides on the multi-purpose tray with the paper.
When using envelopes or paper with logos, be careful of the orientation of the loaded paper and which side is face up.
Preparations and Orientation for Loading Envelopes(P. 147)
Orientation for Loading Paper with a Logo(P. 149)
Do Not Remove the Paper Drawer
● If the paper dr
awer is removed, the machine cannot print even when paper is loaded in the multi-purpose
tray. If you try to print with the paper drawer removed, an error message appears.
1
Hold both sides of the cover when opening it.
2
Pull out the paper tray and open the extension tray.
Open the extension tray when loading large paper sizes.
3
Spread the paper guides apart.
While pressing the lock release lever, move the paper guides.
Basic Operations
144
4
Fan the paper and align the edges.
Fan the paper in small batches, and align the edges by tapping the paper on a at surface a fe
w times.
5
Load the paper with the print side face up.
● Insert the paper until the edge of the paper is against the paper tr
ay.
● Make sure the loaded paper does not exceed the load limit guide (
). If it exceeds the load limit guide,
ther
e may be misfeeds or a paper jam.
When Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-sided Printing)
Flatten the edge of the paper to remove any curls, and load the paper with the back (unprinted) side face up.
● Y
ou can use only paper printed with this machine.
● You cannot print on a side that has been previously printed on.
● You cannot load more than one sheet of paper. Load each sheet separately to print.
● If the printouts look faded, adjust the image quality.
[Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)](P. 382)
6
Align the paper guides with the width of the paper.
● While pr
essing the lock release lever, align the paper guides with the width of the paper.
● Paper guides that are aligned but too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or a paper jam.
7
Set the paper size and type.
Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose
T
ray(P. 158)
By default, when the machine detects paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray, the screen for setting the
paper size and type is displayed on the contr
ol panel. Set the paper size and type each time you load paper.
Basic Operations
145
When Loading A5 or A6 Size Paper
● Set the paper size accor
ding to the orientation of the loaded paper.
● Load A6 paper in portrait orientation.
Landscape orientation (A5)
Portrait orientation (A5R or A6)
Basic Operations
146
Preparations and Orientation for Loading Envelopes
9665-02L
As envelopes have a differ
ent shape and thickness from regular paper, preparations must be made before loading
envelopes.
Envelopes can be printed only on the front side (non-glued side). Load the envelope in the multi-purpose tray, taking
care to check the orientation of the envelope and that the correct side is facing up.
Preparations before Loading Envelopes(P. 147)
Orientation of Envelopes(P. 148)
● For the gener
al procedure of loading envelopes in the multi-purpose tray, see the following:
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 144)
Preparations before Loading Envelopes
Align the envelopes r
egardless of the number of envelopes to be loaded.
1
Close the ap of each envelope.
2
Flatten them to remove any air, and make sure the edges are pressed tightly.
3
Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes, and atten any curls.
4
Align the edges of the envelopes on a at surface.
Basic Operations
147
➠ The envelopes ar
e ready to be loaded.
Orientation of Envelopes
Insert the envelopes No. 10 (COM10), Monarch, ISO-C5, or DL from the short side with the front side (non-glued side)
face up. Insert the envelope with the ap closed and on the left side.
Basic Operations
148
Orientation for Loading Paper with a Logo
9665-02R
When loading paper with a logo, pay attention to the orientation and which side is face up.
By default, the orientation the paper is to be loaded and the side to print on vary depending on whether you want to
print on one or both sides.
Printing on One Side of Paper with a Logo(P. 149)
Printing on Both Sides of Paper with a Logo(P. 151)
● For the gener
al procedure of loading paper, see the following:
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 139)
Loading Paper in the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 144)
● Y
ou can congure the settings so that the orientation the paper is to be loaded and the side to print on do
not change depending on whether you want to print on one or both sides. When this setting is congured,
load the paper using the 2-sided printing method.
[Switch Paper Feed Method](P. 392)
Printing on One Side of Paper with a Logo
Paper with Logo in Portr
ait Orientation
Loading Paper with a Logo in the Paper Drawer
Load the paper with the logo side (side to be printed) face do
wn.
Loading Paper with a Logo in the Multi-purpose T
ray
Load the paper with the logo side (side to be printed) face up.
Basic Operations
149
Paper with Logo in Landscape Orientation
Loading Paper with a Logo in the Paper Drawer
Load the paper with the logo side (side to be printed) face do
wn.
Loading Paper with a Logo in the Multi-purpose T
ray
Load the paper with the logo side (side to be printed) face up.
Basic Operations
150
Printing on Both Sides of Paper with a Logo
Paper with Logo in Portrait Orientation
Loading Paper with a Logo in the Paper Drawer
Load the paper with the logo side (side to be printed rst) face up.
Loading Paper with a Logo in the Multi-purpose T
ray
Load the paper with the logo side (side to be printed rst) face down.
Paper with Logo in Landscape Orientation
Basic Operations
151
Loading Paper with a Logo in the Paper Drawer
Load the paper with the logo side (side to be printed rst) face up.
Loading Paper with a Logo in the Multi-purpose T
ray
Load the paper with the logo side (side to be printed rst) face down.
Basic Operations
152
Specifying the Paper Size and Type
9665-02S
T
o ensure quality printing and prevent paper jams, the paper size and type must be set correctly according to the
loaded paper.
You can register frequently used paper settings and hide unneeded paper settings to simplify the paper settings.
Settings Required after Loading the Paper
Set the paper size and type according to the loaded paper.
Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Paper Drawer(P. 154)
Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 158)
If you always use the same paper in the multi-purpose tr
ay, you can register the paper to use so you do not
have to congure the settings each time.
Registering a Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 162)
Simplifying the Paper Settings
Y
ou can register and set the paper size for easier settings.
Registering Non-standard Size Paper (Custom Paper)(P. 166)
Hiding Unused Paper Sizes(P. 168)
Using Appr
opriate Paper
You can congure the settings to automatically select the paper source with the appropriate paper when
printing.
Using the Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function(P. 170)
Basic Operations
153
Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Paper Drawer
9665-02U
By default, the paper size and type of the paper dr
awer are set to LTR and Plain 2. When paper of a different size or
type is loaded, change the paper settings.
This section describes how to congure the settings using the control panel.
You can also congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
Managing the Machine from a Computer
(Remote UI)
(P. 315)
Touch Panel Model(P. 154)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 156)
Touch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Paper Settings] in the [Home] screen.
[Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Select the paper drawer whose setting you want to change.
3
Select the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer.
● Y
ou can scroll the screen to view paper sizes not displayed on the screen.
● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to [Free Size]; this will reduce the number of
steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in
the printer driver is signicantly different from the size of the loaded paper.
[Action When Free Paper Size
Mismatch]
(P. 395)
Basic Operations
154
When A5 Size Paper Is Loaded
When paper is loaded in the landscape orientation, select [A5]. When paper is loaded in the portr
ait
orientation, select [A5R].
Landscape orientation (A5)
Portrait orientation (A5R)
When Non-standard Size (Custom Size) Paper Is Loaded
1
Press [Custom].
2
Enter the values in [X] and [Y], and press [Apply].
Select [X] or [Y], and enter the length of each side using [+] and [-], with / to move the cursor
between the digits for inputting whole numbers and fractions.
When frequently used non-standard sizes are registered, you can call these up by pressing [S1] to [S3].
If a Set Paper Size Is Not Displayed
Pr
ess [Other Sizes], and select the paper size from the displayed list.
4
Select the type of the paper loaded in the paper drawer.
If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to [Free]; this will reduce the number of steps
r
equired to change the setting each time. However, note that this setting lets the machine perform printing
even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the paper type actually
loaded in the machine.
When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when the
paper type is [Plain 1].
➠ The paper size and type are set.
Basic Operations
155
● Y
ou can change the paper size displayed on the screen in Step 3.
Hiding Unused Paper Sizes(P. 168)
Black and White LCD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Paper Settings] in the [Home] screen, and press .
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Select the paper drawer whose setting you want to change, and press .
3
Select the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer, and press
.
● Y
ou can scroll the screen to view paper sizes not displayed on the screen.
● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to [Free Size]; this will reduce the number of
steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in
the printer driver is signicantly different from the size of the loaded paper.
[Action When Free Paper Size
Mismatch]
(P. 395)
When A5 Size Paper Is Loaded
When paper is loaded in the landscape orientation, select [A5]. When paper is loaded in the portr
ait
orientation, select [A5R].
Landscape orientation (A5)
Portrait orientation (A5R)
When Non-standard Size (Custom Size) Paper Is Loaded
1
Select [Custom], and press
.
2
Press [X] enter the values in [X] .
Basic Operations
156
Enter the value using and , with and to move the cursor between the digits for inputting
whole numbers and fr
actions.
3
Enter the values in [Y] in the same way as [X].
4
Select [<Apply>], and press
.
If a Set Paper Size Is Not Displayed
Pr
ess [<Other Sizes>], press
, and select the paper size from the displayed list.
4
Select the type of the paper loaded in the paper drawer, and press
.
If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to [Free]; this will reduce the number of steps
r
equired to change the setting each time. However, note that this setting lets the machine perform printing
even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the paper type actually
loaded in the machine.
When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when the
paper type is [Plain 1].
➠ The paper size and type are set.
● Y
ou can change the paper size displayed on the screen in Step 3.
Hiding Unused Paper Sizes(P. 168)
Basic Operations
157
Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose
T
ray
9665-02W
When paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tr
ay, the following screen is displayed on the control panel. Set the paper
size and type according to the loaded paper.
Touch Panel Model
Black and White LCD Model
* If the paper size and type of the multi-purpose tray have been registered in advance, the above screen is not
displayed. Registering a Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 162)
This section describes ho
w to congure the settings using the control panel.
You can also congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
Managing the Machine from a Computer
(Remote UI)
(P. 315)
Touch Panel Model(P. 158)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 160)
Touch Panel Model
1
Select the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray.
● Y
ou can scroll the screen to view paper sizes (such as envelopes) not displayed on the screen.
● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to [Free Size]; this will reduce the number of
steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in
the printer driver is signicantly different from the size of the loaded paper.
[Action When Free Paper Size
Mismatch]
(P. 395)
When A5 Size Paper Is Loaded
When paper is loaded in the landscape orientation, select [A5]. When paper is loaded in the portr
ait
orientation, select [A5R].
Basic Operations
158
Landscape orientation (A5)
Portrait orientation (A5R)
When Non-standard Size (Custom Size) Paper Is Loaded
1
Press [Custom].
2
Enter the values in [X] and [Y], and press [Apply].
Select [X] or [Y], and enter the length of each side using [+] and [-], with / to move the cursor
between the digits for inputting whole numbers and fractions.
When frequently used non-standard sizes are registered, you can call these up by pressing [S1] to [S3].
If a Set Paper Size Is Not Displayed
Pr
ess [Other Sizes], and select the paper size from the displayed list.
2
Select the type of paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray.
If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to [Free]; this will reduce the number of steps
r
equired to change the setting each time. However, note that this setting lets the machine perform printing
even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the paper type actually
loaded in the machine.
When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when the
paper type is [Plain 1].
➠ The paper size and type are set.
● Y
ou can change the paper size displayed on the screen in Step 1.
Hiding Unused Paper Sizes(P. 168)
Basic Operations
159
Black and White LCD Model
1
Select the size of the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray, and press
.
● Y
ou can scroll the screen to view paper sizes (such as envelopes) not displayed on the screen.
● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to [Free Size]; this will reduce the number of
steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in
the printer driver is signicantly different from the size of the loaded paper.
[Action When Free Paper Size
Mismatch]
(P. 395)
When A5 Size Paper Is Loaded
When paper is loaded in the landscape orientation, select [A5]. When paper is loaded in the portr
ait
orientation, select [A5R].
Landscape orientation (A5)
Portrait orientation (A5R)
When Non-standard Size (Custom Size) Paper Is Loaded
1
Select [Custom], and press
.
2
Press [X] enter the values in [X] .
Enter the value using and , with and to move the cursor between the digits for inputting
whole numbers and fr
actions.
3
Enter the values in [Y] in the same way as [X].
4
Select [<Apply>], and press
.
If a Set Paper Size Is Not Displayed
Pr
ess [<Other Sizes>], press
, and select the paper size from the displayed list.
2
Select the type of paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray, and press
.
Basic Operations
160
If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to [Free]; this will reduce the number of steps
r
equired to change the setting each time. However, note that this setting lets the machine perform printing
even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the paper type actually
loaded in the machine.
When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when the
paper type is [Plain 1].
➠ The paper size and type are set.
● Y
ou can change the paper size displayed on the screen in Step 1.
Hiding Unused Paper Sizes(P. 168)
Basic Operations
161
Registering a Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for
the Multi-purpose T
ray
9665-02X
By default, when paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tr
ay, the screen for setting the paper size and type is displayed
on the control panel.
If you always use the same paper in the multi-purpose tray, you can register the paper size and type. This prevents the
paper settings screen from being displayed, saving you the trouble of conguring the settings.
When Using Paper of a Size or Type Different from the Registered Paper
After canceling the registration in Step 3, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray. When the screen for
setting the paper size and type is displayed on the control panel, congure the settings according to the
paper to be used.
Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 158)
This section describes ho
w to register the settings using the control panel.
You can also register the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
Managing the Machine from a Computer
(Remote UI)
(P. 315)
Touch Panel Model(P. 162)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 164)
Touch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Paper Settings] in the [Home] screen.
[Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Select the multi-purpose tray.
3
Select the paper size to register.
Basic Operations
162
● Y
ou can scroll the screen to view paper sizes (such as envelopes) not displayed on the screen.
● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to [Free Size]; this will reduce the number of
steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in
the printer driver is signicantly different from the size of the loaded paper.
[Action When Free Paper Size
Mismatch]
(P. 395)
When Registering A5 Size Paper
When paper is loaded in the landscape orientation, select [A5]. When paper is loaded in the portr
ait
orientation, select [A5R].
Landscape orientation (A5)
Portrait orientation (A5R)
When Registering Non-standard Size (Custom Size) Paper
1
Press [Custom].
2
Enter the values in [X] and [Y], and press [Apply].
Select [X] or [Y], and enter the length of each side using [+] and [-], with / to move the cursor
between the digits for inputting whole numbers and fractions.
When frequently used non-standard sizes are registered, you can call these up by pressing [S1] to [S3].
If the Paper Size to Register Is Not Displayed
Pr
ess [Other Sizes], and select the paper size from the displayed list.
To Cancel the Registered Paper
Pr
ess [Specify When Loading Paper]. You do not need to perform Step 4.
When paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray, the screen for setting the paper size and type is displayed on
the control panel.
4
Select the paper type to register.
Basic Operations
163
If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to [Free]; this will reduce the number of steps
r
equired to change the setting each time. However, note that this setting lets the machine perform printing
even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the paper type actually
loaded in the machine.
When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when the
paper type is [Plain 1].
➠ The paper size and type are registered.
● Y
ou can change the paper size displayed on the screen in Step 3.
Hiding Unused Paper Sizes(P. 168)
Black and White LCD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Paper Settings] in the [Home] screen, and press .
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Select the multi-purpose tray, and press
.
3
Select the paper size to register, and press
.
● Y
ou can scroll the screen to view paper sizes (such as envelopes) not displayed on the screen.
● If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to [Free Size]; this will reduce the number of
steps required to change the setting each time. You can also display an error message when the setting in
the printer driver is signicantly different from the size of the loaded paper.
[Action When Free Paper Size
Mismatch]
(P. 395)
When A5 Size Paper Is Loaded
When paper is loaded in the landscape orientation, select [A5]. When paper is loaded in the portr
ait
orientation, select [A5R].
Landscape orientation (A5)
Portrait orientation (A5R)
When Non-standard Size (Custom Size) Paper Is Loaded
1
Select [Custom], and press
.
Basic Operations
164
2
Press [X] enter the values in [X] .
Enter the value using and , with and to move the cursor between the digits for inputting
whole numbers and fr
actions.
3
Enter the values in [Y] in the same way as [X].
4
Select [<Apply>], and press
.
If a Set Paper Size Is Not Displayed
Press [<Other Sizes>], press , and select the paper size from the displayed list.
To Cancel the Registered Paper
Select [Specify When Loading Paper] , and press . You do not need to perform Step 4.
When paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tr
ay, the screen for setting the paper size and type is displayed on
the control panel.
4
Select the paper type to register, and press
.
If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to [Free]; this will reduce the number of steps
r
equired to change the setting each time. However, note that this setting lets the machine perform printing
even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the paper type actually
loaded in the machine.
When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when the
paper type is [Plain 1].
➠ The paper size and type are set.
● Y
ou can change the paper size displayed on the screen in Step 3.
Hiding Unused Paper Sizes(P. 168)
Basic Operations
165
Registering Non-standard Size Paper (Custom Paper)
9665-02Y
Custom paper is non-standar
d size paper whose side lengths can be freely dened within the range supported by the
machine.
You can register sizes when frequently using specic non-standard size paper. You can call up the paper on the size
input screen, saving you the trouble of entering the size.
You can register up to three custom sizes.
This section describes how to register the settings using the control panel.
You can also register the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
Managing the Machine from a Computer
(Remote UI)
(P. 315)
Touch Panel Model(P. 166)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 167)
Touch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Paper Settings] in the [Home] screen.
[Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Register Custom Paper].
➠ The [Register Custom Paper] scr
een is displayed.
3
Select from [S1] to [S3].
The size is registered to the selected number.
4
Enter the lengths for [X] and [Y].
Select [X] or [Y], and enter the length of each side using [+] and [-], with / to move the cursor between
the digits for inputting whole numbers and fr
actions.
Press [Name] to change the display name of [S1] to [S3].
5
Press [Apply].
➠ The custom paper is r
egistered.
Basic Operations
166
Black and White LCD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Paper Settings] in the [Home] screen, and press
.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Select [Register Custom Paper], and press .
➠ The [Register Custom Paper] screen is displayed.
3
Select the registration number, and press .
If you have selected the registered number, continue on to select [Edit], and press .
4
Press [X] enter the values in [X] .
Enter the value using and , with and to move the cursor between the digits for inputting whole
numbers and fr
actions.
5
Enter the values in [Y] in the same way as [X].
6
Select [<Apply>], and press
.
7
Select the type of the paper, and press .
If you frequently need to change the paper to be loaded, set to [Free]; this will reduce the number of steps
r
equired to change the setting each time. However, note that this setting lets the machine perform printing
even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the paper type actually
loaded in the machine.
When the paper type setting in the printer driver is [Auto], the machine operates the same way as when the
paper type is [Plain 1].
➠ The custom paper is registered.
Basic Operations
167
Hiding Unused Paper Sizes
9665-030
The paper settings scr
een displays the registered frequently used paper sizes. If unused paper sizes are displayed, you
can hide these for each paper source to make it easier to select a paper size.
To select a hidden paper size, press [Other Sizes] on the paper settings screen.
Use the control panel to congure the settings. You cannot congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
Touch Panel Model(P. 168)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 169)
Touch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Paper Settings] in the [Home] screen.
[Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes].
➠ The [Select Fr
equently Used Paper Sizes] screen is displayed.
3
Select a paper source.
4
Clear the checkboxes of the paper sizes to hide, and click [Apply].
➠ Paper sizes whose checkbo
xes are cleared are not displayed on the paper settings screen.
Basic Operations
168
Black and White LCD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Paper Settings] in the [Home] screen, and press
.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Select [Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes], and press .
➠ The [Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes] screen is displayed.
3
Select a paper source, and press .
4
Clear the checkboxes of the paper sizes to hide, and press [<Apply>] .
➠ Paper sizes whose checkbo
xes are cleared are not displayed on the paper settings screen.
Basic Operations
169
Using the Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function
9665-031
If you print without specifying the paper sour
ce, the machine automatically selects the paper source according to the
size of the paper to be printed. In addition, if the machine runs out paper while printing, it automatically selects
another paper source loaded with the same size paper to continue printing.
You can use the appropriate paper source by setting the paper source that is selected automatically for each function.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the settings.
[Paper Source Auto Selection] or [Drawer Auto Selection On/Off](P. 391)
1
Log in to Remote UI.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Common Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Common Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
In [Paper Source Auto Selection], set the paper source to be selected automatically to
[On].
● Congur
e this setting for each function. For printing reports and lists and printing from memory media
(touch panel model), set the paper source to [Other] to apply this setting.
● For each function, one of the paper drawers must be set for automatic selection. If the multi-purpose tray
only is set for automatic selection, the setting cannot be completed.
5
Click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
6
Log out from Remote UI.
Basic Operations
170
Inserting and Removing a USB Memory Device
9665-032
Y
ou can insert a USB memory device into the machine to exchange data between the machine and the USB memory
device.
Use the control panel to safely remove the USB memory device from the machine.
You can use a USB memory device with a FAT16 (up to 2 GB) or FAT32 (up to 32 GB) le system.
Inserting a USB Memory Device(P. 171)
Removing the USB Memory Device(P. 172)
Saving Data to a USB Memory Device
● Data may not be able to be saved pr
operly depending on the USB memory device.
Unsupported Devices
● USB memory devices with a security function
● USB memory devices that do not conform to USB standards
● USB card readers
● USB memory devices connected via an extension cable
● USB memory devices connected via a USB hub
Handling USB Memory Devices
● Do not remove the USB memory device or subject it to shocks or vibration or turn OFF the machine while
data is being imported or exported.
Inserting a USB Memory Device
Conrm the orientation of the USB memory de
vice, and insert it into the USB port on the front or back of the machine.
Conrm the Orientation of the USB Memory De
vice before Inserting
● Make sure that the USB memory device is correctly oriented before inserting it into the USB port on the
machine. If you attempt to insert it in the incorrect orientation, the memory device and the machine may be
damaged.
Basic Operations
171
Removing the USB Memory Device
Use the control panel to eject the USB memory device from the machine. You cannot eject the memory device using
Remote UI from a computer.
Follow the Procedure to Remove the USB Memory Device
● If you do not r
emove the USB memory device while following the procedure, the memory device and the
machine may be damaged.
Touch Panel Model(P. 172)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 172)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen or other location.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
➠ The [Status Monitor] screen is displayed.
2
Press [Rmv. Mem. Media].
3
Make sure that [The memory media can be safely removed.] is displayed, and then
r
emove the USB memory device.
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
1
Press
on the control panel. Control Panel of Black and White LCD Model(P. 18)
➠ The [Status Monitor] scr
een is displayed.
2
Press [Device Status]
[Remove Memory Media] .
3
Make sure that [The memory media can be safely removed.] is displayed, and then
remove the USB memory device.
Basic Operations
172
Change of the Default Settings (Touch Panel Model)
9665-0CJ
Y
ou can change the default settings when using the same setting or value for multiple functions. If the settings are not
changed, the default settings will be used.
By conguring the settings as standard or to save paper, for example, you can increase work eciency and reduce
costs.
Changing the Default Settings (Touch Panel Model)(P. 174)
Basic Operations
173
Changing the Default Settings (Touch Panel Model)
9665-0CK
Y
ou can change the default settings for the Memory Media Print function called up using the control panel.
You can also reset the settings to the settings set here by pressing [Reset] on the print setting screen.
This section describes how to congure the settings using the control panel.
You can also congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
Managing the Machine from a Computer
(Remote UI)
(P. 315)
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Function Settings] [Access Files] [Common Settings] [Access Stored Files
Settings] [Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)].
3
Select the setting items to change, and change the default settings.
For details about the setting items, see the following:
[Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)](P. 418)
4
Press [Apply].
➠ The default settings ar
e changed.
Restoring Default Settings to the Factory Settings
● On the scr
een in Step 3, press [Initialize]
[Yes].
Basic Operations
174
Adjusting the Volume
9665-0CL
Y
ou can also set whether the machine emits sounds notifying you of operations and statuses, such as when operating
the control panel and errors are detected.
This section describes how to congure the settings using the control panel.
You can also congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
Managing the Machine from a Computer
(Remote UI)
(P. 315)
Touch Panel Model(P. 176)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 176)
Touch Panel Model
1
Press the Sound Volume key (
) on the control panel. Control Panel(P. 17)
➠ The [V
olume Settings] screen is displayed.
2
Set whether notication sounds ar
e emitted.
[Volume Settings] Screen(P. 177)
To emit notication sounds, select [On].
3
Press [Apply].
➠ The notication sound settings ar
e applied.
Black and White LCD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press . [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Preferences]
[Volume Settings] .
➠ The [V
olume Settings] screen is displayed.
3
Set whether notication sounds ar
e emitted.
[Volume Settings] Screen(P. 177)
To emit notication sounds, select the item and pr
ess
[On] .
➠ The notication sound settings ar
e applied.
Basic Operations
176
[Volume Settings] Screen
9665-037
Y
ou can set whether the machine emits sounds notifying you of operations and statuses.
Touch Panel Model
When you press the Sound Volume key (
) on the control panel, the [Volume Settings] screen is displayed.
Black and White L
CD Model
When you press [Menu] in the [Home] screen
[Preferences] [Volume Settings] , the
[V
olume Settings] screen is displayed.
Touch Panel Model
Black and White LCD Model
[Entry Tone]
Set whether to emit a sound when you pr
ess the keys and buttons on the control panel.
[Invalid Entry Tone]
Set whether to emit a sound when an invalid key is pressed, such as when you enter a value outside the setting range.
[Restock Supplies Tone]
Set whether to emit a sound when the toner cartridge is nearing the end of its lifetime.
[Warning Tone]
Set whether to emit a sound when the machine has a paper jam or other malfunction.
[Job Done Tone]
Set whether to emit a sound when the print operation is completed.
[Energy Saver Alert]
Set whether to emit a sound when the machine enters and exits sleep mode.
Basic Operations
177
Printing
Printing ................................................................................................................................................................
179
Printing Preparations ....................................................................................................................................... 181
Preparing to Print from a Computer ............................................................................................................. 182
Conguring a Printer Port (Windows) .................................................................................................... 185
Setting Up a Print Server .............................................................................................................................. 188
Preparations for Using Universal Print ......................................................................................................... 191
Registering the Machine to Cloud Service .............................................................................................. 192
Registering the Machine to the Computer ............................................................................................. 195
Preparing to Print from a USB Memory Device (Touch Panel Model) ............................................................ 196
Preparing to Receive and Print I-Faxes ......................................................................................................... 197
Printing from a Computer ................................................................................................................................ 199
Registering Non-standard Size Paper to the Computer (Custom Size) .......................................................... 202
Printing a Document Secured with a PIN (Secure Print) ................................................................................ 204
Changing the Time Period That Print Data with a PIN (Secure Data) Is Saved ........................................ 208
Enabling Secure Print in a Printer Driver (macOS) .................................................................................. 209
Printing with Universal Print ......................................................................................................................... 210
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print) (Touch Panel Model) ........................................ 211
Screen for Selecting Files in USB Memory Device (Touch Panel Model) ......................................................... 213
Memory Media Print Settings (Touch Panel Model) ...................................................................................... 214
Receiving and Printing I-Faxes ......................................................................................................................... 218
Changing the Print Settings of the Received I-Fax ........................................................................................ 219
Canceling Printing ............................................................................................................................................. 220
Viewing the Print Job Status and Log ............................................................................................................... 223
Printing
178
Printing
9665-0CR
Y
ou can print documents and photos from a computer or print les directly from a USB memory device inserted into
the machine. The machine can also receive and print I-Faxes.
Printing from a Computer
You can print documents and photos via a printer driver installed on a computer
connected to the machine.
Preparing to Print from a Computer(P. 182)
Printing from a Computer(P. 199)
Setting Up a Print Server
By setting up a print server on a network, you can r
educe the load on the computer that you print from.
In Windows, you can install the printer driver via the print server, which saves you the trouble of
downloading the printer driver to each computer on the network or using a CD/DVD-ROM.
Setting Up a Print Server(P. 188)
Printing with a PIN
When printing fr
om a computer, you can send print data to the machine after setting a PIN.
Printing is not performed until the PIN is entered on the machine, thereby preventing unattended printed
documents and information theft.
Printing a Document Secured with a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 204)
Printing with the Standar
d Functions of the Operating System and Cloud Service
You can print without having to install a dedicated application or printer driver.
Windo
ws
This machine is compatible with Universal Print, a cloud service by Microsoft. You can print documents from a
remote location as long as your computer is connected to the Internet.
Preparations for Using Universal Print(P. 191)
Printing with Universal Print(P. 210)
macOS
Y
ou can use AirPrint to print data.
Using AirPrint Application to Print Data(P. 241)
Chr
ome OS
Use the print function that is standard in the operating system.
Printing from Chromebook or Other
De
vice with Chrome OS(P. 246)
Directly Printing from a USB Memory Device (Touch Panel Model)
You can print PDF, JPEG, and TIFF les dir
ectly from a USB memory device
inserted into the machine without using a computer.
This is convenient when printing les on a computer without a network
connection or when printing les from an external device.
Preparing to Print from a USB Memory Device (Touch Panel Model)(P. 196)
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media Print) (Touch Panel
Model)(P
. 211)
Printing
179
Receiving and Printing I-Faxes
Internet Fax (I-Fax) is a function for sending and receiving faxes via the Internet.
The machine cannot send I-Fax
es, but it can receive and print I-Faxes.
The machine for sending I-Faxes must support I-Fax technology.
Preparing to Receive and Print I-Faxes(P. 197)
Receiving and Printing I-Faxes(P. 218)
◼ See Also
Printing fr
om a Mobile Device
The machine can be operated from a smartphone, tablet, or other mobile device. By using a compatible
application or service, you can easily print photos or documents from a mobile device.
Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 226)
When Results Ar
e Not as Expected
If the print density varies or the image position is shifted, adjust the print quality and position according to
the symptoms that occur.
Adjusting the Print Quality and Position(P. 463)
Printing
180
Printing Preparations
9665-0CS
T
o print from the machine, you must make printing preparations according to your printing method and usage
environment.
Preparing to Print from a Computer(P. 182)
Setting Up a Print Server(P. 188)
Preparations for Using Universal Print(P. 191)
Preparing to Print from a USB Memory Device (Touch Panel Model)(P. 196)
Printing
181
Preparing to Print from a Computer
9665-03A
Mak
e the following preparations for the computer that will be used to print.
Step 1: Installing the Driver to the Computer(P. 182)
Step 2: Using a Driver to Set the Department ID and PIN(P. 182)
Step 3: Conguring the Option Settings of the Machine Using the Driver(P
. 182)
Step 1: Installing the Driver to the Computer
Install the printer driver to the computer that will be used to print. Installing Software and Drivers to the
Computer(P
. 100)
Using a Print Server in Windows
Use a print server to install the printer driver.
Double-click the shared printer on the print server, and follow the instructions on the screen to install the
printer driver.
Displaying a Shared Printer in the Print Server(P. 569)
Changing the Port Type and Number (Windows)
● If the machine is congur
ed not to use LPD or RAW, or if the port number was changed, the settings on the
computer may also have to be changed.
Changing the Port Type and Number(P. 186)
If the IP Addr
ess of the Machine Is Changed after Installing the Printer Driver
● You must add a new port.
Adding a Port(P. 185)
If you do not kno
w which port is being used, see the following:
Viewing the Printer Port(P. 574)
● In macOS, you must r
e-register the machine on the Mac. For details about registering the machine, see the
manual of the driver at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
* If you are using DHCP to automatically obtain the IP address of the machine, the IP address may be changed
automatically.
Step 2: Using a Driver to Set the Department ID and PIN
When Department ID Management is enabled on the machine, set the Department ID and PIN b
y specifying the
printer driver.
Setting the Department ID and PIN on a Computer(P. 257)
* Y
ou can skip this step when not using Department ID Management. Proceed to Step 3.
Step 3: Conguring the Option Settings of the Machine Using the Driver
When optional equipment is installed to the machine, you must congur
e the option settings in the printer driver in
advance.
In Windows, normally, the option settings are congured automatically when the printer driver is installed.
Use the following procedure to congure the option settings when the option settings have not been congured at
installation, optional equipment has been installed after installation of the printer driver, or when using macOS.
When Using Windows(P. 183)
When Using macOS(P. 183)
Printing
182
◼ When Using Windo
ws
Administrator privileges are required on each computer.
1
Log on to the computer using an administrator account.
2
Click [
] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].
➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr
een is displayed.
3
Click the printer driver of the machine
[Manage] [Printer properties].
➠ The printer driver pr
operties screen is displayed.
4
On the [Device Settings] tab, click [
] in [Device information].
➠ The [Conrmation] scr
een is displayed.
5
Click [Yes].
➠ The option settings ar
e obtained.
6
Click [OK]
[OK].
➠ The settings are applied.
When [Could not get device information.] Appears
● Specify the option settings manually
. For more information on how to congure the option settings
manually, click [Help] on the [Device Settings] tab to display help.
◼ When Using macOS
1
Click [
] [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
➠ The [Printers & Scanners] scr
een is displayed.
2
Select the machine, and click [Options & Supplies].
3
On the [Utility] tab, click [Open Printer Utility].
➠ The [Oce Printer Utility] scr
een is displayed.
Printing
183
4
Click [Printer Information].
➠ The option information is obtained, and the [Printer Information] scr
een is displayed.
5
Click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
When the Option Information Cannot Be Obtained
● Specify the option settings manually
. For details about conguring the option settings manually, see the
manual of the driver at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
Printing
184
Conguring a Printer Port (Windo
ws)
9665-03C
If the IP addr
ess of the machine changed or a printer has been added in Windows, you may not be able to print from a
computer. In this case, use the printer driver to add a new port.
In addition, you cannot print from a computer when the port number of the printer driver differs from that of the
machine setting. In this case, change the setting on the printer driver to match that of the machine.
Adding a Port(P. 185)
Changing the Port Type and Number(P. 186)
Adding a Port
Administrator privileges are required on each computer.
Required Preparations
● Pr
epare the information of the IP address or DNS name (host name) of the machine and keep it close by.
Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 94)
1
Log on to the computer using an administrator account.
2
Click [
] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].
➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr
een is displayed.
3
Click the printer driver of the machine
[Manage] [Printer properties].
➠ The printer driver pr
operties screen is displayed.
4
On the [Ports] tab, click [Add Port].
➠ The [Printer Ports] scr
een is displayed.
5
Add a new port.
1
Select [Standard TCP/IP Port], and click [New Port].
➠ The [Add Standar
d TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard] screen is displayed.
2
Click [Next].
3
Enter the IP address or DNS name (host name), and then click [Next].
Printing
185
The port name is entered automatically, so change it, as needed.
When [Additional port information r
equired] Appears
Take action following the instructions on the screen. To set [Device Type], select [Canon Network Printing
Device with P9100] in [Standard].
6
Click [Finish].
➠ A ne
w port is added, and the [Printer Ports] screen is displayed.
7
Click [Close]
[Close].
Changing the Port Type and Number
If the machine is congured not to use LPD or RAW, you must change the type of port on the computer to a protocol
usable on the machine.
If the LPD or RAW port number was changed, the settings on the computer may have to be changed to match the
settings on the machine.
* You do not need to change the port type or number on the computer for WSD ports.
Administrator privileges are required on each computer.
1
Log on to the computer using an administrator account.
2
Click [ ] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].
➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr
een is displayed.
3
Click the printer driver of the machine
[Manage] [Printer properties].
➠ The printer driver pr
operties screen is displayed.
4
On the [Ports] tab, click [Congur
e Port].
➠ The [Congure Port] screen or [Congure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor] screen is displayed.
Printing
186
5
Set the port type and number.
In [Protocol Type], select [Raw] or [LPR].
● When [Raw] is selected, change the port number.
● When [LPR] is selected, enter "Ip
" for [Queue Name].
6
Click [OK]
[Close].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Printing
187
Setting Up a Print Server
9665-03E
By setting up a print server on the network, you can speed up print oper
ations on a computer, thereby reducing the
load on the computer.
In Windows, you can install the printer driver via the print server to save you the trouble of downloading the printer
driver to each computer on the network or using a CD/DVD-ROM.
To set up a print server, enable the print server to print from the machine, and then congure the settings for sharing
the printer.
To use a print server in a domain environment, consult your network administrator..
Enabling the Print Server to Print from the Machine(P. 188)
Conguring the Settings for Sharing the Printer(P
. 188)
Enabling the Print Server to Print from the Machine
Install the printer driver to the computer that will be the print server, and congure the settings according to your
usage environment. Preparing to Print from a Computer(P. 182)
Using a Print Server While Using Department ID Management
Y
ou must install Canon Driver Information Assist Service when installing the printer driver. For more
information, see the manual of the driver at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
Conguring the Settings for Sharing the Printer
Congur
e the printer sharing settings on the computer that will be the print server so that other computers on the
network can use the print server.
When Using Windows(P. 188)
When Using macOS(P. 190)
◼ When Using Windo
ws
Administrator privileges are required on the computer that will be the print server.
Required Preparations
● Check the oper
ating system (32-bit or 64-bit) of the computer that will be the print server and the operating
system of the computer that will use the print server (the client).
Viewing the System Information of the
Computer(P
. 570)
1
Log on to the computer that will be the print server, using an administrator account.
2
Click [ ] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].
➠ The [Printers & scanners] screen is displayed.
3
Click the printer driver of the machine [Manage] [Printer properties].
Printing
188
➠ The printer driver pr
operties screen is displayed.
4
On the [Sharing] tab, select the [Share this printer] checkbox, and enter a shared
name.
5
Install an additional driver, as needed.
If the client computer has an operating system (32-bit or 64-bit) that differs from that of the print server,
install an additional driver.
1
Click [Additional Drivers].
➠ The [Additional Drivers] scr
een is displayed.
2
Select the checkbox of the driver to be added, and click [OK].
● If the print server computer has a 32-bit oper
ating system, select the [x64] (driver for 64-bit version)
checkbox.
● If the print server computer has a 64-bit operating system, select the [x86] (driver for 32-bit version)
checkbox.
3
Click [Browse], specify the folder where the driver is located, and click [OK].
When Specifying the Folder of the Downloaded Driver
● If the print server computer has a 32-bit operating system, specify the [x64] folder with the
decompressed driver
[Driver] folder.
● If the print server computer has a 64-bit oper
ating system, specify the [32BIT] folder with the
decompressed driver
[Driver] folder.
When Specifying the Folder in the Supplied CD/D
VD-ROM
● If the print server computer has a 32-bit operating system, specify [intdrv] in the CD/DVD-ROM
[UFRII] [x64] [Driver] folder.
● If the print server computer has a 64-bit oper
ating system, specify [intdrv] in the CD/DVD-ROM
[UFRII] [32BIT] [Driver] folder.
4
Install the additional driver while following the instructions on the screen.
6
Click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Printing
189
◼ When Using macOS
1
Click [
] [System Preferences] [Sharing].
➠ The [Sharing] scr
een is displayed.
2
Select the [Printer Sharing] checkbox.
3
In [Printers], select the checkbox of the machine.
4
Restrict the users that can use the print server, as needed.
By default, all users can use the print server.
T
o enable specic users to use the print server, click [+] under [Users], and select the users who can use the
print server.
5
Close the [Sharing] screen.
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Printing
190
Preparations for Using Universal Print
9665-03F
Congur
e the machine to be able to use Microsoft's cloud service, Universal Print, and register the machine to each
computer that will be used to print.
You must be a registered user of Microsoft 365 and use Azure Active Directory.
Registering the Machine to Cloud Service(P. 192)
Registering the Machine to the Computer(P. 195)
Printing
191
Registering the Machine to Cloud Service
9665-03H
Register the machine to the cloud-based authentication and management service, Azur
e Active Directory, and set the
members or groups that will use the machine.
Step 1: Registering the Machine to Azure Active Directory(P. 192)
Step 2: Specifying the Members and Groups to Use the Machine(P. 194)
Step 1: Registering the Machine to Azure Active Directory
Congure this setting using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to congure the
settings.
Administrator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings] [Universal Print Settings].
➠ The [Universal Print Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Click [Edit] in [Basic Settings].
5
Select the [Use Universal Print] checkbox, and enter the printer name.
● For the printer name, enter a name to identify the machine, using single-b
yte alphanumeric characters.
● To verify the certicate sent from the server, select the [Verify Server Certicate] checkbox.
To add a Common Name (CN) to the verication items, select the [Add CN to Verication Items] checkbox as
well.
6
Change Application ID and the URL of Azure Active Directory according to usage
envir
onment.
7
Click [OK].
➠ The [Universal Print Settings] scr
een is displayed.
8
Click [Register] in [Registration Status].
➠ The [Information for Registr
ation] screen is displayed.
Printing
192
9
Wait several seconds, and then click [ ].
10
Click the link displayed in [URL for Registration].
11
Register the machine according to the instructions on the screen.
12
Click [Universal Print Settings] at the top of the Remote UI screen.
➠ The [Universal Print Settings] scr
een is displayed.
13
Wait a few minutes, and then click [
].
➠ When r
egistration is complete, [Registered] is displayed in [Registration Status].
14
Log out from Remote UI.
Canceling the Registration
● Click [Unr
egister] on the [Universal Print Settings] screen
[OK]. On the Azure Active Directory device
management screen, select the machine and click [Delete].
Printing
193
Step 2: Specifying the Members and Groups to Use the Machine
1
Display the Universal Print management screen of Azure Active Directory in a Web
br
owser on a computer.
2
Select the machine, and click [Share Printer].
To change the name of the machine displayed on the computer, change [Printer Share Name].
3
Click [Members]
[Add].
4
From the list, select the members and groups who will use the printer.
Printing
194
Registering the Machine to the Computer
9665-03J
Register the machine, which is r
egistered to Azure Active Directory, to the computer to be used for Universal Print.
Required Preparations
● Register the machine to Azur
e Active Directory.
Registering the Machine to Cloud Service(P. 192)
1
Click [
] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Accounts].
➠ The [Your info] screen is displayed.
2
Click [Access work or school] [Connect].
3
Follow the on-screen instructions to sign in to your Microsoft 365 account.
4
Click [Home]
[Devices] [Printers & scanners].
➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr
een is displayed.
5
Click [Add a printer or scanner].
➠ The printer list scr
een is displayed.
6
Select the machine and click [Add device].
➠ The machine is r
egistered to the computer.
When Using a Proxy Server
● T
o use Universal Print via a proxy server, you must congure the proxy settings on each computer. For
details, contact the network administrator.
Printing
195
Preparing to Print from a USB Memory Device (Touch
Panel Model)
9665-0CU
Congur
e the settings to be able to print data from a USB memory device.
By default, LBP247dw cannot print from a USB memory device.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the settings.
[Memory Media Settings](P. 417)
Administr
ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Access Files Settings] [Memory Media Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Memory Media Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Select the [Memory Media Print] checkbox, and click [OK].
5
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Displaying the Operation Screen When a USB Memory Device Is Connected
● Y
ou can congure the setting to display the operation (Memory Media Print) screen when a USB memory
device is inserted into the machine.
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode [Settings/Registration] [Access Files Settings]
[Edit] in [Display Screen When Memory Media is Connected] select the [Display Screen When
Memory Media is Connected] checkbo
x
[OK]
Using the control panel, congur
e the settings in the [Home] screen from [Menu]
[Function Settings].
[Screen When Mem. Med. Conn](P. 417)
Printing
196
Preparing to Receive and Print I-Faxes
9665-03L
Congur
e the information of the e-mail server to use for receiving and printing data by I-Fax (Internet Fax). You can
also congure APOP authentication and encryption communication settings.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control
panel to congure the settings.
Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
If the port number of the e-mail server (POP3 server) is other than 110, you must change the port number setting.
Changing the Port Number(P. 264)
Required Preparations
● Connect the computer you ar
e using to congure the settings to the machine over a network.
● Prepare the following information and keep it close by.
- IP address of the machine
Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 94)
-
Setting information of the e-mail server (POP3 server name, user name, and password to be used for
authentication, encrypted communication setting)
* For details about the setting information, contact your provider or network administrator. Depending on
the usage environment, you can also refer to the information set in the computer e-mail software.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings]
[E-Mail Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit E-Mail Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Enter the basic settings of the e-mail server.
[POP Server]
Enter the POP3 server name (the host name or IP address) using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
Input example: Host name
pop.example.com
[User Name]
Enter the user name used for authenticating the POP3 server using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
[Set/Change Password]
To set a password to use when authenticating the POP3 server, select this checkbox, and enter the
password using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
[POP RX]
Select this checkbox.
[POP Interval]
Enter the interval at which to connect automatically to the POP3 server to receive I-Faxes.
To not receive I-Faxes automatically, enter [0]. In this case, I-Faxes must be manually received.
Printing
197
5
Congure the APOP authentication and encryption settings accor
ding to your usage
environment.
To Use APOP Authentication to Encrypt Password at Authentication
Select the [Use APOP Authentication] checkbo
x.
To Encrypt Communication with the POP3 Server
Select the [Use TLS for POP] checkbo
x.
6
Click [OK].
By clicking [Check POP Connection], you can check the connection with the POP3 server using the current
settings.
7
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Printing
198
Printing from a Computer
9665-03R
You can print documents from a computer using a printer driver.
By changing the settings on the printer driver, you can print accor
ding to the
document and purpose, such as by using 2-sided printing or adjusting the quality.
This section describes the general procedure for this operation. Check the manual of the application you are using for
detailed oper
ations on how to use it.
Required Preparations
● Install the printer driver on the computer, and congur
e the settings according to your usage environment.
Preparing to Print from a Computer(P. 182)
● If the document or paper to print is a non-standar
d size, register the size to the printer driver.
Registering
Non-standar
d Size Paper to the Computer (Custom Size)(P. 202)
When Using Windows(P. 199)
When Using macOS(P. 200)
◼ When Using Windows
1
On your computer, open the document you want to print.
2
In the application used to open the document, select the command to print.
3
Select the printer driver of the machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
➠ The [Printing pr
eferences] screen of the printer driver is displayed.
4
In [Page Size] on the [Basic Settings] tab, select the paper size of the document.
Printing
199
When Printing on Paper of a Size Different from [Page Size]
In [Output Size], select the paper size to print on. The document is enlar
ged or reduced to match the paper
size in [Output Size].
5
Congure the other print settings, as needed.
Congure 2-sided printing and adjust the image quality and other settings to suit your document and
purpose. For mor
e information, click [Help] on the [Printing preferences] screen to display help.
6
Click [OK], and click [Print] or [OK].
➠ Printing starts.
● Y
ou can cancel printing on the printing screen or from the printer icon in the Windows notication area.
Canceling Printing from a Computer(P. 220)
● Use [Status Monitor] to vie
w the print job status and log.
Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 223)
◼ When Using macOS
1
On your computer, open the document you want to print.
2
From the menu in the application used to open the document, click [Print].
➠ The printing dialog bo
x appears.
3
In [Printer], select the printer driver of the machine.
4
In [Paper Size] of the print options, select the paper size of the document.
If print options are not displayed, click [Show Details] in the printing dialog box.
When Printing on Paper of a Size Different from [Paper Size]
1
From the print options pop-up menu, select [Paper Handling].
Printing
200
2
Select the [Scale to t paper size] checkbo
x, and in [Destination Paper Size], select the paper size to print
on.
The document is enlarged or reduced to match the paper size in [Destination Paper Size].
5
Congure the other print settings, as needed.
Congure 2-sided printing and adjust the image quality and other settings to suit your document and
purpose. For mor
e information, click [
] in the printing dialog box to display help.
6
Click [Print].
➠ Printing starts.
● Y
ou can cancel printing from the printer icon in the Dock.
Canceling Printing from a Computer(P. 220)
● Use [Status Monitor] to vie
w the print job status and log.
Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 223)
Printing
201
Registering Non-standard Size Paper to the Computer
(Custom Size)
9665-03S
Custom size paper is non-standar
d size paper whose side lengths can be freely dened.
If the document or paper to print is a non-standard size, you must register the size to the printer driver in advance.
When Using Windows(P. 202)
When Using macOS(P. 202)
◼ When Using Windo
ws
1
Click [
] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].
➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr
een is displayed.
2
Click the printer driver of the machine
[Manage] [Printing preferences].
➠ The [Printing pr
eferences] screen of the printer driver is displayed.
3
On the [Page Setup] tab, click [Custom Paper Size].
4
Enter the custom size paper name and paper size, and click [Register].
5
Click [OK]
[OK].
➠ The custom size paper is r
egistered.
◼ When Using macOS
1
On your computer, open the document you want to print.
Printing
202
2
From the menu in the application used to open the document, click [Print].
➠ The printing dialog bo
x appears.
3
In [Printer], select the printer driver of the machine.
4
In [Paper Size] of the print options, select [Manage Custom Sizes].
If print options are not displayed, click [Show Details] in the printing dialog box.
5
Click [+] at the bottom left, double-click [Untitled], and enter the custom size paper
name.
6
Enter the paper size, and click [OK].
➠ The custom size paper is r
egistered.
Printing
203
Printing a Document Secured with a PIN (Secure Print)
9665-03U
With Secur
e Print, you can set a PIN to a document on the computer and send that document to the machine to be
printed. Printing is performed after that PIN is entered on the machine.
Secure Print can prevent unattended printed documents and information theft. You can also conrm the print data
before printing to prevent unwanted printing.
The print data sent with a PIN (secure data) is temporarily saved in the memory of the machine. If printing is not
performed after a set period of time, the secure data is deleted automatically from the memory, and you can no
longer print the data.
Step 1: Sending Secure Data from a Computer(P. 204)
Step 2: Printing Secure Data by Entering a PIN or Password(P. 206)
● Y
ou can change the period of time that the secure data is saved.
Changing the Time Period That Print
Data with a PIN (Secur
e Data) Is Saved(P. 208)
Step 1: Sending Secure Data from a Computer
Y
ou can send secure data from a computer to the machine using a printer driver.
In Windows, you can send encrypted secure data (using Encrypted Secure Print), thereby preventing eavesdropping
during communication. Secure data is encrypted with an alphanumeric password instead of a PIN.
For details about sending secure data using the Encrypted Secure Print function, see the manual of the driver at the
online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
When Using Windows(P. 204)
When Using macOS(P. 205)
◼ When Using Windo
ws
This section describes how to send regular secure data.
1
Display the [Printing preferences] screen of the printer driver.
Printing from a
Computer(P
. 199)
2
In [Output Method], select [Secured Print].
Printing
204
➠ The [Information] scr
een is displayed.
3
Click [Yes].
➠ The [Secur
ed Print Details] screen is displayed.
4
Enter the user name and PIN, and click [OK].
➠ The [Printing pr
eferences] screen reappears.
5
Click [OK], and click [Print] or [OK].
➠ The secur
e data is sent to the machine.
◼ When Using macOS
Required Preparations
● Enable Secur
e Print in the settings of the printer registered to the computer.
Enabling Secure Print in a
Printer Driver (macOS)(P
. 209)
1
Display the printing dialog box, and select the printer driver of the machine.
Printing from a Computer(P. 199)
2
From the print options pop-up menu, select [Special Features].
If print options are not displayed, click [Show Details] in the printing dialog box.
3
In [Job Processing], select [Secured Print].
4
Click [Print].
➠ The [Secur
ed Print] screen is displayed.
5
Enter the document name, user name, and PIN, and click [OK].
Printing
205
➠ The secur
e data is sent to the machine.
Step 2: Printing Secure Data by Entering a PIN or Password
Print the secure data sent to the machine. If the secure data is left without printing, it will remain in the memory of the
machine, and you may not be able to print other data. Print the sent secure data as soon as possible.
Touch Panel Model(P. 206)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 206)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Secure Print] in the [Home] screen.
[Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
➠ The Secure Print screen is displayed.
If the screen for selecting the user is displayed, select your user name.
2
Select the checkbox of the secure data to print, and press [Start].
3
Enter the PIN or password, and press [Apply].
➠ Printing starts.
● If you selected multiple les of secur
e data in Step 2 above, only secure data that matches the entered PIN or
password is printed.
● To cancel printing, use the control panel to cancel printing.
Canceling Printing with the Control
Panel
(P. 221)
● Use [Status Monitor] to view the print job status and log.
Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 223)
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Secure Print] in the [Home] screen, and press
.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
➠ The Secur
e Print screen is displayed.
If the screen for selecting the user is displayed, select your user name.
Printing
206
2
Select the secure data to print, and press
.
3
Enter the PIN or password, and press .
➠ Printing starts.
● If you selected multiple les of secur
e data in Step 2 above, only secure data that matches the entered PIN or
password is printed.
● To cancel printing, press [<Cancel>] on the printing screen
.
Y
ou can also cancel printing from [Status Monitor] on the control panel.
Canceling Printing with the
Contr
ol Panel(P. 221)
● Use [Status Monitor] to view the print job status and log.
Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 223)
● You can use the following procedure to view the memory usage of saved secure data.
Touch Panel Model
On the control panel, in the [Home] screen or other location, click [Status Monitor] [Device
Information] [Secure Print Memory Usage].
Black and White L
CD Model
On the control panel, press [Device Status] [Secure Print Memory Usage]
Printing
207
Changing the Time Period That Print Data with a PIN
(Secur
e Data) Is Saved
9665-03W
Y
ou can change the period of time until the print data that was sent with a PIN or password (secure data) and is
temporarily saved in the memory of the machine is deleted.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the settings.
[Secure Print](P. 388)
Administr
ator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Secure Print Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Secur
e Print Settings] screen is displayed.
4
In [Secure Print Deletion Time], enter the period of time the secure data is saved
(until it is deleted), and click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
5
Log out from Remote UI.
Printing
208
Enabling Secure Print in a Printer Driver (macOS)
9665-03X
T
o send secure data from a macOS computer to the machine, you must enable Secure Print in the settings of the
printer registered to the computer.
1
Click [
] [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
➠ The [Printers & Scanners] scr
een is displayed.
2
Select the machine, and click [Options & Supplies].
3
On the [Options] tab, select the [Secured Print] checkbox, and click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Printing
209
Printing with Universal Print
9665-03Y
Universal Print is a Micr
osoft service that enables you to print documents via the cloud. There is no need to install a
printer driver to print documents from your computer. You can also print documents from a remote location as long
as your computer is connected to the Internet.
To use Universal Print, you must be a registered user of Microsoft 365 and use Azure Active Directory.
Required Preparations
● Register the machine to Azur
e Active Directory, and set the members or groups that will use the machine.
Registering the Machine to Cloud Service(P. 192)
● T
o each computer that will use Universal Print, register the machine that is registered to Azure Active
Directory.
Registering the Machine to the Computer(P. 195)
For details about how to print with Universal Print and the supported operating systems, see the Microsoft website.
https://docs.micr
osoft.com/
Printing
210
Printing from a USB Memory Device (Memory Media
Print) (T
ouch Panel Model)
9665-040
With Memory Media Print, you can print PDF, JPEG, and TIFF les dir
ectly from a USB
memory device inserted into the machine without using a computer or printer
driver. You can also preview JPEG and TIFF image les on the control panel before
printing.
This is convenient when printing les on a computer without a network connection
or from an external device.
Required Preparations
● Congur
e the settings to print data from a USB memory device.
Preparing to Print from a USB Memory
De
vice (Touch Panel Model)(P. 196)
* By default, LBP247dw does not allow printing.
1
Insert a USB memory device into the USB port on the machine.
Inserting and
Remo
ving a USB Memory Device(P. 171)
If the memory media operation screen appears, press [Memory Media Print], and proceed to step 3.
2
On the control panel, press [Memory Media Print] in the [Home] screen.
[Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
➠ The les and folders of the USB memory device are displayed.
3
Select the checkboxes of the les to print.
Screen for Selecting Files in USB Memory
Device (Touch Panel Model)(P. 213)
You can select multiple les.
* Only les in the same folder can be selected at the same time. If you mo
ve the folder, the le selection is
canceled.
* You cannot select both PDF les and image les (JPEG or TIFF les) at the same time.
4
Press [Apply].
➠ The Memory Media Print settings scr
een is displayed.
Printing
211
5
Congure the print settings.
Memory Media Print Settings (Touch Panel Model)
(P
. 214) /
Receiving and Printing I-Faxes(P. 218)
6
Press [Start].
➠ Printing starts.
● T
o cancel printing, use the control panel to cancel printing.
Canceling Printing with the Control
Panel
(P. 221)
● Use [Status Monitor] to view the print job status and log.
Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 223)
7
When printing is completed, remove the USB memory device. Removing the USB
Memory De
vice(P. 172)
Printing
212
Screen for Selecting Files in USB Memory Device (Touch
Panel Model)
9665-041
Insert the USB memory de
vice into the machine, and in the [Home] screen, press [Memory Media Print] to display the
les and folders in the USB memory device.
Select the checkboxes of the les to print.
T
o select all displayed les, press [Select All] at the bottom of the screen. If there are both PDF les and image les
(JPEG or TIFF les), a screen for selecting the le type is displayed. Use this screen to select the le type you want to
print.
You can also use the following method to change the display of the le selection screen.
Moving Files to a Folder
Select a folder. To navigate up one level, press [
].
* Folders and les deeper than ve le
vels are not displayed.
Changing the File Display Method
Press [
], [ ], or [ ] at the top right of the screen to change the way les ar
e displayed.
(Preview)
(Thumbnail)
(Details)
Changing the File Display Order
Y
ou can arrange les by le name or when last updated.
Press [Sort Files] at the bottom of the screen, and select the le display order.
● Y
ou can also change the default le display method and display order settings.
[Default Display Settings](P. 420)
[File Sort Default Settings](P. 420)
Printing
213
Memory Media Print Settings (Touch Panel Model)
9665-0CW
Y
ou can use the Memory Media Print settings screen to select the paper to use, set 2-sided printing, and congure
other settings. You can also display the details settings screen to adjust the image quality and congure other detailed
print settings.
[Paper]
Select the paper to use for printing.
Select the paper sour
ce with the loaded paper to use, and press [Close].
* If the paper loaded in the paper source does not match the setting of the paper size or paper type, you can use
[Change Paper Settings] to change the paper settings.
[Brightness]
Adjust the brightness of the printed image.
Drag the slider to the left or right to adjust the brightness, and then press [Close].
Press [+] to increase the brightness and [-] to lower it.
[Number of Copies]
Specify the number of copies to print.
Use the numeric keys to enter the number of copies, and then press [Close].
[2-Sided Printing]
Use the button to select whether to use 2-sided printing.
Prints on one side.
Prints on both sides of the paper with the same top and bottom orientation on the front and back sides.
Printed pages ar
e opened horizontally when the paper is bound.
Prints on both sides of the paper with the reverse top and bottom orientation on the front and back
sides.
Printed pages ar
e opened vertically when the paper is bound.
[N on 1] (PDF or JPEG le)
Specify whether to reduce the size of a multiple-page document and arrange the pages on one side of a sheet of
paper.
N on 1 is convenient when you want to save paper by printing on fewer sheets of paper than the original.
Use the button to select the number of pages to be combined.
Printing
214
Pages are not combined.
Combines a 2-page document onto one side of a sheet of paper.
Combines a 4-page document onto one side of a sheet of paper.
Combines an 8-page document onto one side of a sheet of paper. (PDF les only)
* For a PDF le, you can print 9 or 16 pages of a document on one side of a sheet of paper b
y using [N on 1] on
the details settings screen.
[Set PDF Details] Screen(P. 215)
[Set PDF Details]/[Set JPEG/TIFF Details]
Adjust the image quality and congur
e other detailed print settings.
[Set PDF Details] Screen(P. 215)
[Set JPEG/TIFF Details] Screen(P. 216)
Printing with the Same Settings
● Y
ou can change the default Memory Media Print settings.
Changing the Default Settings (Touch Panel
Model)
(P. 174)
[Set PDF Details] Screen
Use this scr
een to congure detailed print settings for PDF les, such as specifying the pages to print and adjusting
the image quality.
To display the screen, press [Set PDF Details] on the Memory Media Print settings screen.
[2-Sided Printing]
Specify whether to use 2-sided printing. When using 2-sided printing, select how printed pages are opened when the
paper is bound.
* This is the same setting as [2-Sided Printing] on the Memory Media Print settings screen.
[N on 1]
Specify whether to r
educe the size of a multiple-page document and arrange the pages on one side of a sheet of
paper.
When combining pages, use the button to select the number of pages to be combined.
Example: When combining a 4-page document onto one side of a sheet of paper
Select [4 on 1].
* This is the same setting as [N on 1] on the Memory Media Print settings screen. However, [9 on 1] and [16 on 1]
are only available for [N on 1] on the [Set PDF Details] screen.
[Print Range]
Print all pages, or specify a r
ange of pages to print. When specifying a range of pages, press [Specied Pages], and
enter the starting and ending pages.
[Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size]
Specify whether to enlarge or reduce the document according to the paper to be used for printing.
* The document is enlarged or reduced while maintaining the aspect ratio.
[Enlarge Print Area]
Specify whether to enlarge the print area to the edge of the paper without providing margins around the paper.
Printing
215
* When [Enlarge Print Area] is set to [On], part of the edge of the printed image may not be printed, or the paper may
be partly smudged.
[Print Comments]
Specify whether to print PDF comments.
When you select [Auto], the document and comments
*1
ar
e printed.
*1
Only comments specied for printing in the PDF le.
[Password to Open Document]
When printing a passwor
d-protected PDF le, enter the password to open the le.
[Other Settings]
Congure and adjust image quality settings and other detailed print settings.
[Halftones]
Set the printing method when reproducing halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker
areas of an image). For details about the settings, see the following:
[Halftones](P. 401)
[Gr
ayscale Conversion]
Specify the conversion method when printing color data in black and white. For details about the settings, see
the following:
[Grayscale Conversion](P. 410)
[Print Quality]
Adjust the print quality
, such as the density and resolution, according to the document and purpose of printing.
[Density]
Adjust the toner density for each color during printing.
For more precise adjustment, you can adjust the levels in [Fine Adjust].
* When [Toner Save] is set to [On], you cannot adjust the toner density.
[Toner Save]
Specify whether to print while saving toner.
To print after checking the layout and appearance, such as before printing a large job, select [On].
[Image Renement]
Specify whether to use smoothing processing that will produce smoother printed outlines in text and gures.
[Resolution]
Specify the resolution to be used for print data processing.
To print with a higher resolution, specify [1200 dpi] in this setting.
[Set JPEG/TIFF Details] Screen
Use this screen to congure detailed print settings for JPEG and TIFF les, such adjusting the image quality.
To display the screen, press [Set JPEG/TIFF Details] on the Memory Media Print settings screen.
[2-Sided Printing]
Specify whether to use 2-sided printing. When using 2-sided printing, select how printed pages are opened when the
paper is bound.
* This is the same setting as [2-Sided Printing] on the Memory Media Print settings screen.
[N on 1] (
JPEG le)
Specify whether to reduce the size of a multiple-page image and arrange the pages on one side of a sheet of
paper.
When combining pages, use the button to select the number of pages to be combined.
Example: When combining a 4-page image onto one side of a sheet of paper
Printing
216
Select [4 on 1].
* This is the same setting as [N on 1] on the Memory Media Print settings screen.
[Original Type]
Select whether to prioritize smoothness of a photo or clarity of te
xt when printing.
[Halftones]
Set the printing method when reproducing halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker areas of
an image), according to the image content.
To Print Images with Fine Gradations, Such as Digital Camera Photos
Set to [Gradation]. Reproduces the gradation with a smooth nish.
To Print Images with Fine Lines and Small Text, Such as CAD Images
Set to [Error Diffusion]. Prints ne lines and small text with high resolution.
* When you set to [Error Diffusion], the xing of the toner and stability of the texture may be reduced.
[Print Quality]
Adjust the toner density and the amount used according to the document being printed and the purpose.
[Density]
Adjust the toner density used when printing.
For more precise adjustment, you can adjust the levels of the three density areas in [Fine Adjust].
*Note that you cannot adjust the toner density if [Toner Save] is set to [On].
[Toner Save]
Specify whether to save toner when printing.
Specify [On] in this setting when you only want to check the layout or other nishing prior to the nal print, such as
before printing a very large job.
Printing
217
Receiving and Printing I-Faxes
9665-043
I-Fax (Internet Fax) is a function for sending and receiving faxes via the Internet.
The machine cannot send I-Fax
es, but it can receive and print I-Faxes.
The machine for sending I-Faxes must support I-Fax technology.
When there is an I-Fax, it is automatically received from the set mail server and then
it is printed automatically once receiving is completed.
You can change the paper size to print and congure the settings to print on both
sides of the paper.
Changing the Print Settings of the Received I-Fax(P. 219)
Required Preparations
● On the machine, congur
e the settings of the e-mail server to be used to receive I-Faxes.
Preparing to
Receive and Print I-Fax
es(P. 197)
◼ Manually Receiving I-Fax
es
If you want to connect to the server before receiving I-Faxes automatically, or if the machine is set to not receive I-
Faxes automatically, you can receive I-Faxes manually.
Touch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen.
[Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
➠ The [Status Monitor] scr
een is displayed.
2
Press [RX Job] [Check I-Fax RX].
➠ The machine connects to the server. When you r
eceive an I-Fax, printing starts automatically.
Black and White LCD Model
1
Press
on the control panel. Control Panel of Black and White LCD Model(P. 18)
➠ The [Status Monitor] scr
een is displayed.
2
Press [RX Job]
[Check I-Fax RX] .
➠ The machine connects to the server. When you r
eceive an I-Fax, printing starts automatically.
Printing
218
Changing the Print Settings of the Received I-Fax
9665-044
Received I-Fax
es are printed on LTR size paper on one side by default. You can change the settings to print on both
sides and on different size paper.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the settings.
[E-Mail Settings](P. 416)
Administr
ator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [RX Settings]
[E-Mail Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit E-Mail Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Change the print settings.
[Print on Both Sides]
Select this checkbo
x to print on both sides of the paper.
[RX Print Size]
Select the paper size for printing the received data.
5
Click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
6
Log out from Remote UI.
Printing
219
Canceling Printing
9665-045
Y
ou can cancel printing from a computer. To cancel printing after the print data has been sent to the machine, use the
control panel or Remote UI.
To cancel printing when using Memory Media Print, use the control panel or Remote UI (Touch Panel Model).
Canceling Printing from a Computer(P. 220)
Canceling Printing with the Control Panel(P. 221)
Canceling Printing with Remote UI(P. 222)
Canceling Printing from a Computer
When Using Windows(P. 220)
When Using macOS(P. 220)
◼ When Using Windo
ws
If the printing screen is displayed, click [Cancel].
If the above screen is not displayed, double-click the printer icon in the Windows notication ar
ea, select the document
to cancel, and click [Document]
[Cancel] [Yes].
If the printer icon is not displayed in the Windows notication ar
ea or the document to be canceled is not displayed,
the print data is sent to the machine after being processed on the computer.
In this case, cancel printing using the control panel of the machine or Remote UI.
Canceling Printing with the
Contr
ol Panel(P. 221)
◼ When Using macOS
Click the printer icon in the Dock, select the document to cancel, and click [
].
Printing
220
Canceling Printing with the Control Panel
Touch Panel Model(P. 221)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 222)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
Follow the instructions on screen to cancel printing.
Press [Cancel]
[Yes].
If the above screen is not displayed, press [ ] on the control panel [Yes].
If the job list screen is displayed, select the job to cancel, and press [Cancel] [Yes].
Printing
221
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
You can cancel printing using the procedure below.
1
Press
on the control panel. Control Panel(P. 17)
2
Press [Print Job] [Job Status] .
3
Select the job to be canceled in [Print Job Status], press .
4
Press [<Cancel>]
[Yes] .
Canceling Printing with Remote UI
You can cancel printing with [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Status] screen in [Print] of Remote UI. Checking Usage
and Logs with Remote UI
(P. 321)
Printing
222
Viewing the Print Job Status and Log
9665-046
Pr
ocesses handled by the machine, including printing, are managed as jobs. By checking the status and log of jobs,
you can determine whether a print job was performed correctly and the cause of errors that occurred.
* If the log is set to not be displayed, you can only check the print job status.
[Display Job Log](P. 425)
This section describes ho
w to view this information using the control panel.
You can also check this information using Remote UI from a computer.
Checking Usage and Logs with Remote
UI(P
. 321)
Touch Panel Model(P. 223)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 224)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen or other location.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
➠ The [Status Monitor] scr
een is displayed.
2
Press [Print Job].
3
Check the print job status and log on the [Print Job Status] or [Print Job Log] tab.
Viewing the Print Job Status
1
On the [Print Job Status] tab, check the job being processed or waiting to be processed.
2
Select a job to view its details.
➠ The job details ar
e displayed.
3
View the le name, user name, and other information.
Depending on the type of char
acters being used, the le name and user name may not be correctly
displayed.
Viewing the Print Job Log
1
On the [Print Job Log] tab, check the completed print jobs.
2
Select a job to view its details.
➠ The job details ar
e displayed.
3
View the le name, user name, and other information.
Depending on the type of char
acters being used, the le name and user name may not be correctly
displayed.
If Print Job Log Displays Error Information
Printing was canceled, or an error occurred.
If a three-digit number starting with "#" (error code) is displayed, you can check the cause and solution
using the error code. An Error Code Is Displayed(P. 554)
Printing
223
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
1
Press
on the control panel. Control Panel(P. 17)
2
Select [Print Job], press , and check the print job status and log .
■Viewing the Print Job Status
1
Select [Job Status], press
.
2
Select a job to view its details and press .
➠ The job details ar
e displayed.
3
View the le name, user name, and other information.
Depending on the type of char
acters being used, the le name and user name may not be correctly
displayed.
■Viewing the Print Job Log
1
Select [Job Log], press
.
2
Select a job to view its details and press .
➠ The job details ar
e displayed.
3
View the le name, user name, and other information.
Depending on the type of char
acters being used, the le name and user name may not be correctly
displayed.
If Print Job Log Displays Error Information
Printing was canceled, or an error occurred.
If a three-digit number starting with "#" (error code) is displayed, you can check the cause and solution
using the error code.
An Error Code Is Displayed(P. 554)
Printing
224
Linking with Mobile Devices
Linking with Mobile Devices ....................................................................................................................
226
Preparations for Linking with Mobile Devices ................................................................................................ 227
Preparations for Direct Connection .............................................................................................................. 228
Preparations for Using AirPrint ..................................................................................................................... 231
Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine ................................................................................................... 234
Connecting a Mobile Device via Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) ....................................................... 235
Connecting a Mobile Device Directly to the Machine (Direct Connection) ..................................................... 236
Using a Dedicated Application to Print (Canon PRINT Business) ................................................................... 240
Using AirPrint Application to Print Data .......................................................................................................... 241
Printing from an Android Device ...................................................................................................................... 244
Printing from Chromebook or Other Device with Chrome OS ........................................................................ 246
Linking with Mobile Devices
225
Linking with Mobile Devices
9665-047
The machine can be oper
ated from a smartphone, tablet, or other mobile device. By using a compatible application or
service, you can easily print photos or documents through a mobile device.
The applications and services that are available vary depending on the mobile device you are using.
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, Mac
Canon PRINT Business (iPhone, iPad only)
Dedicated Canon application. It also supports Department ID Management.
Using a Dedicated Application to Print (Canon PRINT Business)(P. 240)
AirPrint
This function is standar
d in Apple operating systems. You can print from applications that support AirPrint
instead of having to install a dedicated application or driver.
In addition, you can use AirPrint to print from a Mac.
Preparations for Using AirPrint(P. 231)
Using AirPrint Application to Print Data(P. 241)
Andr
oid Devices
Canon PRINT Business
Dedicated Canon application. It also supports Department ID Management.
Using a Dedicated Application to Print (Canon PRINT Business)(P. 240)
Canon Print Service
Dedicated Canon plugin. Enables printing fr
om any application. It also supports Department ID
Management.
Using a Dedicated Plugin to Print (Canon Print Service)(P. 244)
Mopria
® Print Service
Common plugin for Mopria
®
certied printers and multifunction machines. Enables printing from any
application without having to install a dedicated plugin or application for individual manufacturers.
Using a Common Plugin to Print (Mopria® Print Service)(P. 244)
Chr
omebook or Other Device with Chrome OS
You can use the function standard equipped in the Chrome operating system to print without having to install a
dedicated application or printer driver.
Printing from Chromebook or Other Device with Chrome OS(P. 246)
When Applying a Security Policy
● When [Restrict IPP Port (Port Number: 631)] or [Restrict mDNS Port (Port Number: 5353)] is enabled, you
cannot use AirPrint and Mopria
®
Print Service.
Security Policy Items(P. 308)
◼ See Also
Managing the Machine fr
om a Mobile Device (Remote UI)
You can use Remote UI from a Web browser on a mobile device. With Remote UI, you can check the
operation status of the machine and change the machine settings. For details about starting and operating
Remote UI, see the instructions for using Remote UI on a computer.
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 315)
* Some display items ar
e omitted in the mobile version of Remote UI. To check all items, tap [PC Version] at
the bottom of the screen and switch to the computer version of Remote UI.
Linking with Mobile Devices
226
Preparations for Direct Connection
9665-049
Enable the Dir
ect Connection function on the machine. If the machine is not connected to a network, you need to
check the Network Connection Type settings.
Enabling the Direct Connection Function(P. 228)
Checking the Network Connection Type of the Machine(P. 229)
Enabling the Direct Connection Function
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.
[Direct Connection Settings](P. 355)
Administr
ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings] [Direct Connection Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Dir
ect Connection Settings] screen is displayed.
4
Select the [Use Direct Connection] checkbox.
5
Congure the Dir
ect Connection function, as needed.
When connecting multiple mobile devices at the same time, you must specify the SSID and network key.
To Terminate the Connection Automatically
Select the [T
erminate Direct Connection Session] checkbox, and enter the time period of the direct
connection until it is terminated. When multiple mobile devices are connected, they will be disconnected
after the time period elapses since the last started connection.
To Change the IP Address for Connection
In [IP Addr
ess for Direct Connection], enter any IP address.
To specify the SSID and Network Key (When Connecting Multiple Mobile Devices at the
Same Time)
By default, the SSID and network k
ey of the machine are automatically assigned a random character string
each time direct connection is performed.
To specify the SSID and network key manually, in [Access Point Mode Settings], select the [Specify SSID to
Use] or [Specify Network Key to Use] checkbox, and enter an SSID or network key using single-byte
alphanumeric characters.
To Allow Mobile Devices to Always Connect to the Machine
By default, you must use the control panel to put the machine into waiting state when you want to establish
a direct connection.
Linking with Mobile Devices
228
To allow mobile devices to always connect to the machine, in [Access Point Mode Settings], specify the SSID
and network k
ey, and select the [Always Keep Enabled If SSID/Network Key Is Specied] checkbox in [Keep
Connection Enabled].
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Checking the Network Connection Type of the Machine
If the machine is not connected to a network (wir
ed or wireless LAN), check that the network connection type is set to
wired LAN.
If the machine is connected to a network, you do not have to check this.
Touch Panel Model(P. 229)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 229)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen or other location.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
➠ The [Status Monitor] scr
een is displayed.
2
Press [Network Information]
[Network Connection Type].
➠ The [Network Connection T
ype] screen is displayed.
3
Check that [Wired LAN] is displayed.
If the connection type is set to wired LAN, you can establish a direct connection even if the machine is not
connected to a network.
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
1
Press
on the control panel. Control Panel of Black and White LCD Model(P. 18)
➠ The [Status Monitor] scr
een is displayed.
2
Press [Network Information]
[Network Connection Method] .
➠ The [Network Conn. Method] scr
een is displayed.
Linking with Mobile Devices
229
3
Check that [Wired LAN] is displayed.
If the connection type is set to wired LAN, you can establish a direct connection even if the machine is not
connected to a network.
When [Wireless LAN] Is Displayed in [Connection Type] or [Network Conn. Method]
When the machine is not connected to a wir
eless LAN, a direct connection cannot be established. Connect
the machine to a wireless LAN or switch the connection type to wired LAN.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
Selecting Wired or Wireless LAN(P. 55)
Linking with Mobile Devices
230
Preparations for Using AirPrint
9665-04A
Set the basic information that is r
equired to use AirPrint. Congure the settings related to the functions and security
that will be used, according to your usage and environment.
Setting the Basic Information of AirPrint(P. 231)
Setting the Functions and Security to Be Used with AirPrint(P. 232)
When Using Department ID Management
● Department IDs cannot be set with AirPrint. T
o use AirPrint while using Department ID Management,
congure the settings so as not to restrict the following operations:
Enabling Department ID
Management(P
. 256)
- Printing from a computer with an unknown Department ID
Setting the Basic Information of AirPrint
Congur
e these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to congure the
settings.
Administrator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration].
Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings]
[AirPrint Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit AirPrint Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Select the [Use AirPrint] checkbox, and enter the printer name.
● For the printer name, enter a name to identify the machine, using single-b
yte alphanumeric characters.
● If mDNS of IPv4 is set, the mDNS name is entered for the printer name. If you change the printer name, the
mDNS name is also changed.
* When you change the set printer name or mDNS name, the Mac that was connected to the machine may
no longer be able to connect to it. In this case, you must register the machine on the Mac.
5
Enter the location and longitude and latitude of the machine, as needed.
If the location of the machine is set in [Settings/Registration]
[Device Management] [Device Information
Settings], the same character string is entered in the location. When you change the location in AirPrint
Settings, the location in Device Information Settings is also changed.
6
Click [OK].
Linking with Mobile Devices
231
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
7
Log out from Remote UI.
● When the AirPrint function is enabled, the follo
wing network settings are also enabled:
-
[Use HTTP](P. 372)
- [IPP Print Settings](P. 371)
- [mDNS Settings] (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 365)
Setting the Functions and Security to Be Used with AirPrint
AirPrint uses the IPP protocol.
Y
ou can congure the settings to encrypt communication with TLS and congure IPP authentication when using
the protocol.
Congure these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to congure the
settings.
Administrator privileges are required.
Required Preparations
● When encrypting communication with TLS, specify the k
ey and certicate to use for TLS encrypted
communication.
Using TLS(P. 267)
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings] [IPP Print Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit IPP Print Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Congure the IPP settings.
When Restricting the Functions to Use
Clear the [Use IPP Printing] checkbo
x.
When you clear the checkbox, printing with AirPrint is no longer possible.
When Encrypting Communication with TLS
Select the [Allo
w Only When Using TLS] or [Use TLS] checkbox.
When Setting IPP Authentication
Select the [Use Authentication] checkbo
x, and set the user name to be used for IPP authentication using
single-byte alphanumeric characters.
Linking with Mobile Devices
232
To set a password, select the [Set/Change Password] checkbox, and enter the same password in both
[Passwor
d] and [Conrm] using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
Printing with AirPrint now requires authentication, and only users who know the user name and password of
IPP authentication can use these functions.
5
Click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
6
Log out from Remote UI.
Linking with Mobile Devices
233
Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine
9665-04C
T
o use the machine from a mobile device, you must connect it to the machine using either of the following methods:
Connecting via Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)
Connect a mobile device to the machine via a wireless LAN router in the same way as you connect a
computer to the machine. By conguring a mobile device to connect automatically to the wireless LAN
router, you do not need to manually connect it next time.
Connecting a Mobile Device via Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)(P. 235)
Connecting Directly (Direct Connection)
Connect a mobile de
vice directly to the machine via Wi-Fi. You can directly connect to the machine without
using wireless LAN router. You must manually connect the mobile device each time you use the machine.
Preparations for Direct Connection(P. 228)
Connecting a Mobile Device Directly to the Machine (Direct Connection)(P. 236)
Linking with Mobile Devices
234
Connecting a Mobile Device via Wireless LAN Router
(LAN Connection)
9665-04E
Connect a mobile de
vice to the machine via a wireless LAN router in the same way as you connect a computer to the
machine. By conguring a mobile device to connect automatically to the wireless LAN router, you do not need to
manually connect it next time.
Required Preparations
● Connect the machine to the network using wir
eless or wired LAN.
Setting Up the Network(P. 53)
* When using a wir
ed LAN, check that a wireless LAN router is connected to the same network.
● Set an IPv4 address to the machine.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
Connect the mobile device to either of the following wireless LAN routers:
● A wir
eless LAN router connected to the machine
● (When the machine is connected to a wired LAN) A wireless LAN router on the network connected to the
machine
For details about how to connect a mobile device to a wireless LAN router, see the manual of the mobile device.
Linking with Mobile Devices
235
Connecting a Mobile Device Directly to the Machine
(Dir
ect Connection)
9665-04F
Connect a mobile de
vice directly to the machine via Wi-Fi. You can directly connect it to the machine without using
wireless LAN router. You must manually connect the mobile device each time you use the machine.
By default, only one mobile device can be directly connected to the machine at any one time. Setting a xed SSID and
network key enables you to connect up to ve mobile devices at the same time.
To establish a direct connection, you must use the control panel to put the machine into waiting state and then
connect it using either of the follo
wing methods:
Manually Conguring the Wi-Fi Settings
Search for the machine on the mobile device, and enter the network key
manually to connect.
Scanning QR Codes with Canon PRINT Business (Touch Panel Model)
Use Canon PRINT Business to easily connect by simply scanning the QR code
displayed on the scr
een of the machine with a mobile device.
Required Preparations
● Mak
e preparations such as enabling the Direct Connection function on the machine.
Preparations for
Dir
ect Connection(P. 228)
● To connect by scanning the QR code, install Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device.
Touch Panel Model(P. 236)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 238)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Mobile Portal] in the [Home] screen.
[Home]
Screen(P. 116)
➠ The [Mobile Portal] screen is displayed.
Linking with Mobile Devices
236
2
On the [Direct Connection] tab, press [Connect].
➠ The machine enters waiting state for Dir
ect Connection.
Within 5 minutes of pressing [Connect], you must directly connect the mobile device.
When [Disconnect] Is Displayed
● Y
ou can skip this step when [Connect from the device you want to connect.] is displayed. Proceed to Step 3.
● When [Maximum number of wireless devices connected using Direct Connection has been reached.] is
displayed, you cannot connect a new mobile device until a connected mobile device is disconnected. To
disconnect a connected mobile device, press [Disconnect]
[Yes].
* By default, only one mobile de
vice can be directly connected to the machine at any one time.
3
Directly connect the mobile device.
Manually Conguring the Wi-Fi Settings
1
Check the SSID and network key of the machine displayed on the [Direct Connection] tab.
2
In the Wi-Fi settings of the mobile device, select the SSID of the machine, and enter the network key.
For details about ho
w to congure the Wi-Fi settings, see the manual of the mobile device.
Scanning QR Codes with Canon PRINT Business
1
On the [Direct Connection] tab, press [QR Code].
➠ A QR code is displayed.
2
On the mobile device, start Canon PRINT Business, and scan the QR code.
For details about scanning a QR code, see Help in Canon PRINT Business.
4
When [Connected.] appears on the control panel, press [Close].
Linking with Mobile Devices
237
➠ The [Mobile Portal] scr
een reappears.
By default, only one mobile device can be directly connected to the machine at any one time. [Maximum
number of wireless devices connected using Direct Connection has been reached.] is displayed on the
screen.
5
When you have completed your operations on the mobile device, press [Disconnect]
on the [Dir
ect Connection] tab.
➠ The direct connection is terminated.
If multiple mobile devices are connected, all devices are disconnected.
◼ Black and White LCD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Mobile Portal] in the [Home] screen, and press
.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
➠ The [Mobile Portal] scr
een is displayed.
2
Select [<Connect>] and press
.
➠ The machine enters waiting state for Dir
ect Connection.
● Within 5 minutes of pressing [<Connect>], you must directly connect the mobile device.
● You can skip this step when [Connect from device you want to connect.] is displayed. Press
and proceed
to Step 3.
● When [Maximum number of wir
eless devices connected using Direct Connection has been reached.] is
displayed, you cannot connect a new mobile device until a connected mobile device is disconnected. To
disconnect a connected mobile device, press [<Disconnect>]
[Yes] .
* By default, only one mobile de
vice can be directly connected to the machine at any one time.
3
Directly connect the mobile device.
Manually Conguring the Wi-Fi Settings
1
Check the SSID and network key of the machine.
2
In the Wi-Fi settings of the mobile device, select the SSID of the machine, and enter the network key.
For details about ho
w to congure the Wi-Fi settings, see the manual of the mobile device.
4
When [Connected.] appears on the control panel, press [Close].
➠ The [Mobile Portal] scr
een reappears.
By default, only one mobile device can be directly connected to the machine at any one time. [Maximum
number of wireless devices connected using Direct Connection has been reached.] is displayed on the
screen.
5
When you have completed your operations on the mobile device, press
[<Disconnect>]
.
Linking with Mobile Devices
238
➠ The dir
ect connection is terminated.
If multiple mobile devices are connected, all devices are disconnected.
● Y
ou may not be able to connect to the Internet with Direct Connection depending on the mobile device.
● The power-saving effect of sleep mode decreases when using Direct Connection.
● The IP address of the mobile device is set automatically. If you set the IP address manually, communication
using Direct Connection may not be performed correctly.
Checking a Mobile Device Connected to the Machine
● When using Dir
ect Connection, press [Connection Info] to display the information of the mobile device
connected to the machine with Direct Connection.
If the Direct Connection Is Automatically Disconnected
● The direct connection is automatically terminated in the following cases:
- When the Direct Connection Termination is set
- When no data is sent or received between the mobile device and the machine for a while
- When you are using the machine via a wireless LAN connection and the connection drops out
Linking with Mobile Devices
239
Using a Dedicated Application to Print (Canon PRINT
Business)
9665-04H
Y
ou can use the dedicated Canon application Canon PRINT Business to print.
It also supports Department ID Management. Even when printing with an unknown Department ID is restricted, you
can print by setting a Department ID.
Compatible Operating Systems and Download Site
See the Canon website.
https://global.canon/gomp/
Usage
● Connect a mobile device to the machine.
Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine(P. 234)
● Register the machine to Canon PRINT Business.
When the mobile de
vice is connected to the machine via LAN, the IP address information of the machine or
displaying of the QR code is required to register the machine to Canon PRINT Business. You can view the IP
address and display the QR code with [Home] screen
[Mobile Portal] [LAN Connection] tab.
For the black and white L
CD model, you can view the IP address with [Mobile Portal] on the control panel
[Display Device Name/IP Address] . The QR code is not displayed.
● For details about r
egistering the machine and printing, see the Help menu item in the application.
Linking with Mobile Devices
240
Using AirPrint Application to Print Data
9665-04J
AirPrint is a print function standar
d in Apple operating systems. You can print from applications that support AirPrint
instead of having to install a dedicated application or driver.
In addition, you can use AirPrint to print from a Mac.
When Using an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch(P. 241)
When Using a Mac(P. 242)
When Using Department ID Management on the Machine
● You cannot use AirPrint when printing from a computer with an unknown Department ID is restricted.
Enabling Department ID Management(P. 256)
When Using an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch
Use AirPrint to print fr
om an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch connected to the machine via LAN or direct connection.
Operating Environment
You can use AirPrint with the following iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch models:
● iPhone: 3GS or later
● iPad: All models
● iPod touch: Third generation or later
Required Preparations
● Set the machine to enable use of AirPrint.
Preparations for Using AirPrint(P. 231)
● Connect the machine to an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch. Connecting a Mobile Device to the
Machine(P
. 234)
1
Open the data to be printed on the iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch.
2
In the application with the data to be printed open, tap [ ].
➠ The menu options ar
e displayed.
3
Tap [Print].
Linking with Mobile Devices
241
➠ The print options ar
e displayed.
If print options are not displayed, the application does not support AirPrint. In this case, you cannot use
AirPrint to print data.
4
Tap [Printer], and select the machine.
5
Congure the print settings.
The available settings and usable paper sizes vary depending on the application you are using.
6
Tap [Print].
➠ Printing starts.
Use [Status Monitor] on the contr
ol panel to view the print job status and log.
Viewing the Print Job
Status and Log(P
. 223)
When Using a Mac
You can use AirPrint to print data from a Mac connected to the network on the same LAN as the machine or a Mac
connected to the machine via USB.
Operating Environment
You can use AirPrint on a Mac with OS X 10.7 or later
*1
installed.
*1
When printing fr
om a Mac connected to the machine via USB, OS X 10.9 or later.
Required Preparations
● Set the machine to enable use of AirPrint.
Preparations for Using AirPrint(P. 231)
● Connect the machine to a Mac. Setting Up the Network(P. 53)
When connecting via USB
, connect to the USB port for computer connection on the back of the machine with
a USB cable.
Rear Side(P. 15)
● In [System Pr
eferences]
[Printers & Scanners] on the Mac, click [+] to register the machine.
Using AirPrint to Print Data(P. 242)
◼ Using AirPrint to Print Data
1
Open the document you want to print on your Mac.
2
In the application used to open the document, click [Print].
➠ The printing dialog bo
x appears.
3
In [Printer], select the machine.
Linking with Mobile Devices
242
4
Congure the print settings.
The available settings and usable paper sizes vary depending on the application you are using.
5
Click [Print].
➠ Printing starts.
Use [Status Monitor] on the contr
ol panel to view the print job status and log.
Viewing the Print Job
Status and Log(P
. 223)
Linking with Mobile Devices
243
Printing from an Android Device
9665-04K
Install a plugin on a mobile de
vice to enable printing from an application that has a print function.
This machine supports Canon plugins as well as Mopria
®
, which is supported by various manufacturers.
Using a Dedicated Plugin to Print (Canon Print Service)(P. 244)
Using a Common Plugin to Print (Mopria® Print Service)(P. 244)
Using a Dedicated Plugin to Print (Canon Print Service)
Y
ou can use the dedicated Canon plugin Canon Print Service to print from any application.
It also supports Department ID Management. Even when printing with an unknown Department ID is restricted, you
can print by setting a Department ID.
Compatible Operating Systems and Download Site
See the Canon website.
https://global.canon/psmp/
Usage
● Connect a mobile device to the machine.
Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine(P. 234)
● Register the machine to Canon Print Service.
When
the mobile device is connected to the machine via LAN, the IP address information of the machine is
required to register the machine to Canon Print Service. You can view the IP address with [Home] screen
[Mobile Portal] [LAN Connection] tab.
For
the black and white LCD model, you can view the IP address with [Mobile Portal] on the control panel
[Display Device Name/IP Address] .
● For
details about registering the machine and the printing method, see the Canon Print Service manual in
"Mobile Apps" at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
Using a Common Plugin to Print (Mopria
®
Print Service)
The machine supports Mopria
®
Print Service, a plugin that enables printing fr
om any application on a Mopria
®
certied printer or multifunction machine.
You can print on a Mopria
®
certied printer available from various manufacturers, which is convenient when printing
on the go, without having to install a dedicated application or plugin.
Usage
● Connect a mobile de
vice to the machine.
Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine(P. 234)
● For details about ho
w to print and Mopria
®
certied printers, see the following website:
https://mopria.org/
Linking with Mobile Devices
244
Printing from Chromebook or Other Device with
Chr
ome OS
9665-04L
Y
ou can use a Chromebook or other device equipped with Chrome OS to print without having to install a dedicated
application or printer driver.
Printing from a Chrome OS Device
● Printing fr
om a Chrome OS device may not be supported depending on your country or region.
When Using Department ID Management on the Machine
● You cannot print from a device equipped with Chrome OS when printing from a computer with an unknown
Department ID is restricted.
Enabling Department ID Management(P. 256)
Usage
● Connect a Chr
omebook to the machine.
Connecting a Mobile Device via Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)(P. 235)
When
connecting via USB, connect to the USB port for computer connection on the back of the machine
with a USB cable.
Rear Side(P. 15)
● For details about ho
w to print using the Chromebook, see Chromebook Help.
https://support.google.com/chromebook/answer/7225252
Linking with Mobile Devices
246
Security
Security ................................................................................................................................................................
248
Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator ............................................................................ 249
Authenticating Users and Managing Groups .................................................................................................. 251
Authenticating Users and Managing Groups with Department ID (Department ID Management) ............... 252
Registering a Department ID and PIN ................................................................................................... 254
Enabling Department ID Management .................................................................................................. 256
Setting the Department ID and PIN on a Computer ............................................................................... 257
Conrming Usage by Department ID ..................................................................................................... 259
Protecting the Network .................................................................................................................................... 260
Setting the Firewall ....................................................................................................................................... 261
Changing the Port Number .......................................................................................................................... 264
Using a Proxy ............................................................................................................................................... 265
Using TLS ...................................................................................................................................................... 267
Using IPSec ................................................................................................................................................... 269
Using IEEE 802.1X ......................................................................................................................................... 273
Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate .............................................................................................. 275
Generating a Key and Certicate ........................................................................................................... 276
Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate ... 278
Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate from an SCEP Server ............................. 281
If an Error Is Displayed in the Certicate Issuance Request Status .................................................. 286
Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Obtained from an Issuing Authority ........................ 288
Verifying a Received Certicate with OCSP ............................................................................................. 290
Preventing Leaking Information ...................................................................................................................... 291
Restricting Use of Memory Media ................................................................................................................. 292
Restricting Use from a Mobile Device ........................................................................................................... 294
Restricting Printing ....................................................................................................................................... 295
Restricting Printing from a Computer to Secure Print ............................................................................ 296
Preventing Unauthorized Use .......................................................................................................................... 297
Restricting Use of Remote UI ........................................................................................................................ 298
Preventing Connection to Computer via USB Port ........................................................................................ 301
Conguring LPD, RAW, or WSD ..................................................................................................................... 302
Disabling HTTP Communication ................................................................................................................... 304
Restricting Use of the Control Panel (Black and White LCD Model) ............................................................... 305
Applying a Security Policy ................................................................................................................................. 306
Security Policy Items ..................................................................................................................................... 308
Security
247
Security
9665-04R
This machine is an information de
vice that uses communication functions and handles various data. Therefore, it is
important to provide measures to prevent unauthorized access when using the machine in a network environment
and measures against security risks such as leaking information.
This machine is equipped with various functions and settings to reduce these threats and vulnerabilities. Congure the
settings and use them appropriately according to your usage environment and conditions for safer operation of the
machine.
Creating an Administrator System
Use an administrator account to manage the machine and congure the settings. Operate the machine using
a system in which only a specic administrator(s) knows the ID and PIN.
Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 249)
Managing Users and Gr
oups
Managing the users and groups that use the machine and performing authentication of its use can prevent
operation by third parties and unauthorized access.
Authenticating Users and Managing Groups(P. 251)
Network Settings
Applying the network security settings accor
ding to the usage environment can reduce the threat of
unauthorized access and eavesdropping.
Protecting the Network(P. 260)
Managing Usage Status
Using a PIN and setting usage r
estrictions can help prevent unauthorized use of Remote UI. Implementing
measures that include operations according to usage status of the machine can improve security.
Preventing Leaking Information(P. 291)
Preventing Unauthorized Use(P. 297)
Integr
ated Management Using a Security Policy
Applying a security policy that exists for other devices to this machine can allow for sharing of the
information security level within your organization.
Applying a Security Policy(P. 306)
Security
248
Setting the Department ID and PIN for the
Administr
ator
9665-04S
Set the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN to cr
eate an administrator account.
By creating an administrator account, only those users who know these credentials can log in to System Manager
Mode to view and change important settings.
System Manager ID and PIN(P. 9)
This section describes ho
w to congure the settings using the control panel.
You can also congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer after the System Manager ID and PIN have been
set on the machine.
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 315)
Administr
ator privileges are required.
Touch Panel Model(P. 249)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 249)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Management Settings] [User Management] [System Manager Information
Settings].
➠ The [System Manager Information Settings] screen is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the currently set System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].
3
Press [System Manager ID and PIN], enter the System Manager ID, and press [Apply].
Specify any number. You cannot set a System Manager ID consisting of all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."
4
Enter the System Manager PIN, and press [Apply].
Specify any number other than "7654321." You cannot set a PIN consisting of all zeros, such as "00" or
"0000000."
5
Enter the PIN again, and press [Apply].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
◼ Black and White LCD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press
. [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Management Settings]
[User Management] [System Manager
Information Settings] .
Security
249
➠ The [Sys. Manager Info Set.] scr
een is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the currently set System Manager ID and PIN, and then press
.
3
Press [System Manager ID and PIN]
enter the System Manager ID .
Specify any number. You cannot set a System Manager ID consisting of all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."
4
Enter the System Manager PIN, and press .
Specify any number other than "7654321." You cannot set a PIN consisting of all zeros, such as "00" or
"0000000."
5
Enter the PIN again, and press .
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
● Do not for
get the System Manager ID and PIN. If you forget your System Manager ID and PIN, contact your
dealer or service representative.
If the Problem Persists(P. 559)
Setting the System Manager Information
● On the [System Manager Information Settings] scr
een, press [System Manager Name] to set the name of the
system manager.
● You can also congure the e-mail address and other system manager information by using Remote UI from
a computer.
- The set information is displayed in [Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Device Information] of Remote UI.
Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI(P. 321)
-
The set e-mail address becomes the destination that is selected by clicking [Mail to System Manager] on
the Portal page of Remote UI.
Portal Page of Remote UI(P. 319)
Clearing the System Manager ID and PIN Settings
● Clear the enter
ed values of the System Manager ID and PIN, and then click [Apply] with the elds left empty.
Security
250
Authenticating Users and Managing Groups
9665-04U
Managing the users and gr
oups that use the machine can prevent operation by third parties and unauthorized access.
Department ID Management
Use Department ID Management to manage users for all functions of the machine. Only users who know the
Department ID and PIN can use the machine. It is also possible to track usage of the machine by Department
ID to help with managing costs.
Authenticating Users and Managing Groups with Department ID (Department ID Management)
(P
. 252)
Security
251
Authenticating Users and Managing Groups with
Department ID (Department ID Management)
9665-04W
Department ID Management is a function for managing users and gr
oups by allocating a Department ID to each user
or group.
When using Department ID Management, it is recommended to create an administrator account and a system for
management and operation by a specic user.
What You Can Do with Department ID Management(P. 252)
Operation Examples(P. 252)
Department ID Management Procedure(P. 253)
What You Can Do with Department ID Management
By using Department ID Management, you can do the following:
Enhance Security
● Set a PIN for Department ID to require authentication by entering the Department ID and PIN when a user
logs in.
● Restrict operations for an unknown Department ID.
Monitor Device Usage and Manage Costs
● Tally and keep track of the number of printed pages by Department ID.
● Set the maximum number of pages that can be printed by Department ID to control the number of sheets
of paper that can be used.
● Restrict the functions of the machine by Department ID.
Operation Examples
Assign Department IDs to users and groups according to usage environment and purpose. In addition, setting a PIN
to a Department ID can prevent unauthorized access and enable stricter management.
Example 1: Managing individual users by assigning them each a Department ID
Use this method to manage individual users by assigning them each a separate Department ID.
This is useful when ther
e are few people who use the machine and you want to limit the number of pages to be
printed and function access for each user.
Users log in with their own Department ID.
Example 2: Managing users as a group
Use this method to manage multiple users in a group by assigning each group a separate Department ID.
This is useful when ther
e are many people or groups that use the machine, such as oce departments and
school classes.
Security
252
Users log in with the Department ID of the group to which they belong.
Department ID Management Procedure
T
o use Department ID Management, follow the procedure below.
Administrator privileges are required.
Step 1
Set up Department ID Management.
Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 249)
Registering a Department ID and PIN(P. 254)
Step 2
Start Department ID Management.
Restrict oper
ations for unknown Department IDs, as needed.
Enabling Department ID Management(P. 256)
Step 3
Set the Department ID and PIN on each computer using the machine.
Setting the Department ID and PIN on a Computer(P. 257)
Step 4
Perform Department ID Management.
Conrming Usage b
y Department ID(P. 259)
Security
253
Registering a Department ID and PIN
9665-04X
Register the Department ID used b
y a group or user to be managed.
To perform authentication at login, set a PIN.
Limit the number of pages that can be printed and usable functions for each Department ID, as needed.
This section describes how to register a Department ID and PIN using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to register this
information.
[Department ID Management](P. 423)
Administr
ator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [User Management] [Department ID Management].
➠ The [Department ID Management] scr
een is displayed.
4
Click [Register New Department].
➠ The [Register Ne
w Department] screen is displayed.
5
In [New Department], set the Department ID and PIN.
● Enter numbers in [Department ID].
● T
o set a PIN, select the [Set PIN] checkbox, and enter the same number in [PIN] and [Conrm].
* You cannot set a Department ID or PIN consisting of all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."
6
Congure [Restrict Functions] as needed.
● T
o limit the number of pages that can be printed, select the desired item and enter the maximum number of
pages in [Number of Pages].
● To restrict the usable functions, select the items you want to restrict.
7
Click [OK].
➠ The r
egistered Department ID is added to [Department ID Page Total] on the [Department ID
Management] screen.
8
Log out from Remote UI.
Security
254
Editing a Registered Department ID
● T
o edit the registered information, click the Department ID you want to edit in [Department ID Page Total]
on the [Department ID Management] screen.
Security
255
Enabling Department ID Management
9665-04Y
After r
egistering a Department ID, congure the settings to enable Department ID Management. Once Department ID
Management is started, a login screen appears when operating the machine.
By default, printing from a computer can be operated without having to log in.
You can also restrict the operation as needed.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to congure the
settings.
[Department ID Management](P. 423)
Administr
ator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [User Management] [Department ID Management] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Department ID Management] scr
een is displayed.
4
Select the [Department ID Management] checkbox.
5
To restrict printing from a computer with an unknown Department ID, clear the
item.
Clear the [Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs] checkbox.
*
When this checkbo
x is cleared, you must set the Department ID on the driver to be able to print or send
faxes from a computer.
Setting the Department ID and PIN on a Computer(P. 257)
6
Click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
7
Log out from Remote UI.
Security
256
Setting the Department ID and PIN on a Computer
9665-050
When r
estricting printing from a computer with an unknown Department ID, you must set the Department ID and PIN
on each computer using the machine. If you want to include printing from a computer in the usage for each
Department ID even when these are not restricted, set the Department ID and PIN for each computer.
When Using Windows(P. 257)
When Using macOS(P. 258)
◼ When Using Windo
ws
Administrator privileges are required on each computer.
1
Log on to the computer using an administrator account.
2
Click [
] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].
➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr
een is displayed.
3
Click the driver of the machine
[Manage] [Printer properties].
➠ The driver pr
operties screen is displayed.
4
On the [Device Settings] tab, set [User Management] to [Department ID
Management].
5
Click [Settings] at the bottom right.
➠ The [Department ID/PIN Settings] scr
een is displayed.
6
Set the Department ID and PIN.
● To set a PIN, select the [Allow PIN Settings] checkbox, and enter a PIN.
● Click [Verify] to conrm that the Department ID and PIN have been entered correctly.
* This is not available when the machine is connected to the computer via the USB or Web Services on
Devices (WSD) port.
7
Set the authentication process and applicable range, as needed.
Conrming the Department ID and PIN when printing
Select the [Conrm Department ID/PIN When Printing] checkbo
xes.
When the machine is connected to the computer via the USB or WSD port
Select the [Authenticate Department ID/PIN at De
vice] checkbox.
Security
257
8
Click [OK]
[OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
◼ When Using macOS
1
Click [
] [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
➠ The [Printers & Scanners] scr
een is displayed.
2
Select the machine, and click [Options & Supplies].
3
On the [Options] tab, select the [Department ID Management] checkbox, and click
[OK].
4
On the driver setting screen, set the Department ID and PIN.
You must set the Department ID and PIN each time you print.
1
Display the printing dialog box, and select the printer driver of the machine.
Printing from a
Computer(P
. 199)
2
From the print options pop-up menu, select [Special Features].
If print options are not displayed, click [Show Details] in the printing dialog box.
3
Select the [Use Department ID Management] checkbox, and click [Settings].
➠ The [Department ID/PIN Settings] screen is displayed.
4
Enter the Department ID and PIN.
5
Set the authentication process and applicable range, as needed.
Conrming the Department ID and PIN when printing
Select the [Conrm Department ID/PIN When Printing] checkbo
x.
6
Click [OK].
Security
258
Conrming Usage b
y Department ID
9665-051
Y
ou can view the number of pages printed for each Department ID when Department ID Management is enabled.
This section describes how to view this information using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to view this
information.
[Department ID Management](P. 423)
Administr
ator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [User Management]
[Department ID Management].
➠ The [Department ID Management] scr
een is displayed.
4
In [Department ID Page Total], view the usage.
Resetting the count for a specic Department ID only
For the Department ID with the count to r
eset, click [Clear Count]
[OK].
Resetting the count for All Department IDs
Click [Clear All Counts]
[OK].
5
Log out from Remote UI after viewing the usage.
Security
259
Protecting the Network
9665-052
Connecting the machine to a network allo
ws you link it to computers and mobile devices for more convenient
operations. However, this also creates risks of unauthorized access and eavesdropping over the network.
By conguring the security settings according to your network environment, you can reduce these risks to ensure
safer use of the machine.
Filtering Using the Firewall Settings
Allows communications only with devices that have a specic IP address or MAC address to prevent
unauthorized access.
Setting the Firewall(P. 261)
Port Contr
ol
If the port number being used by a communicating device, such as a computer or server, is changed, change
the setting on the machine too. In addition, if it is clear that there is an unneeded protocol, use of the
protocol is prohibited on the machine and that port is closed to prevent intrusion from the outside.
Changing the Port Number(P. 264)
Using a Pr
oxy Server
Using a proxy server to connect the machine to a network not only facilitates managing communication with
external networks but blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced
security.
Using a Proxy(P. 265)
Encryption of Communication Using TLS
Y
ou can use TLS to encrypt communication when using Remote UI. This reduces the risks of data
eavesdropping and tampering during communication.
Using TLS(P. 267)
Encryption of Communication Using IPSec
Use Internet Pr
otocol Security (IPSec) to encrypt data at the IP protocol level. This reduces the risk of data
eavesdropping and tampering during communication without relying on an application or network
conguration.
Using IPSec(P. 269)
Using the Machine in a Network with IEEE 802.1X Authentication
When connecting the machine to a network that uses IEEE 802.1X authentication, you must congure the
settings on the machine such as the authentication method managed by the authentication server.
Using IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
Managing and Verifying the Key and Certicate
You can generate a key and certicate used to encrypt communication and register a key and certicate
obtained from a certication authority. By conguring the settings to check the revocation status of a
certicate (using OCSP), you can check to see if a certicate received from a certication authority has been
revoked.
Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate(P
. 275)
◼ See Also
For the network settings at setup, see the following.
Conguring Your Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 80)
Security
260
Setting the Firewall
9665-053
Set up the pack
et-ltering rewall to prevent unauthorized access.
First, as a prerequisite, set whether to allow or block communication with other devices. Next, specify the IP addresses
or MAC addresses of devices you want to block or allow as exceptions.
For the number of addresses that can be specied and the protocols whose communication can be restricted, see the
rewall specications.
Firewall(P. 35)
Setting IP Address Filtering(P. 261)
Setting MAC Address Filtering(P. 262)
● MA
C address ltering is not available when connecting the machine to a wireless LAN.
● Multicast and broadcast addresses are not restricted even when the setting is congured to block the
sending of data from the machine to other devices.
Setting IP Address Filtering
Set IPv4 addr
ess ltering or IPv6 address ltering according to your usage environment.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.
However, the control panel can only be used to enable or disable the lter.
[Firewall Settings](P. 359)
Administr
ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
● If you set an incorr
ect IP address, you will no longer be able to access Remote UI. If this happens, use the
control panel to disable the rewall settings, and then use Remote UI to set the IP address again.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings]
[Firewall Settings].
➠ The [Fir
ewall Settings] screen is displayed.
4
Click [Edit] for the IP address send or receive lter.
● T
o restrict sending of data from the machine to other devices, click [Edit] for the send lter.
● To restrict receiving of data from other devices, click [Edit] for the receive lter.
Security
261
5
Select the [Use Filter] checkbox.
➠ The IP addr
ess is enabled.
6
In [Default Policy], set the ltering pr
erequisites.
As a ltering pr
erequisite, select whether to allow or block communication with other devices.
7
Register [Exception Addresses].
● In [Addr
ess to Register], enter an IP address, and then click [Add].
● You can also specify a range of IP addresses by using a hyphen (-) or prex length.
Input example:
● One IPv4 address
192.168.0.10
● One IPv6 address
fe80::10
● Specifying a range
192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
192.168.0.32/27
fe80::1234/64
8
Click [OK].
9
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Setting MAC Address Filtering
This section describes ho
w to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings. You
cannot use the control panel to congure some of the settings.
[Firewall Settings](P. 359)
Administr
ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
● If you set an incorr
ect MAC address, you will no longer be able to access Remote UI. If this happens, use the
control panel to disable the rewall settings, and then use Remote UI to set the MAC address again.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
Security
262
3
Click [Network Settings]
[Firewall Settings].
➠ The [Fir
ewall Settings] screen is displayed.
4
Click [Edit] for the MAC address send or receive lter.
● To restrict sending of data from the machine to other devices, click [Edit] for the send lter.
● To restrict receiving of data from other devices, click [Edit] for the receive lter.
5
Select the [Use Filter] checkbox.
➠ The MA
C address is enabled.
6
In [Default Policy], set the ltering pr
erequisites.
As a ltering pr
erequisite, select whether to allow or block communication with other devices.
7
Register [Exception Addresses].
● In [Addr
ess to Register], enter a MAC address, and then click [Add].
● Enter MAC addresses without separating with hyphens (-) or colons (:).
Input example:
123A456B789C
8
Click [OK].
9
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Security
263
Changing the Port Number
9665-054
T
ypically, conventional port numbers are used for major protocols, but these port numbers may be changed to
enhance security. As the port numbers must be the same on communicating devices, such as a computer or server,
when the port number is changed, the setting on the machine also needs to be changed.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.
[Port Number Settings](P. 372)
Administr
ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings] [Port Number Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Port Number Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Change the port number of the protocol, and click [OK].
5
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Protocol Settings
● For the protocol settings and settings of the functions using the protocol, see the following:
LPD/RAW/WSD Conguring LPD
, RAW, or WSD(P. 302)
HTTP
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 304)
POP3 Preparing to Receive and Print I-Faxes(P. 197)
Multicast Disco
very
Conguring SLP Communication
(P. 92)
SNMP
Conguring SNMP(P
. 87)
Changing the Port Number of the Proxy Server
● To change the port number of the proxy server, see the following:
Using a Proxy(P. 265)
Changing the Port Number of the Printer Driver (Windo
ws)
● When the port number of the print protocol (LPD or RAW) is changed on the machine, change the port
number setting on the computer too.
Conguring a Printer Port (Windo
ws)(P. 185)
Security
264
Using a Proxy
9665-055
Using a pr
oxy server to connect to a network not only facilitates managing communications with external networks
but blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security.
Congure these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to congure the
settings.
Administrator privileges are required.
Required Preparations
● Pr
epare the address, port number, and authentication information of the proxy server.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings]
[Proxy Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Pr
oxy Settings] screen is displayed.
4
Select the [Use Proxy] checkbox.
5
Enter the address and port number of the proxy server.
● In [HT
TP Proxy Server Address], enter the IP address and host name.
● In [HTTP Proxy Server Port Number], enter the port number.
6
Set the applicable range and authentication information according to your usage
envir
onment.
When using a proxy server also specied for communication with de
vices on the same
domain
Select the [Use Proxy within Same Domain] checkbox.
When authentication is required to connect to a proxy server
Select the [Use Pr
oxy Authentication] checkbox, and enter the user name to be used for authentication using
single-byte alphanumeric characters.
To set a password to use for authentication, select the [Set/Change Password] checkbox, and enter the
password using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
7
Click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Security
265
8
Log out from Remote UI.
Security
266
Using TLS
9665-056
T
ransport Layer Security (TLS) is a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over the network. Encrypting
communication with TLS when using Remote UI reduces the risks of data eavesdropping and tampering during
communication.
To use TLS encrypted communication for Remote UI, specify the key and certicate (server certicate) you want to use,
and then enable TLS on Remote UI.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to congure the
settings. However, the control panel can only be used to enable or disable TLS on Remote UI.
[Remote UI] or [Use
Remote UI](P
. 430)
Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
Required Preparations
● Pr
epare the key and certicate to use for TLS encrypted communication.
Managing and Verifying a Key
and Certicate(P
. 275)
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
In [Network Settings], click [TLS Settings].
➠ The [TLS Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Specify the key and certicate to use for TLS encrypted communication.
1
In [Key and Certicate Settings], click [Ke
y and Certicate].
➠ The [Key and Certicate Settings] screen is displayed.
2
To the right of the key and certicate to use, click [Register Default Ke
y].
● When you click the key name (or certicate icon), the certicate details appear.
● On the certicate details screen, click [Verify Certicate] to verify that the certicate is valid.
5
Set the TLS version and algorithm.
1
Click [TLS Details]
[Edit].
➠ The [Edit TLS Details] scr
een is displayed.
2
Set the usable version and algorithm, and click [OK].
Some combinations of versions and algorithms cannot be used. For the supported combinations of
versions and algorithms, see the TLS specications.
TLS(P. 38)
[Allo
wed Versions]
Security
267
Specify the maximum and minimum versions of TLS.
[Algorithm Settings]
Select the checkbo
x of the algorithm to use for TLS.
6
Enable TLS on Remote UI.
1
Click [License/Other]
[Remote UI Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Remote UI Settings] scr
een is displayed.
2
Select the [Use TLS] checkbox, and click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
When a Warning Message Appears at Remote UI Startup
● A warning message about the security certicate may appear when starting up Remote UI with TLS enabled.
If ther
e are no problems with the certicate or TLS settings, you can continue operations.
Using TLS to Encrypt Received I-Faxes
● If the POP3 server support TLS, TLS can be used for communication with the server.
Preparing to Receive
and Print I-Faxes(P. 197)
Security
268
Using IPSec
9665-057
Use IP Security Pr
otocol (IPSec) to prevent eavesdropping and tampering of IP packets sent and received over an IP
network. This performs encryption at the IP protocol level to ensure security without relying on an application or
network conguration.
IPSec Applicable Conditions and Supported Modes(P. 269)
IPSec Policy Congur
ation(P. 269)
Setting IPSec(P. 269)
IPSec Applicable Conditions and Supported Modes
Packets where IPSec does not apply
● Packets specifying a loopback, multicast, or broadcast address
● IKE packets sent from UDP port 500
● ICMPv6 Neighbor Solicitation and Neighbor Advertisement packets
Operation mode of key exchange protocol (IKE mode)
The IKE mode supported by the machine is only the main mode that is used to encrypt packets. The non-
encrypting aggressive mode is not supported.
Communication mode
The communication mode supported by the machine is only the transport mode, which encrypts only the
part excluding the IP header. Tunnel mode, which encrypts the entire IP packet, is not supported.
Using IPSec together with IP address ltering
The IP address lter settings are applied rst. Setting the Firewall(P. 261)
IPSec Policy Congur
ation
To perform IPSec communication on the machine, you must create an IPSec policy that includes the applicable range
and algorithms for authentication and encryption. The policy is mainly made up of the following items.
Selector
Specify which IP packets to apply IPSec communication. In addition to specifying the IP address of the
machine and communicating devices, you can also specify their port numbers.
IKE
The key exchange protocol supports Internet Key Exchange Version 1 (IKEv1). For the authentication method,
select the pre-shared key method or digital signature method.
● Pre-shared Key Method:
This authentication method uses a common key word, called Shared Key, for communication between the
machine and other devices.
● Digital Signature Method
The machine and the other devices authenticate each other by mutually verifying their digital signatures.
ESP/AH
Specify the settings for ESP/AH, which is the protocol used for IPSec communication. ESP and AH can be used
at the same time. Use Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) for even greater security.
Setting IPSec
Enable the use of IPSec, and then create and register the IPSec policy. If multiple policies have been created, specify
the order in which they are applied.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
Security
269
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congur
e the settings.
However, the control panel can only be used to enable or disable IPSec.
[Use IPSec](P. 372)
Administr
ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
Required Preparations
● Connect the machine dir
ectly to a computer on the same virtual private network (VPN) as the machine.
Conrm the operation conditions, and nish the settings on the computer in advance.
IPSec(P. 35)
● Pr
epare the following according to the IKE authentication method:
- When using the pre-shared key method, enable TLS for Remote UI communication.
Using TLS(P. 267)
-
When using the digital signature method, prepare the key and certicate to use.
Managing and
V
erifying a Key and Certicate(P. 275)
● When using PFS, check that PFS is enabled on the communicating device.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings]
[IPSec Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit IPSec Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Select the [Use IPSec] checkbox, and click [OK].
To only receive packets that meet the policy, clear the [Receive Non-Policy Packets] checkbox.
5
Click [Register New Policy].
➠ The [Register Ne
w IPSec Policy] screen is displayed.
6
In [Policy Settings], enter the policy name, and select the [Enable Policy] checkbox.
For the policy name, enter a name to identify the policy using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
7
In [Selector Settings], set the selector.
[Local Address Settings]
Select the type of IP addr
ess of the machine to which the policy is applied.
● To apply IPSec to all IP packets, select [All IP Addresses].
● To apply IPSec to IP packets sent and received using an IPv4 or IPv6 address, select [IPv4 Address] or [IPv6
Address].
[Remote Address Settings]
Select the type of IP address of the communicating device to which the policy is applied.
● To apply IPSec to all IP packets, select [All IP Addresses].
● To apply IPSec to IP packets sent and received using an IPv4 or IPv6 address, select [All IPv4 Addresses] or
[All IPv6 Addresses].
Security
270
● T
o specify an IPv4 or IPv6 address to which IPSec is applied, select [IPv4 Manual Settings] or [IPv6 Manual
Settings].
[Addresses to Set Manually]
When [IPv4 Manual Settings] or [IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected, enter the IP address. You can also
specify a range of IP addresses by using a hyphen (-).
Input example:
● One IPv4 address
192.168.0.10
● One IPv6 address
fe80::10
● Range specication
192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
[Subnet Settings]
When [IPv4 Manual Settings] is selected, you can use a subnet mask to specify the range of IPv4
addresses.
Input example:
255.255.255.240
[Prex Length]
When [IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected, you can use a prex length to specify the range of IPv6
addresses. Enter the prex length with a range of 0 to 128.
[Port Settings]
Set the port to which IPSec is applied in [Local Port] on the machine and [Remote Port] on the
communicating device.
● To apply IPSec to all port numbers, select [All Ports].
● To apply IPSec to a specic protocol such as HTTP or WSD, select [Single Port], and enter the port number
of the protocol.
8
In [IKE Settings], set IKE.
[IKE Mode]
The machine only supports the main mode.
[Authentication Method]
Select the authentication method of the machine.
● When
[Pre-Shared Key Method] is selected, click [Shared Key Settings]
enter
the string to use as the
shared key using single-byte alphanumeric characters
click [OK].
● When
[Digital Signature Method] is selected, click [Key and Certicate]
[Register Default Key] to the right
of the k
ey and certicate to use.
[Validity]
Enter the valid period of IKE SA (ISAKMP SA) to use as the control communication path in minutes.
[Authentication/Encryption Algorithm]
Select the algorithm to use for key exchange.
9
In [IPSec Network Settings], congur
e the IPSec network settings.
[Use PFS]
Select this checkbo
x to congure PFS for the session key.
[Validity]
Security
271
Specify the valid period of IPSec SA to use as the data communication path by time, size, or both.
● When the [Specify b
y Time] checkbox is selected, enter the valid period in minutes.
● When the [Specify by Size] checkbox is selected, enter the valid period in megabytes.
● When both are selected, the item whose specied value is reached rst is applied.
[Authentication/Encryption Algorithm]
Select this checkbox according to the IPSec header (ESP and AH) to be used and its algorithm.
[ESP Authentication]
When [ESP] is selected, select the authentication algorithm. To perform ESP authentication, select [SHA1].
Otherwise, select [Do Not Use].
[ESP Encryption]
When [ESP] is selected, select the encryption algorithm. If you do not want to specify the algorithm, select
[NULL]. To disable encryption, select [Do Not Use].
[Connection Mode]
The machine only supports the transport mode.
10
Click [OK].
➠ The ne
wly registered policy is added to [Registered IPSec Policies] on the [IPSec Settings] screen.
When multiple policies are registered
Click [Up] or [Do
wn] to the right of the policy name to set the priority. Higher level policies have priority in
application to IPSec communication.
11
Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Editing Registered Policies
● T
o edit the registered information, click the policy name you want to edit in [Registered IPSec Policies] on the
[IPSec Settings] screen.
Security
272
Using IEEE 802.1X
9665-058
In a network envir
onment with IEEE 802.1X authentication, only client devices (supplicants) authenticated by the
authentication server (RADIUS server) are allowed to connect to the network via the LAN switch (authenticator),
thereby blocking unauthorized access. When connecting the machine to a network that uses IEEE 802.1X
authentication, you must congure the settings on the machine such as the authentication method managed by the
authentication server.
IEEE 802.1X Authentication Methods(P. 273)
Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
IEEE 802.1X Authentication Methods
The follo
wing IEEE 802.1X authentication methods are supported:
TLS
The machine and authentication server authenticate each other by mutually verifying their certicates. This
cannot be used together with another authentication method.
TTLS
This authentication method uses a user name and password for machine authentication and a CA certicate
for the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol, and TTLS can be
used together with PEAP.
PEAP
The required settings are almost the same as those for TTLS, with MSCHAPv2 used as the internal protocol.
Setting IEEE 802.1X
First enable IEEE 802.1X, and then set the authentication method.
This section describes ho
w to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.
However, the control panel can only be used to enable or disable IEEE 802.1X.
[Use IEEE 802.1X] or [IEEE 802.1X
Settings](P
. 358)
Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
Required Preparations
● When using TLS as the authentication method, pr
epare the key and certicate issued by the certicate
authority and used for authentication of the machine. Managing and Verifying a Key and
Certicate(P. 275)
* A preinstalled CA certicate or a CA certicate installed from Remote UI is used for server authentication.
● When using TTLS or PEAP as the authentication method, TLS-encrypt communication using Remote UI.
Using TLS(P. 267)
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings] [IEEE 802.1X Settings] [Edit].
Security
273
➠ The [Edit IEEE 802.1X Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] checkbox, and enter the login name.
For the login name, enter a name to identify the user (EAP Identity) using single-byte alphanumeric
char
acters.
When verifying the certicate of an authentication server
Select the [V
erify Authentication Server Certicate] checkbox.
When verifying the common name of the certicate, select the [Verify Authentication Server Name] checkbox,
and enter the name of the authentication server to which the user is registered.
5
Congure the settings accor
ding to the authentication method to be used.
When using TLS
1
Select the [Use TLS] checkbox.
2
In [Name of Key to Use], click [Key and Certicate].
➠ The [Ke
y and Certicate Settings] screen is displayed.
3
To the right of the key and certicate to use, click [Register Default Ke
y].
● Click the key name (or certicate icon) to display the certicate details.
● On the certicate details screen, click [Verify Certicate] to verify that the certicate is valid.
When using TTLS or PEAP
1
Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] checkbox.
When using T
TLS, select the internal protocol to be used.
2
Use [Use Login Name as User Name] to specify whether to use the login name of IEEE 802.1X
authentication for the user name.
3
In [User Name/Password Settings], click [Change User Name/Password].
➠ The [Change User Name/Password] screen is displayed.
4
Set the user name and password, and select the [OK] checkbox.
● Enter the user name using single-b
yte alphanumeric characters.
● To set a password, select the [Change Password] checkbox, and enter the same password in both
[Password] and [Conrm] using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
6
Click [OK].
7
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Security
274
Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate
9665-059
T
o encrypt communication with TLS when using Remote UI, or to use TLS as the IEEE 802.1X authentication method, a
key and certicate are required In addition, depending on the communicating device, encrypted communication using
a specied certicate may be requested, thereby requiring a key and certicate.
Managing a Key and Certicate
You can prepare a key and certicate using the follo
wing methods:
Generating a Key and Certicate on the Machine
Generate the key and certicate required for TLS on the machine. You can immediately communicate where
self-signed certicates are allowed.
Generating a Key and Certicate(P
. 276)
Registering a Certicate Issued by a Certicate Authority in a Self-generated Key
When a key is generated on the machine, generate a Certicate Signing Request (CSR), have the certicate
authority issue a certicate, and then register that certicate in the key.
Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) and Obtaining and Registering a
Certicate(P
. 278)
Registering a Certicate Obtained from an SCEP Server to a Self-generated Key
When generating a key on the machine, request a Simple Certicate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) server to
issue a certicate, and then register the obtained certicate. You can also request that a certicate be issued
at a specied date and time.
Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate fr
om an SCEP Server(P. 281)
Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Obtained from an Issuing Authority
Register a key and certicate obtained from an issuing authority or a CA certicate issued by a certicate
authority, without self-generating the key and certicate. You can use a digital certicate that matches the
communicating device and authentication level.
Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Obtained fr
om an Issuing Authority(P. 288)
Verifying a Certicate
You can congur
e the settings to verify the validity of a certicate that the machine receives from a certicate
authority, using the Online Certicate Status Protocol (OCSP).
Verifying a Received Certicate with OCSP(P. 290)
Security
275
Generating a Key and Certicate
9665-05A
Gener
ate the key and certicate required for TLS-encrypted communication on the machine. A self-signed certicate is
used for the self-generated key.
For the algorithm of the keys and certicates that can be generated with this machine, see the specications of the
self-generated key and self-signed certicate.
Keys and Certicates(P
. 36)
Generate a key and certicate using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to generate a key
and certicate.
Administrator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings] [Generate Key].
➠ The [Gener
ate Key] screen is displayed.
4
Select [Network Communication], and click [OK].
➠ The [Gener
ate Network Communication Key] screen is displayed.
5
In [Key Settings], enter the name of the key, and select the signature and key
algorithm.
● Enter the k
ey name using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
● For the key algorithm, select [RSA] or [ECDSA], and select the key length from the pulldown menu. The longer
the key length, the better the security, but this slows down communication processing.
6
In [Certicate Settings], set the certicate information.
[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]/[Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the start and end dates of the certicate validity period.
[Country/Region]
Select [Select Country/Region], and then select the country or r
egion from the pulldown menu, or select
[Enter Internet Country Code], and enter the country code.
[State]/[City]/[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter the items as needed using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
[Common Name]
Enter the name of the certicate subject as needed using single-byte alphanumeric characters. This
corresponds to the Common Name (CN).
7
Click [OK].
Security
276
➠ The gener
ated key and certicate are added to [Registered Key and Certicate] on the [Key and Certicate
Settings] screen.
8
Log out from Remote UI.
Viewing and Verifying Detailed Information of a Generated Certicate
● When you click the k
ey name (or certicate icon) in [Registered Key and Certicate] on the [Key and
Certicate Settings] screen, the certicate details appear.
● On the certicate details screen, click [Verify Certicate] to verify that the certicate is valid.
When the Key and Certicate Cannot Be Deleted
● You cannot delete a key and certicate being used. Disable the function being used, or delete these after
switching to another key and certicate.
Security
277
Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)
and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate
9665-05C
As a certicate gener
ated on the machine does not have a signature from a certicate authority, the machine may not
be able to communicate depending on the communicating device. In this case, registering a signed certicate issued
by a certicate authority to the key enables communication even with a self-generated key.
For the certicate authority to issue a signed certicate, you must make a request attached with a Certicate Signing
Request (CSR). The machine generates a CSR at the same time it generates a key.
For more information about the keys that can be generated by the machine and the CSR algorithm, see self-generated
key and CSR specications.
Keys and Certicates(P
. 36)
Generating a Key and CSR(P. 278)
Registering a Certicate Issued b
y a Certicate Authority to a Key(P. 279)
Generating a Key and CSR
Generate a key and CSR using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to generate a key and
certicate.
Administrator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings] [Generate Key].
➠ The [Gener
ate Key] screen is displayed.
4
Select [Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)], and click [OK].
➠ The [Gener
ate Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)] screen is displayed.
5
In [Key Settings], enter the name of the key, and select the signature algorithm and
k
ey algorithm.
● Enter the k
ey name using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
● For the key algorithm, select [RSA] or [ECDSA], and select the key length from the pulldown menu. The longer
the key length, the better the security, but this slows down communication processing.
6
In [Certicate Signing Request (CSR) Settings], set the CSR information.
[Country/Region]
Select [Select Country/Region], and either select the country or r
egion from the pulldown menu, or select
[Enter Internet Country Code] and enter the country code.
[State]/[City]/[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Security
278
Enter the items as needed using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
[Common Name]
Enter the name of the certicate subject as needed using single-b
yte alphanumeric characters. This
corresponds to the Common Name (CN).
7
Click [OK].
➠ The [Ke
y and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) Details] screen is displayed.
8
Click [Store in File] to save the CSR le to a computer.
9
Log out from Remote UI.
10
Submit the application with CSR le attached to the certicate authority
.
● When the CSR is gener
ated, the key is registered to the machine, but it cannot be used until the certicate
issued by the certicate authority is registered.
Registering a Certicate Issued b
y a Certicate Authority to a Key
Register the certicate using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to register it.
Administrator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Device Management]
[Key and Certicate Settings].
➠ The [Ke
y and Certicate Settings] screen is displayed.
4
Click the key name (or certicate icon) to which to r
egister the certicate.
Security
279
➠ The [Ke
y and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) Details] screen is displayed.
5
Click [Register Certicate].
6
In [Specify File], click [Browse], and specify the le of the certicate issued b
y the
certicate authority.
7
Click [Register].
➠ The icon of the certicate displayed in [Register
ed Key and Certicate] on the [Key and Certicate Settings]
screen changes from [
] to [ ].
8
Log out from Remote UI.
Viewing and Verifying Detailed Information of a Registered Certicate
● Click the key name (or certicate icon) in [Registered Key and Certicate] on the [Key and Certicate Settings]
screen to display the certicate details.
● On the certicate details screen, click [Verify Certicate] to verify that the certicate is valid.
When the Key and Certicate Cannot Be Deleted
● You cannot delete a key and certicate being used. Disable the function being used, or delete these after
switching to another key and certicate.
Security
280
Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a
Certicate fr
om an SCEP Server
9665-05E
When gener
ating a key on the machine, you can request a Simple Certicate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) server that
manages certicates to issue a certicate. The certicate issued by an SCEP server is registered automatically to the
machine.
For information about the algorithm of the keys that can be generated with this machine and certicates that can be
requested to be issued, see the specications of the self-generated key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR).
Keys
and Certicates(P
. 36)
This machine supports Network Device Enrollment Service (NDES) in Windows Server 2008 R2, 2012 R2, and 2016 for
the SCEP server. Communication using HTTPS is not supported.
To obtain and register a certicate from an SCEP server, congure the settings for communicating with the SCEP
server, and then generate a key and request certicate issuance. You can also request certicate issuance at a
specied date and time.
Conguring the SCEP Server Communication Settings(P
. 281)
Generating a Key and Requesting Certicate Issuance
(P. 282)
Requesting Certicate Issuance at a Specied Date and Time(P
. 283)
Conguring the SCEP Server Communication Settings
Congure the communication settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to
congure the settings.
Administrator privileges are required.
Required Preparations
● Pr
epare the URL and port number of the SCEP server.
* Communication using HTTPS is not supported.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Device Management]
[Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)].
➠ The [Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)] scr
een is displayed.
4
In [Communication Settings], click [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Communication Settings] scr
een is displayed.
5
Set the SCEP server information.
[SCEP Server URL]
Security
281
Enter the URL of the connecting SCEP server.
[Port Number]
Enter the port number used to communicate with the SCEP server.
[Communication Timeout]
Enter the time fr
om search start to timeout in seconds.
6
Click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
7
Log out from Remote UI.
Generating a Key and Requesting Certicate Issuance
Congur
e the settings for generating a key and requesting the issuance of a certicate using Remote UI from a
computer. You cannot use the control panel to congure the settings.
Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted after obtaining a key.
* This method cannot be used to request issuance of a certicate when the setting for requesting issuance of a
certicate at a specied date and time is enabled.
Requesting Certicate Issuance at a Specied Date and
Time(P
. 283)
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Device Management]
[Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)]
[Certicate Issuance Request].
➠ The [Certicate Issuance Request] scr
een is displayed.
4
Set the items for a key and certicate.
[Key Name]
Enter the k
ey name using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the pulldown menu.
[Key Length (bit)]
Select the key length from the pulldown menu. The larger the value, the better the security, but this slows
down communication processing.
[Organization]
Enter the organization name using single-byte alphanumeric characters, as needed.
[Common Name]
Enter the name of the certicate subject using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
This is also called the Common Name (CN).
[Challenge Password]
Security
282
When the SCEP server has a password, enter the password for the request data used for the issuance request
using single-b
yte alphanumeric characters.
[Key Usage]
Select the usage of the generated key. If the usage is not decided, select [None].
5
Click [Issuance Request]
[OK].
➠ The r
equest to issue a certicate is sent to the SCEP server.
6
When the message that says a certicate is acquir
ed appears, click [Restart].
➠ The machine restarts, and the key and certicate are registered.
Viewing Issuance Request Status and Error Information
● Y
ou can view detailed information on the [Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)] screen.
If a certicate is not issued, an error is displayed in the certicate issuance request status. For details about
the message and how to resolve it, see the following:
If an Error Is Displayed in the Certicate Issuance Request Status(P. 286)
Viewing and Verifying Detailed Information of a Registered Certicate
● In [Settings/Registration] [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings] [Registered Key and
Certicate], click the key name (or certicate icon) to display the certicate details.
● On the certicate details screen, click [Verify Certicate] to verify that the certicate is valid.
When the Key and Certicate Cannot Be Deleted
● You cannot delete a key and certicate being used. Disable the function being used, or delete these after
switching to another key and certicate.
Requesting Certicate Issuance at a Specied Date and Time
The request for certicate issuance occurs at the specied date and time. You can also set the request for certicate
issuance to occur regularly.
Congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to congure the settings.
Administrator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Device Management]
[Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)].
➠ The [Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)] scr
een is displayed.
4
In [Settings for Certicate Issuance Auto Request], click [Edit].
Security
283
➠ The [Edit Settings for Certicate Issuance Auto Request] scr
een is displayed.
5
Select the [Enable Timer for Certicate Issuance Auto Request] checkbo
x, and enter
the start date and time to request issuance of a certicate.
6
Set other items at the time of issuance auto request, as needed.
[Auto Adjust Issuance Request Time]
To adjust the certicate issuance request time, select this checkbox.
The start time for issuing a certicate may be adjusted randomly by up to 10 minutes to reduce the load on
the SCEP server.
[Perform Polling When Communication Error Occurs or When Issuance Request Is Deferred]
Check the status of the SCEP server, such as when certicate issuance has been deferred. Select the checkbox
and enter the number of polling retries and interval.
* Polling is not performed and an error occurs in the following cases:
● When the machine has e
xceeded the limit of keys and certicates that can be registered
● When an error occurs in the obtained response data
● When an error occurs in the SCEP server
[Send Periodic Issuance Requests]
The request for certicate issuance occurs automatically and regularly. Select the checkbox and select the
issuance request interval from the pulldown menu.
Enabling this setting resets the start date and time to request issuance of a certicate.
[Automatically Restart Device After Acquiring Certicate]
To restart the machine after obtaining a certicate, select the checkbox.
[Delete Old Key and Certicate]
To overwrite the key and certicate with the same location where the key will be used, select the checkbox.
7
In [Settings for Key and Certicate T
o Be Issued], set the items for a key and
certicate.
[Key Name]
Enter the k
ey name using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the pulldown menu.
[Key Length (bit)]
Select the key length from the pulldown menu. The larger the value, the better the security, but this slows
down communication processing.
[Organization]
Enter the organization name using single-byte alphanumeric characters, as needed.
[Common Name]
Enter the name of the certicate subject using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
This is also called the Common Name (CN).
[Challenge Password]
When the SCEP server has a password, enter the password for the request data used for the issuance request
using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
[Key Usage]
Security
284
Select the the usage of the generated key. If the usage is not decided, select [None].
8
Click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
9
Log out from Remote UI.
Viewing Issuance Request Status and Error Information
● Y
ou can view detailed information on the [Settings for Certicate Issuance Request (SCEP)] screen.
If a certicate is not issued, an error is displayed in the certicate issuance request status. For details about
the message and how to resolve it, see the following:
If an Error Is Displayed in the Certicate Issuance Request Status(P. 286)
Viewing and Verifying Detailed Information of a Registered Certicate
● In [Settings/Registration] [Device Management] [Key and Certicate Settings] [Registered Key and
Certicate], click the key name (or certicate icon) to display the certicate details.
● On the certicate details screen, click [Verify Certicate] to verify that the certicate is valid.
When the Key and Certicate Cannot Be Deleted
● You cannot delete a key and certicate being used. Disable the function being used, or delete these after
switching to another key and certicate.
Security
285
If an Error Is Displayed in the Certicate Issuance
Request Status
9665-05F
If a certicate is not issued, an err
or is displayed in the certicate issuance request status. Select the message from the
list below, and check how to troubleshoot the problem.
Key and Certicate Registr
ation Limit Error(P. 286)
Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 0: Unrecognized or Unsupported Algorithm)(P. 286)
Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 1: CMS Message Integrity V
erication Failure)(P. 286)
Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 2: Forbidden or Unsupported Transaction)(P. 287)
Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 3: Excessive Time Difference Between CMS signingTime and
System Time)
(P. 287)
Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 4: No Certicate Identied That Matches Pr
ovided Criteria)
(P. 287)
Communication Error (TCP ERROR)(P. 287)
Communication Error (HTTP ERROR <HTTP status code>)(P. 287)
Deferred(P. 287)
● If the pr
oblem persists even after trying the troubleshooting methods, contact the SCEP server
administrator.
Key and Certicate Registr
ation Limit Error
The maximum number of keys and certicates that can be registered to the machine has been reached.
Delete unused keys and certicates.
Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 0: Unrecognized or
Unsupported Algorithm)
The algorithm of the certicate is unkno
wn or is not supported.
Set the [Signature Algorithm] and [Key Length (bit)] of the Certicate Issuance Request Correctly.
Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate fr
om an SCEP Server(P. 281)
Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 1: CMS Message Integrity
V
erication Failure)
Certicate integrity check (CMS message signature verication) failed.
Request Certicate Issuance Again.
Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate fr
om an SCEP Server(P. 281)
Security
286
Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 2: Forbidden or Unsupported
Transaction)
Communication with the SCEP server is not allowed or supported.
Set the Communication Settings of the SCEP Server Correctly.
Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate fr
om an SCEP Server(P. 281)
Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 3: Excessive Time Difference
Between CMS signingTime and System Time)
The time of the signingTime attribute in the authenticated attribute of CMS (PKCS#7) does not match the time of the
SCEP server.
Check the Date and Time Settings on the Machine.
If the settings are not correct, set the time zone, and then set the current date and time.
Request certicate issuance again.
Setting the Date and Time(P. 314)
Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate fr
om an SCEP Server(P. 281)
Communication Error (SCEP ERROR - Fail Info 4: No Certicate Identied That
Matches Pr
ovided Criteria)
Unable to identify if the certicate matches the standard.
Contact the SCEP Server Administrator.
Communication Error (TCP ERROR)
Connection to SCEP server failed or timed out.
Set the Communication Settings of the SCEP Server Corr
ectly.
Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate fr
om an SCEP Server(P. 281)
Communication Error (HTTP ERROR <HTTP status code>)
HT
TP error occurred.
Set the Communication Settings of the SCEP Server Correctly.
Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate fr
om an SCEP Server(P. 281)
Deferred
SCEP server r
eturned a deferred status.
Wait a Moment, and Request Certicate Issuance.
Generating a Key and Obtaining and Registering a Certicate fr
om an SCEP Server(P. 281)
Security
287
Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate
Obtained fr
om an Issuing Authority
9665-05H
Install and r
egister a key and certicate or CA certicate obtained from a digital certicate issuing authority to the
machine before starting to use them.
Register the key and certicate or CA certicate using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to
register these.
Administrator privileges are required.
Required Preparations
● Check the conditions of the k
ey and certicate or CA certicate usable with the machine.
Keys and
Certicates(P
. 36)
● When registering a key and certicate, check the password for the private key set in the le.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Device Management]
[Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate
Settings].
➠ The [Ke
y and Certicate Settings] screen or [CA Certicate Settings] screen is displayed.
4
Click [Register Key and Certicate] or [Register CA Certicate].
➠ The [Register Ke
y and Certicate] screen or [Register CA Certicate] screen is displayed.
5
Install the key and certicate le or CA certicate le.
1
Click [Install].
2
Click [Browse] in [Specify File], and specify the le to be installed.
3
Click [Start Installation].
➠ The installed le is added to [Installed Ke
y and Certicate] on the [Register Key and Certicate] screen
or [Installed CA Certicate] on the [Register CA Certicate] screen.
6
Registering the key and certicate or CA certicate.
When registering a key and certicate
1
To the right of the key and certicate le to r
egister, click [Register].
Security
288
➠ The [Enter Private Ke
y Password] screen is displayed.
2
Enter the key name password using single-byte alphanumeric characters, and click [OK].
➠ The r
egistered key and certicate are added to [Registered Key and Certicate] on the [Key and
Certicate Settings] screen.
When registering a CA certicate
T
o the right of the CA certicate le to register, click [Register].
➠ The registered CA certicate is added to [Registered CA Certicate] on the [CA Certicate Settings] screen.
7
Log out from Remote UI.
Viewing and Verifying Detailed Information of a Registered Certicate
● When you click the k
ey name (or certicate icon) in [Registered Key and Certicate] on the [Key and
Certicate Settings] screen, the certicate details appear.
● On the certicate details screen, click [Verify Certicate] to verify that the certicate is valid.
Viewing and Verifying Detailed Information of a Registered CA Certicate
● When you click the issued to location in [Registered CA Certicate] on the [CA Certicate Settings] screen, the
CA certicate details appear.
● On the CA certicate details screen, click [Verify Certicate] to verify that the CA certicate is valid.
When the Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Cannot Be Deleted
● You cannot delete a key and certicate being used. Disable the function being used, or delete these after
switching to another key and certicate.
● A preinstalled CA certicate cannot be deleted. If a preinstalled CA certicate is not required, click [Disable]
to the right of the CA certicate.
Security
289
Verifying a Received Certicate with OCSP
9665-05J
Online Certicate Status Pr
otocol (OCSP) is a protocol for inquiring to an OCSP responder (server that supports OCSP)
about the revocation status of a certicate received from a certicate authority.
You can congure the settings to verify the validity of a certicate that the machine receives from a certicate
authority, using the OCSP.
Congure these settings using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to congure the
settings.
Administrator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Device Management] [OCSP (Online Certicate Status Pr
otocol) Settings]
[Edit].
➠ The [Edit OCSP (Online Certicate Status Pr
otocol) Settings] screen is displayed.
4
Select the [Use OCSP (Online Certicate Status Pr
otocol)] checkbox.
5
Set the certicate verication le
vel and the OCSP responder.
[Certicate V
erication Level]
Set whether to validate the certicate even if its revocation status cannot be conrmed, such as when the
machine is unable to connect to an OCSP responder.
[OCSP Responder Settings]
Specify the URL of the OCSP responder.
[Custom URL]
When [Use Custom URL] or [Use Certicate URL (Use Custom URL If Certicate URL Cannot Be Retrieved)] is
selected, enter the URL of the OCSP responder.
[Communication Timeout]
Enter the time from search start to timeout in seconds.
6
Click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
7
Log out from Remote UI.
Security
290
Preventing Leaking Information
9665-05K
Leaving a printed document on the machine poses a risk of information leakage. In addition, while using memory
media and mobile de
vices is easy and convenient, these can lead to information theft.
You can take measures to prevent leaking information, according to the usage status of the function, to ensure safer
use of the machine.
Appropriately Restricting Functions
You can restrict access to part or all of a function using memory media and mobile devices.
Restricting Use of Memory Media(P. 292)
Restricting Use from a Mobile Device(P. 294)
Pr
eventing Unattended Printed Documents and Information Theft
You can store print data sent from a computer without printing them immediately.
Restricting Printing(P. 295)
Security
291
Restricting Use of Memory Media
9665-05L
USB memory de
vices and other memory media can be easy and convenient, but they can also lead to information
leakage. You can prohibit the use of memory media.
Preventing Use of Memory Media When Printing (Touch Panel Model)(P. 292)
Preventing All Use of Memory Media(P. 292)
● Even if you use this setting to r
estrict the use of memory media, a computer can still be connected to the
USB port on the back of the machine. To also restrict computer connections, see the following.
Preventing Connection to Computer via USB Port(P. 301)
Preventing Use of Memory Media When Printing (Touch Panel Model)
This section describes ho
w to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the settings.
[Memory Media Settings](P. 417)
Administr
ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration].
Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Access Files Settings]
[Memory Media Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Memory Media Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Clear the [Memory Media Print] checkbox, and click [OK].
5
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Preventing All Use of Memory Media
This section describes ho
w to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.
[USB Settings](P. 374)
Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
Security
292
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration].
Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [External Interface Settings]
[Edit].
➠ The [Edit External Interface Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Clear the [Use USB Storage Device] checkbox, and click [OK].
5
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Security
293
Restricting Use from a Mobile Device
9665-05R
The machine supports the Mopria
®
plugin, which is supported by various manufacturers.
Mopria
®
enables printing from any application, such as on a smartphone, or a device equipped with Chrome OS
without having to install a dedicated Canon plugin.
Printing from a mobile device can be easy and convenient, but it can also lead to information leakage. You can also
prohibit use of Mopria
®
.
Congure this setting using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to congure the setting.
Administrator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings]
[Mopria Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Mopria Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Clear the [Use Mopria] checkbox, and click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
5
Log out from Remote UI.
● When the Mopria
®
setting is enabled, the HT
TP, IPP printing, and mDNS (IPv4/IPv6) network settings are
also enabled.
-
[TCP/IP Settings](P. 363)
Security
294
Restricting Printing
9665-05S
Y
ou can require users to enter a PIN before printing. This can prevent not only unattended printed documents and
information theft, but also unneeded printing, thereby saving paper.
Restricting Printing from a Computer to Secure Print(P. 296)
◼ See Also
By using the Department ID Management function, you can r
estrict the number of pages that can be printed and the
print function for each Department ID. You can also restrict printing from an unknown Department ID.
Authenticating Users and Managing Groups with Department ID (Department ID Management)(P. 252)
Security
295
Restricting Printing from a Computer to Secure Print
9665-05U
With Secur
e Print, you can set a PIN to a document on the computer and send that document to the machine to be
printed. Printing is performed after that PIN is entered on the machine.
Restricting printing from a computer to Secure Print can prevent unattended printed documents and information
theft. You can also conrm the print data before printing to prevent unwanted printing.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congure the settings.
[Secure Print](P. 388)
Administr
ator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P. 319)
3
Click [Secure Print Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit Secur
e Print Settings] screen is displayed.
4
Check that the [Secure Print] checkbox is selected.
5
Select the [Restrict Printer Jobs] checkbox.
6
Click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
7
Log out from Remote UI.
● For details about printing with Secur
e Print and the time period that Secure Print data is saved, see the
following:
Printing a Document Secured with a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 204)
Changing the Time Period That Print Data with a PIN (Secure Data) Is Saved(P. 208)
Security
296
Preventing Unauthorized Use
9665-05W
The machine pr
ovides various settings to ensure ecient management and operation. While this information and the
settings provide convenience, they can also lead to information leakage and other security issues if the information
and settings can be accessed by anyone.
You can take measures to restrict access and disable functions according to the usage status of the function, to ensure
safer use of the machine.
Restricting Access to Information and Settings
Restricting users and operations accessing information and settings on the machine can help prevent
unauthorized use and protect condential information.
Restricting Use of Remote UI(P. 298)
Disabling Unused Functions
Y
ou can disable unused functions to prevent intrusion from the outside.
Preventing Connection to Computer via USB Port(P. 301)
Conguring LPD
, RAW, or WSD(P. 302)
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 304)
Restricting Use of the Control Panel (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 305)
◼ See Also
For details about the administr
ator account and how to manage users and groups with access to the machine, see the
following.
Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 249)
Authenticating Users and Managing Groups with Department ID (Department ID Management)(P. 252)
Security
297
Restricting Use of Remote UI
9665-05X
While Remote UI is convenient for oper
ating the machine from a computer, it also poses a risk of third-party access to
the machine.
You can congure the setting to require users to enter a PIN (Remote UI Access PIN) when using Remote UI to prevent
unauthorized access by a third party.
If you do not use Remote UI, it is recommended that you disable the function.
Setting the PIN to Use for Remote UI(P. 298)
Disabling Remote UI(P. 299)
Setting the PIN to Use for Remote UI
Y
ou can restrict the use of Remote UI to only those users who know the Remote UI Access PIN.
This setting is not required when using Department ID Management, as Department ID authentication is performed.
This section describes how to congure the settings using the control panel.
You can also congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer after the Remote UI Access PIN has been set on
the machine.
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 315)
Administr
ator privileges are required.
Touch Panel Model(P. 298)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 299)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Management Settings] [License/Other]
*1
[Remote UI Settings] [Restrict
Access].
➠ The [Restrict Access] scr
een is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].
System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
*1
Depending on the model, [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmwar
e] may appear.
3
Set [Restrict Access] to [On], enter the Remote UI Access PIN, and press [Apply].
4
Enter the same number, and press [Apply].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Security
298
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press
. [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Management Settings]
[Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware]
[Remote UI Settings] [Remote UI Access Security Settings] .
➠ The [RUI Access Security] scr
een is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press
. System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
3
Set [Remote UI Access Security Settings] to [On], enter the Remote UI Access PIN, and
pr
ess .
4
Enter the same number, and press .
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
When [Management Settings] of the Settings Menu Is Initialized
● Use the settings menu on the contr
ol panel to reset the Remote UI Access PIN.
[Restrict Access] or
[Remote UI Access Security Settings]
(P. 430)
Disabling Remote UI
Y
ou can disable Remote UI to reduce the risk of unauthorized access to the machine via the network.
Use the control panel to congure the settings. You cannot congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
Touch Panel Model(P. 299)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 300)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Management Settings] [License/Other]
*1
[Remote UI Settings] [Remote
UI].
➠ The [Remote UI Settings] screen is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
Security
299
*1
Depending on the model, [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmwar
e] may appear.
3
Set [Use Remote UI] to [Off], and press [Apply]
[OK].
4
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
◼ Black and White LCD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press
. [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Management Settings]
[Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware]
[Remote UI Settings] .
➠ The [Remote UI Settings] scr
een is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press
. System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
3
Press [Use Remote UI]
[Off] .
4
Restart the machine. Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
Security
300
Preventing Connection to Computer via USB Port
9665-0CX
Y
ou can disable the USB port for computer connection on the back of the machine to reduce the risk of an external
connection without going through a network with security measures.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.
[USB Settings](P. 374)
Administr
ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [External Interface Settings]
[Edit].
➠ The [Edit External Interface Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Clear the [Use as USB Device] checkbox, and click [OK].
5
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
● For the touch panel model, e
ven if you use this setting to restrict the use of the rear USB port, memory
media can still be connected to the USB port on the front of the machine.
For the black and white LCD model, even if you use this setting to restrict the use of the rear USB port,
memory media can still be connected to the USB port on the rear of the machine. To also restrict USB
connection of memory media, see the following.
Restricting Use of Memory Media(P. 292)
Security
301
Conguring LPD
, RAW, or WSD
9665-060
Select whether to use any of the pr
otocols below on the machine when printing documents from a computer.
You are recommended to disable any protocols you will not be using.
When using LPD or RAW, you can congure the time until reception of print data is canceled.
LPD
This protocol is not dependent on the hardware, operating system, or other platform. It is commonly used in
TCP/IP network environments.
RAW
This is Windows' proprietary print data type protocol. It is used as standard in a Windows environment.
WSD
This protocol enables automatic detection of network-connected printers in a Windows environment.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.
[TCP/IP Settings](P. 363)
Administr
ator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Network Settings].
4
Congure LPD
, RAW, or WSD.
When Conguring LPD
1
Click [LPD Settings]
[Edit].
➠ The [Edit LPD Settings] scr
een is displayed.
2
Set whether to use LPD.
When not using LPD
, clear the [Use LPD Printing] checkbox, and proceed to step 5.
3
Enter the time in [RX Timeout].
Enter the time in minutes from the start of reception standby, after print data reception is canceled, to
the timeout.
When Conguring RA
W
1
Click [RAW Settings] [Edit].
➠ The [Edit RAW Settings] screen is displayed.
2
Set whether to use RAW.
When not using RA
W, clear the [Use RAW Printing] checkbox, and proceed to step 5.
Security
302
3
Enter the time in [RX Timeout].
Enter the time in minutes fr
om the start of reception standby, after print data reception is canceled, to
the timeout.
When Conguring WSD
1
Click [WSD Settings]
[Edit].
➠ The [Edit WSD Settings] scr
een is displayed.
2
Set whether to use WSD for each function.
When not using WSD
, clear the checkbox of the function for restricting use of WSD.
Using WSD to Print Data
Select the [Use WSD Printing] checkbox.
The [Use WSD Browsing] checkbox is selected automatically, and WSD is used to obtain the information
of the machine from the computer.
When Responding to a Search Request of the Machine by Multicast Discovery
Select the [Use Multicast Discovery] checkbox.
To keep the machine in sleep mode without responding to received multicast discovery packets, clear the
checkbox.
5
Click [OK].
6
Restart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
➠ The settings are applied.
Adding a WSD Network Device
● Click [ ] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners] [Add printers & scanners], and
perform the oper
ations following the instructions on the screen.
● For details about installing the driver via a WSD network, see the manual of the driver at the online manual
site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
Changing the Port Number
● To change the port number of each protocol, see the following:
Changing the Port Number(P. 264)
Security
303
Disabling HTTP Communication
9665-061
It is r
ecommended to disable HTTP communication when using only the USB connection or when not using functions
that require HTTP communication, such as Remote UI, WSD printing, and AirPrint.
This section describes how to congure the settings using the control panel.
You can also congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
Managing the Machine from a Computer
(Remote UI)
(P. 315)
Administrator privileges are required.
Touch Panel Model(P. 304)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 304)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [Use HTTP].
➠ The [Use HTTP] screen is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
3
Press [Off]
[Yes].
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press
. [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Preferences]
[Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [Use HTTP]
.
➠ The [Use HT
TP] screen is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press
. System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
3
Press [Off]
[Yes] .
Security
304
Restricting Use of the Control Panel (Black and White
L
CD Model)
9665-0CY
By disabling the contr
ol panel keys, you can prevent the settings of the machine from being changed.
To set Key Lock of the control panel, use Remote UI from a computer.
Administrator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Device Management]
[Key Lock Settings] [Edit...].
➠ The [Edit Ke
y Lock Settings] screen is displayed.
4
Select the [Enable Key Lock] checkbox, and click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
5
Log out from Remote UI.
● Even when Ke
y Lock is enabled, you can use the
, , and keys on the control panel.
Security
305
Applying a Security Policy
9665-062
Canon multifunction machines and printers have a security policy function for collectively conguring and managing
multiple security settings accor
ding to a policy.
You cannot edit the security policy with the machine, but you can apply a security policy that has been edited with
another device or device management software.
Applying a Security Policy to the Machine(P. 306)
Checking the Security Policy Applied to the Machine(P. 307)
Applying a Security Policy to the Machine
You can import a security policy exported from another device or the device management software to the machine
and apply it.
* If you cannot import a security policy exported from another machine to this machine, use the device management
software.
Import the security policy using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to import it.
Administrator privileges are required. When a security policy is imported, the machine restarts automatically.
Do not turn OFF the machine until the import is complete.
● It may tak
e a few minutes until the process is completed. Turning OFF the machine during processing may
cause data corruption or damage the machine.
Do not operate the machine during import.
● Before import, check that the machine is not printing or performing other operations.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Data Management]
[Import].
➠ The [Import] scr
een is displayed.
4
Click [Browse] in [File Path], and specify the le to be imported.
Import the device conguration information le (*.dcm).
5
In [Decryption Password], enter the password set at export.
6
Select the [Settings/Registration] checkbox in [Select Item to Import].
Security
306
7
Click [Start Importing]
[OK].
➠ The security policy is imported to the machine.
When the import is complete, the machine r
estarts automatically.
8
Click [OK].
Exporting a Security Policy
● Y
ou can export the security policy applied to the machine and apply it to another device (Canon device that
supports security policy setting).
Importing and Exporting the Settings(P. 330)
* If you cannot import a security policy e
xported from another machine to this machine, use the device
management software.
Applying a Password-protected Security Policy
● When applying a security policy that is protected with a password from another device to the machine, the
same password is set for the security policy on the machine. Thereafter, you can only import a security
policy with the same password.
* The security policy exported from the machine is also set with the same password.
Checking the Security Policy Applied to the Machine
Y
ou can check the security policy items and their usage.
Check the security policy using Remote UI from a computer. You cannot use the control panel to check this
information.
Administrator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Security Settings]
[Conrm Security Policy].
➠ The [Conrm Security Policy] scr
een is displayed.
4
Check the security policy items and their usage.
Security Policy Items(P. 308)
5
Log out from Remote UI after viewing the usage.
Security
307
Security Policy Items
9665-063
Y
ou can check the security policy items and their usage from Remote UI on the [Conrm Security Policy] screen.
The content set on another device or software is applied to the security policy for the machine. Therefore, there may
be function items in the security policy that are not available on the machine, but these do not affect the settings or
operation of the machine.
[Interface](P. 308)
[Network](P. 308)
[Authentication](P. 310)
[Key/Certicate](P
. 310)
[Log] (P. 311)
[Job](P. 311)
[Storage] (P. 311)
[Interface]
[Wireless Connection Policy]
You can disable the wireless connection to prevent unauthorized access.
[Prohibit Use of Direct Connection]
You can prohibit access from mobile devices. [Direct Connection Settings](P. 355)
[Pr
ohibit Use of Wireless LAN]
You can prohibit wireless access via a wireless LAN router or access point.
[Select Wired/Wireless LAN]
(P
. 355)
[USB Policy]
You can disable the USB connection to prevent unauthorized access and data theft.
[Prohibit Use as USB Device]
You can prohibit a computer from connecting to the machine via the USB port.
[USB Settings](P. 374)
[Pr
ohibit Use as USB Storage Device]
You can prohibit the use of USB memory devices with the machine.
[USB Settings](P. 374)
[Network]
[Communication Oper
ational Policy]
Security
308
You can require a signature or certicate verication for safer communication.
[Always V
erify Signatures for SMS/WebDAV Server Functions]
As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.
[Always Verify Server Certicate When Using TLS]
This veries the certicate including Common Nae (CN) when using TLS-encrypted communication.
* This does not apply to communication with an IEEE 802.1X network.
[Prohibit Cleartext Authentication for Server Functions]
You can limit verication information to secure methods only. When you are using the machine as a server,
cleartext authentication and functions using cleartext authentication are not available.
[Dedicated Port Auth.
Method] or [Dedicated Port Authentication Method](P
. 358)
* If you are using an older version of the device management software or driver, you may not be able to
connect to the machine. Use an updated version.
[Prohibit Use of SNMPv1]
You can prohibit use of SNMPv1 when obtaining device information from a computer.
[SNMP Settings]
(P
. 357)
[Port Usage Policy]
You can close unused ports to prevent external intrusion.
[Restrict LPD Port (Port Number: 515)]
You can prohibit printing using the LPD protocol.
[LPD Settings](P. 370)
[Restrict RA
W Port (Port Number: 9100)]
You can prohibit printing using the RAW protocol.
[RAW Settings](P. 370)
[Restrict FTP Port (Port Number: 21)]
As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy
.
[Restrict WSD Port (Port Number: 3702, 60000)]
You can prohibit the use of functions using the WSD protocol.
[WSD Settings](P. 371)
[Restrict BMLinkS Port (Port Number: 1900)]
As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy
.
[Restrict IPP Port (Port Number: 631)]
You can disable certain print functions that use mobile apps and prohibit related printing.
Linking with
Mobile De
vices(P. 226)
[Restrict SMB Port (Port Number: 137, 138, 139, 445)]
As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.
[Restrict SMTP Port (Port Number: 25)]
As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.
[Restrict Dedicated Port (Port Number: 9002, 9006, 9007, 9011-9015, 9017-9019, 9022, 9023, 9025, 20317,
47545-47547)]
You can prohibit the use of dedicated ports.
[Use Dedicated Port] or [Dedicated Port Settings](P. 357)
[Restrict Remote Oper
ator's Software Port (Port Number: 5900)]
As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.
[Restrict SIP (IP Fax) Port (Port Number: 5004, 5005, 5060, 5061, 49152)]
As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.
[Restrict mDNS Port (Port Number: 5353)]
You can disable mDNS settings (IPv4/IPv6) and certain print functions that use a mobile app. This disables
network discovery and automatic settings using mDNS as well as related printing.
[mDNS Settings] (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 365)
Security
309
Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 226)
[Restrict SLP Port (Port Number: 427)]
Y
ou can disable response to discovery in Multicast Discovery Settings as well as network discovery and
automatic settings using SLP.
Conguring SLP Communication
(P. 92)
[Restrict SNMP Port (Port Number: 161)]
You can prohibit the use of functions using the SNMP protocol. This prohibits the machine from obtaining
device information from a computer using SNMP and conguring related settings.
[SNMP Settings](P. 357)
[Authentication]
[Authentication Operational Policy]
As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.
[Prohibit Guest Users to Use Device]
[For
ce Setting of Auto Logout]
[Password Operational Policy]
As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.
[Prohibit Caching of Password for External Servers]
[Display W
arning When Default Password Is in Use]
[Prohibit Use of Default Password for Remote Access]
[Password Settings Policy]
As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.
[Minimum Number of Characters for Password]
[Passwor
d Validity Period]
[Prohibit Use of 3 or More Identical Consecutive Characters]
[Force Use of at Least 1 Uppercase Character]
[Force Use of at Least 1 Lowercase Character]
[Force Use of at Least 1 Digit]
[Force Use of at Least 1 Symbol]
[Lockout Policy]
You can prohibit login for a while when the wrong password is entered a certain number of times in a row.
[Enable Lockout]
This enables Lockout. Set the Lockout threshold and Lockout period separately on the machine.
[Lockout] or
[Lock
out Settings](P. 435)
[Key/Certicate]
By pr
eventing weak encryption and encrypting user passwords and keys within a certain hardware, you can protect
sensitive data.
[Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption]
Security
310
You can prohibit the use of weak encryption. [Encryption Settings](P. 433)
[Pr
ohibit Use of Key/Certicate with Weak Encryption]
You can prohibit the use of keys and certicates with weak encryption.
[Use TPM to Store Password and Key]
As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.
[Log]
As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy.
[Force Recording of Audit Log]
[For
ce SNTP Settings]
[Job]
[Printing Policy]
As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy
.
[Prohibit Immediate Printing of Received Jobs]
[Sending/Receiving Policy]
As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy
.
[Allow Sending Only to Registered Addresses]
[Force Conrmation of Fax Number]
[Prohibit Auto Forwarding]
[Storage]
As this function is not available on the machine, it is not applied to the security policy
.
[Force Complete Deletion of Data]
Security
311
Managing the Machine
Managing the Machine ...............................................................................................................................
313
Setting the Date and Time ................................................................................................................................ 314
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ................................................................................... 315
Starting Remote UI ....................................................................................................................................... 316
Portal Page of Remote UI ............................................................................................................................. 319
Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI ................................................................................................... 321
Monitoring the Usage ....................................................................................................................................... 323
Checking the Number of Printed Pages (Check Counter) .............................................................................. 324
Printing and Viewing Reports and Lists ........................................................................................................ 326
Changing the Report and List Print Settings .......................................................................................... 329
Importing and Exporting the Settings ............................................................................................................. 330
Updating the Firmware (Touch Panel Model) .................................................................................................. 333
Updating the Firmware (Black and White LCD Model) .................................................................................... 336
Initializing the Settings and Data .................................................................................................................... 339
Managing the Machine
312
Managing the Machine
9665-064
This section describes the management functions that ar
e required to operate the machine.
Monitoring the Operation Status and Usage of the Machine, and Conguring the
Settings
Setting the Date and Time
Set the date and time for the machine. The date and time ar
e used as the reference for the functions using
date and time information, and therefore, they need to be set accurately.
Setting the Date and Time(P. 314)
Checking the Oper
ation Status and Changing the Settings (Remote UI)
You can use a Web browser on a computer to check the operation status of the machine and change the
machine settings. You can manage the machine from a remote location and eciently perform time-
consuming settings and registration on your computer.
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 315)
Monitoring the Usage (Contr
ol Panel)
You can use the control panel of the machine to check the total number of printed pages and print the
settings and other reports and lists.
Monitoring the Usage(P. 323)
Managing Servers, V
arious Data, and Firmware
Managing the Settings of the Machine
Y
ou can use the import and export functions to regularly back up the settings. In addition, you can share the
settings with other devices to save time on conguring the settings.
Importing and Exporting the Settings(P. 330)
Updating the Firmwar
e
Update the rmware to add new functions to the machine and to x bugs. By updating to the latest
rmware, you can use the machine with more stable and comfortable operations.
Updating the Firmware (Touch Panel Model)(P. 333)
Updating the Firmware (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 336)
Initializing the Settings and Data
You can initialize all settings and data when replacing or disposing of the machine. Initializing the machine
prevents access to condential information and unauthorized use by third parties.
Initializing the Settings and Data(P. 339)
◼ See Also
For the settings required to operate the machine, such as the network settings, see the following:
Setting Up(P. 45)
Managing the Machine
313
Setting the Date and Time
9665-065
Set the date and time for the machine. The date and time set her
e are used as the reference for the functions using
date and time information, and therefore, they need to be set accurately.
This section describes how to congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congure the settings.
[Timer/Energy Settings](P. 351)
1
Log in to Remote UI.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Timer Settings]
[Edit].
➠ The [Edit Timer Settings] scr
een is displayed.
4
Enter the current date and time.
5
Set the time zone according to the region where the machine is used.
Communicating over the Internet is premised on setting the UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) correctly. The
UT
C is a coordinated universal time that is standard for all parts of the world. There is a time difference
depending on the country or region where the machine is used.
6
Set daylight saving time as needed.
● Select the [Use Daylight Saving Time] checkbo
x if the machine is in a country or region with daylight saving
time, and then set the start and end dates.
7
Click [OK].
➠ The settings ar
e applied.
8
Log out from Remote UI.
● Adjust the time r
egularly when the clock is noticeably incorrect.
● You can also specify to automatically synchronize the date and time with a server on the network using
SNTP.
Conguring SNTP
(P. 90)
Managing the Machine
314
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)
9665-066
With Remote UI, you can use a W
eb browser on a computer to check the function operation status of the machine and
change the machine settings. You can manage the machine from a remote location and eciently perform time-
consuming settings and registration on your computer.
Remote UI has the following two modes. The functions available with Remote UI vary depending on the mode you
logged in to.
● System Manager Mode
You can use all functions of Remote UI.
● General User Mode
You can monitor usage, view logs, cancel printing, and change some settings.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
Portal Page of Remote UI(P. 319)
Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI(P. 321)
◼ See Also
It is r
ecommended that you set up the following functions to prevent unauthorized use of Remote UI by a third party:
System Manager ID
Set the System Manager ID, which is the exclusive administrator account, so that only users with the ID can
log in to System Manager Mode.
Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 249)
Remote UI Access PIN
If Department ID Management is not set up, congur
e this setting to require PIN entry when logging in to
Remote UI so that only users with the PIN can use Remote UI.
Setting the PIN to Use for Remote UI(P. 298)
Managing the Machine
315
Starting Remote UI
9665-067
T
o use Remote UI, enter the IP address of the machine into a Web browser on a computer, and log in with System
Manager Mode or General User Mode. The functions available with Remote UI vary depending on the mode you
logged in to.
When Department ID Management is set up, you must log in with the Department ID. The mode to which you are
logging in varies depending on the System Manager ID settings.
Required Preparations
● Check the oper
ating environment of Remote UI.
Supported Environment(P. 40)
● Connect the computer you ar
e using to operate Remote UI to the machine over a network.
Setting Up the
Network(P
. 53)
● Check the IP address of the machine.
Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 94)
When Department ID Management Is Not Set Up
● To log in with Remote UI, you must set the Remote UI Access PIN on the machine. Setting the PIN to Use
for Remote UI(P
. 298)
When Logging in with System Manager Mode
● To log in with System Manager Mode (System Manager ID), you must rst change the System Manager PIN
from the default setting.
Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 249)
1
From a Web browser on a computer, access the following URL.
http://<IP address of the machine>/
➠ The Remote UI login scr
een appears.
When Remote UI communication is encrypted, a warning message about the security certicate may
appear. If there are no problems with the certicate or TLS settings, you can continue operations.
When entering an IPv6 address, enclose the IP address in brackets [ ].
Example:
http://[fe80:2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/
If the Remote UI Login Screen Is Not Displayed
When a message such as [Cannot access Remote UI.] is displayed and the login scr
een is not displayed, see
the following:
Cannot Access Remote UI(P. 532)
2
Enter the items required for login.
Managing the Machine
316
When Department ID Management is not set up
Select [System Manager Mode] or [Gener
al User Mode], and enter the required items according to the setting
status.
[System Manager Mode]
When the System Manager ID is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN. System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
* When logging in with System Manager Mode, you must change the System Manager PIN from the default
setting.
Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 249)
[Gener
al User Mode]
You can log in without entering a user name, but enter a print user name when checking and canceling jobs
waiting to be printed.
* If a user name is not set in the printer driver, the logon user name of the computer that sent the print data
is set automatically.
[Remote UI Access PIN]
When the Remote UI Access PIN is set, enter the PIN.
When Department ID Management is set
Enter the Department ID and PIN.
When the System Manager ID is set
When logging in with System Manager Mode, enter the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN.
When a Department ID other than the System Manager ID is enter
ed, you will log in with General User Mode.
When the System Manager ID is not set
No matter which Department ID is entered, you will log in with System Manager Mode.
System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
* When logging in with System Manager Mode, you must change the System Manager PIN from the default
setting.
Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 249)
3
Click [Log In].
➠ The Portal page of Remote UI appears.
Portal Page of Remote UI(P. 319)
4
When you have completed your operations, click [Log Out].
➠ The login scr
een appears after logging out from Remote UI.
Managing the Machine
317
● Do not access other websites when using Remote UI.
Setting the Time Until the User Is Automatically Logged Out
● The user is automatically logged out fr
om Remote UI if no operations are performed for a certain period of
time. Use the following procedure to set the time until the user is logged out.
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings]
[Session Settings] [Edit] enter the time until the user is logged out [OK]
Managing the Machine
318
Portal Page of Remote UI
9665-068
When you log in to Remote UI, the Portal page (Remote UI top page) appears. Fr
om here you can check the operations
status of the machine, view various information, and change the settings with button operations.
[Device Name]
Displays the de
vice name set in [Settings/Registration]
[Device Management] [Device Information Settings].
[Pr
oduct Name]/[Product Name (Serial Number)]
Displays the product name of the machine.
Depending on the model, the serial number may also be displayed.
[Location]
Displays the installation location set in [Settings/Registration]
[Device Management] [Device Information
Settings].
[Login User]
Displays the information of the logged in user.
[Log Out]
Y
ou are logged out of Remote UI, and the login screen is displayed.
[Language]
You can change the display language of Remote UI.
* The display languages of the computer and Remote UI must be the same. If the display languages are not the same,
the entered information may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to reference a folder, server, or other
specied destination.
[Mail to System Manager]
Creates e-mail for the administrator indicated in [Settings/Registration]
[User Management] [System Manager
Information].
[Last Updated]
Displays the date and time that the information displayed on the Portal page was last updated.
Click [ ] to the right of the date and time to update these.
[Device Basic Information]
Displays the current status and error information of the machine.
When an error occurs, this displays a link to the error information screen.
Managing the Machine
319
[Consumables Information]
Displays the paper sour
ce information and remaining amount of ink in the toner cartridge.
Click [Check Consumables Details] to display the toner cartridge name.
[Support Link]
Displays a link to support information for this machine that is set in [Settings/Registration]
[License/Other]
[Support Link].
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
Click this to display the [Status Monitor/Cancel] scr
een.
From here, you can check the status and logs of a function, operation status of the machine, and error information.
Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI(P. 321)
[Settings/Registration]
Click this to display the [Settings/Registr
ation] screen.
If you logged in with System Manager Mode, you can change any settings and perform operations such as saving
and importing data.
● The items that can be set in the [Settings/Registration] screen are nearly the same as those of the control panel,
but some items can only be set with either the control panel or Remote UI.
Settings Menu Items(P. 344)
● Depending
on the item, you may have to restart the machine for the settings to be applied. If a restart is
required, a message appears at the top of the screen.
[Application Library] (System Manager Mode only)
Click this to display the setting scr
een for the Application Library.
For details about the Application Library, see the manual of the Application Library at the online manual site.
Managing the Machine
320
Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI
9665-069
Fr
om Status Monitor/Cancel in Remote UI, you can check the status and logs of a function, operation status of the
machine, and error information.
1
Log in to Remote UI.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Status Monitor/Cancel]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Select an item to view the status or log.
[Print]
[Job Status]
Displays the status (Printing or Waiting) of printed data from a computer.
This displays the status of all print jobs regardless of the Department ID Management setting.
If you entered your user name in [User Name] when you logged in with General User Mode, only the print
job status for that user is visible.
● Click [Job Number] for paused prints and secure prints to display print details and view the user name
and number of printed sheets.
● Click [Cancel] in [Job Operation] to delete the print data for jobs that are printing or waiting.
[Job Log]
Displays the print job log from a computer.
[RX]
[Job Status]
Displays the RX job status for I-Fax jobs.
[Job Log]
Displays the RX job log for I-Fax jobs.
[Error Information]
Displays information of errors occurring on the machine.
* You can view the same information by clicking the link displayed in [Error Information] on the Portal page.
[Consumables]
Displays the paper size and type of each paper source and the toner cartridge name.
* You can view the same information by clicking [Check Consumables Details] on the Portal page.
Managing the Machine
321
[Device Features]
Displays the specications of the machine and the status of optional equipment.
[De
vice Information]
Displays information of the machine, such as the product name and serial number, as well as the rmware
version and system manager information.
● [Device Name] and [Location] display the information set in [Settings/Registration]
[De
vice
Management]
[Device Information Settings].
● [System
Manager Information] displays the information set in [Settings/Registration]
[User
Management] [System Manager Information].
[Check Counter]
Displays the total number of pages printed to date. Checking the Number of Printed Pages (Check
Counter)
(P. 324)
[Cartridge Log]
Displays a usage record for the toner cartridge.
[Eco Information]
Displays the average number of sheets output and average power consumption per month.
4
Log out from Remote UI after viewing the usage.
Managing the Machine
322
Monitoring the Usage
9665-06A
Y
ou can use the control panel of the machine to check the total number of printed pages and print the machine
settings and other reports and lists.
Checking the Number of Printed Pages (Check Counter)(P. 324)
Printing and Viewing Reports and Lists(P. 326)
◼ See Also
Y
ou can also check the counter using Remote UI from a computer. In Remote UI, you can also check the status and
logs of a function, operation status of the machine, and error information.
Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI(P. 321)
Managing the Machine
323
Checking the Number of Printed Pages (Check Counter)
9665-06C
Y
ou can display a counter showing the total number of pages printed to date.
The number of printed pages includes printed reports and lists.
For the Touch Panel Model(P. 324)
For the Black and White LCD Model(P. 324)
For the Touch Panel Model
This section describes how to check the number of printed pages using the control panel.
You can also check this information using Remote UI from a computer. Checking Usage and Logs with Remote
UI(P
. 321)
1
On the control panel, press [Check Counter] in the [Home] screen.
[Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Check the number of printed pages.
[101: Total 1]
Displays the total number of pages printed.
[102: T
otal 2]
Displays the total number of pages printed.
Operations Available on the Check Counter Screen
● Pr
ess [Monitoring Service] to check the connection to the monitoring server. Perform this operation to send
the information of the machine regularly to the monitoring server.
● Press [Check Dev. Cong.] to check the conguration of options on the machine.
For the Black and White LCD Model
This section describes how to check the number of printed pages using the control panel.
You can also check this information using Remote UI from a computer. Checking Usage and Logs with Remote
UI(P
. 321)
Managing the Machine
324
1
Press
on the control panel. Control Panel(P. 17)
➠ The [Status Monitor] scr
een is displayed.
2
Press [Device Status]
[Check Counter] .
➠ The [Check Counter] scr
een is displayed.
3
Select the item you want to check, and press
.
4
Check the number of printed pages.
[101: Total 1]
Displays the total number of pages printed.
[102: T
otal 2]
Displays the total number of pages printed.
Managing the Machine
325
Printing and Viewing Reports and Lists
9665-06E
Y
ou can print and view reports and lists including machine usage and settings.
Types of Reports and Lists(P. 326)
Printing Reports and Lists(P. 327)
2-Sided Printing of Reports and Lists
● Reports and lists ar
e printed on paper on one side by default. You can change the setting to print on both
sides.
Changing the Report and List Print Settings(P. 329)
Types of Reports and Lists
Machine Usage Reports
Y
ou can print and view the following reports related to usage of the machine including power consumption
and status of consumables:
● Eco Report
Displays the number of printed pages and power consumption per month. You can see how to save paper
and power based on this information.
● Consumables Status Report
Displays the status of consumables installed in the machine.
● PCL Font List
Displays the fonts available in PCL mode.
● PS Font List (LBP246dw)
Displays the fonts available in PS mode.
● Cartridge Log Report
Displays a log of toner cartridge usage.
● Department ID Management Report
Displays the number of printed pages and other usage for each Department ID when Department ID
Management is enabled.
Settings Lists
You can print and view the following lists that summarize the registration information and settings of the
machine:
● User Data List
Displays the serial number and other machine information as well as the settings that do not require
administrator privileges.
● System Manager Data List
Displays the serial number and other machine information as well as the settings that require
administrator privileges.
● IPSec Policy List
Displays the settings of the IPSec policies registered to the machine.
Managing the Machine
326
Printing Reports and Lists
Print reports and lists using the control panel. You cannot print these using Remote UI from a computer.
Administr
ator privileges are required to print the following reports and lists:
● Department ID Management Report
● System Manager Data List
● IPSec Policy List
Touch Panel Model(P. 327)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 327)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Output Report] [Print List].
➠ The [Print List] screen is displayed.
3
Select the report or list to print.
➠ A scr
een conrming the paper available for printing is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].
System
Manager ID and PIN(P. 9)
4
Check that printable paper is set in the machine, and press [Start].
➠ The r
eport or list is printed.
◼ Black and White LCD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press
. [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Output Reports]
[Print List] .
3
Select the report or list to print.
➠ A screen conrming the paper available for printing is displayed.
Managing the Machine
327
Changing the Report and List Print Settings
9665-06F
Reports and lists ar
e printed on paper on one side by default. You can change the setting to print on both sides.
Use the control panel to congure the settings. You cannot congure the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
Touch Panel Model(P. 329)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 329)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Output Report] [Report Settings].
➠ The [Report Settings] scr
een is displayed.
3
Press [Default Settings for Report Output].
➠ The [Default Settings for Report Output] scr
een is displayed.
4
Set [2-Sided Printing] to [On], and press [Apply].
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press
. [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Output Reports]
[Report Settings] .
➠ The [Report Settings] scr
een is displayed.
3
Select [Default Settings for Report Output] and press
.
➠ The [Default Settings for Report Output] screen is displayed.
4
Press [2-Sided Printing] [On] .
Managing the Machine
329
Importing and Exporting the Settings
9665-06H
Y
ou can write the settings to les and save (export) them to a computer. You can also load an exported le and apply
(import) the settings to the machine.
You can use the import and export functions to back up the settings in case of an accident.
In addition, an exported le can be imported to another device
*1
to enable sharing of the settings with another device
without having to congure settings.
Some items cannot be imported or exported.
Settings that Can Be Imported and Exported(P. 436)
*1
The settings of the machine can only be applied to the same model.
Exporting the Settings(P. 330)
Importing the Settings(P. 331)
Do Not Turn OFF the Machine until the Import or Export Is Complete.
● It may tak
e a few minutes until the process is completed. Turning OFF the machine during processing may
cause data corruption or damage the machine.
Do Not Operate the Machine during Import or Export.
● Before import or export, check that the machine is not printing or performing other operations.
Exporting the Settings
Select the items to e
xport and write them to a le.
This section describes how to export the settings using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to export. When
exporting from the control panel, use a USB memory device.
[Import/Export](P. 431)
Administr
ator privileges are required.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Data Management]
[Export].
➠ The [Export] scr
een is displayed.
4
In [Select Item to Export], select the items to export.
For the black and white LCD model, [Settings/Registration] and [Application Library Settings Information] are
not displayed. The settings of the machine are exported.
When Exporting the Settings of the Machine
Select the [Settings/Registr
ation] checkbox.
Managing the Machine
330
When Exporting the Settings of the Application Library
Select the [Application Libr
ary Settings Information] checkbox.
5
In [Encryption Password], set a password.
● Enter the same passwor
d in [Encryption Password] and [Conrm] using single-byte alphanumeric characters.
● A password is required to import exported data.
6
Click [Start Exporting] to save the exported data as a le to a computer.
7
Log out from Remote UI.
Importing the Settings
Specify the e
xported le and select the items to be imported.
The device conguration information le (*.dcm) is available for the le format to import.
This section describes how to import les using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to import. When
importing from the control panel, use a USB memory device.
[Import/Export](P. 431)
Administr
ator privileges are required. Depending on the items to be imported, the machine restarts automatically.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration].
Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Data Management]
[Import].
➠ The [Import] scr
een is displayed.
4
Click [Browse] in [File Path], and specify the le to be imported.
5
Enter the decryption password.
Enter the password set at export.
6
In [Select Item to Import], select the items to import.
For the black and white LCD model, [Settings/Registration] and [Application Library Settings Information] are
not displayed. The settings of the machine ar
e imported.
When Importing the Settings of the Machine
Select the [Settings/Registr
ation] checkbox.
When Importing the Settings of the Application Library
Select the [Application Libr
ary Settings Information] checkbox.
Managing the Machine
331
7
Click [Start Importing]
[OK].
➠ The selected le is imported to the machine.
8
When the screen indicating that importing has completed appears, click [OK].
When [Settings/Registration] is selected in Step 6 and the import is complete, the machine restarts
automatically
.
9
Log out from Remote UI.
Managing the Machine
332
Updating the Firmware (Touch Panel Model)
9665-06J
When functions ar
e added or the software version is upgraded, the rmware of the machine is updated.
Check the version of the rmware, and update the rmware via the Internet or a computer according to the usage
environment of the machine.
: Can be updated : Cannot be updated
Usage environment of the machine Connection via Internet Connection via computer
Wired LAN connection
Wireless LAN connection
USB connection
Use IPv6
* You cannot update the rmwar
e in an IPv6 Environment. Connect the machine to a computer via USB, and update
from the computer.
Checking the Firmware Version(P. 333)
Updating the Firmware via the Internet(P. 334)
Updating the Firmware via a Computer(P. 334)
Checking the Firmware Version
Check the current version of the rmware before updating it, and then check the version after updating to see if the
update was performed correctly.
This section describes how to check the rmware version using the control panel.
You can also use Remote UI from a computer to check the rmware version. Managing the Machine from a
Computer (Remote UI)(P
. 315)
Administrator privileges are required.
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Management Settings] [License/Other] [Update Firmware].
➠ The [Update Firmwar
e] screen is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].
System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
3
Select [Version Information].
➠ Displays the curr
ent version of the rmware.
Managing the Machine
333
Updating the Firmware via the Internet
Use the control panel to update the rmware via the Internet. You cannot update it using Remote UI from a computer.
Administrator privileges are required. When the rmware has been updated, the machine restarts automatically.
Required Preparations
● Connect the machine to the Internet.
Setting Up the Network(P. 53)
1
On the control panel, press [Update Firmware] in the [Home] screen. [Home]
Screen(P. 116)
➠ The machine accesses the Canon server to see if new rmware is available.
When [This is the latest rmware version.] appears, no update is available.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System
Manager ID and PIN(P. 9)
2
In the licensing screen, press [Accept].
➠ The rmwar
e update conrmation screen is displayed.
3
Press [OK].
➠ Do
wnloading of the rmware starts.
When the download is complete, the machine restarts automatically, and the rmware is updated.
● Do not turn OFF the machine until the r
estart is complete.
Updating the Firmware via a Computer
Update the rmwar
e from a computer connected to the machine via wired LAN or USB.
Required Preparations
● Do
wnload the latest rmware from the Canon website for your country/region to the computer performing
the update.
https://global.canon/en/support/
◼ Ho
w to Update from a Computer
See the "User Support Tool Operation Guide" included with the rmware.
Managing the Machine
334
◼ T
o Put the Machine into Update Waiting State (Download Mode)
Use the following procedure.
Use the control panel to perform this operation. You cannot perform this operation using Remote UI from a computer.
Administrator privileges are required.
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Management Settings] [License/Other] [Update Firmware].
➠ The [Update Firmwar
e] screen is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].
System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
3
Press [Via PC]
[Yes].
➠ Switches the machine to do
wnload mode and puts it into update waiting state.
Managing the Machine
335
Updating the Firmware (Black and White LCD Model)
9665-0E0
When functions ar
e added or the software version is upgraded, the rmware of the machine is updated.
Check the version of the rmware, and update the rmware via the Internet or a computer according to the usage
environment of the machine.
: Can be updated : Cannot be updated
Usage environment of the machine Connection via Internet Connection via computer
Wired LAN connection
Wireless LAN connection
USB connection
Use IPv6
* You cannot update the rmwar
e in an IPv6 Environment. Connect the machine to a computer via USB, and update
from the computer.
Checking the Firmware Version(P. 336)
Updating the Firmware via the Internet(P. 337)
Updating the Firmware via a Computer(P. 337)
Checking the Firmware Version
Check the current version of the rmware before updating it, and then check the version after updating to see if the
update was performed correctly.
This section describes how to check the rmware version using the control panel.
You can also use Remote UI from a computer to check the rmware version. Managing the Machine from a
Computer (Remote UI)(P
. 315)
Administrator privileges are required.
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press
. [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Management Settings]
[Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware]
[Update Firmware] .
➠ The [Update Firmwar
e] screen is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press
. System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
3
Select [Version Information] and press
.
➠ Displays the curr
ent version of the rmware.
Managing the Machine
336
Updating the Firmware via the Internet
Use the control panel to update the rmware via the Internet. You cannot update it using Remote UI from a computer.
Administrator privileges are required. When the rmware has been updated, the machine restarts automatically.
Required Preparations
● Connect the machine to the Internet.
Setting Up the Network(P. 53)
1
On the control panel, select [Update Firmware] in the [Home] screen, and press .
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
➠ The machine accesses the Canon server to see if ne
w rmware is available.
When [This is the latest rmware version.] appears, no update is available.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press
. System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
2
In the licensing screen, select [Yes], and press
.
➠ The rmwar
e update conrmation screen is displayed.
3
Press
.
➠ Do
wnloading of the rmware starts.
When the download is complete, the machine restarts automatically, and the rmware is updated.
● Do not turn OFF the machine until the r
estart is complete.
Updating the Firmware via a Computer
Update the rmwar
e from a computer connected to the machine via wired LAN or USB.
Required Preparations
● Do
wnload the latest rmware from the Canon website for your country/region to the computer performing
the update.
https://global.canon/en/support/
◼ How to Update from a Computer
See the "User Support Tool Operation Guide" included with the rmware.
Managing the Machine
337
◼ T
o Put the Machine into Update Waiting State (Download Mode)
Use the following procedure.
Use the control panel to perform this operation. You cannot perform this operation using Remote UI from a computer.
Administrator privileges are required.
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press
. [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Management Settings]
[Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware]
[Update Firmware] .
➠ The [Update Firmwar
e] screen is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press
. System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
3
Press [Via PC]
[Yes] .
➠ Switches the machine to download mode and puts it into update waiting state.
Managing the Machine
338
Initializing the Settings and Data
9665-06K
Y
ou can initialize the settings and registered data to reset the machine to the factory settings. You can initialize
specied settings and data only or initialize all settings and data.
Initializing Specic Settings and Data
You can initialize the following items separately:
● Settings menu: Initializes the settings of [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
● Key and Certicate: Initializes the settings of the key and certicate as well as CA certicate, and clears
everything except the pre-installed key and certicate.
Initializing Specic Settings and Data(P
. 339)
Initializing All Settings and Data
You can reset all settings to the factory settings, and clear all stored data including logs. Initialization is
performed to prevent access to condential information and unauthorized use such as when replacing or
disposing of the machine.
Initializing All Settings and Data(P. 340)
Initializing Specic Settings and Data
This section describes how to initialize settings and data using Remote UI from a computer.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then perform initialization from [Preferences] or
[Management Settings]. [Initialize Network Settings](P. 360) / [Data Management](P. 431)
Administr
ator privileges are required. Depending on the item to be initialized, you may have to restart the machine.
1
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 316)
2
On the Portal page of Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration]. Portal Page of
Remote UI(P
. 319)
3
Click [Data Management].
➠ The [Data Management] scr
een is displayed.
4
Select the item to initialize.
Initializing the Settings Menu
Click [Initialize Menu], and select the setting to be initialized fr
om [Menu to Initialize].
When Initializing a Key and Certicate
Click [Initialize Ke
y and Certicate].
5
Click [Initialize]
[OK].
➠ The specied item is initialized.
6
Log out from Remote UI.
Managing the Machine
339
When the Settings Menu Is Initialized
When any of the follo
wing is initialized, restart the machine to apply the initialized settings.
Restarting the
Machine
(P. 108)
● [Preferences]
● [Function Settings]
● [Management Settings]
● [Network Settings]
When Initializing a Key and Certicate
● Functions using a k
ey and certicate such as TLS or IKE of IPSec are disabled. To use these functions again,
you must set the key and certicate, and then enable the function.
When [Management Settings] of the Settings Menu Is Initialized
● This also initializes the Remote UI Access PIN. To use Remote UI, you must set the Remote UI Access PIN
again.
Setting the PIN to Use for Remote UI(P. 298)
Initializing All Settings and Data
Use the contr
ol panel to initialize all settings and data. You cannot initialize these using Remote UI from a computer.
Administrator privileges are required. When these are initialized, the machine restarts automatically.
● Befor
e initialization, check that there is no data being processed or waiting to be processed. This data is
deleted when the initialization is performed.
Touch Panel Model(P. 340)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 341)
◼ Touch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen. [Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Management Settings] [Initialize All Data/Settings].
➠ The initialization conrmation scr
een is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In].
System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
3
Press [Yes]
[Yes].
➠ All settings and data are initialized.
When initialization is complete, the machine restarts automatically.
Managing the Machine
340
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press
. [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Management Settings]
[Initialize All Data/Settings] .
➠ The initialization conrmation screen is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press . System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
3
Press
[Yes] .
➠ All settings and data ar
e initialized.
When initialization is complete, the machine restarts automatically.
Managing the Machine
341
Settings Menu Items
Settings Menu Items ....................................................................................................................................
344
[Preferences] ...................................................................................................................................................... 345
[Display Settings] .......................................................................................................................................... 347
[Timer/Energy Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 351
[Network] ..................................................................................................................................................... 355
[Wireless LAN Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 361
[TCP/IP Settings] .................................................................................................................................... 363
[External Interface] ....................................................................................................................................... 374
[Accessibility] ................................................................................................................................................ 375
[Volume Settings] ......................................................................................................................................... 377
[Adjustment/Maintenance] .............................................................................................................................. 379
[Adjust Image Quality] .................................................................................................................................. 380
[Special Processing] ............................................................................................................................... 382
[Maintenance] .............................................................................................................................................. 387
[Function Settings] ............................................................................................................................................ 388
[Common] .................................................................................................................................................... 390
[Paper Feed Settings] ............................................................................................................................. 391
[Print Settings] ....................................................................................................................................... 393
[Printer] ........................................................................................................................................................ 394
[Printer Settings] .................................................................................................................................... 395
[PDL Selection (Plug and Play)] .............................................................................................................. 413
[Receive] ....................................................................................................................................................... 414
[Common Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 415
[E-Mail Settings] ..................................................................................................................................... 416
[Access Files] (Touch Panel Model) ................................................................................................................ 417
[Common Settings] (Touch Panel Model) ............................................................................................... 418
[Management Settings] .................................................................................................................................... 421
[User Management] ..................................................................................................................................... 423
[Device Management] .................................................................................................................................. 425
[License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware] .......................................................................... 428
[Remote UI Settings] .............................................................................................................................. 430
[Data Management] ..................................................................................................................................... 431
[Security Settings] ......................................................................................................................................... 433
[Authentication/Password Settings] ....................................................................................................... 435
Settings that Can Be Imported and Exported .................................................................................................. 436
Settings Menu Items
342
[Preferences] ................................................................................................................................................
437
[Adjustment/Maintenance] ........................................................................................................................... 442
[Function Settings] ....................................................................................................................................... 443
[Management Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 446
Settings Menu Items
343
Settings Menu Items
9665-06L
This section describes the items available in the settings menu displayed when you pr
ess [Menu] in the [Home] screen
on the control panel.
From the settings menu, you can run functions and modify the settings according to the machine’s operating
environment or its usage.
Administrator privileges are required to view or change some settings. Note also that the machine may need to be
restarted for changed settings to take effect.
[Preferences](P. 345)
[Adjustment/Maintenance](P. 379)
[Function Settings](P. 388)
[Management Settings](P. 421)
Support for Importing and Exporting Setting Data
The settings menu items can be used with the Import and Export functions to r
egularly back up your settings
or share them with other machines.
Check this list to see which settings can be imported and exported.
Settings that Can Be Imported and Exported(P. 436)
Menu Route Map (List)
This list sho
ws you the settings menu items and the values set.
Click the icon below to view the corresponding Menu Route Map (PDF).
Touch panel model
Black and white LCD model
◼ See Also
If a Login Scr
een Appears
If a System Manager ID has been set, a login screen may appear when certain items are selected. Once you
enter the required information and the login is authenticated, you can view or change the settings.
Logging In to the Machine(P. 136)
If the Machine Must be Restarted
After changing the settings, r
estart the machine.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
Settings Not Included in the Menus
The Paper Settings items appear when you pr
ess [Paper Settings] in the [Home] screen.
Specifying the Paper Size and Type(P. 153)
For the touch panel model, the volume adjustment items appear when you pr
ess the Sound Volume key
(
).
Adjusting the Sound Volume(P. 175)
Conguring Settings fr
om Remote UI
The settings menu items can also be specied from a computer using Remote UI. In Remote UI, specify the
settings from [Settings/Registration] in the Portal page.
The items that can be specied in [Settings/Registration] in Remote UI are almost identical to those in the
control panel settings menu, but there are also items that can be specied only from the control panel or
only from Remote UI. Note also that some of the item names differ in Remote UI.
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 315)
Checking the Settings
Y
ou can check a list of the current settings by printing them out.
Printing and Viewing Reports and Lists(P. 326)
Settings Menu Items
344
[Preferences]
9665-06R
These ar
e settings used to congure features such as the control panel screen displays and the network settings
according to the environment in which the machine is used.
* Values in bold red text indicate the default setting for each item.
[Display Settings](P. 345)
[English Keyboard Layout](P. 345)
[Timer/Energy Settings](P. 345)
[Network](P. 345)
[External Interface](P. 345)
[Accessibility](P. 346)
[Volume Settings] (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 346)
[Display Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences]
Congur
e the control panel screen displays.
[Display Settings](P. 347)
[English Keyboard Layout]
[Menu] [Preferences]
Specify the layout for a USB k
eyboard connected to the machine.
[USA Layout]
[UK Layout]
[Timer/Energy Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences]
Set the date and time and specify the Ener
gy Saver settings.
[Timer/Energy Settings](P. 351)
[Network]
[Menu] [Preferences]
Congur
e the network environment for the machine.
[Network](P. 355)
[External Interface]
[Menu]
[Preferences]
Congur
e the USB connection.
[External Interface](P. 374)
Settings Menu Items
345
[Accessibility]
[Menu] [Preferences]
Congur
e control panel screen features such as screen color inversion and message display time to make the screen
easier to see.
[Accessibility](P. 375)
[Volume Settings] (Black and White LCD Model)
[Menu] [Preferences]
Set whether sounds ar
e emitted.
[Volume Settings](P. 377)
Settings Menu Items
346
[Display Settings]
9665-06S
Congur
e the control panel screen displays.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Default Screen After Startup/Restoration] or
[Default Scr
een after Startup/Restoration](P. 347)
[Home Screen Button Display Settings] or [Button
Display Or
der on Home Screen](P. 347)
[Language](P. 347)
[Remote UI Language](P. 348)
[Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch](P. 348)
[Gram/Pound Switch](P. 348)
[Display Timing for Cart. Prep.] or [Displ.
Timing for Cartridge Pr
ep. Notif.](P. 348)
[Display Notif. to Clean Fixing Assembly]
(P
. 349)
[Show Warnings](P. 349)
[Action When Warning](P. 350)
[Display IP Address](P. 350)
[Default Screen After Startup/Restoration] or [Default Screen after Startup/
Restoration]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]
Specify the scr
een displayed after the start screen appears when the machine is turned ON and immediately after an
Auto Reset.
[Home]
[Secur
e Print]
[Status Monitor]
[Home Screen Button Display Settings] or [Button Display Order on Home
Screen]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]
Rearr
ange the buttons or change the display order of the items so that you can run frequently used functions more
quickly from the [Home] screen of the control panel.
Customizing the [Home] Screen(P. 131)
[Language]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]
Change the language sho
wn on the control panel and used in printed reports.
* Depending on your country or region, the [Language] setting may not be available, or its content or default setting
may be different.
[Deutsch]
[English]
[Español]
[Fr
ançais]
[Italiano]
[Português]
[日本語]
[中文(繁體)]
Settings Menu Items
347
[中文(简体)]
[한국어]
[Remote UI Language]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]
Change the language sho
wn on Remote UI screens.
* Depending on your country or region, the [Remote UI Language] setting may not be available, or its content or
default setting may be different.
[English]
[
Japanese]
[French]
[Spanish]
[German]
[Italian]
[Portuguese]
[Chinese (Simplied)]
[Chinese (Traditional)]
[Korean]
[Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]
Change the units sho
wn on the screen for entering length and width.
[Millimeter]
[Inch]
[Gram/Pound Switch]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]
Y
ou can change the units displayed such as for the paper weight.
* [Gram/Pound Switch] is only displayed when [Select Country/Region] is set to [United States (US)] or [Canada (CA)].
[Gram]
[Pound]
[Display Timing for Cart. Prep.] or [Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]
When the toner in a toner cartridge runs lo
w, a message appears notifying you to prepare a new toner cartridge.
Specify when this message appears (the toner level in a cartridge).
Touch Panel Model
To manually specify when this message appears (the toner level in a cartridge), set [Auto] to [Off] and specify the
timing in [Custom].
When [Auto] is set to [On], the machine automatically decides when to display the message.
Settings Menu Items
348
[Auto]
[Off]
[Custom]
2 to 20 to 99 (%)
[On]
Black and White L
CD Model
To manually specify when this message appears (the toner level in a cartridge), specify the timing in [Custom].
When [Auto] is enabled, the machine automatically decides when to display the message.
[Auto]
[Custom]
2 to 20
to 99 (%)
[Display Notif. to Clean Fixing Assembly]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]
Select whether to notify you b
y displaying a message when the xing assembly requires cleaning.
[Off]
[On]
[1000 to 50000]
[Show Warnings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]
Specify whether a notication message is displayed when a toner cartridge is lo
w on toner.
* If the machine is congured to stop printing when a toner cartridge is low on toner, this cannot be set to [Off].
[Action When Warning](P. 350)
* If the machine is congur
ed not to print incoming I-Faxes when a toner cartridge is low on toner, the message
appears even when this is set to [Off].
[Continue Print. When Cart. Low] or [Continue Print. When Amount in
Cart. Lo
w](P. 415)
Touch Panel Model
[Off]
[On]
Black and White L
CD Model
[Low Cartridge Level]
[Off]
[On]
Settings Menu Items
349
[Action When Warning]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]
Specify whether to continue printing when a toner cartridge is lo
w on toner.
If this is set to [Stop Printing], a notication message appears when the toner cartridge runs low on toner.
[Show
W
arnings](P. 349)
[Low Cartridge Level]
[Continue Printing]
[Stop Printing]
[Display IP Address]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Display Settings]
Specify whether to display the machine
’s IPv4 address in the [Status Monitor] screen.
[Status Monitor]
Scr
een(P. 119)
[Off]
[On]
Settings Menu Items
350
[Timer/Energy Settings]
9665-06U
Set the date and time and specify the Ener
gy Saver settings.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Current Date/Time Settings](P. 351)
[Date/Time Settings](P. 351)
[Date Format](P. 352)
[Time Format](P. 352)
[Auto Reset Time](P. 352)
[Function After Auto Reset](P. 353)
[Auto Sleep Time](P. 353)
[Auto Sleep Daily Timer](P. 353)
[Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings](P. 353)
[Current Date/Time Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]
Set the date and time for the machine. The date and time set her
e are used as a reference for the functions that use
date and time information.
Setting the Date and Time(P. 314)
Befor
e conguring this setting, check that the correct time zone is selected.
[Date/Time Settings](P. 351)
* The curr
ent date and time cannot be changed for one hour after Daylight Saving Time is set.
[Date/Time Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]
Set the time zone (UTC
*1
) and Daylight Saving Time accor
ding to the region where the machine is installed.
*1
The UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) is a coordinated universal time that is standard for all parts of the world. Internet-
based communication relies on the UTC being set correctly.
* Depending on your country or region, the [Date/Time Settings] setting may not be displayed, or its content or default
setting may be differ
ent.
* When you change the time zone, the current time setting is automatically changed accordingly.
[Current Date/
Time Settings](P
. 351) .
* If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to which daylight saving time is in effect.
[Time Zone]
[(UT
C-12:00) International Date Line West] to [(UTC-05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada)] to [(UTC+14:00) Kiritimati
Island]
[Daylight Saving Time Settings]
[Off]
[On]
[Start]: Month, Week, Day
[End]: Month, Week, Day
Settings Menu Items
351
[Date Format]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]
Set the or
der in which the year, month, and day are displayed.
* Depending on your country or region, the [Date Format] setting may not be available, or its content or default
setting may be different.
[YYYY MM/DD]
[MM/DD/YYYY]
[DD/MM YYYY]
[Time Format]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]
Set 12 Hour or 24 Hour as the format for displayed time.
[12 Hour (AM/PM)]
[24 Hour]
[Auto Reset Time]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]
If the contr
ol panel is not used for a set period, a function called “Auto Reset Time” automatically restores the default
settings. This setting species whether Auto Reset is invoked.
If you enable Auto Reset, you can then set the time after which it is triggered.
* You can also change the screen that is displayed after an Auto Reset.
[Function After Auto Reset](P. 353)
T
ouch Panel Model
[Set This Function]
[Off]
[On]
[Set Time]
1 to 2
to 9 (min.)
Black and White L
CD Model
0 (Off)
1 to 2 to 9 (min.)
Situations Where Auto Reset is Not Triggered
● When the Err
or lamp on the control panel is ashing
Control Panel(P. 17)
● When the [Menu] scr
een or an error message
*1
is displayed on the control panel
● When processing of some sort (such as printing) is in progress
Settings Menu Items
352
*1
Auto Reset is performed for some messages.
[Function After Auto Reset]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]
Set the screen displayed after an Auto Reset.
● T
o view the specied screen, set to [Default Function]. Specify the displayed screen in [Default Screen After
Startup/Restoration].
[Default Screen After Startup/Restoration] or [Default Screen after Startup/
Restor
ation](P. 347)
● To display the screen for the function being used before the Auto Reset, set to [Selected Function].
[Default Function]
[Selected Function]
[Auto Sleep Time]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]
Set the time after which the machine automatically goes into sleep mode. Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep
Mode)(P
. 110)
* Use of the default settings is recommended to achieve the most effective power savings.
1 to 120 (min.)
[Auto Sleep Daily Timer]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]
Congur
e the machine to automatically enter sleep mode at a specied time.
Reducing Power Consumption (Sleep
Mode)(P
. 110)
Touch Panel Model
[Set This Function]
[Off]
[On]
(0:00 to 12:59 AM/PM)
Black and White L
CD Model
[Off]
[On]
(0:00 to 12:59 AM/PM)
[Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Timer/Energy Settings]
Settings Menu Items
353
[Network]
9665-06W
Specify the settings for the machine
’s network environment.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Select Wired/Wireless LAN](P. 355)
[Wireless LAN Settings](P. 355)
[Direct Connection Settings](P. 355)
[Easy Connection via PC](P. 357)
[TCP/IP Settings](P. 357)
[SNMP Settings](P. 357)
[Use Dedicated Port] or [Dedicated Port
Settings](P
. 357)
[Dedicated Port Auth. Method] or [Dedicated
Port Authentication Method]
(P. 358)
[Wait Time for Conn. at Startup] or [Waiting
Time for Connection at Startup]
(P. 358)
[Ethernet Driver Settings](P. 358)
[Use IEEE 802.1X] or [IEEE 802.1X Settings](P. 358)
[Firewall Settings](P. 359)
[Device Settings Management] or [Device
Settings Management On/Off](P
. 359)
[Monitoring Service](P. 359)
[RMT-SW](P. 360)
[Initialize Network Settings](P. 360)
[Select Wired/Wireless LAN]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
Set whether to connect the machine to the network using a wir
ed or wireless LAN.
Selecting Wired or Wireless
LAN(P
. 55)
* If you are switching from a wired LAN to a wireless LAN, you can make the change within the procedure for
conguring the wireless LAN.
[Wir
ed LAN]
[Wireless LAN]
[Wireless LAN Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
Specify the settings for connecting the machine to a wir
eless LAN and to save energy while the machine is connected
to a wireless LAN.
[Wireless LAN Settings](P. 361)
[Direct Connection Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
Specify the settings for using a dir
ect connection and for the connection function.
Enabling the Direct Connection
Function
(P. 228)
Touch Panel Model
[Use Direct Connection]
[Off]
[On]
[Dir
ect Connection Termination]
[Automatically Terminate Session]
[Off]
Settings Menu Items
355
[On]
[Time Until Session T
erminates]
1 to 60 (min.)
[Access Point Mode Settings]
[Use Custom SSID]
[Off]
[On]
[SSID]
[Use Custom Network Key]
[Off]
[On]
[Network Key]
[Keep Enabled If SSID/Ntwk Key Spcfd]
*1
[Off]
[On]
[Cong. IP Address For Direct Conn.]
192.168.22.1
*1
May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
Black and White L
CD Model
[Use Direct Connection]
[Off]
[On]
[Time Until Dir
ect Connection Termination]
0 (Off)
1 to 60 (min.)
[Access Point Mode Settings]
[Use Custom SSID]
[Off]
[On]
[SSID (1-20 Characters)]
[Use Custom Network Key]
[Off]
[On]
[Network Key (10 Char.)]
[Keep Enabled If SSID/Ntwk Key Spcfd]
*1
[Off]
[On]
[Cong. IP Address For Direct Conn.]
192.168.22.1
*1
May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
Settings Menu Items
356
[Easy Connection via PC]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
Start cableless setup mode.
T
o congure the network settings using the Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility, select cableless setup mode.
* You can download the Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility from the Canon website for your country/region.
https://global.canon/en/support/
[TCP/IP Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
Specify the settings for using the machine on a T
CP/IP network.
[TCP/IP Settings](P. 363)
[SNMP Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
Specify the settings for setting up, monitoring, and contr
olling the machine using SNMP management software.
Conguring SNMP
(P. 87)
To ensure compliance with the protocol’s advanced specications (RFC2790) when the machine’s status is being
monitored, set [Format Host Rsrcs. MIB to RFC2790]/[Format Host Resources MIB to RFC2790] to [On].
[SNMPv1 Settings]
[Off]
[On]
[SNMPv3 Settings]
[Off]
[On]
[Acquir
e Printer Mngt. Info. from Host]
[Off]
[On]
[Format Host Rsrcs. MIB to RFC2790]/[Format Host Resources MIB to RFC2790]
[Off]
[On]
[Use Dedicated Port] or [Dedicated Port Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
Specify whether to use a dedicated port.
Use a dedicated port for tasks such as printing fr
om a computer and conguring or browsing the machine’s settings.
[Off]
[On]
Settings Menu Items
357
[Dedicated Port Auth. Method] or [Dedicated Port Authentication Method]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
Set the authentication method when using a dedicated port.
If you specify [Mode 2], communication via the dedicated port will be limited to secur
e authentication methods only.
This may mean that you cannot connect to the machine from device management software, drivers or other software.
[Mode 1]
[Mode 2]
[Wait Time for Conn. at Startup] or [Waiting Time for Connection at Startup]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
Set the waiting time until a connection is established when the machine starts up.
If the machine is connected via a de
vice such as a switching hub, you may not be able to connect to the network even
when the setting on the machine is correct. If so, set the waiting time and reconnect.
0 to 300 (sec.)
[Ethernet Driver Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
Set the Ethernet communication method. Manually Conguring the Ethernet Settings(P
. 81)
This also allows you to check the MAC address on a wired LAN.
Viewing the MAC Address of the Wired LAN(P. 96)
* If the [Communication Mode] is set to [Half Duple
x], [1000BASE-T] cannot be selected.
[Auto Detect]
[Off]
[Communication Mode]
[Half Duple
x]
[Full Duplex]
[Ethernet Type]
[10BASE-T]
[100BASE-TX]
[1000BASE-T]
[On]
[MAC Address]
[Use IEEE 802.1X] or [IEEE 802.1X Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
Specify whether to use IEEE 802.1X.
Use Remote UI fr
om a computer to set the IEEE 802.1X authentication method.
Using IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
* [Use IEEE 802.1X] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
[Off]
Settings Menu Items
358
[On]
[Firewall Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
Specify whether to enable an IP addr
ess lter and MAC address lter.
Use Remote UI from a computer to set the default policy for ltering and the exception addresses.
Setting the
Fir
ewall(P. 261)
[IPv4 Address Filter]
[Outbound Filter]
[Off]
[On]
[Inbound Filter]
[Off]
[On]
[IPv6 Addr
ess Filter]
[Outbound Filter]
[Off]
[On]
[Inbound Filter]
[Off]
[On]
[MAC Address Filter]
[Outbound Filter]
[Off]
[On]
[Inbound Filter]
[Off]
[On]
[Device Settings Management] or [Device Settings Management On/Off]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
Select whether to use the de
vice management software to manage the settings and other data in the machine. For
more information, see the manual of the software you are using.
[Off]
[On]
[Monitoring Service]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
Check that the machine can communicate with the monitoring server.
Perform this oper
ation to regularly send machine information to the monitoring server. For details, contact your
dealer or service representative.
Settings Menu Items
359
* [Monitoring Service] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
[RMT-SW]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
Normally
, use the machine with this set to [Off].
When your service representative carries out device maintenance remotely, he or she may change this to [On].
[Off]
[On]
[Initialize Network Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
Use this to r
estore the network settings to the factory settings.
Initializing Specic Settings and Data(P
. 339)
Settings Menu Items
360
[Wireless LAN Settings]
9665-06X
Specify the settings for connecting the machine to a wir
eless LAN and to save energy while the machine is connected
to a wireless LAN.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Select Network](P. 361)
[Other Connections](P. 361)
[Connection Set.] or [Connection Settings](P. 362)
[Select Network]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Wireless LAN Settings]
Select a wir
eless LAN router (access point) from the displayed list and enter the network key to connect.
Connecting
to a Wir
eless LAN by Searching for a Router (Access Point Setup Method)(P. 66)
[Other Connections]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Wireless LAN Settings]
Connect to the wir
eless LAN by a method other than selecting the wireless LAN router from a list.
[Manually Enter Network Name (SSID)] or [Manually Enter Network Name]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Wireless LAN Settings] [Other Connections]
Connect to a wir
eless LAN router by manually entering all the router information, such as the SSID, network key
and security settings.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method)(P. 69)
[Security Settings]
[None]
[WEP]
[Open System]
Encryption k
eys 1 to 4
[Shared Key]
Encryption keys 1 to 4
[WPA/WPA2-PSK]
[Auto]
[AES-CCMP]
[WPA/WPA2-EAP]
[WPS Push Button Mode]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Wireless LAN Settings] [Other Connections]
Connect to a wir
eless LAN by pressing a button on a LAN router that supports WPS push button mode.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Using the Router Button (Push Button Mode)(P. 61)
[WPS PIN Code Mode]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Wireless LAN Settings] [Other Connections]
Settings Menu Items
361
Connect to a wireless LAN router that supports WPS PIN code mode by registering a PIN code generated by the
machine. Use a computer or similar de
vice to register the PIN code.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by
Entering a PIN Code (WPS PIN Code Mode)
(P. 63)
[Connection Set.] or [Connection Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Wireless LAN Settings]
Congur
e the setting to save power when connecting by wireless LAN, and check the wireless LAN connection
information.
[Power Save Mode]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Wireless LAN Settings] [Connection Set.]
Specify whether to periodically set the machine to Po
wer Save Mode according to signals sent from the wireless
LAN router.
[Off]
[On]
[Connection Information]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Wireless LAN Settings] [Connection Set.]
Check data such as the security settings, as well as the wir
eless LAN MAC address and other connection
information.
Viewing the MAC Address and Connection Information of the Wireless LAN(P. 97)
[MAC Address]
[Wir
eless LAN Status]
[Latest Error Information]
[Channel]
[Network Name]
[Security Settings]
[Power Save Mode]
Settings Menu Items
362
[TCP/IP Settings]
9665-06Y
Specify the settings to use the machine on a T
CP/IP network.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[IPv4 Settings](P. 363)
[IPv6 Settings](P. 366)
[DNS Settings] (Touch Panel Model)(P. 368)
[WINS Settings](P. 370)
[LPD Settings](P. 370)
[RAW Settings](P. 370)
[WSD Settings](P. 371)
[IPP Print Settings](P. 371)
[Use HTTP](P. 372)
[Use IPSec](P. 372)
[Port Number Settings](P. 372)
[MTU Size](P. 373)
[IPv4 Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]
Specify the settings to use the machine in an IPv4 envir
onment.
[IP Address Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings]
Set the IPv4 addr
ess either automatically or manually.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
T
ouch Panel Model
[Auto Acquire]
[Auto Acquir
e]
[Off]
[On]
[Select Protocol]
[Off]
[DHCP]
[Auto IP]
[Off]
[On]
[Manually Acquire]
*1
[IP Address]: 0.0.0.0
[Subnet Mask]: 0.0.0.0
[Gateway Address]: 0.0.0.0
[Check Settings]
*1
May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
Black and White L
CD Model
[Auto Acquir
e]
[Select Protocol]
Settings Menu Items
363
[Off]
[DHCP]
[Auto IP]
[Off]
[On]
[Manually Acquir
e]
*1
[IP Address]: 0.0.0.0
[Subnet Mask]: 0.0.0.0
[Gateway Address]: 0.0.0.0
[Check Settings]
*1
May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
[DHCP Option Settings] (Touch Panel Model)
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings]
Specify the settings for using a DHCP server in an IPv4 envir
onment with a Domain Name System (DNS)
implemented.
Conguring DNS(P
. 82)
[Acquire Host Name]
[Off]
[On]
[DNS Dynamic Update]
[Off]
[On]
[Acquir
e DNS Server Address]
[Off]
[On]
[Acquire Domain Name]
[Off]
[On]
[Acquire WINS Server Address]
[Off]
[On]
[Acquire POP Server Address]
[Off]
[On]
[PING Command]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings]
Ex
ecute a PING command to check whether the machine can connect to devices on the network.
Checking
Whether the Machine Can Connect to Network De
vices(P. 94)
Settings Menu Items
364
[DNS Settings] (Black and White LCD Model)
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings]
Specify the DNS settings when using the machine in an envir
onment with a Domain Name System (DNS)
implemented.
Conguring DNS(P
. 82)
[DNS Server Settings]
[Primary DNS Server]: 0.0.0.0
[Secondary DNS Server]: 0.0.0.0
[DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings]
[Host Name]
[Domain Name]
[DNS Dynamic Update Settings]
[Off]
[On]
[DNS Dyn. Updt. Intrvl.]
0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)
[mDNS Settings] (Black and White LCD Model)
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings]
Specify the mDNS settings to use DNS functions in an envir
onment such as Bonjour with no DNS installed.
[Off]
[On]
[mDNS Name]
[DHCP Option Settings] (Black and White LCD Model)
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings]
Specify the settings for using a DHCP server in an IPv4 envir
onment with a Domain Name System (DNS)
implemented.
Conguring DNS(P
. 82)
[Acquire Host Name]
[Off]
[On]
[DNS Dynamic Update]
[Off]
[On]
[Acquir
e DNS Server Address]
[Off]
[On]
[Acquire Domain Name]
[Off]
[On]
[Acquire WINS Server Address]
Settings Menu Items
365
[Off]
[On]
[Acquir
e POP Server Address]
[Off]
[On]
[IPv6 Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]
Specify the settings for using the machine in an IPv6 envir
onment.
You can set multiple IPv6 addresses and use them at the same time.
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
[Use IPv6]
[Off]
[On]
[Stateless Addr
ess Settings]
[Stateless Address Settings]
[Off]
[On]
[Check Settings]
[DHCPv6 Settings]
[Use DHCPv6]
[Off]
[On]
[Check Settings]
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
[Off]
[On]
[Acquire Domain Name]
[Off]
[On]
[Check IPv6 Settings]
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
[Use IPv6]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv6 Settings]
Congur
e whether to use IPv6.
[Off]
[On]
[Check Settings]
Settings Menu Items
366
[Stateless Address Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv6 Settings]
Congur
e whether to use a stateless address.
[Off]
[On]
[Check Settings]
[Use DHCPv6]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv6 Settings]
Congur
e whether to use a stateful address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.
[Off]
[On]
[Check Settings]
[DNS Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv6 Settings]
Specify the DNS settings when using the machine in an envir
onment with a Domain Name System (DNS)
implemented.
Conguring DNS(P
. 82)
[DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings]
[Use IPv4 Host/Domain]
[Off]
[Host Name]
[Domain Name]
[On]
[DNS Dynamic Update Settings]
[Off]
[On]
[Regist. Manual Addr.]
[Off]
[On]
[Regist. Stateful Addr.]
[Off]
[On]
[Regist Stateless Addr.]
[Off]
[On]
[DNS Dynamic Update Interval]
0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)
[mDNS Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv6 Settings]
Specify the mDNS settings to use DNS functions in an envir
onment such as Bonjour with no DNS installed.
[Off]
Settings Menu Items
367
[On]
[Use IPv4 Name for mDNS]
[Off]
[mDNS Name]
[On]
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPv6 Settings]
Specify the settings for using a DHCP server in an IPv4 envir
onment with a Domain Name System (DNS)
implemented.
Conguring DNS(P
. 82)
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
[Off]
[On]
[Acquir
e Domain Name]
[Off]
[On]
[DNS Settings] (Touch Panel Model)
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]
Specify the DNS settings when using the machine in an envir
onment with a Domain Name System (DNS) implemented.
Conguring DNS(P
. 82)
The settings for mDNS (multicast DNS) used by functions such as Bonjour are also specied here.
[IPv4 DNS Server Address Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [DNS Settings]
Set the IP addr
ess for an IPv4 DNS server.
[Primary DNS Server]: 0.0.0.0
[Secondary DNS Server]: 0.0.0.0
[DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [DNS Settings]
Specify the host name to be r
egistered for the machine on the DNS server and the name of the domain to which
it belongs.
[IPv4]
[Host Name]
[Domain Name]
[IPv6]
[Use IPv4 Host/Domain]
[Off]
[Host Name]
[Domain Name]
[On]
Settings Menu Items
368
[DNS Dynamic Update Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [DNS Settings]
Specify whether settings ar
e automatically updated when the correspondence between host names and IP
addresses is changed in environments such as DHCP.
If you enable automatic updating, you can also specify the interval between updates.
[IPv4]
[DNS Dynamic Update]
[Off]
[On]
[DNS Dynamic Update Interval]
0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)
[IPv6]
[DNS Dynamic Update]
[Off]
[On]
[Register Manual Addr
ess]
[Off]
[On]
[Register Stateful Address]
[Off]
[On]
[Register Stateless Address]
[Off]
[On]
[DNS Dynamic Update Interval]
0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)
[mDNS Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [DNS Settings]
Specify the mDNS settings to use DNS functions in an envir
onment with no DNS installed.
[IPv4]
[Use mDNS]
[Off]
[On]
[mDNS Name]
[IPv6]
[Use mDNS]
[Off]
[On]
[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]
[Off]
[mDNS Name]
[On]
Settings Menu Items
369
[WINS Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]
Congur
e WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) when using the machine in a network environment that uses both
NetBIOS and TCP/IP.
Conguring WINS(P
. 86)
[WINS Resolution]
[Off]
[On]
[WINS Server Addr
ess]: 0.0.0.0
[LPD Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]
Specify whether to use the LPD pr
otocol.
Conguring LPD
, RAW, or WSD(P. 302)
If the LPD protocol is used, you can also set the time from the start of reception standby, after print data reception is
canceled, to the timeout.
Touch Panel Model
[Use LPD Printing]
[Off]
[On]
[RX Timeout]
1 to 5
to 60 (min.)
Black and White L
CD Model
[LPD Print Settings]
[Off]
[On]
[RX Timeout]
1 to 5 to 60 (min.)
[RAW Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]
Specify whether to use the RA
W protocol.
Conguring LPD
, RAW, or WSD(P. 302)
If the RAW protocol is used, you can also set the time from the start of reception standby, after print data reception is
canceled, to the timeout.
Touch Panel Model
[Use RAW Printing]
[Off]
[On]
[RX Timeout]
1 to 5
to 60 (min.)
Settings Menu Items
370
Black and White L
CD Model
[RAW Print Settings]
[Off]
[On]
[RX Timeout]
1 to 5 to 60 (min.)
[WSD Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]
Specify whether to use the WSD pr
otocol. You can specify this setting for each of the functions that use the WSD
protocol.
Conguring LPD
, RAW, or WSD(P. 302)
Touch Panel Model
[Use WSD Printing]
[Off]
[On]
[Use WSD Br
owsing]
[Off]
[On]
[Use Multicast Discovery]
[Off]
[On]
Black and White L
CD Model
[WSD Print Settings]
[Use WSD Print]
[Off]
[On]
[Use WSD Br
owsing]
[Off]
[On]
[Use Multicast Discovery]
[Off]
[On]
[IPP Print Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]
Specify whether to use IPP (Internet Printing Pr
otocol). You can use IPP when printing with AirPrint.
Setting the
Functions and Security to Be Used with AirPrint(P
. 232)
When using IPP, you can also specify whether TLS encryption is used for communication.
Settings Menu Items
371
Touch Panel Model
[Use IPP Printing]
[Off]
[On]
[Allo
w IPP Printing Only w/TLS]
[Off]
[On]
Black and White L
CD Model
[Use IPP Printing]
[Off]
[On]
[Allo
w IPP Printing Only When Using TLS]
[Off]
[On]
[Use HTTP]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]
Specify whether to use HT
TP.
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 304)
[Off]
[On]
[Use IPSec]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]
Specify whether to use IPSec (IP Security Pr
otocol).
Use Remote UI from a computer to specify setting such as the IPSec policy, selector, and IKE.
Using IPSec(P. 269)
[Off]
[On]
[Port Number Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]
Specify the port number for the pr
otocol used in accordance with the port numbers for the computer, server or other
device.
Changing the Port Number(P. 264)
[LPD]
1 to 515 to 65535
[RA
W]
1 to 9100 to 65535
[WSD Multicast Discovery]
Settings Menu Items
372
1 to 3702 to 65535
[HT
TP]
1 to 80 to 65535
[Multicast Discovery]
1 to 427 to 65535
[POP3]
1 to 110 to 65535
[SNMP]
1 to 161 to 65535
[MTU Size]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings]
If communication slo
ws down due to the size of the packets sent, use this to change the maximum size for outgoing
packets.
[1300]
[1400]
[1500]
Settings Menu Items
373
[External Interface]
9665-070
Specify the settings for USB connections.
* V
alues in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[USB Settings](P. 374)
[USB Settings]
[Menu] [Preferences] [External Interface]
Specify the settings for using the USB ports and USB memory devices.
● Specify
whether to use the USB port for connecting to the computer in [Use as USB Device].
Preventing
Connection to Computer via USB Port(P
. 301)
● Specify whether to use memory media such as USB memory devices in [Use USB Storage Device].
Restricting
Use of Memory Media
(P. 292)
[Use as USB Device]
[Off]
[On]
[Use USB Stor
age Device]
[Off]
[On]
Settings Menu Items
374
[Accessibility]
9665-071
Congur
e control panel screen features such as screen color inversion and message display time to make the screen
easier to see.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Invert Screen Colors](P. 375)
[Brightness](P. 375)
[Contrast] (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 375)
[Message Display Time](P. 375)
[Scrolling Speed] (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 376)
[Cursor Movement Type] (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 376)
[Invert Screen Colors]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Accessibility]
Specify whether light and dark on the contr
ol panel screen are reversed.
Use this setting when the display is still dicult to see even after you have adjusted the brightness.
[Brightness]
(P
. 375)
[Off]
[On]
[Brightness]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Accessibility]
Adjust the brightness of the contr
ol panel screen when it is dicult to see.
5 levels
[Contrast] (Black and White LCD Model)
[Menu] [Preferences] [Accessibility]
Adjust the contr
ast to make the control panel screen easier to view.
7 levels
[Message Display Time]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Accessibility]
Set the number of seconds for which each message is displayed when 2 messages ar
e displayed alternately on the
control panel screen.
1 to 2 to 5 (sec.)
Settings Menu Items
375
[Scrolling Speed] (Black and White LCD Model)
[Menu] [Preferences] [Accessibility]
Set the scr
olling speed when operating the screen.
[Slow]
[Standar
d]
[Fast]
[Cursor Movement Type] (Black and White LCD Model)
[Menu] [Preferences] [Accessibility]
Set the cursor oper
ation when entering text.
Set to [Auto] to move the cursor automatically to the next input eld after entering text. When set to [Manual], you
must press
to move the cursor.
[Auto]
[Manual]
Settings Menu Items
376
[Volume Settings]
9665-0E1
For the black and white L
CD model, set whether the machine emits sounds notifying you of operations and statuses.
Adjusting the Volume(P. 176)
[Entry Tone](P. 377)
[Invalid Entry Tone](P. 377)
[Restock Supplies Tone](P. 377)
[Warning Tone](P. 377)
[Job Done Tone](P. 378)
[Energy Saver Alert](P. 378)
[Entry Tone]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Volume Settings]
Set whether to emit a sound when you pr
ess the keys and buttons on the control panel.
[Off]
[On]
[Invalid Entry Tone]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Volume Settings]
Set whether to emit a sound when an invalid k
ey is pressed, such as when you enter a value outside the setting range.
[Off]
[On]
[Restock Supplies Tone]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Volume Settings]
Set whether to emit a sound when the toner cartridge is nearing the end of its lifetime.
[Off]
[On]
[Warning Tone]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Volume Settings]
Set whether to emit a sound when the machine has a paper jam or other malfunction.
[Off]
[On]
Settings Menu Items
377
[Job Done Tone]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Volume Settings]
Set whether to emit a sound when the print oper
ation on the machine is completed.
[Off]
[On]
[Energy Saver Alert]
[Menu] [Preferences] [Volume Settings]
Set whether to emit a sound when the machine enters and e
xits sleep mode.
[Off]
[On]
Settings Menu Items
378
[Adjustment/Maintenance]
9665-072
Use this setting to adjust the print quality and when cleaning the machine.
[Adjust Image Quality](P. 379)
[Maintenance](P. 379)
[Adjust Image Quality]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance]
Use this setting to adjust the image quality or print position and for special pr
ocessing according to the paper used.
[Adjust Image Quality](P. 380)
[Maintenance]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance]
Carry out maintenance to clean the machine and to contr
ol condensation.
[Maintenance](P. 387)
Settings Menu Items
379
[Adjust Image Quality]
9665-073
Use this setting to adjust the image quality or print position and for special pr
ocessing according to the paper used.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Printer Density](P. 380)
[Toner Save](P. 380)
[Adjust Print Position](P. 380)
[Special Processing](P. 381)
[Printer Density]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]
If printed te
xt or ne lines appear faded, adjust the density.
Adjusting the Print Density(P. 464)
9 levels
[Toner Save]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]
Specify whether to adjust the print quality to save toner.
T
o give priority to print quality, select [Off].
[Off]
[On]
[Adjust Print Position]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]
Adjust the print position if te
xt or images are printed off-center or outside the printable range.
Adjusting the Print
Position
(P. 466)
[Multi-Purpose Tray]
[Adjust V
ertically (Front Side)]
-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))
[Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)]
-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))
[Adjust Vertically (Back Side)]
-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))
[Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)]
-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))
[Drawer 1]
[Adjust Vertically (Front Side)]
-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))
[Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)]
-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))
Settings Menu Items
380
[Adjust Vertically (Back Side)]
-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0
to + 5.0 (mm))
[Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)]
-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))
[Drawer 2]
*1
[Adjust Vertically (Front Side)]
-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))
[Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)]
-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))
[Adjust Vertically (Back Side)]
-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))
[Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)]
-0.20" to 0.00" to + 0.20" (-5.0 to 0.0 to + 5.0 (mm))
*1
May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
[Special Processing]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]
Use a r
ange of processes to resolve problems that arise due to factors such as the paper type, the material used, or its
condition.
[Special Processing](P. 382)
Settings Menu Items
381
[Special Processing]
9665-075
Use a r
ange of processes to resolve problems that arise due to factors such as the paper type, the material used, or its
condition.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Special Paper Processing](P. 382)
[Reduce Ppr. Sticking at Output](P. 384)
[High Humidity Mode](P. 384)
[Low Humidity Mode](P. 384)
[Reduce Ghosting 1](P. 384)
[Rdc Condens. (Consec 2-Sd Prt)] or [Reduce Condensation (Consec. 2-Sd Print)](P. 385)
[Rdc. Wrinkles(Humidity)/Streaks](P. 385)
[Quiet Mode](P. 385)
[Correct Blurry Image](P. 385)
[Rdc Blnk Space Dark. After Rplc Cart.](P. 386)
[Special Paper Processing]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]
Specify special processing for the paper in the following situations:
● If you ar
e using the back of printed paper
● If you are printing on envelopes with a rough surface
● If the paper curls during printing
● If the paper creases or wrinkles when printed
[Manual Back Side Print (2-Sided Only)]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing] [Special Paper
Pr
ocessing]
If you are using paper that has already been printed on, images or text may be blurred. If so, specifying [On] for
that paper source may improve the print results.
* When this is set to [On], if some time has passed since the front side of the paper was printed, or depending
on the operating environment humidity, changes in image quality may occur.
[Multi-Purpose Tray]
[Off]
[On]
[Dr
awer 1]
[Off]
[On]
[Drawer 2]
*1
[Off]
[On]
*1
May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
Settings Menu Items
382
[Rough Surface Envelope Mode]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing] [Special Paper
Pr
ocessing]
Specify [On] if you are printing on envelopes with a rough surface.
* This setting is only available when the paper type is set to [Envelope 2].
* Specifying [On] decreases the printing speed.
* Specifying [On] disables the [Paper Curl Correction] setting.
[Off]
[On]
[Paper Wrinkle Correction]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing] [Special Paper
Pr
ocessing]
Depending on the paper used, printing may cause paper wrinkling. In this event, specifying [On] may correct
the paper wrinkling.
* Specifying [On] may cause faded printing or make printing slower.
[Off]
[On]
[Paper Curl Correction]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing] [Special Paper
Pr
ocessing]
Depending on paper used, the paper may curl during printing. If so, specifying [On] in this setting may alleviate
paper curling.
* Specifying [On] in this setting may lead to faded print or make printing slower.
[Off]
[On]
[Rdc. Tnr Flaking from Heavy Sml. Ppr]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing] [Special Paper
Pr
ocessing]
Printing photos or other halftone images on small-sized heavy paper may result in streaked stains on the back
of the paper. If this occurs, specifying [On] may improve the print results.
* Specifying [On] may make printing slower.
[Off]
[On]
[Reduce Thin Paper Curling]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing] [Special Paper
Pr
ocessing]
The paper may curl when you print on thin paper. If this occurs, specifying [On] may correct the paper curling.
Settings Menu Items
383
* This setting is only available when the paper type is set to [Thin].
* If you specify [On], you will no longer be able to use automatic 2-sided printing with the [Thin] setting.
* Specifying [On] may cause the toner not to adher
e fully to the paper, resulting in faded printing.
[Off]
[On]
[Reduce Ppr. Sticking at Output]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]
In 2-sided printing involving multiple pages, printed paper sheets may stick together. If so, specifying [On] in this
setting may r
educe the likelihood of paper sheets sticking together.
* Specifying [On] in this setting slows down the print speed.
[Off]
[On]
[High Humidity Mode]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]
Printing in a high-humidity envir
onment may cause uneven print density. If so, specifying [On] may improve the print
results.
* Specifying [On] may create variations in the print density in environments with low humidity.
[Off]
[On]
[Low Humidity Mode]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]
Printing in a lo
w-humidity environment may lead to blurred images and/or text. If so, specifying [Mode 1] may correct
the problem. If this does not correct the problem, select [Mode 2]
* Enabling this setting may lead to faint or uneven printing in high-humidity environments.
[Off]
[Mode 1]
[Mode 2]
[Reduce Ghosting 1]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]
If you print on small-sized paper and then continue printing on a lar
ger sized paper, ghost images may appear in the
unprinted sections of the paper. If this occurs, specifying [On] may improve the print results.
* When you select [On], the printing speed may decrease.
Settings Menu Items
384
[Off]
[On]
[Rdc Condens. (Consec 2-Sd Prt)] or [Reduce Condensation (Consec. 2-Sd
Print)]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]
In 2-sided printing, water dr
oplets inside the machine may result in images being printed faintly. If so, specifying [On]
in this setting may reduce the amount of condensation inside the machine.
* Specifying [On] in this setting makes printing slower.
[Off]
[On]
[Rdc. Wrinkles(Humidity)/Streaks]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]
Printing on damp paper may mak
e the paper wrinkle or printing may lead to streaks at the edges of the paper when
printing halftone images such as photos. If this occurs, specifying [On] may improve the print results.
* When you select [On], the printing speed will decrease.
[Off]
[On]
[Quiet Mode]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]
If the oper
ation sound during printing is loud, selecting [On] may reduce the operation sound.
* When you select [On], the printing speed will decrease.
[Off]
[On]
[Correct Blurry Image]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]
Depending on the paper type and oper
ating environment, smudges may appear on the printed paper. If this occurs,
selecting [Mode 1] may improve the print results. If that does not work, try selecting [Mode 2], [Mode 3] and then
[Mode 4] in that order.
* Enabling this setting may reduce the print density or slow down printing. It may also make outlines less distinct or
make them slightly rougher.
[Off]
[Mode 1]
[Mode 2]
[Mode 3]
[Mode 4]
Settings Menu Items
385
[Rdc Blnk Space Dark. After Rplc Cart.]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special Processing]
Black str
eaks may appear immediately after replacing a toner cartridge, and printing may generally be darker when
printing on heavy paper. If this occurs, specifying [On] may improve the print results. This setting is enabled the next
time you replace a toner cartridge.
* If you specify [On], it will take some time for the toner to be evenly distributed immediately after toner cartridge
replacement.
[Off]
[On]
Settings Menu Items
386
[Maintenance]
9665-076
Carry out maintenance to clean the machine and contr
ol condensation.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Clean Fixing Assembly](P. 387)
[Control Condensation](P. 387)
[Clean Fixing Assembly]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance]
Perform this oper
ation to clean the xing assembly if black streaks appear on printed paper following procedures such
as toner cartridge replacement.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 453)
[Control Condensation]
[Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance]
In envir
onments subject to sudden temperature changes, condensation may form and cause images and/or text to be
faint or blurred. If so, specifying [On] may improve the print results.
During condensation removal, a blank sheet of paper may be output without printing correctly. If you set this to [On],
you can set whether to restrict printing.
* If you set this to [On], you must keep the machine ON to continuously remove the condensation.
[Off]
[On]
[Allo
w Job Printing During Process]
[Do Not Allow Job Printing During Process]
Settings Menu Items
387
[Function Settings]
9665-077
Specify the settings for printing and r
eceiving I-Faxes.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Common](P. 388)
[Printer](P. 388)
[Receive](P. 388)
[Access Files] (Touch Panel Model)(P. 388)
[Secure Print](P. 388)
[Common]
[Menu] [Function Settings]
Specify the settings for function oper
ation, such as the paper source and printing.
[Common](P. 390)
[Printer]
[Menu] [Function Settings]
Specify the printer settings.
[Printer](P. 394)
[Receive]
[Menu] [Function Settings]
Specify the settings for I-Fax
es.
[Receive](P. 414)
[Access Files] (Touch Panel Model)
[Menu] [Function Settings]
Specify the settings for using USB memory de
vices.
[Access Files] (Touch Panel Model)(P. 417)
[Secure Print]
[Menu] [Function Settings]
Specify whether to use the Secure Print function, which assigns a PIN for printing. Printing a Document
Secur
ed with a PIN (Secure Print)(P. 204)
● To restrict printing from a computer to Secure Print jobs only, specify [Restrict Printer Jobs] also.
Restricting
Printing fr
om a Computer to Secure Print(P. 296)
● To change the period of time until the print data that was sent with a PIN (secure data) and is temporarily saved
in the memory of the machine is deleted, specify the [Secure Print Deletion Time] setting also.
Changing the
Time Period That Print Data with a PIN (Secur
e Data) Is Saved(P. 208)
Settings Menu Items
388
Touch Panel Model
[Use Secure Print]
[Off]
[On]
[Restrict Printer Jobs]
[Off]
[On]
[Secur
e Print Deletion Time]
10 to 30 to 240 (min.)
Black and White L
CD Model
[Use Secure Print]
[Off]
[On]
[Restrict Printer Jobs]
[Off]
[On]
[Secur
e Print Deletion Time]
10 to 30 to 240 (min.)
Settings Menu Items
389
[Common]
9665-078
Specify the settings for function oper
ations, such as the paper source and printing.
[Paper Feed Settings](P. 390)
[Print Settings](P. 390)
[Paper Feed Settings]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common]
Specify the settings for the paper sour
ce.
[Paper Feed Settings](P. 391)
[Print Settings]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common]
Specify the settings for printing.
[Print Settings](P. 393)
Settings Menu Items
390
[Paper Feed Settings]
9665-079
Specify the settings for the paper sour
ce.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Paper Source Auto Selection] or [Drawer Auto Selection On/Off](P. 391)
[Switch Paper Feed Method](P. 392)
[Paper Source Auto Selection] or [Drawer Auto Selection On/Off]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Paper Feed Settings]
Specify the settings for each function so that the machine automatically selects the corr
ect paper source for the size of
the paper to be printed.
Using the Appropriate Paper Source for Each Function(P. 170)
[Printer]
[Multi-Purpose T
ray]
[Off]
[On]
[Drawer 1]
[Off]
[On]
[Drawer 2]
*1
[Off]
[On]
[Receive]
[Multi-Purpose Tray]
[Off]
[On]
[Drawer 1]
[Off]
[On]
[Drawer 2]
*1
[Off]
[On]
[Other]
[Multi-Purpose Tray]
[Off]
[On]
[Drawer 1]
[Off]
[On]
[Drawer 2]
*1
[Off]
[On]
Settings Menu Items
391
*1
May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
[Switch Paper Feed Method]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Paper Feed Settings]
When printing on paper with a logo, specify the paper loading method for each paper sour
ce.
When this type of paper is used, the default setting is that the paper is loaded differently depending on whether
printing is 1-sided or 2-sided. For the paper source for which [Print Side Priority] is set, always load the paper for 2-
sided printing, regardless of whether printing is 1-sided or 2-sided.
Orientation for Loading Paper with a
Logo(P
. 149)
* If you specify [Print Side Priority] in this setting, 1-sided printing will be slower. If you are using paper without a pre-
printed logo, or if you are not using 2-sided printing for paper with a pre-printed logo, specify [Speed Priority].
[Multi-Purpose Tray]
[Speed Priority]
[Print Side Priority]
[Dr
awer 1]
[Speed Priority]
[Print Side Priority]
[Drawer 2]
*1
[Speed Priority]
[Print Side Priority]
*1
May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
● If you specify [Print Side Priority] for a paper sour
ce containing a paper that cannot be used for 2-sided
printing, that setting is disabled and the machine operates using the [Speed Priority] setting.
Settings Menu Items
392
[Print Settings]
9665-07A
Specify the settings for printing.
* V
alues in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Auto Delete Suspended Jobs](P. 393)
[Auto Delete Suspended Jobs]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Print Settings]
Specify whether to automatically delete the print job when an err
or occurs and printing stops.
If you specify automatic deletion, you can also specify the time before the job is deleted.
Touch Panel Model
[Set This Function]
[Off]
[On]
[Set Time]
0 to 5
to 240 (min.)
Black and White L
CD Model
[Off]
[On]
0 to 5 to 240 (min.)
Settings Menu Items
393
[Printer]
9665-07C
Specify the printer settings.
[Printer Settings](P. 394)
[PDL Selection (Plug and Play)](P. 394)
[Printer Settings]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer]
Specify the settings for printer oper
ation and for processing print data.
[Printer Settings](P. 395)
[PDL Selection (Plug and Play)]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer]
Specify which Page Description Language (PDL) to use when connecting the machine to a computer using Plug and
Play
.
[PDL Selection (Plug and Play)](P. 413)
Settings Menu Items
394
[Printer Settings]
9665-0E2
Specify the settings for printer oper
ation and for processing print data.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Action When Free Paper Size Mismatch]
(P
. 395)
[Copies](P. 396)
[2-Sided Printing](P. 396)
[Default Paper](P. 396)
[Paper Size Override](P. 396)
[Print Quality](P. 396)
[Layout](P. 397)
[Auto Skip Error] or [Auto Error Skip](P. 399)
[Timeout](P. 399)
[Personality](P. 399)
[Escape Tray Mode](P. 400)
[Speed/Prt. Side Priority for 2-Sd] or [Speed/
Print Side Priority for 2-Sided]
(P. 400)
[Prioritize MP Tray] or [Prioritize Multi-Purpose
T
ray](P. 400)
[Check Paper Size in Tray](P. 400)
[Recovery Printing](P. 400)
[UFR II](P. 401)
[PCL](P. 402)
[PS](P. 407)
[Imaging Settings](P. 408)
[PDF](P. 408)
[XPS](P. 410)
If the Control Panel and Printer Driver Have the Same Settings
● Priority is given to the printer driver settings. The contr
ol panel settings are valid for operating systems such
as UNIX, PS, and PCL printing where printer drivers cannot be used and when printing from mobile devices.
[Action When Free Paper Size Mismatch]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
When the paper size of each paper sour
ce is set to [Free Size] in [Paper Settings], you can specify the operation that is
to be performed when the size of the loaded paper is signicantly different from the setting in the printer driver.
If the printer driver's settings do not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing error may occur.
[Multi-Purpose Tray]
[For
ce Output]
[Display Error]
[Drawer 1]
[Force Output]
[Display Error]
[Drawer 2]
*1
[Force Output]
[Display Error]
*1
May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
Settings Menu Items
395
[Copies]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify the number of copies to be printed.
1 to 999
[2-Sided Printing]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify whether to print on both sides of the paper.
[Off]
[On]
[Default Paper]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify the paper size and type to be used when printing fr
om a mobile device or an OS that does not support the
printer driver.
See below for the papers that can be specied.
Usable Paper(P. 23)
[Paper Size Override]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify whether the machine substitutes A4 size paper for Letter size paper and vice-versa when printing.
Specifying [On] in this setting means that if, for e
xample, printing on A4 size paper is specied on the computer and
there is only Letter size paper loaded, the job is printed on Letter size paper instead.
* Print settings are specied in an application or printer driver, but this setting can only be specied on the control
panel.
[Off]
[On]
[Print Quality]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Adjust print quality settings such as the density and r
esolution according to the document being printed and the
purpose.
[Density]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Print Quality]
Adjust the toner density used when printing.
For mor
e precise adjustment, you can adjust the levels of the three density areas in [Fine Adjust].
* Note that you cannot adjust the toner density if [Toner Save] is set to [On].
[Toner Save](P. 397)
Settings Menu Items
396
* [Density] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
T
ouch Panel Model
17 levels
[Fine Adjust]
[High]/[Medium]/[Lo
w]
17 levels
Black and White L
CD Model
[Density]
17 le
vels
[Density (Fine Adjust)]
[High]/[Medium]/[Low]
17 levels
[Toner Save]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Print Quality]
Specify whether to save toner when printing.
Specify [On] in this setting when you only want to check the layout or other nishing prior to the nal print,
such as befor
e printing a very large job.
[Off]
[On]
[Image Renement]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Print Quality]
Specify whether to use smoothing pr
ocessing that will produce smoother printed outlines in text and gures.
[Off]
[On]
[Resolution]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Print Quality]
Specify the r
esolution used to process print data.
To print with a higher resolution, specify [1200 dpi] in this setting.
[1200 dpi]
[600 dpi]
[Layout]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify the gutter dir
ection or margin and the print position.
Settings Menu Items
397
[Binding Location]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Layout]
Specify whether the gutter will be on the long edge or the short edge when the printed document will be
bound using a method such as staples.
Use this setting in conjunction with the [Gutter] setting to adjust the binding position and mar
gins.
[Gutter]
(P
. 398)
● To bind the paper on the long edge, specify [Long Edge] in this setting.
● T
o bind the paper on the short edge, specify [Short Edge] in this setting.
[Long Edge]
[Short Edge]
[Gutter]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Layout]
Offset the print position to adjust the width of the mar
gin that will form the gutter.
Specify the offset width in 0.01" (0.5 mm) increments in the plus (+) or minus (-) offset direction, in accordance
with the edge specied in [Binding Location].
[Binding Location](P. 398)
If [Binding Location] is set to [Long Edge]
Specify the offset width b
y selecting a positive (+) value to bind on the left edge of the paper or a negative (-)
value to bind on the right edge.
Specied as a positive (+) value
Specied as a negative (-) value
If [Binding Location] is set to [Short Edge]
Specify the offset width b
y selecting a positive (+) value to bind on the top edge of the paper or a negative (-)
value to bind on the bottom edge.
Specied as a positive (+) value
Specied as a negative (-) value
-1.90 to 0.00 to +1.90 (inches) or -50.0 to 00.0
to +50.0 (mm)
[Offset Short Edge] or [Offset Long Edge]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Layout]
Offset the print position of te
xt and images. Use this setting when the printed text and images are shifted
towards one edge of the paper or when they extend beyond the print range.
Specify the offset width as a positive (+) or negative (-) value in 0.01" (0.5 mm) increments for each paper edge
direction and print side.
Settings Menu Items
398
To Offset Along the Short Edge (Horizontally)
Specify the adjustment width b
y selecting a positive (+) value to adjust to the right on the paper or a negative
(-) value to adjust to the left on the paper.
To Offset Along the Long Edge (Vertically)
Specify the adjustment width b
y selecting a positive (+) value to adjust down on the paper or a negative (-)
value to adjust up on the paper.
-2.00 to 0.00 to +2.00 (inches) or -50.0 to 00.0
to +50.0 (mm)
[Auto Skip Error] or [Auto Error Skip]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify whether to continue printing if an err
or occurs during printing.
It is recommended that the [Off] setting normally be used so that printing stops when an error occurs.
[Off]
[On]
[Timeout]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify the time fr
om the start of waiting to receive print data until reception times out when print data reception is
interrupted.
5 to 15
to 300 (sec.)
[Personality]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
This should normally be set to [Auto], in which the machine automatically identies the r
eceived print data and
switches to the appropriate operating mode.
If the machine doesn’t switch to the appropriate operating mode for some reason (such as an unknown print data
format), set the operating mode manually.
[Auto]
[PS]
*1
[PCL]
[PDF]
[XPS]
[Imaging]
*1
May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
Settings Menu Items
399
[Escape Tray Mode]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify whether to feed paper fr
om the multi-purpose tray when the appropriate paper is not loaded in the paper
drawer while Paper Source Auto Selection is enabled.
[Off]
[On]
[Speed/Prt. Side Priority for 2-Sd] or [Speed/Print Side Priority for 2-Sided]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify whether to print the last page on one side of the paper when using 2-sided printing and the last page
number is odd, or the last page is blank or cannot be printed and ends with an odd page number.
● T
o print the last page on one side of the paper, select [Speed Priority].
● To print the last page on both sides of the paper, select [Print Side Priority].
When using paper printed with a logo for example, selecting [Print Side Priority] aligns the orientation and print
side with that of other pages.
[Speed Priority]
[Print Side Priority]
[Prioritize MP Tray] or [Prioritize Multi-Purpose Tray]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify whether to give priority to paper feeding fr
om the multi-purpose tray over feeding from the paper drawer
when the machine automatically selects the correct paper source for the size of the paper to be printed.
If you specify [On] in this setting and the same paper is loaded into both the multi-purpose tray and the paper drawer,
paper is fed from the multi-purpose tray.
[Off]
[On]
[Check Paper Size in Tray]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify whether to determine the paper size in the paper sour
ce and the paper size in the printer driver.
When [On] is selected, printing is canceled if the paper sizes do not match.
[Off]
[On]
[Recovery Printing]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Settings Menu Items
400
Specify whether to resume printing from the page where an error that stops printing occurred after the error is
r
esolved.
* When [Off] is selected, the page where the error occurred is not printed. Printing resumes from the next page, but it
may resume two pages later when using 2-sided printing and depending on when the error occurred.
[Off]
[On]
[UFR II]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify the print data pr
ocessing method used when the UFR II Printer Driver is used.
[Halftones]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [UFR II]
Specify the print method used to r
eproduce halftones (intermediate areas between light and dark areas)
according to the print data content.
To print at high denition with clear text outlines
Specify [Resolution]. This is useful for printing les with text and ne lines.
To print at a higher resolution than the [Resolution] setting, specify [High Resolution]. This is useful for
printing data with ne lines and small text, such as CAD les.
* Selecting [High Resolution] may reduce the consistency of textures.
To print with highlighted contrast between light and dark areas
Specify [Color Tone]. This is useful for printing image les such as photos.
To print with smoother gradations and outlines
Specify [Gradation]. This is useful for printing les such as gures that use tonal gradations.
[Resolution/Gradation]
[T
ext]
[Resolution]
[Color Tone]
[Gradation]
[High Resolution]
[Graphics]
[Resolution]
[Color Tone]
[Gradation]
[High Resolution]
[Image]
[Resolution]
[Color Tone]
[Gradation]
[High Resolution]
[Paper Save]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [UFR II]
Specify whether to disable output for blank pages included in the print data.
[Off]
[On]
Settings Menu Items
401
[PCL]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify the PCL printing settings, such as page layout and print quality
.
[Paper Save]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PCL]
Specify whether to disable output for blank pages included in print data.
[Off]
[On]
[Orientation]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PCL]
Select [Portr
ait] (vertical orientation) or [Landscape] (horizontal orientation) as the page orientation.
[Portr
ait]
[Landscape]
[Font Number]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PCL]
Specify the font to use b
y selecting a corresponding font ID number.
* You can print the PCL font list with font samples from the control panel.
Printing and Viewing Reports and
Lists(P
. 326)
LBP247dw
0 to 104
LBP246dw
0 to 54
[Point Size]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PCL]
Set the font size in points, adjustable in 0.25 increments.
● Y
ou can specify this setting only when a proportionally-spaced scalable font is selected in [Font Number].
* [Point Size] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
4.00 to 12.00 to 999.75 (point)
[Pitch]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PCL]
Set the font pitch, or cpi (characters per inch), adjustable in 0.01 increments.
● Y
ou can specify this setting only when a xed-pitch scalable font or a bitmap font is selected in [Font
Number].
Settings Menu Items
402
* [Pitch] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
0.44 to 10.00 to 99.99 (cpi)
[Form Lines]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PCL]
Set the number of lines printed on one page from 5 to 128.
● This
setting is automatically changed according to the settings specied in [Default Paper Size] and
[Orientation].
* Depending on your country or region, the [Form Lines] setting may not be available, or its content or default
setting may be different.
5 to 60 to 128 (lines)
[Character Code]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PCL]
Select the character code that is best suited to the computer you are sending print data from.
● The specied
setting is ignored when the character code is controlled by the font specied in [Font
Number].
LBP247dw
[ARABIC8]
[DESKT
OP]
[GREEK8]
[HEBREW7]
[HEBREW8]
[ISO4]
[ISO6]
[ISO11]
[ISO15]
[ISO17]
[ISO21]
[ISO60]
[ISO69]
[ISOCYR]
[ISOGRK]
[ISOHEB]
[ISOL1]
[ISOL2]
[ISOL5]
[ISOL6]
[ISOL9]
[LEGAL]
[MATH8]
[MCTEXT]
[MSPUBL]
[PC775]
[PC8]
[PC850]
[PC851]
[PC852]
[PC858]
[PC862]
[PC864]
[PC866]
[PC8DN]
[PC8GRK]
[PC8TK]
[PC1004]
[PIFONT]
[PSMATH]
[PSTEXT]
[ROMAN8]
[ROMAN9]
[VNINTL]
[VNMATH]
[VNUS]
[WIN30]
[WINARB]
[WINBALT]
[WINCYR]
[WINGRK]
[WINL1]
[WINL2]
[WINL5]
LBP246dw
Settings Menu Items
403
[DESKTOP]
[ISO11]
[ISO15]
[ISO17]
[ISO21]
[ISO4]
[ISO6]
[ISO60]
[ISO69]
[ISOL1]
[ISOL2]
[ISOL5]
[ISOL6]
[ISOL9]
[LEGAL]
[MA
TH8]
[MCTEXT]
[MSPUBL]
[PC1004]
[PC775]
[PC8]
[PC850]
[PC852]
[PC858]
[PC8DN]
[PC8TK]
[PIFONT]
[PSMATH]
[PSTEXT]
[ROMAN8]
[ROMAN9]
[VNINTL]
[VNMATH]
[VNUS]
[WIN30]
[WINBALT]
[WINL1]
[WINL2]
[WINL5]
[Custom Paper]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PCL]
Specify whether to set a custom paper size.
Specify [On] to set the dimensions of the paper in [X dimension] and [Y dimension].
[Off]
[On]
[Unit of Measure]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PCL]
Select the unit of measur
ement used to set custom paper sizes.
* Depending on your country or region, the [Unit of Measure] setting may not be displayed, or its content or
default setting may be different.
[Millimeter]
[Inch]
[X dimension]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PCL]
Specify the horizontal dimension (short edge) of the custom paper.
* [X dimension] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
3 to 8 1/2 (inches) or 77 to 216
(mm)
[Y dimension]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PCL]
Specify the vertical dimension (long edge) of the custom paper.
Settings Menu Items
404
* [Y dimension] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
5 to 14
(inches) or 127 to 355 (mm)
[Append CR to LF]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PCL]
Select whether to append a carriage return (CR) when the machine receives a line feed code (LF).
● If
[Yes] is selected, the print position moves to the beginning of the next line when the machine receives an
LF code.
● If [No] is selected, the print position moves to the next line, just under the received LF code.
[Yes]
[No]
[Enlarge A4 Print Width]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PCL]
Select whether to e
xpand the width of the printable area of A4 size paper in portrait orientation to that of Letter
size.
[Off]
[On]
[Halftones]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PCL]
Specify the print method used to r
eproduce halftones (intermediate areas between light and dark areas)
according to the print data content.
To print at high denition with clear text outlines
Specify [Resolution]. This is useful for printing les with text and ne lines.
To print at a higher resolution than the [Resolution] setting, specify [High Resolution]. This is useful for
printing data with ne lines and small text, such as CAD les.
* Selecting [High Resolution] may reduce the consistency of textures.
To print with highlighted contrast between light and dark areas
Specify [Color Tone]. This is useful for printing image les such as photos.
To print with smoother gradations and outlines
Specify [Gradation]. This is useful for printing les such as gures that use tonal gradations.
[Resolution/Gradation]
[T
ext]
[Resolution]
[Color Tone]
Settings Menu Items
405
[Gradation]
[High Resolution]
[Gr
aphics]
[Resolution]
[Color Tone]
[Gradation]
[High Resolution]
[Image]
[Resolution]
[Color Tone]
[Gradation]
[High Resolution]
[BarDIMM] (Touch Panel Model)
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PCL]
This setting enables you to print bar codes supported by the Barcode Printing Kit.
● If
[Enable] is selected, the machine will generate bar codes when it receives bar code commands from the
host computer.
● If [Disable] is selected, bar codes will not be generated, even if bar code commands are sent from the host
computer.
* To enable the BarDIMM menu, it is necessary to activate the Barcode Printing Kit. When you are not printing
bar codes, make sure to disable the BarDIMM menu. Otherwise, the processing speed of regular print jobs may
be reduced.
* The default setting is [Disable]. If you activate the Barcode Printing Kit, it changes to [Enable].
[Disable]
[Enable]
[FreeScape] (Touch Panel Model)
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PCL]
Specify the AEC (Alternate Escape Code) to be used for bar code commands when the host computer does not
support the standar
d Escape Code.
* This setting is available only when [BarDIMM] is enabled.
[Off]
[~]
["]
[#]
[$]
[/]
[\]
[?]
[{]
[}]
[|]
Settings Menu Items
406
[PS]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify the PS printing settings such as page layout and print quality
.
* [PS] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
[Job Timeout]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PS]
This setting enables you to specify the amount of time before a job times out.
● If a job has not nished within the set time limit, the job is automatically canceled.
0 to 3600 (sec.)
[Print PS Errors]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PS]
This setting determines whether an err
or page is printed when an error is encountered.
[Off]
[On]
[Halftones]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PS]
Specify the print method used to r
eproduce halftones (intermediate areas between light and dark areas)
according to the print data content.
To print with smoother gradations and outlines
Specify [Resolution]. This is useful for printing les such as gures that use tonal gradations.
To print with highlighted contrast between light and dark areas
Specify [Gradation]. This is useful for printing image les such as photos.
To print at high denition with clear text outlines
Specify [High Resolution]. This is useful for printing les with text and ne lines.
[Resolution/Gradation]
[T
ext]
[Resolution]
[Gradation]
[High Resolution]
[Graphics]
[Resolution]
[Gradation]
[High Resolution]
[Image]
[Resolution]
[Gradation]
[High Resolution]
[Grayscale Conversion]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PS]
Settings Menu Items
407
Specify the conversion method when printing color data in black and white.
● Specify [sRGB] for black and white printing with smooth gr
adations to represent different colors.
● Specify [NTSC] for black and white printing that looks similar to NTSC television images.
● Specify [Uniform RGB] for uniform black and white printing of RGB over the entire document, based on the
brightness.
[sRGB]
[NTSC]
[Uniform RGB]
[PS Password Settings]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PS]
You can specify the password that restricts the use of the control command prepared by the PS printer.
● [SystemPar
amsPassword] is a password that allows changes to the system parameter, and
[StartJobPassword] is a password that allows the startjob and exitserver operators to perform. For more
information, check the PostScript language specications.
* If [StartJobPassword] is set but [SystemParamsPassword] is not set, password check will not be performed
while performing the startjob or exitserver operator.
[SystemParamsPassword]
[StartJobPasswor
d]
[Imaging Settings]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify the print data pr
ocessing method used for printing JPEG or TIFF format image les.
[Halftones]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [Imaging Settings]
Specify the print method used to r
eproduce halftones (intermediate areas between light and dark areas)
according to the image content.
To print with highlighted contrast between light and dark areas
Specify [Gradation]. This is useful for printing image les such as photos.
To print with smoother gradations and outlines
Specify [Resolution]. This is useful for printing les such as gures that use tonal gradations.
To print at high denition with clear text outlines
Specify [High Resolution]. This is useful for printing les with text and ne lines.
[Gr
adation]
[Resolution]
[High Resolution]
[PDF]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify the print data pr
ocessing method used for printing PDF format les.
Settings Menu Items
408
[Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]
Specify whether to enlar
ge or reduce documents to t the paper used for printing.
* If you specify [On] in this setting, documents are enlarged or reduced while maintaining their aspect ratio.
[Off]
[On]
[Enlarge Print Area]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]
Specify whether to print with the print ar
ea enlarged so that it occupies the entire paper, leaving no margins
around the edges of the paper.
* In some documents, specifying [On] in this setting may lead to images being printed with some of the edges
cut off, or to smudging on some parts of the paper.
[Off]
[On]
[N on 1]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]
Specify whether to r
educe the size of a multi-page original and print the pages arranged on one sheet of paper.
To print multiple pages on one sheet (N on 1), select the number of pages to be combined.
Example: To print a 4-page document on one side of the paper
Select [4 on 1].
[Off]
[2 on 1]
[4 on 1]
[6 on 1]
[8 on 1]
[9 on 1]
[16 on 1]
[Print Comments]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]
Specify whether to print the comments in a PDF le.
If you specify [Auto] in this setting, the document and comments
*1
ar
e printed.
*1
This only applies to comments specied for printing within the PDF le.
[Off]
[Auto]
[Halftones]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]
Specify the print method used to r
eproduce halftones (intermediate areas between light and dark areas)
according to the print data content.
To print with smoother gradations and outlines
Settings Menu Items
409
Specify [Resolution]. This is useful for printing les such as gur
es that use tonal gradations.
To print with highlighted contrast between light and dark areas
Specify [Gradation]. This is useful for printing image les such as photos.
To print at high denition with clear text outlines
Specify [High Resolution]. This is useful for printing les with text and ne lines.
[Resolution/Gradation]
[T
ext]
[Resolution]
[Gradation]
[High Resolution]
[Graphics]
[Resolution]
[Gradation]
[High Resolution]
[Image]
[Resolution]
[Gradation]
[High Resolution]
[Grayscale Conversion]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [PDF]
Specify the conversion method when printing color data in black and white.
● Specify [sRGB] for black and white printing with smooth gr
adations to represent different colors.
● Specify [NTSC] for black and white printing that looks similar to NTSC television images.
● Specify [Uniform RGB] for uniform black and white printing of RGB over the entire document, based on the
brightness.
[sRGB]
[NTSC]
[Uniform RGB]
[XPS]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings]
Specify the print data pr
ocessing used for printing XPS format les.
[Halftones]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [XPS]
Specify the print method used to r
eproduce halftones (intermediate areas between light and dark areas)
according to the print data content.
To print with smoother gradations and outlines
Specify [Resolution]. This is useful for printing les such as gures that use tonal gradations.
To print with highlighted contrast between light and dark areas
Specify [Gradation]. This is useful for printing image les such as photos.
To print at high denition with clear text outlines
Specify [High Resolution]. This is useful for printing les with text and ne lines.
[Resolution/Gradation]
[T
ext]
Settings Menu Items
410
[Resolution]
[Gr
adation]
[High Resolution]
[Graphics]
[Resolution]
[Gradation]
[High Resolution]
[Image]
[Resolution]
[Gradation]
[High Resolution]
[Grayscale Conversion]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [XPS]
Specify the conversion method used when printing color data in black and white. This can be set separately for
te
xt, graphics (lines or gures), and images (photos).
● Specify [sRGB] for black and white printing with smooth gradations to represent different colors.
● Specify [NTSC] for black and white printing that looks similar to NTSC television images.
● Specify [Uniform RGB] for uniform black and white printing of RGB over the entire document, based on the
brightness.
[Text]
[sRGB]
[NTSC]
[Uniform RGB]
[Gr
aphics]
[sRGB]
[NTSC]
[Uniform RGB]
[Image]
[sRGB]
[NTSC]
[Uniform RGB]
[Paper Save]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [XPS]
Specify whether to disable output for blank pages included in the print data.
[Off]
[On]
[Compressed Image Output]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [Printer Settings] [XPS]
If the machine runs short of memory during printing, image quality may suffer. Specify whether to continue
printing when this occurs.
● T
o continue printing even with degraded image quality, specify [Output] in this setting.
Settings Menu Items
411
● T
o stop printing and display an error when image quality is severely degraded, specify [Display Error].
[Output]
[Display Err
or]
Settings Menu Items
412
[PDL Selection (Plug and Play)]
9665-07F
Specify which Page Description Language (PDL) to use when the machine is connected to a computer using Plug and
Play
.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Network](P. 413)
[USB](P. 413)
[Network]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Printer] [PDL Selection (Plug and Play)]
Specify the Page Description Language (PDL) to use when the machine is connected to a networked computer
using Plug and Play
.
When connecting the machine, select from the following:
● When connecting as a UFR II printer: [UFR II]
● When connecting as a PCL6 printer: [PCL6]
● When connecting as a PS printer: [PS]
[UFR II]
[PCL6]
[PS]
*1
*1
May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
[USB]
[Menu]
[Function Settings] [Printer] [PDL Selection (Plug and Play)]
Specify the Page Description Language (PDL) to use when the machine is connected to a computer via USB using
Plug and Play
.
● When connecting the machine as a printer, select from the following:
- When connecting as a UFR II printer: [UFR II]
- When connecting as a PCL6 printer: [PCL6]
- When connecting as a PS printer: [PS]
[UFR II]
[PCL6]
[PS]
*1
*1
May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
Settings Menu Items
413
[Receive]
9665-0E3
Specify the settings for r
eceiving I-Faxes.
[Common Settings](P. 414)
[E-Mail Settings](P. 414)
[Common Settings]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive]
Specify the settings for the action when r
eceiving I-Faxes.
[Common Settings](P. 415)
[E-Mail Settings]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive]
Specify the settings for printing r
eceived I-Faxes.
[E-Mail Settings](P. 416)
Settings Menu Items
414
[Common Settings]
9665-07J
Specify the settings for the action when r
eceiving I-Faxes.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Continue Print. When Cart. Low] or [Continue Print. When Amount in Cart.
Low]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive] [Common Settings]
Specify whether to print received I-Faxes when a toner cartridge is low on toner.
● Printing
when a toner cartridge is low on toner may lead to print results that are faint or faded. For this reason,
this should normally be set to [Off]. When this setting is used and toner is low, received I-Faxes are stored in the
machine’s memory.
● If [On] is specied in this setting, received I-Faxes are not stored in the machine’s memory. If this leads to print
results that are too faint to read, you will need to ask the sender to re-send the I-Fax.
[Off]
[On]
Settings Menu Items
415
[E-Mail Settings]
9665-07K
Specify the settings for printing r
eceived I-Faxes.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Print on Both Sides](P. 416)
[RX Print Size](P. 416)
[Print on Both Sides]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive] [E-Mail Settings]
Specify whether to use 2-sided printing for r
eceived I-Faxes.
[Off]
[On]
[RX Print Size]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Receive] [E-Mail Settings]
Specify the paper size for printing r
eceived I-Faxes.
[L
TR]
[LGL]
[FOOLSCAP/FOLIO (215.9x330.2 mm)] or [FOOLSCAP/FOLIO]
[OFICIO (215.9x317.5 mm)] or [OFICIO]
[LETTER (Government) (203.2x266.7 mm)] or [Government-LTR]
[LEGAL (Government) (203.2x330.2 mm)] or [Government-LGL]
[LEGAL (India) (215.0x345.0 mm)] or [India-LGL]
[FOOLSCAP (Australia) (206.0x337.0 mm)] or [AUS-FOOLSCAP]
[OFICIO (Brazil) (215.9x355.0 mm)] or [Brazil-OFICIO]
[OFICIO (Mexico) (215.9x341.0 mm)] or [Mexico-OFICIO]
[A4]
Settings Menu Items
416
[Access Files] (Touch Panel Model)
9665-07L
Specify the settings for using a USB memory de
vice.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Common Settings](P. 417)
[Memory Media Settings](P. 417)
[Screen When Mem. Med. Conn](P. 417)
[Common Settings]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Access Files]
Specify the settings for Memory Media Print.
[Common Settings] (Touch Panel Model)(P. 418)
[Memory Media Settings]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Access Files]
Specify the functions that can be used when a USB memory device is plugged into the machine.
● T
o allow data in a USB memory device to be printed, set [Use Print Function] to [On].
● To restrict the printing of data in a USB memory device, set [Use Print Function] to [Off].
Preventing Use of
Memory Media When Printing (T
ouch Panel Model)(P. 292)
[Use Print Function]
[Off]
[On]
[Screen When Mem. Med. Conn]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Access Files]
Congur
e the settings to display the operation (Memory Media Print) screen when a USB memory device is inserted
into the machine.
[Off]
[On]
Settings Menu Items
417
[Common Settings] (Touch Panel Model)
9665-07R
Specify the settings for Memory Media Print.
* V
alues in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Access Stored Files Settings](P. 418)
[Access Stored Files Settings]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Access Files] [Common Settings]
Specify the settings for printing and displaying les in a USB memory de
vice.
[Change Default Settings (Memory Media Print)]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Access Files] [Common Settings] [Access Stored Files Settings]
Change the default settings for Memory Media Print. Changing the Default Settings (Touch Panel Model)
(P
. 174)
When you press [Reset] in the Memory Media print screen, the settings revert to the values specied here.
[Paper]
[Multi-Purpose T
ray]
[Drawer 1]
[Drawer 2]
*1
[Auto Select Paper (LTR/LGL)]
[Number of Copies]
1 to 999
[2-Sided Printing]
[Off]
[Book Type]
[Calendar Type]
[Print Quality]
[Density]
*1
17 levels
[Fine Adjust]
[High]/[Medium]/[Low]
17 levels
[Toner Save]
[Off]
[On]
[Image Renement]
[Off]
[On]
[Resolution]
[1200 dpi]
[600 dpi]
Settings Menu Items
418
[Set JPEG/TIFF Details]
[Brightness]
5 le
vels
[N on 1]
[Off]
[2 on 1]
[4 on 1]
[Original Type]
[Photo Priority]
[Text Priority]
[Halftones]
[Gradation]
[Error Diffusion]
[Set PDF Details]
[N on 1]
[Off]
[2 on 1]
[4 on 1]
[6 on 1]
[8 on 1]
[9 on 1]
[16 on 1]
[Print Range]
[All Pages]
[Specied Pages]
[Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size]
[Off]
[On]
[Enlarge Print Area]
[Off]
[On]
[Print Comments]
[Off]
[Auto]
[Other Settings]
[Halftones]
[Resolution/Gradation]
[Text]
[Resolution]
[Gradation]
[High Resolution]
[Graphics]
[Resolution]
[Gradation]
[High Resolution]
[Image]
[Resolution]
[Gradation]
Settings Menu Items
419
[High Resolution]
[Gr
ayscale Conversion]
[sRGB]
[NTSC]
[Uniform RGB]
*1
May not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
[Default Display Settings]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Access Files] [Common Settings] [Access Stored Files Settings]
Specify ho
w les in a USB memory device are displayed.
Files in the le selection screen for a USB memory device are displayed as specied here.
Screen for
Selecting Files in USB Memory De
vice (Touch Panel Model)(P. 213)
[Preview]
[Thumbnail]
[Details]
[File Sort Default Settings]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Access Files] [Common Settings] [Access Stored Files Settings]
Specify the display or
der for les in a USB memory device.
[Name (Ascending)]
[Name (Descending)]
[Date/Time (Ascending)]
[Date/Time (Descending)]
[File Name Display Format]
[Menu] [Function Settings] [Access Files] [Common Settings] [Access Stored Files Settings]
Specify the display format for les in a USB memory de
vice.
● Specify [Short File Name] in this setting to use abbreviated le names in the display. File names are
truncated to a maximum of eight characters. Numbers are added to the ends of le names to distinguish
between les with similar names.
● To show the le names in full, specify [Long File Name] in this setting. Up to 40 characters are shown
unabbreviated.
* The character count for le names does not include the le extension.
[Short File Name]
[Long File Name]
Settings Menu Items
420
[Management Settings]
9665-07S
Specify the settings for managing the machine users, the system, and other data.
[User Management](P. 421)
[Device Management](P. 421)
[License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware](P. 421)
[Data Management](P. 421)
[Security Settings](P. 421)
[Initialize All Data/Settings](P. 421)
[User Management]
[Menu] [Management Settings]
Register and manage information on the machine
’s administrator and users.
[User Management](P. 423)
[Device Management]
[Menu] [Management Settings]
Specify and manage the settings for information and oper
ations relating to the machine’s hardware.
[Device Management](P. 425)
[License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware]
[Menu] [Management Settings]
Specify and manage the settings for information and oper
ations relating to the machine’s software.
[License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware](P. 428)
[Data Management]
[Menu] [Management Settings]
Manage or initialize stor
ed data and the machine’s settings.
[Data Management](P. 431)
[Security Settings]
[Menu] [Management Settings]
Specify and manage the security settings, such as the machine
’s authentication functions and system verication.
[Security Settings](P. 433)
[Initialize All Data/Settings]
[Menu] [Management Settings]
Settings Menu Items
421
[User Management]
9665-07U
Register and manage information on the machine
's administrator and users.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[System Manager Information Settings](P. 423)
[Department ID Management](P. 423)
[System Manager Information Settings]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [User Management]
Specify a System Manager ID and System Manager PIN to cr
eate a dedicated administrator account.
If needed, you can also specify the administrator's name.
Use Remote UI from a computer to specify other administrator information, such as the e-mail address.
Setting the
Department ID and PIN for the Administr
ator(P. 249)
* The default settings for the System Manager ID and PIN differ depending on the model.
System Manager ID and
PIN(P
. 9)
[System Manager ID and PIN]
[System Manager ID]
[System Manager PIN]
[System Manager Name]
[Department ID Management]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [User Management]
T
o enhance security and manage function use and costs, assign a Department ID to users and groups that use the
machine.
Authenticating Users and Managing Groups with Department ID (Department ID Management)
(P
. 252)
Touch Panel Model
[Enable Dept. ID Management]
[Off]
[On]
[Allo
w Print Jobs (Unknown IDs)]
[Off]
[On]
[Register/Edit]
[Count Mngt.]
Black and White L
CD Model
Set whether to enable Department ID Management. To register the Department ID and check the usage by
Department ID, use Remote UI from a computer.
[Off]
Settings Menu Items
423
[On]
Settings Menu Items
424
[Device Management]
9665-07W
Specify and manage settings for information and oper
ations relating to the machine’s hardware.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Device Information Settings](P. 425)
[Select Country/Region](P. 425)
[Display Job Log](P. 425)
[Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)] or [Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)](P. 426)
[Notify to Check Paper Settings](P. 426)
[Canon Genuine Mode](P. 427)
[Displ. uniFLOW Online Setup Button] (Touch Panel Model)(P. 427)
[Device Information Settings]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [Device Management]
Specify a name to identify the machine and the installation location.
The information specied her
e appears in the Remote UI Portal page.
Portal Page of Remote UI(P. 319)
[Device Name]
[Location]
[Select Country/Region]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [Device Management]
Specify the country or r
egion where the machine is used. The default setting may vary depending on the setting
selected at initial power-ON.
* Depending on your country or region, the [Select Country/Region] setting may not be available, or its content or
default setting may be different.
[United States (US)]
[Canada (CA)]
[Br
azil (BR)]
[Mexico (MX)]
[Panama (PA)]
[Other]
[Display Job Log]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [Device Management]
Specify whether the logs for printing ar
e shown on the Status Monitor screen.
[Status Monitor] Screen(P. 119)
Checking Usage and Logs with Remote UI(P. 321)
Printing and Viewing Reports and Lists(P. 326)
[Off]
[On]
Settings Menu Items
425
[Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)] or [Displ. Consmbls.
Info (RUI/Toner Status)]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [Device Management]
Specify whether a button that accesses sites for purchasing toner cartridges is displayed in Toner Status and
Remote UI. Y
ou can also specify whether Toner Status is used.
● Specify whether to show the button in Remote UI in [Displ. Cnsmbls. Purch. Btn.(RUI)] or [Displ. Consumables
Purchase Button (RUI)].
● Specify whether to use Toner Status in [Toner Status] in the [Toner Status Settings].
● If you opt to use Toner Status, use [Displ. Cnsmbls. Purch. Btn.(RUI)] or [Displ. Consumables Purchase Button
(RUI)] in the [Toner Status Settings] to specify whether to show the button.
Toner Status sends notication of the remaining amount of toner in the machine to the computer on which the tool is
installed. Download Toner Status from the Canon website for your country/region, and install it on your computer.
https://global.canon/en/support/
* If the machine is supplied with a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM, you can also use this to install Toner Status.
Touch Panel Model
[Displ. Cnsmbls. Purch. Btn.(RUI)]
[Off]
[On]
[T
oner Status Settings]
[Toner Status]
[Off]
[On]
[Displ. Consmbls. Purchase Btn.]
[Off]
[On]
Black and White L
CD Model
[Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)]
[Off]
[On]
[T
oner Status Settings]
[Off]
[On]
[Displ Cnsmbl Purch Btn]
[Off]
[On]
[Notify to Check Paper Settings]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [Device Management]
Settings Menu Items
426
Specify whether the Notify to Check Paper Settings screen appears when the paper drawer is loaded into the machine.
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 139)
[Off]
[On]
[Canon Genuine Mode]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [Device Management]
Specify whether to switch to Canon Genuine Mode.
● Normally
, there is no need to change this setting.
● Your Canon service representative may change this setting. If this setting is not displayed, contact the
machine’s administrator.
[Off]
[On]
[Displ. uniFLOW Online Setup Button] (Touch Panel Model)
[Menu] [Management Settings] [Device Management]
On the [Home] scr
een of the control panel, select whether to display the buttons for installing the uniFLOW Online and
uniFLOW Online Express applications.
[Off]
[On]
Settings Menu Items
427
[License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update
Firmwar
e]
9665-07X
Specify and manage the settings for information and oper
ations relating to the machine’s software.
[Register License](P. 428)
[Remote UI Settings](P. 428)
[Remote Operation Settings] (Touch Panel Model)(P. 428)
[Update Firmware](P. 428)
[Register License]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware]
T
o use the system options with the machine, register your license key.
* [Register License] may not be displayed depending on the model, the installed options, and other settings.
[Remote UI Settings]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware]
Specify the settings for using Remote UI and for Restrict Access for Remote UI.
[Remote UI Settings](P. 430)
[Remote Operation Settings] (Touch Panel Model)
[Menu] [Management Settings] [License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware]
Specify whether to enable r
emote operation.
Specifying [On] displays a screen on the computer that matches the screen on this machine’s touch panel display,
allowing you to congure the machine and run jobs remotely.
* If you specify [On], you should also set a password as a security measure.
[Off]
[On]
[Passwor
d]
[Update Firmware]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware]
Check the machine
’s rmware version and update the rmware via the Internet or a computer.
Updating the Firmware (Touch Panel Model)(P. 333)
Updating the Firmware (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 336)
[Via PC]
[Via Internet]
Settings Menu Items
428
[Version Information]
[Notication] or [Notication Settings]
[Off]
[On]
Settings Menu Items
429
[Remote UI Settings]
9665-07Y
Specify the settings for using Remote UI and for Restrict Access for Remote UI.
* V
alues in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Remote UI] or [Use Remote UI](P. 430)
[Restrict Access] or [Remote UI Access Security Settings](P. 430)
[Remote UI] or [Use Remote UI]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware] [Remote UI Settings]
Specify whether to use Remote UI. Disabling Remote UI(P. 299)
If you opt to use Remote UI, you can also specify whether to use TLS encryption for communication when using
Remote UI. Using TLS(P. 267)
T
ouch Panel Model
[Use Remote UI]
[Off]
[On]
[Use TLS]
[Off]
[On]
Black and White L
CD Model
[Off]
[On]
[Use TLS]
[Off]
[On]
[Restrict Access] or [Remote UI Access Security Settings]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware] [Remote UI Settings]
When using Remote UI, set this setting to [On], and set the Remote UI Access PIN. Setting the PIN to Use for
Remote UI(P
. 298)
[Off]
[On]
[Remote UI Access PIN]
Settings Menu Items
430
[Data Management]
9665-080
Manage or initialize the data and settings on the machine.
* V
alues in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Import/Export](P. 431)
[Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey Prog.] or [Enable Product Extended Survey Program](P. 431)
[Initialize Key and Certicate](P
. 431)
[Initialize Menu](P. 431)
[Import/Export]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [Data Management]
Import or export the various settings.
When importing is completed, the machine r
estarts automatically.
● To import or export using the control panel, use a USB memory device.
Inserting and Removing a USB
Memory De
vice(P. 171)
● To import or export particular items, use Remote UI from a computer.
Importing and Exporting the
Settings(P
. 330)
[Import]
[Export]
[Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey Prog.] or [Enable Product Extended Survey
Program]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [Data Management]
Specify whether to use the Pr
oduct Extended Survey Program (a program for surveying machine usage).
The Product Extended Survey Program is installed at the same time as the drivers. It automatically sends monthly
updates of information on device usage to Canon over a 10-year period. The program does not send personal
information or any information other than that shown above.
[Off]
[On]
[Initialize Key and Certicate]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [Data Management]
Initialize the k
ey and certicate settings and CA certicate settings, and delete all keys and certicates other than pre-
installed ones.
Initializing Specic Settings and Data(P
. 339)
[Initialize Menu]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [Data Management]
Settings Menu Items
431
[Security Settings]
9665-081
Specify and manage security settings such as the machine
’s authentication functions and system verication.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Authentication/Password Settings](P. 433)
[Encryption Settings](P. 433)
[Verify System at Startup](P. 433)
[Authentication/Password Settings]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [Security Settings]
Congur
e the authentication functions for the machine.
[Authentication/Password Settings](P. 435)
[Encryption Settings]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [Security Settings]
Specify whether to r
estrict the use of weak encryption or keys and certicates that use weak encryption.
Touch Panel Model
[Prohibit Use of Weak Encrypt.]
[Off]
[On]
[Pr
ohibit Weak Encryp. Key/Cert.]
[Off]
[On]
Black and White L
CD Model
[Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption]
[Off]
[On]
[Pr
ohibit Key/Cert. with Weak Encryption]
[Off]
[On]
[Verify System at Startup]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [Security Settings]
V
erify that the system and the applications have not been tampered with when starting up the machine or running
applications (Application Library).
If Tampering is Detected
● The machine switches to update standby mode. You need to update the rmware.
Updating the Firmware (Touch Panel Model)(P. 333)
Settings Menu Items
433
[Authentication/Password Settings]
9665-082
Specify the settings for the machine
’s authentication functions.
* Values in bold red text are the default settings for each item.
[Authentication Function Settings](P. 435)
[Authentication Function Settings]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [Security Settings] [Authentication/Password Settings]
Specify the settings for enhanced security using the authentication functions.
[Lock
out] or [Lockout Settings]
[Menu] [Management Settings] [Security Settings] [Authentication/Password Settings] [Authentication
Function Settings]
Specify whether to switch to a state that does not permit login (lock
out) for a set period if authentication fails.
If you use lockout, you can also specify how many consecutive times authentication fails before lockout is
invoked in [Lockout Threshold] and specify the length of the lockout period in [Lockout Period].
* This does not apply to Department ID authentication.
Touch Panel Model
[Enable Lockout]
[Off]
[On]
[Lock
out Threshold]
1 to 10 (time(s))
[Lockout Period]
1 to 60 (min.)
Black and White L
CD Model
[Enable Lockout]
[Off]
[On]
[Lock
out Threshold]
1 to 10 (times)
[Lockout Period]
1 to 60 (min.)
Settings Menu Items
435
Settings that Can Be Imported and Exported
9665-083
Y
ou can view a list of support for importing and exporting the machine's settings.
[Preferences](P. 437)
[Adjustment/Maintenance](P. 442)
[Function Settings](P. 443)
[Management Settings](P. 446)
● See the follo
wing for information on how to import and export data.
Importing and Exporting the Settings(P. 330)
Settings Menu Items
436
[Preferences]
9665-084
Support for importing and e
xporting the [Preferences] is as shown below.
: Can be imported or exported
: Cannot be imported or exported
[Display Settings](P. 437)
[English Keyboard Layout](P. 438)
[Timer/Energy Settings](P. 438)
[Network](P. 438)
[External Interface](P. 440)
[Accessibility](P. 440)
[Volume Settings] (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 440)
[Display Settings]
Setting Import and Export
[Default Screen After Startup/Restoration] or [Default Screen after Startup/Restoration]
[Home Screen Button Display Settings] or [Button Display Order on Home Screen]
[Language]
[Remote UI Language]
[Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch]
[Gram/Pound Switch]
[Display Timing for Cart. Prep.] or [Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.]
[Display Notif. to Clean Fixing Assembly]
[Show Warnings]
[Action When Warning]
[Display IP Address]
Settings Menu Items
437
[English Keyboard Layout]
Setting Import and Export
[English Keyboard Layout]
[Timer/Energy Settings]
Setting Import and Export
[Current Date/Time Settings]
[Date/Time Settings]
[Date Format]
[Time Format]
[Auto Reset Time]
[Function After Auto Reset]
[Auto Sleep Time]
[Auto Sleep Daily Timer]
[Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings]
[Network]
Setting Import and Export
[Select Wired/Wireless LAN]
[Wireless LAN Settings] [Manually Enter Network Name (SSID)] or [Manually Enter Network Name]
[WPS Push Button Mode]
[WPS PIN Code Mode]
[Power Save Mode]
Settings Menu Items
438
Setting Import and Export
[Connection Information]
[Direct Connection Settings]
[Easy Connection via PC] (Touch Panel Model)
[TCP/IP Settings] [IPv4 Settings]
*1
[IPv6 Settings]
[DNS Settings]
*2
[WINS Settings]
[LPD Settings]
[RAW Settings]
[WSD Settings]
[IPP Print Settings]
[Use HTTP]
[Use IPSec]
[Port Number Settings]
[MTU Size]
[SNMP Settings]
[Use Dedicated Port] or [Dedicated Port Settings]
[Dedicated Port Auth. Method] or [Dedicated Port Authentication Method]
[Wait Time for Conn. at Startup] or [Waiting Time for Connection at Startup]
[Ethernet Driver Settings]
[Use IEEE 802.1X] or [IEEE 802.1X Settings]
[Firewall Settings]
Settings Menu Items
439
Setting Import and Export
[Device Settings Management] or [Device Settings Management On/Off]
[Monitoring Service] (Black and White LCD Model)
[RMT-SW]
[Initialize Network Settings]
*1
The [PING Command] is " ."
*2
For the black and white L
CD model, this setting is included in [IPv4 Settings] and [IPv6 Settings].
[External Interface]
Setting Import and Export
[USB Settings]
[Accessibility]
Setting Import and Export
[Invert Screen Colors]
[Brightness]
[Contrast]
*1
[Message Display Time]
[Scrolling Speed]
*1
[Cursor Movement Type]
*1
*1
For the black and white L
CD model only
[Volume Settings] (Black and White LCD Model)
Setting Import and Export
[Entry Tone]
Settings Menu Items
440
Setting Import and Export
[Invalid Entry Tone]
[Restock Supplies Tone]
[Warning Tone]
[Job Done Tone]
[Energy Saver Alert]
Settings Menu Items
441
[Adjustment/Maintenance]
9665-085
Support for importing and e
xporting the [Adjustment/Maintenance] is as shown below.
: Can be imported or exported
: Cannot be imported or exported
[Adjust Image Quality](P. 442)
[Maintenance](P. 442)
[Adjust Image Quality]
Setting Import and Export
[Printer Density]
[Toner Save]
[Adjust Print Position]
[Special Processing]
[Maintenance]
Setting Import and Export
[Clean Fixing Assembly]
[Control Condensation]
Settings Menu Items
442
[Function Settings]
9665-086
Support for importing and e
xporting the [Function Settings] is as shown below.
: Can be imported or exported
: Cannot be imported or exported
[Common](P. 443)
[Printer](P. 443)
[Receive](P. 444)
[Access Files] (Touch Panel Model)(P. 444)
[Secure Print](P. 445)
[Common]
Setting Import and Export
[Paper Feed Settings]
[Print Settings]
[Printer]
Setting Import and Export
[Printer Settings] [Action When Free Paper Size Mismatch]
[Copies]
[2-Sided Printing]
[Default Paper]
[Paper Size Override]
[Print Quality]
[Layout]
[Auto Skip Error] or [Auto Error Skip]
[Timeout]
[Personality]
Settings Menu Items
443
Setting Import and Export
[Escape Tray Mode]
[Speed/Prt. Side Priority for 2-Sd] or [Speed/Print Side Priority for 2-Sided]
[Prioritize MP Tray] or [Prioritize Multi-Purpose Tray]
[Check Paper Size in Tray]
[Recovery Printing]
[UFR II]
[PCL]
[PS]
[Imaging Settings]
[PDF]
[XPS]
[PDL Selection (Plug and Play)] [Network]
[USB]
[Receive]
Setting Import and Export
[Common Settings]
[E-Mail Settings]
[Access Files] (Touch Panel Model)
Setting Import and Export
[Common Settings]
[Memory Media Settings]
Settings Menu Items
444
Setting Import and Export
[Screen When Mem. Med. Conn]
[Secure Print]
Setting Import and Export
[Secure Print]
Settings Menu Items
445
[Management Settings]
9665-087
Support for importing and e
xporting the [Management Settings] is as shown below.
: Can be imported or exported
: Cannot be imported or exported
[User Management](P. 446)
[Device Management](P. 446)
[License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware](P. 447)
[Data Management](P. 447)
[Security Settings](P. 447)
[Initialize All Data/Settings](P. 447)
[User Management]
Setting Import and Export
[System Manager Information Settings]
[Department ID Management]
*1
*1
For the touch panel model, the [Count Mngt.] is " ."
[Device Management]
Setting Import and Export
[Device Information Settings]
[Select Country/Region]
[Display Job Log]
[Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)] or [Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)]
[Notify to Check Paper Settings]
[Canon Genuine Mode]
[Displ. uniFLOW Online Setup Button] (Touch Panel Model)
Settings Menu Items
446
[License/Other] or [Remote UI Settings/Update Firmware]
Setting Import and Export
[Register License]
[Remote UI Settings]
[Remote Operation Settings] (Touch Panel Model)
[Update Firmware]
[Data Management]
Setting Import and Export
[Import/Export]
[Enable Prod. Ext'd Survey Prog.] or [Enable Product Extended Survey Program]
[Initialize Key and Certicate]
[Initialize Menu]
[Security Settings]
Setting Import and Export
[Authentication/Password Settings]
[Encryption Settings]
[Verify System at Startup]
[Initialize All Data/Settings]
Setting Import and Export
[Initialize All Data/Settings]
Settings Menu Items
447
Maintenance
Maintenance .....................................................................................................................................................
449
Cleaning the Machine ....................................................................................................................................... 451
Cleaning the Surface of the Machine ............................................................................................................ 452
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ....................................................................................................................... 453
Replacing Consumables .................................................................................................................................... 454
Replacing the Toner Cartridge ...................................................................................................................... 455
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables ....................................................................................... 460
List of Consumables ..................................................................................................................................... 461
Adjusting the Print Quality and Position ......................................................................................................... 463
Adjusting the Print Density ........................................................................................................................... 464
Adjusting the Print Position .......................................................................................................................... 466
Moving the Machine .......................................................................................................................................... 469
Maintenance
448
Maintenance
9665-088
T
o ensure safe and convenient use of the machine, daily maintenance that includes cleaning and replacement of
consumables is required.
If you notice a deterioration in the print quality or frequent paper jams, perform cleaning and adjustment to improve
it.
Performing Maintenance Operations
In addition to performing regular maintenance, operations are required according to the machine status and
print quality
.
Cleaning
Regularly clean the various parts of the machine. If the paper becomes dirty, or the print quality has
deteriorated, clean the parts causing the problem according to the symptoms.
Cleaning the Machine(P. 451)
Replacing Consumables
If a message about consumables appears on the scr
een of the control panel or Remote UI, or the print
quality deteriorates, replace the consumables.
Replacing Consumables(P. 454)
Adjusting the Print Quality and Position
If the print density varies, the image position is shifted, or the print r
esults are otherwise not as expected,
adjust the print quality and position according to the symptoms that occur.
Adjusting the Print Quality and Position(P. 463)
Changing the Installation Location
When moving the machine, perform the prescribed procedure to prevent accident or damage.
Moving the Machine(P. 469)
Maintenance and Inspections
● The minimum holding period for performance parts for r
epairs and toner cartridge is seven (7) years after
production of the machine model is discontinued.
● If a problem occurs during operation, see the following:
Troubleshooting(P. 473)
If the problem still cannot be resolved or you think the machine needs to be checked, contact your dealer or
service representative. If the Problem Persists(P. 559)
Installation
● If you nd the machine's operation to be noisy in some operating modes or due to your surroundings, we
recommend setting up the machine in a separate location from your oce.
● Water droplets (condensation) may form inside the machine if the room where the machine is installed is
heated rapidly, or if the machine is moved from a cool, dry location to a warm, humid location. Using the
machine under these conditions may result in problems such as paper jams, poor print quality, or faults. Let
the machine adjust to the ambient temperature and humidity for at least two hours before use.
● Machines with storage devices such as hard disks may not operate properly when used at high altitudes
(3,280 yards (3,000 meters) above sea level or higher).
◼ See Also
Checking the Requir
ed Troubleshooting Solutions from the Symptoms
Maintenance
449
You can check the required maintenance operations and settings according to the status of the machine and
the err
or description.
Paper Jams(P. 474)
Problems with Printing Results(P. 485)
Paper and Paper Feeding Problems(P. 507)
Vie
wing the Number of Printed Pages and Machine Usage
As a guide to when to perform maintenance, you can view the number of printed pages using the counter
and view the usage of the machine from reports and lists.
Monitoring the Usage(P. 323)
Maintenance
450
Cleaning the Machine
9665-089
T
o ensure ecient use of the machine, regularly clean the various parts and keep them clean.
If the paper becomes dirty, or the print quality has deteriorated, clean the parts causing the problem according to the
symptoms.
Parts to Clean on a Regular Basis
Clean the surface (
) frequently.
Cleaning the Surface of the Machine(P. 452)
Parts to Clean When Symptoms Occur
If the paper becomes dirty or print quality has deterior
ated, clean the xing assembly (
) inside the
machine.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 453)
Maintenance
451
Cleaning the Surface of the Machine
9665-08A
Regularly clean the surface of the machine to k
eep it clean. In addition, remove dust from the ventilation holes to
ensure ecient ventilation and cooling of the inside of the machine.
● Black dots in the surface of the machine ar
e due to the use of recycled materials and are not a quality
problem.
1
Turn OFF the power and remove the power cord from the outlet.
Turning OFF the
Machine(P
. 105)
Turning OFF the machine deletes any data waiting to be printed.
2
Wipe the surface of the machine and the ventilation slots.
● Wipe with a soft cloth soak
ed in water or diluted neutral detergent and wrung out.
● For the location of the ventilation slots, see the part names on the front of the machine.
Front Side(P. 13)
3
Allow the parts to fully dry.
4
Plug the power cord into the outlet, and turn ON the machine.
Turning ON the
Machine(P. 104)
Maintenance
452
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly
9665-08C
If the printout is smudged, the xing assembly may be dirty
. In this case, you can clean the xing assembly using
paper.
The xing assembly cannot be cleaned when data is waiting to be printed or a toner cartridge has reached the end of
its lifetime.
Required Preparations
● Check that ther
e is enough amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridge.
Checking the Remaining
Amount of Consumables
(P. 460)
Touch Panel Model(P. 453)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 453)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance] [Clean Fixing Assembly].
➠ The available paper sizes and types ar
e displayed on the conrmation screen.
3
Check that available paper is loaded, and then press [OK]
[Start].
➠ The paper is fed to the machine, and cleaning starts.
When cleaning is completed, a sheet of paper with a printed image (pattern) is output.
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press
. [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Adjustment/Maintenance]
[Maintenance] [Clean Fixing
Assembly] .
➠ The available paper sizes and types ar
e displayed on the conrmation screen.
3
Check that available paper is loaded, and then press
.
➠ The paper is fed to the machine, and cleaning starts.
When cleaning is completed, a sheet of paper with a printed image (pattern) is output.
Maintenance
453
Replacing Consumables
9665-08F
If a message about consumables appears on the scr
een of the control panel or Remote UI, or the print quality
deteriorates, replace the consumables.
You can view the current remaining amount of consumables on the control panel and Remote UI. For the consumable
item names and number of sheets that can be printed, see the list of consumables.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 455)
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 460)
List of Consumables(P. 461)
Maintenance
454
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
9665-08H
Replace the toner cartridge at the appr
opriate time according to messages that appear and a change in print quality.
Before replacing the toner cartridge, check the precautions in Important Safety Instructions.
Manuals of the
Machine(P
. 563)
When to Replace the Toner Cartridge(P. 456)
Before Replacing Toner Cartridge(P. 456)
Replacing Toner Cartridge(P. 458)
● Do not touch the contacts ( ) inside the machine. Doing so may result in a fault.
● Be sur
e to hold the toner cartridge using the handle.
● Do not touch the toner cartridge memory ( ) or the electrical contacts ( ). To avoid scratching the
surface of the drum inside the machine or e
xposing it to light, do not open the drum protective shutter (
).
Maintenance
455
When to Replace the Toner Cartridge
When a Message Appears on the Scr
een of the Control Panel or Remote UI
Follow the message on the screen to prepare a new toner cartridge and replace the old one. Print quality
may suffer if you continue using the toner cartridge without replacing it.
For details about the message and how to resolve it, see the following:
A Message Appears(P. 537)
When Print Quality Deterior
ates
If printouts show any of the symptoms below, the toner cartridge is near the end of their lifetime. It is
recommended to replace the toner cartridge even if a message does not appear.
Streaks appear
Printing is uneven
Toner smudges and splatters appear
White spots appear
Partially faded
The entire background is darkened
Before Replacing Toner Cartridge
Perform the follo
wing procedure before replacing the toner cartridge. The message on the screen may disappear, and
the print quality may improve.
1
Open the front cover.
Maintenance
456
2
Remove the toner cartridge.
3
Shake the toner cartridge ve or six times to e
venly distribute the toner inside the
cartridge.
4
Install the toner cartridge.
Fully push it in until it cannot go any further.
5
Close the front cover.
Maintenance
457
Replacing Toner Cartridge
1
Open the front cover.
2
Remove the toner cartridge.
3
Remove the replacement toner cartridge from the protective case.
4
Shake the toner cartridge ve or six times to e
venly distribute the toner inside the
cartridge.
Maintenance
458
5
Install the toner cartridge.
Fully push it in until it cannot go any further.
6
Close the front cover.
Maintenance
459
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables
9665-08J
Y
ou can view the percentage of the current remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge in increments of 10%.
Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge, for example, to see if you need to prepare a new toner
cartridge before printing a large volume document.
* The displayed value for the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge is for reference and may not indicate
the actual amount remaining.
This section describes how to view this information using the control panel.
You can also check this information using Remote UI from a computer.
Managing the Machine from a Computer
(Remote UI)
(P. 315)
Touch Panel Model(P. 460)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 460)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Status Monitor] in the [Home] screen or other location.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Device Information] [Cartridge Information].
➠ The remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge is displayed.
3
Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge.
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
1
Press the Status Monitor key (
) on the control panel. Control Panel of Black and
White L
CD Model(P. 18)
2
Press [Device Status]
[Cartridge Level] .
➠ The r
emaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge is displayed.
3
Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge.
● Y
ou can congure the settings to notify you to prepare a new toner cartridge when the current toner
cartridge reaches a specied amount.
[Display Timing for Cart. Prep.] or [Displ. Timing for Cartridge
Pr
ep. Notif.](P. 348)
Maintenance
460
List of Consumables
9665-08K
The item names of the machine consumables and number of sheets that can be printed ar
e shown below.
In addition, precautions must be taken when handling and storing consumables. See also "Important Safety
Instructions."
Manuals of the Machine(P. 563)
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine Toner, Cartridge and Parts is
r
ecommended.
◼ T
oner Cartridge
Supplied Toner Cartridge
The average number of sheets that can be printed
*1
with the supplied toner cartridge is sho
wn below.
*1
The aver
age yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19752" (the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner
cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer
components" issued by International Organization for Standardization (ISO)) when printing A4 size plain paper with the
default print density setting.
3,000 sheets (LBP247dw)
1,500 sheets (LBP246dw)
Replacement T
oner Cartridge
The Canon genuine toner cartridge for replacement and average number of sheets that can be printed
*1
ar
e
shown below.
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
*1
The aver
age yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19752" (the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner
cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer
components" issued by International Organization for Standardization (ISO)) when printing A4 size plain paper with the
default print density setting.
Canon Cartridge 070
3,000 sheets
Canon Cartridge 070 H
10,200 sheets
Store toner cartridges as described below. Storing toner cartridges in an improper location or environment may
cause pr
oblems such as data loss.
Maintenance
461
● Stor
e unopened until immediately prior to use.
● Do not store toner cartridges upright or upside down.
● Do not store toner cartridges in the following locations:
- Locations exposed to open ames
- Locations exposed to direct sunlight or bright light for ve minutes or more
- Locations exposed to excessively salty air
- Locations heavily exposed to corrosive gases (e.g. aerosol sprays or ammonia)
- Very hot and/or humid locations
- Locations subject to dramatic changes in temperature and humidity likely to cause condensation
- Very dusty locations
- Locations within the reach of children
- Locations close to products affected by magnetism (e.g. oppy disks or disk drives)
● Store the packaging material safely for future use. It will be needed for situations such as storing the
machine with the toner cartridges removed.
● Canon reserves the right to reposition, reshape, add, or remove packaging material without notice.
● Store toner cartridges in the following conditions:
- Storage temperature range: 32 - 95 °F (0 - 35 °C)
- Storage humidity range: 35% to 85% RH (relative humidity, condensation-free)
*1
*1 Even within the approved storage humidity range, water droplets (condensation) may develop inside the toner
cartridge if the temper
atures inside and outside the toner cartridge differ. Condensation will adversely affect the print
quality.
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges
● Please be awar
e that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit
toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any
malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see https://global.canon/ctc/ .
● The toner cartridge may need to be r
eplaced before reaching the average number of sheets that can be
printed depending on the installation environment, paper size to be printed, and original type.
Maintenance
462
Adjusting the Print Quality and Position
9665-08L
If the print density varies, the image position is shifted, or the print r
esults are otherwise not as expected, adjust the
print quality and position according to the symptoms that occur.
Printed image is too light/dark.
Adjusting the Print Density(P. 464)
Printed position is closer to one side or sticking out. Adjusting the Print Position(P. 466)
Maintenance
463
Adjusting the Print Density
9665-0E4
If print r
esults are too dark or too faint, adjust the print density.
Use the control panel to perform adjustment. You cannot perform adjustment using Remote UI from a computer.
Touch Panel Model(P. 464)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 464)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Printer Density].
3
Adjust the density.
Specify [+] to increase the density and [-] to reduce it.
4
Press [Apply].
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press
. [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Adjustment/Maintenance]
[Adjust Image Quality] [Printer
Density] .
Maintenance
464
3
Adjust the density.
Specify [+] to increase the density and [-] to reduce it.
4
Press .
Maintenance
465
Adjusting the Print Position
9665-08U
If te
xt or images are printed off-center or outside of the printable range, you can adjust the print position to improve
printing results.
You can specify the adjustment direction and width for each paper source and print side (front and back side).
Use the control panel to perform adjustment. You cannot perform adjustment using Remote UI from a computer.
Touch Panel Model(P. 466)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 467)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Adjust Print Position].
➠ The [Adjust Print Position] screen is displayed.
3
Select the paper source for which you want to adjust the print position.
4
Select a combination of the adjustment direction and print side.
Example:
When adjusting the print position of the front side of the paper in the vertical direction
Select [Adjust Vertically (Front Side)].
5
Enter the adjustment value, and press [Apply].
Maintenance
466
Specify the adjustment direction using + and -, and specify the adjustment width in units of 0.01" (0.1 mm).
◼ Black and White L
CD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press
. [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
2
Press [Adjustment/Maintenance]
[Adjust Image Quality] [Adjust Print
Position] .
➠ The [Adjust Print Position] scr
een is displayed.
3
Select the paper source for which you want to adjust the print position.
4
Select a combination of the adjustment direction and print side.
Example:
When adjusting the print position of the front side of the paper in the vertical direction
Select [Adjust Vertically (Front Side)].
5
Enter the adjustment value, and press
.
Specify the adjustment direction using + and -, and specify the adjustment width in units of 0.01" (0.1 mm).
When Adjusting Vertically
Specify the adjustment width b
y selecting a positive value to adjust down on the paper or a negative value to
adjust up on the paper.
Maintenance
467
When Adjusting Horizontally
Specify the adjustment width b
y selecting a positive value to adjust to the right on the paper or a negative
value to adjust to the left on the paper.
Maintenance
468
Moving the Machine
9665-08W
The machine is a heavy object. When mo
ving the machine for cleaning or to change locations, be sure to perform the
procedure below to prevent injury, accident, or damage to the machine.
● If the machine is to be tr
ansported for relocation, removals, etc., take the following steps to prevent damage
and faults during transportation:
- Remove the toner cartridge.
- Securely pack the machine in the original packaging (box) and packing materials.
1
Turn OFF the machine.
Turning OFF the Machine(P. 105)
Turning OFF the machine deletes any data waiting to be printed.
2
Unplug the power cord in the order shown.
3
Unplug all cables and cords connected to the machine.
* The number of connected cables and cords varies depending on the usage environment.
4
When moving the machine a long distance, remove the toner cartridge to prevent
spilling of toner.
Replacing Toner Cartridge(P. 458)
5
Pull out the paper drawer.
Maintenance
469
Make sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage the
paper dr
awer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
6
Close the front cover, multi-purpose tray, and any other covers or trays.
7
Grab the lift handles, and lift up the machine to move it.
● The machine is a heavy object. For the dimensions and weight of the machine, see the basic specications.
Basic Specications(P
. 29)
● When the optional Cassette Feeding Module-AH is installed, remove it and move it separately, rather than
lifting it with the machine.
8
Gently lower the machine.
For the installation procedure after moving, see "Setup Guide."
Manuals of the Machine(P. 563)
Maintenance
470
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................
473
Paper Jams ......................................................................................................................................................... 474
Paper Jams Inside the Machine .................................................................................................................... 476
Paper Jams in a Paper Source ....................................................................................................................... 481
Paper Jams That Occur Repeatedly ............................................................................................................... 483
Problems with Printing Results ........................................................................................................................ 485
Toner Smudges and Splatters Appear .......................................................................................................... 487
Streaks Appear ............................................................................................................................................. 488
Printing Is Uneven ........................................................................................................................................ 490
Printed Paper Is Blank .................................................................................................................................. 492
Smudge Marks Appear on the Edge of Printouts .......................................................................................... 493
Text or Images Are Blurry ............................................................................................................................. 494
Printouts Have Ghost Images ....................................................................................................................... 496
Printouts Are Faded ...................................................................................................................................... 498
The Edge of the Page Is Not Printed ............................................................................................................. 500
The Background Is Generally Dark ............................................................................................................... 501
White Spots Appear ...................................................................................................................................... 502
Smudge Marks Appear on the Back Side of Printouts ................................................................................... 504
Printouts Are Skewed ................................................................................................................................... 505
The Printed Barcode Cannot be Scanned ..................................................................................................... 506
Paper and Paper Feeding Problems ................................................................................................................. 507
Paper Creases ............................................................................................................................................... 508
Paper Curls ................................................................................................................................................... 510
Paper Is Not Fed or Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together .......................................................................... 511
Setting Up .......................................................................................................................................................... 512
The Machine Connected via WSD Port Is Not Displayed During Driver Installation ...................................... 513
Cannot Connect to Wireless LAN .................................................................................................................. 514
Network ............................................................................................................................................................. 515
Cannot Switch to Wireless LAN ..................................................................................................................... 516
Cannot Find the Print Server to Connect to .................................................................................................. 518
Cannot Connect to a Shared Printer ............................................................................................................. 519
Cannot Find the IP Address of the Machine .................................................................................................. 520
AirPrint Does Not Work ................................................................................................................................ 521
Printing .............................................................................................................................................................. 522
Troubleshooting
471
Cannot Print .................................................................................................................................................
523
Cannot Print (Wireless LAN) ................................................................................................................... 524
Cannot Print (Wired LAN) ....................................................................................................................... 526
Cannot Print (USB Connection) .............................................................................................................. 528
Cannot Print (via Print Server) ................................................................................................................ 529
Printing Is Slow ............................................................................................................................................. 530
Management Functions and Environment Settings ....................................................................................... 531
Cannot Access Remote UI ............................................................................................................................. 532
Changing the Volume of the Conrmation Sound and Warning Tone .......................................................... 533
Changing the Time Until Sleep Mode ........................................................................................................... 534
Lost Department ID or PIN for the Administrator ......................................................................................... 535
Checking the Items That Can Be Congured on the Machine and Their Settings ......................................... 536
A Message Appears ........................................................................................................................................... 537
An Error Code Is Displayed ................................................................................................................................ 554
If the Problem Persists ...................................................................................................................................... 559
Troubleshooting
472
Troubleshooting
9665-08X
This chapter describes ho
w to troubleshoot problems and answers frequently asked questions.
Select an item to check from the contents or the list below.
You can click [
] at the top of the screen to search for the message or error code (three-digit number starting with #)
that appears on the contr
ol panel, and check how to troubleshoot problems.
◼ Frequently Asked Questions
Lost Department ID or PIN for the Administrator(P. 535)
Cannot Print(P. 523)
[The memory is full.] Is Displayed on the Control Panel, and the Operation Cannot Be Performed.(P. 553)
◼ Fr
equently Asked Questions about Operations
I Want to Print on an Envelope.
Load the envelope in the multi-purpose tray, taking care to check the orientation of the envelope and that
the correct side faces up.
Then, set the paper size and type according to the placed envelope.
Next, use the print driver of the computer to set the paper size of the document and the paper size to print,
and then perform printing.
Preparations and Orientation for Loading Envelopes(P. 147)
Specifying the Paper Size and Type(P. 153)
Printing from a Computer(P. 199)
Troubleshooting
473
Paper Jams
9665-0E5
If paper jams in the machine, [Paper jammed.] appears on contr
ol panel. Press [Next] or
, and follow the displayed
instructions on ho
w to clear the paper jam.
Touch Panel Model
Black and White LCD Model
For details about clearing paper jams from various parts of the machine, see below.
Multi-purpose Tray, and Paper Drawer
Paper Jams in a Paper Source(P. 481)
Output Tray, inside the machine, 2-sided transport guide, and Rear Side
Paper Jams Inside the Machine(P. 476)
Do not forcibly remove the jammed paper from the machine.
● For
cibly removing the paper may result in personal injury or damage parts of the machine. If you cannot
remove the paper, contact your dealer or service representative.
If the Problem Persists(P. 559)
Troubleshooting
474
When All Paper Jams Have Been Cleared
● Immediately r
emove your hands from the machine and optional equipment so that your clothing and hands
do not get caught in the rollers.
When clearing paper jams, do not turn the power OFF.
● Data being printed is er
ased when you turn the power OFF.
When the Paper Gets Torn
● Be sure to remove it so that no pieces remain.
Troubleshooting
475
Paper Jams Inside the Machine
9665-0E6
Remo
ve the jammed paper from the location where it occurred. If the paper tears, ensure that no pieces are left
behind.
Paper jam inside the machine or in the rear side(P. 476)
Paper jam in the 2-sided transport guide(P. 479)
Paper jam inside the machine or in the rear side
Removing paper jammed inside the machine or in the rear side.
If you cannot remove the paper, do not try to remove it forcibly. Check the control panel, and remove the jammed
paper from another location.
1
Open the front cover
2
Remove the toner cartridge
3
Removing paper jammed inside the machine
1
While holding the green knob on the front, lift up the transport guide
Troubleshooting
476
Do not release the transport guide until you have returned it to its original position in step 3.
2
Gently pull out the paper.
3
Slowly return the transport guide to its original position
4
While holding the green knob at the back, lift up the transport guide
Do not release the transport guide until you have returned it to its original position in step 6.
5
Gently pull out the paper.
6
Slowly return the transport guide to its original position
Troubleshooting
477
4
Removing paper jammed in the rear side
1
Open the rear cover.
2
Gently pull out the paper.
Pull the jammed paper out in whichever direction makes removal easiest.
3
Close the rear cover.
5
Install the toner cartridge
6
Close the rear cover.
➠ The message [Paper jammed.] disappears, and printing r
esumes automatically.
If printing does not resume automatically, try printing again.
If Paper Jams Occur Repeatedly
● Check the status of the machine and paper. Paper Jams That Occur Repeatedly(P. 483)
Troubleshooting
478
Paper jam in the 2-sided transport guide
If you cannot remove the paper, do not try to remove it forcibly. Check the control panel, and remove the jammed
paper from another location.
1
Pull out the paper drawer
Always hold the paper drawer with both hands and pull it out gently. If you pull the drawer out with only one
hand, it may be too heavy to hold, causing it to fall and be damaged.
2
While holding the green knob, lower the 2-sided transport guide
3
Gently pull out the paper
4
Return the 2-sided transport guide
Close it rmly until you hear a click.
Troubleshooting
479
5
Load the paper drawer into the machine
6
Press [Next] on the control panel. When [Is all of the jammed paper removed?]
appears, pr
ess [Yes].
For the black and white LCD model, when [Is all of the jammed paper removed?] appears, press [Yes]
.
➠ The message [Paper jammed.] disappears, and printing r
esumes automatically.
If printing does not resume automatically, try printing again.
If Paper Jams Occur Repeatedly
● Check the status of the machine and paper.
Paper Jams That Occur Repeatedly(P. 483)
Troubleshooting
480
Paper Jams in a Paper Source
9665-091
Remo
ve the jammed paper from the location where it occurred. If the paper tears, be sure to remove the parts so that
no pieces remain.
Paper Jams in the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 481)
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer(P. 481)
Paper Jams in the Multi-purpose Tray
Remove the jammed paper from the multi-purpose tray or inside the machine.
If you cannot remove the paper, do not try to remove it forcibly. Check the control panel, and remove the jammed
paper from another location.
1
If there is other paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray, remove that paper.
2
Gently pull out the paper.
3
Press [Next] on the control panel. When [Is all of the jammed paper removed?]
appears, pr
ess [Yes].
For the black and white LCD model, when [Is all of the jammed paper removed?] appears, press [Yes]
.
➠ The message [Paper jammed.] disappears, and printing r
esumes automatically.
If printing does not resume automatically, try printing again.
If Paper Jams Occur Repeatedly
● Check the status of the machine and paper.
Paper Jams That Occur Repeatedly(P. 483)
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer
Remo
ve the paper loaded in the paper drawer.
If you cannot remove the paper, do not try to remove it forcibly. Check the control panel, and remove the jammed
paper from another location.
1
Pull out the paper drawer, and remove it while lifting the front side.
Troubleshooting
481
Always hold the paper drawer with both hands and pull it out gently. If you pull the drawer out with only one
hand, it may be too heavy to hold, causing it to fall and be damaged.
2
Gently pull out the paper.
3
Load the paper drawer into the machine.
4
If the optional Cassette Feeding Module-AH is installed, remove the paper while
follo
wing 1 to 3 above.
5
Press [Next] on the control panel. When [Is all of the jammed paper removed?]
appears, pr
ess [Yes].
For the black and white LCD model, when [Is all of the jammed paper removed?] appears, press [Yes]
.
➠ The message [Paper jammed.] disappears, and printing r
esumes automatically.
If printing does not resume automatically, try printing again.
If Paper Jams Occur Repeatedly
● Check the status of the machine and paper. Paper Jams That Occur Repeatedly(P. 483)
Troubleshooting
482
Paper Jams That Occur Repeatedly
9665-092
T
roubleshoot by checking the items below.
Are There Paper Scraps or Foreign Objects Inside the Machine?
Remove any paper scraps or foreign objects. Paper Jams(P. 474)
Ar
e You Using Appropriate Paper?
Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.
Usable Paper(P. 23)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Is Paper Loaded Corr
ectly?
● Fan the paper thor
oughly in small batches so that it is not stuck together.
● Align the edges by tapping the paper on a at surface a few times before loading the paper.
Loading
Paper(P
. 138)
● Make sure the loaded paper does not exceed the load limit line or load limit guide (
).
Paper Drawer
Multi-purpose Tray
● Check that the paper guides ar
e aligned with the markings and are not too loose or too tight.
Paper Drawer
Multi-purpose Tray
Do Paper Jams Occur When Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper?
Flatten the edges of the paper to thoroughly remove any curls.
* When printing on the back side of printed paper, you can only use paper printed with this machine. Do not
use paper printed with another printer or multifunction machine, as this can cause paper jams or damage the
machine.
Troubleshooting
483
Problems with Printing Results
9665-093
If printouts sho
w any of the symptoms below, check how to troubleshoot the problem based on the symptom.
Toner Smudges and Splatters
Appear
(P. 487)
Streaks Appear(P. 488) Printing Is Uneven(P. 490)
Printed Paper Is Blank(P. 492) Smudge Marks Appear on the
Edge of Printouts(P
. 493)
Text or Images Are
Blurry(P
. 494)
Printouts Have Ghost
Images(P
. 496)
Printouts Are Faded(P. 498) The Edge of the Page Is Not
Printed(P
. 500)
Troubleshooting
485
Toner Smudges and Splatters Appear
9665-094
T
roubleshoot by checking in the following order:
Step 1: Checking the Paper(P. 487)
Step 2: Checking the Toner Cartridge(P. 487)
Step 3: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine(P. 487)
Step 4: Checking the Maintenance Status(P. 487)
Step 1: Checking the Paper
Are You Using Appropriate Paper?
Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.
Usable Paper(P. 23)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Step 2: Checking the Toner Cartridge
Check the Remaining Amount of Toner in the Toner Cartridge.
Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge and replace the cartridge that is low on toner.
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 460)
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 455)
* Depending on the usage condition of the machine, the actual r
emaining amount of toner may be lower than
indicated or the parts may be deteriorated. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Step 3: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine
Ar
e You Using the Machine in an Environment with Low Humidity?
Setting [Low Humidity Mode] to [Mode 1] may solve the problem. If that does not work, select [Mode 2].
T
ouch Panel Model
[Home] screen on the control pane l [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image
Quality] [Special Processing] [Low Humidity Mode] [Mode 1] or [Mode 2]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control pane l [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image
Quality] [Special Processing] [Low Humidity Mode] [Mode 1] or [Mode 2]
* Enabling this setting may reduce the density or create fading in a humid environment.
Step 4: Checking the Maintenance Status
Have You Cleaned the Fixing Assembly?
These symptoms may occur when the xing assembly is dirty
. In this case, clean the xing assembly.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 453)
Troubleshooting
487
Streaks Appear
9665-095
T
roubleshoot by checking in the following order:
Step 1: Checking the Paper(P. 488)
Step 2: Checking the Toner Cartridge(P. 488)
Step 3: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine(P. 488)
Step 4: Checking the Maintenance Status(P. 489)
Step 5: Checking for Streaking at the Paper Edges(P. 489)
Step 1: Checking the Paper
Are You Using Appropriate Paper?
Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.
Usable Paper(P. 23)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Step 2: Checking the Toner Cartridge
Check the Remaining Amount of Toner in the Toner Cartridge.
Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge, and replace any toner cartridge, as needed.
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 460)
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 455)
* Depending on the usage condition of the machine, the actual r
emaining amount of toner may be lower than
indicated or the parts may be deteriorated. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Step 3: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine
Are You Using the Machine in an Environment with Sudden Temperature Changes?
Sudden temperature changes can create condensation, which can result in faded or blurry images and text.
Setting [Contr
ol Condensation] to [On] may solve the problem.
Touch Panel Model
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance] [Control
Condensation] [On]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance]
[Maintenance] [Control Condensation] [On]
* During condensation removal, a blank sheet of paper may be output without being printed correctly. If you
set this to [On], you can set whether to r
estrict printing.
* If you set this to [On], you must keep the machine ON to continuously remove the condensation. The Auto
Shutdown Time setting is disabled.
Troubleshooting
488
Is the Machine Installed in a Location Subject to Strong Wind Such as from an Air
Conditioner?
If so, adjust the air direction and volume of the air conditioner.
If that does not work, setting [Switch Paper Feed Method] to [Print Side Priority] may impr
ove the problem.
Touch Panel Model
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Paper Feed Settings] [Switch
Paper Feed Method] [Print Side Priority]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Paper Feed
Settings] [Switch Paper Feed Method] [Print Side Priority]
* When you select [Print Side Priority], the printing speed for 1-Sided printing will decrease.
Step 4: Checking the Maintenance Status
Have You Cleaned the Fixing Assembly?
These symptoms may occur when the xing assembly is dirty
. In this case, clean the xing assembly.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 453)
Step 5: Checking for Streaking at the Paper Edges
Do Streaks Appear at the Paper Edges?
Setting [Rdc. Wrinkles(Humidity)/Streaks] to [On] may solve the problem.
T
ouch Panel Model
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality] [Special
Pr
ocessing]
[Rdc. Wrinkles(Humidity)/Streaks] [On]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image
Quality] [Special Processing] [Rdc. Wrinkles(Humidity)/Streaks] [On]
* Specifying [On] decreases the printing speed.
Troubleshooting
489
Printing Is Uneven
9665-096
T
roubleshoot by checking in the following order:
Step 1: Checking the Paper(P. 490)
Step 2: Checking the Toner Cartridge(P. 490)
Step 3: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine(P. 490)
Step 1: Checking the Paper
Are You Using Appropriate Paper?
Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.
Usable Paper(P. 23)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Step 2: Checking the Toner Cartridge
Check the Remaining Amount of Toner in the Toner Cartridge.
Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge and replace the cartridge that are low on toner.
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 460)
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 455)
* Depending on the usage condition of the machine, the actual r
emaining amount of toner may be lower than
indicated or the parts may be deteriorated. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Step 3: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine
Ar
e You Using the Machine in an Environment with Sudden Temperature Changes?
Sudden temperature changes can create condensation, which can result in faded or blurry images and text.
Setting [Contr
ol Condensation] to [On] may solve the problem.
Touch Panel Model
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance] [Control
Condensation] [On]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance]
[Maintenance] [Control Condensation] [On]
* During condensation removal, a blank sheet of paper may be output without being printed correctly. If you
set this to [On], you can set whether to r
estrict printing.
* If you set this to [On], you must keep the machine ON to continuously remove the condensation. The Auto
Shutdown Time setting is disabled.
Is the Machine Installed in a Location Subject to Strong Wind Such as from an Air
Conditioner?
If so, adjust the air direction and volume of the air conditioner.
If that does not work, setting [Switch Paper Feed Method] to [Print Side Priority] may impr
ove the problem.
Troubleshooting
490
Touch Panel Model
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Paper Feed Settings] [Switch
Paper Feed Method] [Print Side Priority]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Paper Feed
Settings] [Switch Paper Feed Method] [Print Side Priority]
* When you select [Print Side Priority], the printing speed for 1-Sided printing will decrease.
Troubleshooting
491
Printed Paper Is Blank
9665-097
T
roubleshoot by checking the items below.
Is Condensation Removal Being Performed?
Check the control panel, and wait for condensation removal to nish.
Troubleshooting
492
Smudge Marks Appear on the Edge of Printouts
9665-098
T
roubleshoot by checking in the following order:
Are You Using Appropriate Paper?
● Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and r
eplace it with appropriate paper, as needed.
Usable Paper(P. 23)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
● Set the paper size and type corr
ectly according to the loaded paper.
Specifying the Paper Size and
T
ype(P. 153)
Are You Printing to the Edge of the Paper Without Margins?
This symptom may occur when the margin is set to none in the printer driver. To print with this machine, a
mar
gin of 1/4" (5 mm) (3/8" (10 mm) at the top and bottom of an envelope) is required.
On the [Printing preferences] screen of the printer driver, congure the following setting to provide a margin.
[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]
Have You Cleaned the Fixing Assembly?
These symptoms may occur when the xing assembly is dirty
. In this case, clean the xing assembly.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 453)
Troubleshooting
493
Text or Images Are Blurry
9665-099
T
roubleshoot by checking the following steps:
Step 1: Checking the Paper(P. 494)
Step 2: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine(P. 494)
Step 1: Checking the Paper
Are You Using Appropriate Paper?
Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.
Usable Paper(P. 23)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Is the Paper Stained Accor
ding to the Paper Type or Usage Environment?
Setting [Correct Blurry Image] to [Mode 1] may solve the problem. If that does not work, try specifying [Mode
2], [Mode 3] and then [Mode 4] in sequence.
T
ouch Panel Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]
[Special Processing] [Correct Blurry Image] select the mode
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image
Quality] [Special Processing] [Correct Blurry Image] select the mode
* Enabling this setting may lower the print density or slow down printing. It may also make outlines less distinct
or mak
e them slightly rougher.
Step 2: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine
Ar
e You Using the Machine in an Environment with Sudden Temperature Changes?
Sudden temperature changes can create condensation, which can result in faded or blurry images and text.
Setting [Contr
ol Condensation] to [On] may solve the problem.
Touch Panel Model
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance] [Control
Condensation] [On]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance]
[Maintenance] [Control Condensation] [On]
* During condensation removal, a blank sheet of paper may be output without being printed correctly. If you
set this to [On], you can set whether to r
estrict printing.
* If you set this to [On], you must keep the machine ON to continuously remove the condensation. The Auto
Shutdown Time setting is disabled.
Troubleshooting
494
Are You Using the Machine in an Environment with Low Humidity?
Setting [Low Humidity Mode] to [Mode 1] may solve the problem. If that does not work, specify [Mode 2].
T
ouch Panel Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]
[Special Processing] [Low Humidity Mode] [Mode 1] or [Mode 2]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image
Quality] [Special Processing] [Low Humidity Mode] [Mode 1] or [Mode 2]
* Enabling this setting may reduce the density or create fading in a humid environment.
Troubleshooting
495
Printouts Have Ghost Images
9665-09A
T
roubleshoot by checking the following steps:
Step 1: Checking the Paper and Toner Cartridge(P. 496)
Step 2: Checking the Occurrence of Ghost Images(P. 496)
Step 3: Checking the Maintenance Status of the Machine(P. 497)
Step 1: Checking the Paper and Toner Cartridge
Are You Using Appropriate Paper?
Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.
Usable Paper(P. 23)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Have the T
oner Cartridge Reached the End of Their Lifetime?
Parts inside the toner cartridge may have deteriorated. If this symptom occurs, it is recommended to replace
the toner cartridge r
egardless of the remaining amount of toner or messages displayed.
Replacing the
T
oner Cartridge(P. 455)
Step 2: Checking the Occurrence of Ghost Images
Do Ghost Images Appear on the Same Page?
Setting [High Humidity Mode] to [On] may solve the problem.
T
ouch Panel Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]
[Special Processing] [High Humidity Mode] [On]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust
Image Quality] [Special Processing] [High Humidity Mode] [On]
* Specifying [On]may lead to variations in the print density in environments with low humidity.
Do Ghost Images Appear with Str
eaks?
If you print on small-sized paper and then continue printing on a larger sized paper, ghost images may appear
in the unprinted sections of the paper. In this e
vent, setting [Reduce Ghosting 1] to [On] may improve the print
results.
Touch Panel Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]
[Special Processing] [Reduce Ghosting 1] [On]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image
Quality] [Special Processing] [Reduce Ghosting 1] [On]
Troubleshooting
496
* When you select [On], the printing speed may decrease.
Step 3: Checking the Maintenance Status of the Machine
Have You Cleaned the Fixing Assembly?
These symptoms may occur when the xing assembly is dirty
. In this case, clean the xing assembly.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 453)
Troubleshooting
497
Printouts Are Faded
9665-09C
T
roubleshoot by checking the following steps:
Step 1: Checking the Paper and Toner Cartridge(P. 498)
Step 2: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine(P. 498)
Step 1: Checking the Paper and Toner Cartridge
Are You Using Appropriate Paper?
● Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and r
eplace it with appropriate paper, as needed.
Usable Paper(P. 23)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
● Set the paper size and type corr
ectly according to the loaded paper.
Specifying the Paper Size and
T
ype(P. 153)
Is Printing Faded When Printing Envelopes?
When printing on envelopes with a rough surface, setting [Rough Surface Envelope Mode] to [On] may solve the
pr
oblem.
Touch Panel Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]
[Special Processing] [Special Paper Processing] [Rough Surface Envelope Mode] [On]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image
Quality] [Special Processing] [Special Paper Processing] [Rough Surface Envelope
Mode] [On]
* This setting is only available when the paper type is set to [Envelope 2].
* Specifying [On] decr
eases the printing speed.
* Specifying [On] disables the [Paper Curl Correction] setting.
Have the Toner Cartridge Reached the End of Their Lifetime?
Parts inside the toner cartridge may have deteriorated. If this symptom occurs, it is recommended to replace
the toner cartridge r
egardless of the remaining amount of toner or messages displayed.
Replacing the
T
oner Cartridge(P. 455)
* Depending on the usage condition of the machine, the actual remaining amount of toner may be lower than
indicated or the parts may be deteriorated. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Step 2: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine
Ar
e You Using the Machine in an Environment with Sudden Temperature Changes?
Sudden temperature changes can create condensation, which can result in faded or blurry images and text.
Setting [Contr
ol Condensation] to [On] may solve the problem.
Touch Panel Model
Troubleshooting
498
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance] [Control
Condensation] [On]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance]
[Maintenance] [Control Condensation] [On]
* During condensation removal, a blank sheet of paper may be output without being printed correctly. If you
set this to [On], you can set whether to r
estrict printing.
* If you set this to [On], you must keep the machine ON to continuously remove the condensation. The
automatic shutdown setting is disabled.
Is the Machine Installed in a Location Subject to Strong Wind Such as from an Air
Conditioner?
If so, adjust the air direction and volume of the air conditioner.
If that does not work, setting [Switch Paper Feed Method] to [Print Side Priority] may impr
ove the problem.
Touch Panel Model
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Paper Feed Settings] [Switch
Paper Feed Method] [Print Side Priority]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Paper Feed
Settings] [Switch Paper Feed Method] [Print Side Priority]
* When you select [Print Side Priority], the printing speed for 1-Sided printing will decrease.
Troubleshooting
499
The Edge of the Page Is Not Printed
9665-09E
T
roubleshoot by checking in the following order:
Are You Using Appropriate Paper?
Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.
Usable Paper(P. 23)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Ar
e the Paper Guides Correctly Aligned with the Paper?
Paper guides that are aligned but too loose or too tight can cause part of the page to not be printed. Check the
paper guides, and align them with the width of the paper. Loading Paper(P. 138)
Ar
e You Printing to the Edge of the Paper Without Margins?
This symptom may occur when the margin is set to none in the printer driver. To print with this machine, a
mar
gin of 1/4" (5 mm) (3/8" (10 mm) at the top and bottom of an envelope) is required.
On the [Printing preferences] screen of the printer driver, congure the following setting to provide a margin.
[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]
Troubleshooting
500
The Background Is Generally Dark
9665-09F
T
roubleshoot by checking in the following order:
Are You Using the Machine in an Appropriate Environment?
● Re-install the machine in an appr
opriate environment.
Moving the Machine(P. 469)
● Keep the toner cartridge in a suitable location and try printing again after 2-3 hours. If the pr
oblem persists,
replace the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 455)
Troubleshooting
501
White Spots Appear
9665-09H
T
roubleshoot by checking the following steps:
Step 1: Checking the Paper(P. 502)
Step 2: Checking the Toner Cartridge(P. 502)
Step 3: Checking the Occurrence of White Spots(P. 502)
Step 4: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine(P. 503)
Step 1: Checking the Paper
Are You Using Appropriate Paper?
Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.
Usable Paper(P. 23)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Ar
e You Using Paper That Has Absorbed Moisture?
Check the precautions, and replace the paper with dry paper.
Precautions When Handling Paper(P. 27)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Step 2: Checking the Toner Cartridge
Check the Remaining Amount of Toner in the Toner Cartridge.
Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge and replace the cartridge that are low on toner.
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 460)
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 455)
* Depending on the usage condition of the machine, the actual r
emaining amount of toner may be lower than
indicated or the parts may be deteriorated. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Step 3: Checking the Occurrence of White Spots
Ar
e Dark Characters and Lines Hollowed Out?
Setting [High Humidity Mode] to [On] may solve the problem.
T
ouch Panel Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]
[Special Processing] [High Humidity Mode] [On]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image
Quality] [Special Processing] [High Humidity Mode] [On]
* Specifying [On] may lead to variations in the print density in environments with low humidity.
Troubleshooting
502
Step 4: Checking the Usage Environment of the Machine
Are You Using the Machine in an Environment with Sudden Temperature Changes?
Sudden temperature changes can create condensation, which can result in faded or blurry images and text.
Setting [Contr
ol Condensation] to [On] may solve the problem.
Touch Panel Model
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Maintenance] [Control
Condensation] [On]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance]
[Maintenance] [Control Condensation] [On]
* During condensation removal, a blank sheet of paper may be output without being printed correctly. If you
set this to [On], you can set whether to r
estrict printing.
* If you set this to [On], you must keep the machine ON to continuously remove the condensation. The
automatic shutdown setting is disabled.
Are You Using the Machine in a Humid Environment?
Setting [High Humidity Mode] to [On] may solve the problem.
T
ouch Panel Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]
[Special Processing] [High Humidity Mode] [On]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image
Quality] [Special Processing] [High Humidity Mode] [On]
* Specifying [On] may lead to variations in the print density in environments with low humidity.
Troubleshooting
503
Smudge Marks Appear on the Back Side of Printouts
9665-0E7
T
roubleshoot by checking in the following order:
Are You Using Paper That Is Smaller Than the Size of the Print Data?
Replace with paper that is the same size as the print data. Loading Paper(P. 138)
Does staining occur when you print photos or other halftone images on small-sized
heavy paper?
Setting [Rdc. Tnr Flaking from Heavy Sml. Ppr] to [On] may solve the problem.
T
ouch Panel Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]
[Special Processing] [Special Paper Processing] [Rdc. Tnr Flaking from Heavy Sml. Ppr] [On]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust
Image Quality] [Special Processing] [Special Paper Processing] [Rdc. Tnr Flaking
fr
om Heavy Sml. Ppr]
[On]
* Specifying [On] may make printing slower.
Have Y
ou Cleaned the Fixing Assembly?
These symptoms may occur when the xing assembly is dirty
. In this case, clean the xing assembly.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 453)
Troubleshooting
504
The Printed Barcode Cannot be Scanned
9665-0E8
T
roubleshoot by checking in the following order:
Are You Using a Very Small Barcode or One With Thick Lines?
● Enlar
ge the barcode.
● If the barcode lines are perpendicular to the output feed direction, rotate the image 90° so that the lines are
parallel.
Try using Barcode Adjustment Mode
Setting [Barcode Adjustment Mode] to [Mode 1] in the printer driver may solve the problem. If that does not
work, try selecting [Mode 2] and then [Mode 3] in sequence.
● Specify the settings belo
w in the [Printing preferences] screen of the printer driver.
[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Barcode Adjustment Mode] select the mode
* When this setting is enabled, the print density may decrease.
● If setting [Bar
code Adjustment Mode] to [Mode 3] does not work, changing the [Printer Density] may solve
the problem.
Adjusting the Print Density(P. 464)
Troubleshooting
506
Paper Creases
9665-0E9
T
roubleshoot by checking the items below.
Is Paper Loaded Correctly?
● Mak
e sure the loaded paper does not exceed the load limit line or load limit guide (
).
Paper Drawer
Multi-purpose Tray
● Check that the paper guides ar
e aligned with the markings and are not too loose or too tight.
Paper Drawer
Multi-purpose Tray
Are You Using Paper That Has Absorbed Moisture?
Check the precautions, and replace the paper with dry paper.
Precautions When Handling Paper(P. 27)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Ar
e You Using Appropriate Paper?
Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.
Usable Paper(P. 23)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Does This Occur When Printing on Plain Paper or Thin Paper?
Setting [Paper Wrinkle Correction] to [On] may solve the problem.
T
ouch Panel Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]
[Special Processing] [Special Paper Processing] [Paper Wrinkle Correction] [On]
Black and White LCD Model
Troubleshooting
508
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust
Image Quality] [Special Processing] [Special Paper Processing] [Paper Wrinkle
Corr
ection]
[On]
Specifying [On] may lead to faded printouts or slower printing speeds.
Troubleshooting
509
Paper Curls
9665-09S
T
roubleshoot by checking the items below.
Are You Using Appropriate Paper?
● Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and r
eplace it with appropriate paper, as needed.
Usable Paper(P. 23)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
● Set the paper size and type corr
ectly according to the loaded paper.
Specifying the Paper Size and
T
ype(P. 153)
● Setting [Paper Curl Correction] to [On] may improve the problem.
Touch Panel Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust Image Quality]
[Special Processing] [Special Paper Processing] [Paper Curl Correction] [On]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Adjustment/Maintenance] [Adjust
Image Quality] [Special Processing] [Special Paper Processing] [Paper Curl
Corr
ection]
[On]
* When you select [On], this may result in faded printouts and slower printing speeds.
● Setting [Switch Paper Feed Method] to [Print Side Priority] may impr
ove the problem.
Touch Panel Model
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Paper Feed Settings]
[Switch Paper Feed Method] [Print Side Priority]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Function Settings] [Common] [Paper
Feed Settings] [Switch Paper Feed Method] [Print Side Priority]
* When you select [Print Side Priority], the printing speed for 1-Sided printing will decrease.
● Load the paper with the side to be printed (paper fr
ont and back) reversed.
* In rare cases, the symptom may worsen depending on the paper used. In this case, print on the original
side of the paper.
Are You Using Paper That Has Absorbed Moisture?
Try the following in the order below:
● Check the pr
ecautions, and replace the paper with dry paper.
Precautions When Handling Paper(P. 27)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
● Change the paper type setting to a thinner paper. Specifying the Paper Size and Type(P. 153)
Troubleshooting
510
Paper Is Not Fed or Two or More Sheets Are Fed
T
ogether
9665-09U
T
roubleshoot by checking the items below.
Are You Using Appropriate Paper?
Check whether the paper in the machine is usable, and replace it with appropriate paper, as needed.
Usable Paper(P. 23)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Is Paper Loaded Corr
ectly?
● Fan the paper thor
oughly in small batches so that it is not stuck together.
● Align the edges by tapping the paper on a at surface a few times before loading the paper.
Loading
Paper(P
. 138)
● Do not load paper of different sizes or types together.
Troubleshooting
511
Setting Up
9665-09X
This is a list of pr
oblems that can occur during setup of the machine. Check how to troubleshoot the problem based on
the symptom.
◼ Problems During Driver Installation
The Machine Connected via WSD Port Is Not Displayed During Driver Installation(P. 513)
◼ Pr
oblems with Wireless LAN and Wired LAN Connection
Cannot Connect to Wireless LAN
Check whether the machine can connect to the network.
Cannot Connect to Wireless LAN(P. 514)
Cannot Connect to Wir
ed LAN
The IP address setting may have failed. Set the IP address again.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
Cannot Connect to Wir
eless LAN and Wired LAN at the Same Time
You cannot connect the machine to a wireless LAN and wired LAN at the same time. You can connect to USB
and wireless LAN or USB and wired LAN at the same time.
◼ Problems with USB Connection
The Computer Cannot Communicate with the Machine
Try the following:
● Replace the USB cable. If the USB cable is long, replace it with a short cable.
● If you are using a USB hub, connect the machine directly to the computer using a USB cable.
Troubleshooting
512
The Machine Connected via WSD Port Is Not Displayed
During Driver Installation
9665-09Y
T
roubleshoot by checking the items below.
Check the Settings of the Machine.
Congure the settings belo
w if they have not been congured.
The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
WSD Printing and Multicast Discovery Settings
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [WSD
Settings] [Edit] select the [Use WSD Printing] and [Use Multicast Discovery] checkboxes [OK] restart
the machine.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congur
e the
settings.
[WSD Settings](P. 371)
Selecting the Page Description Language
Select the page description language (PDL) of the installed driver.
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode [Settings/Registration] [Printer Settings] [PDL Selection
(Plug and Play)] [Edit] select the PDL in [Network] [OK] restart the machine.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur
e the
settings.
[Network](P. 413)
Check the OS Network Settings.
Congure the settings belo
w if they have not been congured.
In Windows, click [ ] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Network & Internet] [Status] [Change connection
pr
operties]
[Network pr
ole]
[Private]
Check Whether the Driver Is Installed.
Use the following procedure to check whether the driver of the machine is displayed.
In Windows, click [ ] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners] check whether the
driver is displayed.
If the driver is displayed, it is installed. In this case, uninstall the driver, and then reinstall it.
For details about uninstalling and installing drivers, see the driver manual at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
Troubleshooting
513
Cannot Connect to Wireless LAN
9665-0A0
T
roubleshoot by checking the status of the computer, wireless LAN router (access point), and machine with the steps
below.
Step 1: Checking the Status of the Computer and Wireless LAN Router(P. 514)
Step 2: Checking the Status of the Machine and Wireless LAN Router(P. 514)
Step 3: Reconnecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 514)
Step 1: Checking the Status of the Computer and Wireless LAN Router
Have You Congured the Settings of the Computer and Wireless LAN Router?
Congure the r
equired settings if they have not been congured.
Are the Power Cables and Ethernet Cable Connected Correctly?
If any cables are connected incorrectly or disconnected, connect them correctly.
Is the Po
wer of Wireless LAN Router On?
If you cannot establish a connection even if the power is on, turn off the power of the computer and router and
turn it on again.
Step 2: Checking the Status of the Machine and Wireless LAN Router
Is the Power of the Machine ON?
If the power is ON, turn OFF the power and turn it ON again.
Is the Location Appr
opriate?
● The machine and wir
eless LAN router should be installed in a location without walls or other obstructions
between the devices and within range of 164' (50 m).
● Do not install near a microwave oven, cordless telephone, or other device that generates radio waves.
Step 3: Reconnecting to a Wireless LAN
Connect to the wir
eless LAN using the connection type according to your wireless LAN router.
Connecting to a
Wir
eless LAN(P. 58)
Troubleshooting
514
Network
9665-0A1
This is a list of pr
oblems that can occur with the network. Check how to troubleshoot the problem based on the
symptom.
Cannot Switch to Wireless LAN(P. 516)
Cannot Find the Print Server to Connect to(P. 518)
Cannot Connect to a Shared Printer(P. 519)
Cannot Find the IP Address of the Machine(P. 520)
AirPrint Does Not Work(P. 521)
Troubleshooting
515
Cannot Switch to Wireless LAN
9665-0A2
Use the network settings to switch fr
om wired LAN connection to wireless LAN connection.
Touch Panel Model(P. 516)
Black and White LCD Model(P. 516)
◼ T
ouch Panel Model
1
On the control panel, press [Menu] in the [Home] screen.
[Home] Screen(P. 116)
2
Press [Preferences] [Network] [Select Wired/Wireless LAN].
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press [Log In]. System
Manager ID and PIN(P
. 9)
3
Press [Wireless LAN].
➠ The message [Settings congur
ed.] appears.
4
Connect the machine to the wireless LAN.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
5
Install the driver to the computer that will use the machine.
When switching the machine from wired LAN connection to wireless LAN connection, any installed drivers
must be uninstalled and then r
einstalled.
For details about uninstalling and installing drivers, see the driver manual at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
◼ Black and White LCD Model
1
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and press
. [Home]
Scr
een(P. 116)
Press [Preferences]
[Network] [Select Wired/Wireless LAN] .
➠ The [Select Wir
ed/Wireless LAN] screen is displayed.
If the login screen appears, enter the System Manager ID and PIN, and then press
. System Manager
ID and PIN(P
. 9)
3
Press [Wireless LAN].
➠ The message [Settings applied.] appears.
Troubleshooting
516
4
Connect the machine to the wireless LAN.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
5
Install the driver to the computer that will use the machine.
When switching the machine from wired LAN connection to wireless LAN connection, any installed drivers
must be uninstalled and then r
einstalled.
For details about uninstalling and installing drivers, see the driver manual at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
Troubleshooting
517
Cannot Find the Print Server to Connect to
9665-0A3
T
roubleshoot by checking the items below.
Are the Print Server and Computer Connected Correctly?
● Check the network settings of the print server and computer, and mak
e sure they are connected correctly.
● If they are connected using an Ethernet cable, make sure the cable is connected correctly.
Is the Print Server Started?
Start the print server if it has not been started.
Ar
e there Any Restrictions with Connecting to the Print Server?
Check with the administrator of the print server, and ask for permission, if needed.
Is Network Disco
very Enabled? (Windows)
Enable network discovery if not enabled. Enabling Network Discovery(P. 569)
Troubleshooting
518
Cannot Find the IP Address of the Machine
9665-0A5
Vie
w the IP address using the following procedure:
Touch Panel Model
Vie
wing the IPv4 Address
[Home] screen on the control panel [Status Monitor] [Network Information] [IPv4] view the
setting.
Viewing the IPv6 Address
[Home] screen on the control panel [Status Monitor] [Network Information] [IPv6] view the
setting.
Black and White LCD Model
Vie
wing the IPv4 Address
on the control panel [Network Information] [IPv4] view the setting.
Viewing the IPv6 Address
on the control panel [Network Information] [IPv6] view the setting.
If the IP Address Is Displayed as "0.0.0.0"
● A suitable IP addr
ess is not set. Set the IP address again.
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 78)
Troubleshooting
520
AirPrint Does Not Work
9665-0A6
T
roubleshoot by checking the items below.
Is the Power of the Machine ON?
If the machine is ON, restart the machine, and try AirPrint again. Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
Does an Err
or Message Appear on the control panel?
Follow the instructions of the error message on the screen to x the pr
oblem.
A Message Appears(P. 537)
When Using a Mac, Is it Corr
ectly Connected to the Machine?
Connect the Mac to the network on the same LAN as the machine. Setting Up the Network(P. 53)
When connecting via USB
, directly connect the Mac to the USB port for computer connection on the back of the
machine with a USB cable.
Rear Side(P. 15)
Ar
e You Required to Enter the Department ID and PIN to Print from a Computer? (When
Using Department ID Management on the Machine)
If you are required to enter a Department ID and PIN to print from a computer, the machine blocks printing
fr
om an unknown Department ID, so AirPrint cannot be used. To enable use of AirPrint, cancel blocking of
printing when the Department ID is unknown.
Enabling Department ID Management(P. 256)
Have the Functions Usable with AirPrint Been Restricted?
If the protocol (IPP or Network Link Scan) for use with AirPrint has been disabled to restrict functions, cancel
this r
estriction to enable the use of AirPrint.
Setting the Functions and Security to Be Used with
AirPrint(P
. 232)
Is Bonjour Enabled on Your Apple Device?
Enable Bonjour if it is not enabled. For details, see the manual of your Apple device.
Troubleshooting
521
Printing
9665-0A7
This is a list of pr
oblems that can occur when printing. Check how to troubleshoot the problem based on the symptom.
Cannot Print(P. 523)
Printing Is Slow(P. 530)
◼ Pr
oblems with Printing Results
If the printing results are not as expected, see the following:
Problems with Printing Results(P. 485)
◼ Fr
equently Asked Questions about Operations
I Want to Print on an Envelope.
Place the envelope in the multi-purpose tray while paying attention to the orientation and side of the
envelope.
Then, set the paper size and type according to the placed envelope.
Next, use the printer driver of the computer to set the paper size of the document and the paper size to
print, and then perform printing.
Preparations and Orientation for Loading Envelopes(P. 147)
Specifying the Paper Size and Type(P. 153)
Printing from a Computer(P. 199)
Troubleshooting
522
Cannot Print
9665-0A8
T
roubleshoot by checking the items below.
Has an Error Occurred?
Check the print processing status and log, and if a three-digit number starting with "#" (error code) is displayed,
check ho
w to troubleshoot the problem based on the error code.
Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 223)
An Error Code Is Displayed(P. 554)
Can Y
ou Print a Test Page?
If you can print a test page, check if the print settings of the application are correct.
Printing a Test Page(P. 575)
Check the Network Status and Settings.
Check the required items according to the usage environment.
Cannot Print (Wireless LAN)(P. 524)
Cannot Print (Wired LAN)(P. 526)
Cannot Print (USB Connection)(P. 528)
Cannot Print (via Print Server)(P. 529)
Troubleshooting
523
Cannot Print (Wireless LAN)
9665-0A9
T
roubleshoot by checking the items below.
Check the Wireless LAN Connection Status.
Check the connection status of the machine, and take action according to the status. Viewing the MAC
Addr
ess and Connection Information of the Wireless LAN(P. 97)
If the Machine Is Not Connected to the Wireless LAN
Check the status of the computer and wireless LAN router (access point) and the status of the machine, and
reconnect to the wireless LAN.
Cannot Connect to Wireless LAN(P. 514)
If the Connection Is Poor
Change the follo
wing settings on the wireless LAN router, and try printing:
● Change the channel of the wireless LAN router. If there are multiple wireless LAN routers, separate the
channels by ve or more channels.
● Increase the wireless output of the wireless LAN router if possible.
Are the Machine and Computer Connected to the Same Wireless LAN Router?
● When you ar
e using a computer connected to a wireless LAN, check that the SSID (identier of the wireless
LAN router) of the machine matches that of the computer.
Viewing the MAC Address and Connection Information of the Wireless LAN(P. 97)
Viewing the Network Connection Information of the Computer(P. 572)
● If the SSID of the machine and the computer do not match, congur
e the wireless LAN connection settings
on the machine again, and connect the machine to the SSID to which the computer is connected.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
Is the Printer Port of the Computer Congur
ed Correctly? (Windows)
Change the settings if they have not been congur
ed correctly. If there is no available port, add a new port.
Viewing the Printer Port(P. 574)
Conguring a Printer Port (Windo
ws)(P. 185)
Can You Access Remote UI?
If you cannot access Remote UI, the r
ewall settings of the machine may be incorrect, preventing
communication with the computer.
Use the following procedure to disable the rewall settings with the control panel, and then use Remote UI to
congure the rewall again.
Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
Touch Panel Model
1
Disable the r
ewall settings.
To Disable IPv4 Address Filter
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Firewall Settings] [IPv4
Addr
ess Filter]
[Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter] [Off] [Apply] Restart the machine.
To Disable IPv6 Address Filter
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Firewall Settings] [IPv6
Addr
ess Filter]
[Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter] [Off] [Apply] Restart the machine.
Troubleshooting
524
To Disable MAC Address Filter
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Firewall Settings] [MAC
Addr
ess Filter]
[Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter] [Off] [Apply] Restart the machine.
2
Congure the r
ewall correctly.
Setting the Firewall(P. 261)
Black and White LCD Model
1
Disable the r
ewall settings.
To Disable IPv4 Address Filter
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
[Firewall Settings] [IPv4 Address Filter] [Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter]
[Off] Restart the machine.
To Disable IPv6 Address Filter
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
[Firewall Settings] [IPv6 Address Filter] [Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter]
[Off] Restart the machine.
To Disable MAC Address Filter
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
[Firewall Settings] [MAC Address Filter] [Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter]
[Off] Restart the machine.
2
Congure the r
ewall correctly.
Setting the Firewall(P. 261)
Reinstall the Printer Driver.
Uninstall the installed driver, and then reinstall it.
For details about uninstalling and installing drivers, see the driver manual at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
Ar
e You Using Resident Software?
If you are using resident software, such as security software, disable it and then try printing.
Can Y
ou Print from Another Computer in the Network?
If you cannot print from another computer, contact your dealer or service representative. If the Problem
Persists(P
. 559)
Troubleshooting
525
Cannot Print (Wired LAN)
9665-0AA
T
roubleshoot by checking the items below.
Is the Printer Port of the Computer Congured Correctly? (Windows)
Change the settings if they have not been congur
ed correctly. If there is no available port, add a new port.
Viewing the Printer Port(P. 574)
Conguring a Printer Port (Windo
ws)(P. 185)
Can You Access Remote UI?
If you cannot access Remote UI, the r
ewall settings of the machine may be incorrect, preventing
communication with the computer.
Use the following procedure to disable the rewall settings with the control panel, and then use Remote UI to
congure the rewall again.
Administrator privileges are required. The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
Touch Panel Model
1
Disable the r
ewall settings.
To Disable IPv4 Address Filter
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Firewall Settings] [IPv4
Addr
ess Filter]
[Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter] [Off] [Apply] Restart the machine.
To Disable IPv6 Address Filter
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Firewall Settings] [IPv6
Addr
ess Filter]
[Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter] [Off] [Apply] Restart the machine.
To Disable MAC Address Filter
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Firewall Settings] [MAC
Addr
ess Filter]
[Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter] [Off] [Apply] Restart the machine.
2
Congure the r
ewall correctly.
Setting the Firewall(P. 261)
Black and White LCD Model
1
Disable the r
ewall settings.
To Disable IPv4 Address Filter
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
[Firewall Settings] [IPv4 Address Filter] [Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter]
[Off] Restart the machine.
To Disable IPv6 Address Filter
Troubleshooting
526
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
[Firewall Settings] [IPv6 Address Filter] [Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter]
[Off] Restart the machine.
To Disable MAC Address Filter
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network]
[Firewall Settings] [MAC Address Filter] [Outbound Filter] or [Inbound Filter]
[Off] Restart the machine.
2
Congure the r
ewall correctly.
Setting the Firewall(P. 261)
Reinstalling the Printer Driver
Uninstall the installed driver, and then reinstall it.
For details about uninstalling and installing drivers, see the driver manual at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
Ar
e You Using Resident Software?
If you are using resident software, such as security software, disable it and then try printing.
Can Y
ou Print from Another Computer in the Network?
If you cannot print from another computer, contact your dealer or service representative. If the Problem
Persists(P
. 559)
Troubleshooting
527
Cannot Print (USB Connection)
9665-0AC
T
roubleshoot by checking the items below.
Check the USB Cable.
● If you ar
e using a long USB cable, replace it with a short USB cable.
● If you still cannot print with a short USB cable, the cable may be damaged. Replace with a new USB cable,
and try printing.
Are You Using a USB Hub?
Connect the machine directly to the computer using a USB cable.
T
ry Using Another USB Port.
Connect the USB cable to another USB port on your computer.
Is the Printer Port of the Computer Congur
ed Correctly? (Windows)
If the printer port is not congur
ed correctly or there is no available port, reinstall the printer driver. When you
reinstall the driver, the correct port is congured automatically.
Viewing the Printer Port(P. 574)
For details about installing the driver, see the manual of the driver at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
Is T
wo-way Communication Between the Machine and Computer Enabled? (Windows)
Enable two-way communication if it is not enabled, and restart the computer and machine. Viewing Two-way
Communication
(P. 575)
Is a Setting Preventing the Machine from Establishing a USB Connection to the
Computer?
If usage of the USB port for computer connection on the back of the machine is restricted, cancel this setting.
Preventing Connection to Computer via USB Port(P. 301)
Ar
e You Using Resident Software?
If you are using resident software, such as security software, disable it and then try printing.
Can Y
ou Print via USB Connection from Another Computer?
If you cannot print from another computer, contact your dealer or service representative. If the Problem
Persists(P
. 559)
Troubleshooting
528
Cannot Print (via Print Server)
9665-0AE
T
roubleshoot by checking the items below.
Can You Print from the Print Server?
If you can print, check the connection between the computer and the print server. Cannot Find the Print
Server to Connect to(P
. 518)
Reinstall the Printer Driver.
Uninstall the installed driver, and then reinstall it.
For details about uninstalling and installing drivers, see the driver manual at the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
Installing in Windo
ws
Use a print server to install the printer driver.
Double-click the shared printer on the print server, and follow the instructions on the screen to install the
printer driver.
Displaying a Shared Printer in the Print Server(P. 569)
Ar
e You Using Resident Software?
If you are using resident software, such as security software, disable it and then try printing.
Can Y
ou Print via a Print Server from Another Computer?
If you cannot print from another computer, contact your dealer or service representative. If the Problem
Persists(P
. 559)
Troubleshooting
529
Printing Is Slow
9665-0AF
It tak
es time until the rst page is printed. The printing speed may be slower after continuous printing or printing on
narrow paper to allow for adjustments of the temperature or image quality of the machine.
In all other cases, an error may have occurred. Troubleshoot by checking the items below.
Check the Paper Orientation.
This symptom may occur depending on the paper orientation. Change the paper orientation if possible.
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Is Secur
e Print Enabled?
This symptom may occur when Secure Print is enabled. Use the procedure below to disable Secure Print.
The machine must be r
estarted to apply the settings.
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode [Settings/Registration] [Secure Print Settings] [Edit]
clear the [Secure Print] checkbox [OK] restart the machine.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur
e the
settings.
[Secure Print](P. 388)
Troubleshooting
530
Management Functions and Environment Settings
9665-0AH
This is a list of fr
equently asked questions about management functions. Check the applicable item.
Cannot Access Remote UI(P. 532)
Changing the Volume of the Conrmation Sound and W
arning Tone(P. 533)
Changing the Time Until Sleep Mode(P. 534)
Lost Department ID or PIN for the Administrator(P. 535)
Checking the Items That Can Be Congur
ed on the Machine and Their Settings(P. 536)
Troubleshooting
531
Cannot Access Remote UI
9665-0AJ
If the message [Cannot access Remote UI.] or [Cannot continue the settings because the function to perform settings
for the de
vice is restricted.] appears and you cannot access Remote UI, troubleshoot by checking the items below.
Set the Remote UI Access PIN.
To access the Remote UI, you must set the Remote UI Access PIN.
Administr
ator privileges are required to congure the setting.
Touch Panel Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Management Settings] [License/Other] [Remote UI
Settings] [Restrict Access] [On] enter the PIN [Apply] enter the PIN again [Apply]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Management Settings] [Remote UI
Settings/Update Firmwar
e]
[Remote UI Settings] [Remote UI Access Security
Settings] [On] enter the PIN enter the PIN again
* You cannot set a PIN consisting of all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."
* A Remote UI PIN is not r
equired when Department ID Management is enabled.
Change the System Manager PIN.
When logging in with System Manager Mode, you must change the System Manager PIN from the default
settings.
Administr
ator privileges are required to change the settings.
Touch Panel Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Management Settings] [User Management] [System
Manager Information Settings] [System Manager ID and PIN] enter the System Manager ID [Apply]
enter the PIN [Apply] enter the PIN again [Apply]
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Menu] [Management Settings] [User
Management] [System Manager Information Settings] [System Manager ID and
PIN] enter the System Manager ID enter the PIN enter the PIN again
* You cannot set a System Manager ID or PIN consisting of all zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."
* Only allo
w certain administrators to have access to the System Manager ID and PIN after the settings are
changed.
Troubleshooting
532
Lost Department ID or PIN for the Administrator
9665-0AR
Contact the administr
ator to check whether the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN were changed from the
default settings.
If they have not been changed from the default settings, they are listed below.
For LBP247dw
● System Manager ID: 7654321
● System Manager PIN: 7654321
For LBP246dw
The System Manager ID and System Manager PIN are not set.
* If they have not been changed from the default settings, change them for enhanced security, and allow only certain
administrators to know this information.
Setting the Department ID and PIN for the Administrator(P. 249)
● If you still cannot r
ecover your System Manager ID and PIN even after conrming the above information,
contact your dealer or service representative.
If the Problem Persists(P. 559)
Troubleshooting
535
Checking the Items That Can Be Congur
ed on the
Machine and Their Settings
9665-0AS
Y
ou can print the User Data List and System Manager Data List to check the items that can be congured on the
machine and their settings.
Printing and Viewing Reports and Lists(P. 326)
User Data List
Displays the settings that do not r
equire administrator privileges.
System Manager Data List
Displays the settings that require administrator privileges.
Troubleshooting
536
A Message Appears
9665-0EA
If a message appears on the contr
ol panel, select the message from the list below, and check how to troubleshoot the
problem.
An error occurred during certicate verication.(P
. 538)
Cannot analyze the authentication server certicate.(P
. 538)
Cannot nd the access point.(P
. 538)
Cannot print. A non-Canon or counterfeit cartridge may be inserted.(P. 539)
Cannot print RX data.(P. 539)
Cannot recognize the image.(P. 539)
Cart. Comm. Error Cannot print. A non-Canon or counterfeit cartridge may be in use. Close: Press
OK(P
. 540)
End of Cartridge Lifetime(P. 540)
Cartridge Comm. Error Problems caused by non-Canon cart. not covered by warranty. Close: Press
OK(P
. 540)
Change the authentication password.(P. 540)
Check the authentication settings.(P. 540)
Could not connect.(P. 540)
Could not connect. Check the encryption key.(P. 541)
Could not connect. Device will restart.(P. 541)
Could not connect. The maximum number of devices that can connect to the access point has been
r
eached.(P. 541)
Could not connect using Easy Connection via PC. The device will restart.(P. 541)
Could not connect using the wireless LAN.(P. 542)
Could not connect using the wireless LAN. Turn the main power OFF and ON, then congur
e the settings
again.(P. 542)
Could not connect using WPS. Wait a moment, then congur
e the settings again.(P. 542)
Could not detect any connections from wireless devices.(P. 543)
Could not perform cleaning.(P. 543)
Could not perform correction.(P. 543)
Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Cannot analyze the authentication server certicate.
(P
. 543)
Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Change the authentication password.(P. 544)
Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Check the authentication settings.(P. 544)
Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Congur
e the correct authentication information.(P. 544)
Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Congur
e the information required for authentication.
(P. 544)
Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. No reply from the destination.(P. 544)
Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. The authentication server certicate has e
xpired.(P. 544)
Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. The authentication server certicate is incorr
ect.(P. 545)
Could not perform Open System authentication. Check the encryption key settings.(P. 545)
Could not perform Shared Key authentication. Check the encryption key settings.(P. 545)
Could not perform Shared Key authentication. Check the encryption key settings.(P. 546)
Direct Connection terminated.(P. 546)
Easy Connection via PC ended due to timeout The device will restart.(P. 546)
Encryption key not set correctly. Check encryption key set.(P. 546)
Reset the network key. Connecting to a Wireless LANEnd of Cartridge Lifetime(P. 546)
Key Lock is enabled.(P. 547)
Load paper.(P. 547)
Low Cartridge Level(P. 547)
Memory Full (Skip Error)(P. 547)
Memory Full (Secure Print)(P. 548)
Troubleshooting
537
Memory Full (Secure Print)(P. 548)
Memory Full (Skip Error)(P. 548)
Memory media is restricted.(P. 548)
Memory Media Print is restricted.(P. 548)
No Paper(P. 549)
No reply from the destination.(P. 549)
No response from the host.(P. 549)
Paper jammed.(P. 549)
Paper Settings and Loaded Size Mismatch or Size/Settings Mismatch(P. 549)
Prepare cartridge.(P. 550)
Printing is restricted.(P. 550)
Problems resulting from the use of non-Canon cartridges are not covered under the warranty. The
amount r
emaining in the cartridge cannot be displayed correctly.(P. 551)
Set the correct authentication information.(P. 551)
Set the information necessary for authentication.(P. 551)
Size/Settings Mismatch(P. 551)
The authentication server certicate has e
xpired.(P. 552)
The authentication server certicate is incorr
ect.(P. 552)
The computer is restricted.(P. 552)
The encryption key is not set correctly. Check the encryption key settings.(P. 552)
The memory is full.(P. 553)
The number of entered characters is incorrect or invalid characters are used.(P. 553)
Use Remote UI to set the information necessary for authentication.(P. 553)
● If the pr
oblem persists even after trying the troubleshooting methods, contact your dealer or service
representative.
If the Problem Persists(P. 559)
An error occurred during certicate verication.
An err
or occurred during verication due to an expired certicate or incorrect information.
Install the Correct Key and Certicate or CA Certicate.
Check the expiration date, certication authority, and other information, and then install the key and
certicate or CA certicate.
Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Obtained fr
om an
Issuing Authority(P. 288)
Are the Current Date and Time on the Machine Correct?
Check the date and time settings on the machine. If the settings are not correct, set the time zone, and then
set the current date and time.
Setting the Date and Time(P. 314)
Cannot analyze the authentication server certicate.
The certicate of the authentication server may not be corr
ect, or it may be a format unsupported by the machine.
Check the Certicate of the Authentication Server, and Change the Setting, as Needed.
Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
Cannot nd the access point.
An err
or occurred, preventing the machine from detecting the wireless LAN router (access point).
Is Connection Type Congured Correctly?
Troubleshooting
538
Select the connection type (WPS) according to the method supported by the wireless LAN router.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Using the Router Button (Push Button Mode)(P. 61)
Did Y
ou Connect Within the Fixed Time?
When connecting by pressing a button on the wireless LAN router, set the connection type on the control
panel of the machine, and then press the button on the wireless LAN router within one or two minutes.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Using the Router Button (Push Button Mode)(P. 61)
Ar
e the SSID and Network Key Congured Correctly?
When entering the wireless LAN router information manually, check the SSID and network key of the wireless
LAN router, and congure the settings correctly on the machine.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by
Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method)(P
. 69)
Are the Machine and Wireless LAN Router Located Appropriately?
● The machine and wireless LAN router should be installed in a location without walls or other obstructions
between the devices and within range of 164' (50 m).
● Do not install near a microwave oven, digital cordless telephone, or other device that generates radio
waves.
Check the Security Settings of the Wireless LAN Router.
For details, see the manual of the wir
eless LAN router or contact the manufacturer.
Cannot print. A non-Canon or counterfeit cartridge may be inserted.
Printing cannot be performed due to the use of a toner cartridge whose print quality cannot be guaranteed.
Replace with a New Toner Cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 455)
For optimum print quality
, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
List of
Consumables
(P. 461)
Cannot print RX data.
Received data cannot be printed for some reason.
Do the Cause and Solution Appear on the Control Panel?
If so, follow the instructions on the screen.
Is the Front Cover, Rear Cover, or Feeder Cover Open on the Machine?
Close the covers if they are open.
Is Paper Loaded?
Load paper if not loaded.
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Is Paper Jammed?
If so, r
emove any jammed paper.
Paper Jams(P. 474)
Have the T
oner Cartridge Reached the End of Their Lifetime?
Check the remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge, and replace any toner cartridge, as needed.
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 460)
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 455)
Cannot recognize the image.
In Memory Media Print, you selected an image for which a pr
eview cannot be displayed.
Does the Machine Have Sucient Free Memory?
Troubleshooting
539
If the machine does not have sucient fr
ee memory, previews of JPEG and TIFF images cannot be displayed.
Cart. Comm. Error Cannot print. A non-Canon or counterfeit cartridge may
be in use. Close: Press OK
Printing cannot be performed due to incorrect installation of the toner cartridge, a damaged toner cartridge, or the
use of a toner cartridge whose print quality cannot be guaranteed.
Reinstall the Toner Cartridge or Replace with New Toner Cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 455)
● For
optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
List of
Consumables
(P. 461)
● If the message still appears after repeatedly reinstalling the toner cartridge, contact your dealer or service
representative.
If the Problem Persists(P. 559)
End of Cartridge Lifetime
The toner cartridge have reached the end of their lifetime.
It Is Recommended to Replace with New Toner Cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 455)
Cartridge Comm. Error Problems caused by non-Canon cart. not covered by
warranty. Close: Press OK
Printing cannot be performed due to incorrect installation of the toner cartridge, a damaged toner cartridge, or the
use of a non-Canon toner cartridge, resulting in a communication error.
Reinstall the Toner Cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 455)
● For
optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
List of
Consumables
(P. 461)
● If the message still appears after repeatedly reinstalling the toner cartridge, contact your dealer or service
representative.
If the Problem Persists(P. 559)
Change the authentication password.
The password has expired.
Set a new password.
Check the authentication settings.
The authentication method set on the machine does not match that set on the RADIUS server.
Check the Authentication Method Set on the RADIUS Server, and Set This Corr
ectly.
Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
Could not connect.
An err
or occurred, preventing the machine from establishing a direct connection.
Wait a Moment, and Try Connecting Again.
Troubleshooting
540
If you still cannot establish a connection, restart the machine.
Set the IP Addr
ess for Connection to Something Other Than "192.168.22.xx".
The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [Direct
Connection Settings] [Edit] in [IP Address for Direct Connection], enter the IP address [OK] restart
the machine
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Preferences] to congur
e the
settings.
[Direct Connection Settings](P. 355)
Is the Subnet Mask Congur
ed Correctly?
Check the IPv4 subnet mask settings. Change the settings if they have not been congured correctly. For
details, contact the network administrator.
Viewing the IP address set to the machine(P. 95)
Setting IPv4 Addresses(P. 74)
Could not connect. Check the encryption key.
The network key (encryption key) of the wireless LAN router (access point) is not congured correctly, preventing
connection.
Reset the Network Key.
Check the network key of the wireless LAN router, and congure the settings correctly on the machine.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
Could not connect. Device will restart.
An err
or occurred, preventing the machine from connecting in Access Point Mode. Alternatively, an error occurred
when starting cableless setup mode.
Restart the Machine, and Start Cableless Setup Mode Again.
Administrator privileges are required.
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Easy Connection
via PC] start the settings on the computer
Could not connect. The maximum number of devices that can connect to the
access point has been r
eached.
The maximum number of devices that can be connected to the wireless LAN router (access point) has been reached,
preventing connection.
Reduce the Number of Devices (Clients) Connected to the Wireless LAN Router.
For the maximum number of connections, see the manual of the wireless LAN router or contact the
manufacturer.
Could not connect using Easy Connection via PC. The device will restart.
An err
or occurred, preventing the machine from connecting in Access Point Mode. Alternatively, an error occurred
when starting cableless setup mode.
Restart the Machine, and Start Cableless Setup Mode Again.
Administrator privileges are required.
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Easy Connection via PC] [Yes]
start the settings on the computer
Troubleshooting
541
Could not connect using the wireless LAN.
An error occurred, preventing the machine from connecting to the wireless LAN.
Restart the Machine, and Congure the Wireless LAN Connection Again.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
Ar
e the Machine and Wireless LAN Router (Access Point) Located Appropriately?
● The machine and wireless LAN router should be installed in a location without walls or other obstructions
between the devices and within range of 164' (50 m).
● Do not install near a microwave oven, digital cordless telephone, or other device that generates radio
waves.
Check the Security Settings of the Wireless LAN Router.
For details, see the manual of the wir
eless LAN router or contact the manufacturer.
Could not connect using the wireless LAN. Turn the main power OFF and ON,
then congure the settings again.
An error occurred, preventing the machine from connecting to the wireless LAN.
Restart the Machine, and Congure the Wireless LAN Connection Again.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
Ar
e the Machine and Wireless LAN Router (Access Point) Located Appropriately?
● The machine and wireless LAN router should be installed in a location without walls or other obstructions
between the devices and within range of 164' (50 m).
● Do not install near a microwave oven, digital cordless telephone, or other device that generates radio
waves.
Check the Security Settings of the Wireless LAN Router.
For details, see the manual of the wir
eless LAN router or contact the manufacturer.
Could not connect using WPS. Wait a moment, then congur
e the settings
again.
An error occurred, preventing the machine from establishing a WPS connection.
Wait a Moment, and Congure the Settings Again.
If you still cannot establish a WPS connection, check whether the wireless LAN router (access point) supports
WPS.
Troubleshooting
542
If It Supports WPS
Check that the machine and wir
eless LAN router are located appropriately.
● The machine and wireless LAN router should be installed in a location without walls or other
obstructions between the devices and within range of 164' (50 m).
● Do not install near a microwave oven, digital cordless telephone, or other device that generates radio
waves.
If It Does Not Support WPS
Connect using a differ
ent connection type.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
Could not detect any connections from wireless devices.
An error occurred, preventing the machine from detecting mobile devices.
Did You Connect Within the Fixed Time?
Connect the mobile device to the machine within ve minutes of the SSID and network key being displayed.
Could not perform cleaning.
Cleaning could not be performed due to jammed paper or another problem.
Is Paper Loaded?
Load paper in the paper drawer if not loaded. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 139)
Is Paper Jammed?
If so, r
emove any jammed paper.
Paper Jams(P. 474)
Could not perform correction.
Corr
ection could not be performed due to jammed paper or another problem.
Is Paper Jammed?
Remove any jammed paper.
Paper Jams(P. 474)
Check the Remaining Amount of T
oner in the Toner Cartridge.
A sucient amount of toner in the toner cartridge is required to perform correction. Check the remaining
amount of toner in the toner cartridge, and replace any toner cartridge, as needed.
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 460)
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 455)
Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Cannot analyze the
authentication server certicate.
Check the certicate of the authentication server, and change the setting, as needed.
Check the Certicate of the RADIUS Server, and Change the Setting, as Needed.
Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
Troubleshooting
543
Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Change the authentication
password.
The password has expired.
Set a New Password.
Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Check the authentication
settings.
The authentication method set on the machine does not match that set on the RADIUS server.
Check the Authentication Method Set on the RADIUS Server, and Set This Correctly.
Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Congure the correct
authentication information.
The authentication method or authentication information of IEEE 802.1X is not set correctly.
Set the Authentication Method and Authentication Information (Keys and Certicates, Password, CA
Certicate) Correctly.
Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate(P
. 275)
Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. Congure the information
required for authentication.
The authentication method or authentication information of IEEE 802.1X is not set correctly.
Set the Authentication Method and Authentication Information (Keys and Certicates, Password, CA
Certicate) Correctly.
Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate(P
. 275)
Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. No reply from the
destination.
The network connection may have a problem.
Check the Network Status and Settings.
● Check the Ethernet cable and switch status.
● Check the network key of the wireless LAN router, and congure the settings correctly on the machine.
Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. The authentication server
certicate has expired.
The server certicate sent from the RADIUS server has expired.
Troubleshooting
544
Check the Expiry Date of the RADIUS Server.
Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
Could not perform IEEE 802.1X authentication. The authentication server
certicate is incorrect.
A CA certicate that supports the certicate of the authentication server is not registered to the machine.
Check the Certicate Information of the Authentication Server, and Register a Supported CA
Certicate.
Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Obtained fr
om an Issuing Authority(P. 288)
Could not perform Open System authentication. Check the encryption key
settings.
The WEP authentication methods of the machine and wireless LAN router (access point) do not match, or MAC address
ltering of the wireless LAN router is set to prevent a connection to the machine, thereby preventing Open System
Authentication.
Use the Manual Setup Method to Change the WEP Authentication Method to [Shared Key], and
Connect Again.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method)(P. 69)
In the MA
C address ltering setting of the wireless LAN router, allow the connection to the machine.
Check the MAC address of the machine, and congure the wireless LAN router to allow a connection from
that MAC address.
Viewing the MAC Address and Connection Information of the Wireless LAN(P. 97)
For the setup method, see the manual of the wir
eless LAN router or contact the manufacturer.
Could not perform Shared Key authentication. Check the encryption key
settings.
The network k
ey (encryption key) of the wireless LAN router (access point) is not congured correctly, or the WEP
authentication methods of the machine and wireless LAN router do not match, preventing Shared Key Authentication.
Reset the Network Key.
Check the network key of the wireless LAN router, and congure the settings correctly on the machine.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
Match the WEP Authentication Method on the Machine and Wir
eless LAN Router.
The machine may be set to Shared Key Authentication, and the wireless LAN router may be set to Open
System Authentication. Change the WEP setting according to the authentication method you are using.
When Using Open System Authentication
Connect to the wireless LAN using either of the following methods:
● Connect with the access point setup method.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Searching for a
Router (Access Point Setup Method)(P
. 66)
● Using the Manual Setup Method, connect with the WEP authentication method set to [Open System].
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method)(P. 69)
When Using Shar
ed Key Authentication
On the wireless LAN router, change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key", and connect again.
For the setup method, see the manual of the wireless LAN router or contact the manufacturer.
Troubleshooting
545
Could not perform Shared Key authentication. Check the encryption key
settings.
The network key (encryption key) of the wireless LAN router (access point) is not congured correctly, or the WEP
authentication methods of the machine and wireless LAN router do not match, preventing Shared Key Authentication.
Reset the Network Key.
Check the network key of the wireless LAN router, and congure the settings correctly on the machine.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
Match the WEP Authentication Method on the Machine and Wir
eless LAN Router.
The machine may be set to Shared Key Authentication, and the wireless LAN router may be set to Open
System Authentication. Change the WEP setting according to the authentication method you are using.
When Using Open System Authentication
Connect to the wireless LAN using either of the following methods:
● Connect with the access point setup method.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Searching for a
Router (Access Point Setup Method)(P
. 66)
● Using the Manual Setup Method, connect with the WEP authentication method set to [Open System].
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method)(P. 69)
When Using Shar
ed Key Authentication
On the wireless LAN router, change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key", and connect again.
For the setup method, see the manual of the wireless LAN router or contact the manufacturer.
Direct Connection terminated.
The connection with a mobile de
vice was terminated.
Directly Connect Again.
Connecting a Mobile Device Directly to the Machine (Direct Connection)(P. 236)
Easy Connection via PC ended due to timeout The device will restart.
30 minutes have elapsed since the start of the cableless setup mode without connecting to the computer.
Restart the Machine, and Start Cableless Setup Mode Again.
Administr
ator privileges are required.
[Home] on the control panel [Menu] [Preferences] [Network] [Easy Connection via PC] [Yes]
start the settings on the computer
Encryption key not set correctly. Check encryption key set.
The network k
ey (encryption key) of the wireless LAN router (access point) may not be congured correctly on the
machine.
Reset the Network Key.
Reset the network key.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58) End of Cartridge Lifetime
The toner cartridge have r
eached the end of their lifetime.
It Is Recommended to Replace with New Toner Cartridge.
Press [Display Cartridge Replacement Steps] and replace the toner cartridge while following the instructions
on the screen.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 455)
Troubleshooting
546
Key Lock is enabled.
Usage of the control panel keys is restricted.
Cancel the Key Lock Function with Remote UI.
Restricting Use of the Control Panel (Black and White LCD Model)(P. 305)
Load paper.
Correct paper is not loaded.
Is Paper Loaded in the Paper Drawer or Multi-purpose Tray?
Load paper if not loaded. Loading Paper(P. 138)
Ar
e You Using Appropriate Paper When Printing Reports, Lists, and Received Data?
● Check that the paper is usable, and replace it with paper to suit your purpose.
Usable Paper(P. 23)
Loading Paper(P. 138)
● Set
the paper size and type correctly according to the loaded paper.
Specifying the Paper Size and
T
ype(P. 153)
Low Cartridge Level
It is nearing the time to replace the toner cartridge.
Prepare New Toner Cartridge, and Replace the Old Ones, as Needed.
When printing large printing jobs, it is recommended to press [Display Cartridge Replacement Steps] and
replace the toner cartridge while following the instructions on the screen. Replacing the Toner
Cartridge
(P. 455)
To Continue Printing, Use the Procedure Below.
When I-Faxing
When receiving an I-Fax, the data may be saved to the memory of the machine without being printed to
prevent printing text that is dicult to read or images that are dicult to see.
To continue printing, enable [Continue Printing When Amount in Cartridge Is Low].
Log in to Remote UI [Settings/Registration] [RX/Forwarding Settings] or [RX Settings] [Common
Settings] [Edit] in [Common Settings] select the [Continue Printing When Amount in Cartridge Is
Lo
w] checkbox
[OK]
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur
e
the settings.
[Continue Print. When Cart. Low] or [Continue Print. When Amount in Cart. Low]
(P
. 415)
* When this setting is enabled, the printing results may be light or faded.
● Y
ou can manually specify when this message appears (when toner is low).
[Display Timing for Cart.
Pr
ep.] or [Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.](P. 348)
Memory Full (Skip Error)
The memory is full with data that has not been printed due to an err
or.
Troubleshooting
547
Cancel Printing of the Data with an Error, or Press [Skip Error] on the [Status Monitor] Screen.
Canceling Printing with the Control Panel(P. 221)
Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 223)
Memory Full (Secure Print)
The memory is full with Secure Print data that has not been printed.
Print the Secure Print Data Saved to the Memory.
For details about how to print, see the procedure for when using the Secure Print function. Step 2:
Printing Secur
e Data by Entering a PIN or Password(P. 206)
Memory Full (Secure Print)
The memory is full with Secure Print data that has not been printed.
Print the Secure Print Data Saved to the Memory.
For details about how to print, see the procedure for when using the Secure Print function. Step 2:
Printing Secur
e Data by Entering a PIN or Password(P. 206)
Memory Full (Skip Error)
The memory is full with data that has not been printed due to an error.
Cancel Printing of the Data with an Error, or Press [Skip Error] on the [Status Monitor] Screen.
Canceling Printing with the Control Panel(P. 221)
Viewing the Print Job Status and Log(P. 223)
Memory media is restricted.
The settings ar
e congured to not print data from a USB memory device.
To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Memory Media Settings] Setting.
The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode [Settings/Registration] [Access Files Settings] [Memory
Media Settings] [Edit] select the [Memory Media Print] checkbox [OK] restart the machine
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings)] to change the
setting. [Memory Media Settings](P. 417)
Memory Media Print is restricted.
The settings ar
e congured to not print data from a USB memory device.
To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Memory Media Settings] Setting.
The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode [Settings/Registration] [Access Files Settings] [Memory
Media Settings] [Edit] select the [Memory Media Print] checkbox [OK] restart the machine.
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to change the
setting. [Memory Media Settings](P. 417)
Troubleshooting
548
No Paper
Usage of the control panel keys is restricted.
Load the Paper.
Load the paper for printing reports, lists, or I-Faxes, and set the paper size and type. Loading
Paper(P
. 138)
No reply from the destination.
The Ethernet cable may not be connected or there may be a problem with the switch.
Check the Ethernet cable and switch status.
No response from the host.
The machine is not connected correctly to the network.
Check the Settings of the Machine and Network, and Connect Again.
When Connected via Wireless LAN
Congure the settings correctly according to your usage environment. Connecting to a Wireless
LAN(P
. 58)
When Connected via Wired LAN
Check that the Ethernet cable is properly connected.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 57)
Paper jammed.
Paper jammed in the machine during printing.
Remo
ve the Jammed Paper, and If Printing Does Not Resume Automatically, Try Printing Again.
Paper Jams(P. 474)
Paper Settings and Loaded Size Mismatch or Size/Settings Mismatch
The size of the paper loaded in the machine does not match that set on the contr
ol panel or printer driver.
Match the Size of the Loaded Paper with the Paper Size Setting.
When Using the Loaded Paper
● Change the paper size setting on the control panel to match the size of the loaded paper.
Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Paper Drawer(P. 154)
Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 158)
● When
printing from a computer, change the paper size setting on the printer driver to match the size of
the loaded paper.
Printing from a Computer(P. 199)
When Reloading Paper
Load paper of the size set on the contr
ol panel or printer driver.
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Check That the Paper Guides Ar
e Aligned with the Markings and Are Not Too Loose or Too Tight.
Paper Drawer
Multi-purpose Tray
Troubleshooting
549
Prepare cartridge.
It is nearing the time to replace the toner cartridge.
Prepare New Toner Cartridge, and Replace the Old Ones, as Needed.
When printing large jobs, it is recommended to replace the toner cartridge. Replacing the Toner
Cartridge
(P. 455)
To Continue Printing, Use the Procedure Below.
When I-Faxing
When receiving an I-Fax, the data may be saved to the memory of the machine without being printed to
prevent printing text that is dicult to read or images that are dicult to see.
To continue printing, enable [Continue Printing When Amount in Cartridge Is Low].
Log in to Remote UI [Settings/Registration] [RX/Forwarding Settings] or [RX Settings] [Common
Settings] [Edit] in [Common Settings] select the [Continue Printing When Amount in Cartridge Is
Lo
w] checkbox
[OK]
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur
e
the settings.
[Continue Print. When Cart. Low] or [Continue Print. When Amount in Cart. Low]
(P
. 415)
* When this setting is enabled, the printing results may be light or faded.
● Y
ou can manually specify when this message appears (when toner is low).
[Display Timing for Cart.
Pr
ep.] or [Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.](P. 348)
Printing is restricted.
Printing is r
estricted due to Department ID Management.
Log In with a Department ID That Does Not Restrict Printing.
For the Department ID and PIN, contact the system administrator.
To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Restrict Functions] Setting of Your Department ID.
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode [Settings/Registration] [User Management]
[Department ID Management] select the Department ID to edit clear the [Restrict Color Print] and
[Restrict Black & White Print] checkbo
xes
[OK]
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to change
the setting. [Department ID Management](P. 423)
Troubleshooting
550
Problems resulting from the use of non-Canon cartridges are not covered
under the warranty. The amount remaining in the cartridge cannot be
displayed correctly.
The remaining amount of toner is not correctly displayed due to the use of a toner cartridge whose print quality
cannot be guaranteed.
Replace with a New Toner Cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 455)
For optimum print quality
, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
List of
Consumables
(P. 461)
Set the correct authentication information.
The authentication method or authentication information of IEEE 802.1X is not set correctly.
Set the Authentication Method and Authentication Information (Keys and Certicates, Password, CA
Certicate) Correctly.
Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate(P
. 275)
Set the information necessary for authentication.
The authentication method or authentication information of IEEE 802.1X is not set corr
ectly.
Set the Authentication Method and Authentication Information (Keys and Certicates, Password, CA
Certicate) Correctly.
Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate(P
. 275)
Size/Settings Mismatch
The size of the paper loaded in the machine does not match that set on the contr
ol panel or printer driver.
Match the Size of the Loaded Paper with the Paper Size Setting.
When Using the Loaded Paper
● Change the paper size setting on the control panel to match the size of the loaded paper.
Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Paper Drawer(P. 154)
Setting the Paper Size and Type for the Multi-purpose Tray(P. 158)
● When
printing from a computer, change the paper size setting on the printer driver to match the size of
the loaded paper.
Printing from a Computer(P. 199)
When Reloading Paper
Load paper of the size set on the contr
ol panel or printer driver.
Loading Paper(P. 138)
Check That the Paper Guides Ar
e Aligned with the Markings and Are Not Too Loose or Too Tight.
Paper Drawer
Multi-purpose Tray
Troubleshooting
551
The authentication server certicate has expired.
The server certicate sent from the RADIUS server has expired.
Check the Expiry Date of the RADIUS Server.
Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
The authentication server certicate is incorrect.
A CA certicate that supports the certicate of the authentication server is not registered to the machine.
Check the certicate information of the authentication server, and register a supported CA certicate.
Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
Registering a Key and Certicate or CA Certicate Obtained fr
om an Issuing Authority(P. 288)
The computer is restricted.
Saving of scanned data to a computer is restricted due to Department ID Management.
To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Department ID Management] Setting.
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode [Settings/Registration] [User Management]
[Department ID Management] [Edit] select the [Allow Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs] checkbox [OK]
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to change
the setting. [Department ID Management](P. 423)
The encryption key is not set correctly. Check the encryption key settings.
The network k
ey (encryption key) of the wireless LAN router (access point) is not congured correctly on the machine.
Alternatively, the WEP authentication method of the machine does not match that of the wireless LAN router.
Reset the Network Key.
Check the network key of the wireless LAN router, and congure the settings correctly on the machine.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
Match the WEP Authentication Method on the Machine and Wir
eless LAN Router.
The machine may be set to Shared Key Authentication, and the wireless LAN router may be set to Open
System Authentication. Change the WEP setting according to the authentication method you are using.
When Using Open System Authentication
Connect to the wireless LAN using either of the following methods:
● Connect with the access point setup method.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Searching for a
Router (Access Point Setup Method)(P
. 66)
● Using the Manual Setup Method, connect with the WEP authentication method set to [Open System].
Connecting to a Wireless LAN by Setting the Details (Manual Setup Method)(P. 69)
Troubleshooting
552
When Using Shared Key Authentication
On the wir
eless LAN router, change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key", and connect again.
For the setup method, see the manual of the wireless LAN router or contact the manufacturer.
The memory is full. [The memory is full.] Is Displayed on the Control Panel, and the Operation Cannot Be Performed.
Printing cannot be performed due to insucient available memory. If there is data waiting to be printed, wait until the
processing is completed.
Reduce the File Size or Divide the File.
Optimize the le to make it smaller, or divide the le and then print it.
The number of entered characters is incorrect or invalid characters are used.
The network key of the wireless LAN router (access point) is not congured correctly on the machine.
Reset the Network Key.
Check the network key of the wireless LAN router, and congure the settings correctly on the machine.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 58)
Use Remote UI to set the information necessary for authentication.
The authentication method or authentication information of IEEE 802.1X is not set correctly.
Check the IEEE 802.1X Setting, and Set This Correctly.
Check the following, and change the setting, as needed. Setting IEEE 802.1X(P. 273)
● The login name is specied corr
ectly.
● At least one of the following checkboxes is selected: [Use TLS], [Use TTLS], and [Use PEAP].
● When using TLS, a key and certicate are registered.
● When using TTLS or PEAP, the user name and password are set correctly.
Troubleshooting
553
An Error Code Is Displayed
9665-0AW
If printing cannot be performed, an I-Fax cannot be r
eceived, or another error occurs, an error code (three-digit
number starting with "#") is displayed in the job log.
Select the err
or code from the list below, and check how to troubleshoot the problem.
#001 to #099
#037(P. 554) #099(P. 554)
#401 to #499
#408(P. 555)
#701 to #799
#701(P. 555) #752(P. 555) #753(P. 555) #766(P. 556)
#801 to #899
#802(P. 556) #810(P. 556) #816(P. 556) #818(P. 556) #819(P. 556) #820(P. 556)
#821(P. 557) #822(P. 557) #827(P. 557) #829(P. 557) #852(P. 557) #853(P. 557)
#861(P. 558) #863(P. 558)
#901 to #999
#934(P. 558) #995(P. 558)
● If the pr
oblem persists even after trying the troubleshooting methods, contact your dealer or service
representative.
If the Problem Persists(P. 559)
#037
Printing could not be performed due to the le size.
Reduce the File Size or Divide the File.
Optimize the le to mak
e it smaller, or divide the le and then print it.
#099
The job was canceled.
This does not indicate a malfunction. Perform the oper
ation again, as needed.
Troubleshooting
554
#408
The USB memory device may have been removed, or the USB memory device was formatted with an unsupported le
system.
Has the USB Memory Device Been Removed?
Conrm the orientation of the USB memory device, and insert it correctly into the machine. Inserting and
Remo
ving a USB Memory Device(P. 171)
Was the USB Memory Device Formatted with a Supported File System?
You can use a USB memory device with a FAT16 or FAT32 le system.
#701
Authentication could not be performed due to incorrect entry of the Department ID or PIN. Alternatively, the user
attempted to perform an operation restricted with Department ID Management without entering the Department ID.
Enter the Correct Department ID and PIN.
If you lost your Department ID or PIN, contact the system administrator.
To Cancel Restriction, Change the [Department ID Management] Setting.
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode [Settings/Registration] [User Management]
[Department ID Management] [Edit] select the [Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs] checkbox [OK]
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Management Settings] to change
the setting. [Department ID Management](P. 423)
#752
The POP3 server name is not congured correctly, or the machine is not connected correctly to the network.
Congure the POP3 Server Name Correctly.
Preparing to Receive and Print I-Faxes(P. 197)
Check the Network Status and Settings.
If the machine is not connected to a network, r
econgure the network settings.
Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 94)
Setting Up the Network(P. 53)
#753
The machine was unable to connect to the network due to a disconnected Ethernet cable.
Check That the Ethernet Cable Is Pr
operly Connected.
Troubleshooting
555
#766
The certicate has expired.
Renew the certicate, or use a certicate that is not expired.
Managing and Verifying a Key and Certicate(P
. 275)
Are the current date and time on the machine correct?
Check the date and time setitngs. If the settings are not correct, set the time zone, and then set the current
date and time.
Setting the Date and Time(P. 314)
#802
The POP3 server name is not set corr
ectly.
When Receiving an I-Fax, Correctly Set the POP3 Server Name.
Preparing to Receive and Print I-Faxes(P. 197)
#810
The machine cannot connect to the POP3 server, or the information of the POP3 server is not set correctly.
Check the Network Status and Settings.
If the machine is not connected to a network, recongure the network settings.
Checking the Network Status and Settings(P. 94)
Setting Up the Network(P. 53)
Set the information of the POP3 server corr
ectly.
Preparing to Receive and Print I-Faxes(P. 197)
Check the Status of the POP3 Server.
Check that the POP3 server is oper
ating properly on the network. For details about the POP3 server status,
contact your provider.
#816
The maximum number of pages that can be printed for the department has been r
eached.
Check the Usage, and Reset the Count to Zero.
Conrming Usage b
y Department ID(P. 259)
#818
The r
eceived data is in a format that cannot be printed.
Have the sender change the le format and resend the le.
#819
The received data has invalid MIME information and cannot be processed.
Have the sender check the settings and resend the data.
#820
The r
eceived data has invalid BASE64 or uuencode data and cannot be processed.
Have the sender check the settings and resend the data.
Troubleshooting
556
#821
The received data has a TIFF analysis error and cannot be processed.
Have the sender check the settings and resend the data.
#822
The le format is unsupported, and printing cannot be performed.
Save using a supported le format.
The following le formats can be printed from a USB memory device:
● JPEG (DCF, Exif2.21 or earlier, JFIF)
● TIFF (JPEG, MH, MR, MMR compression)
● PDF
#827
The received data includes unsupported MIME information and cannot be processed.
Have the sender check the settings and resend the data.
#829
The received data exceeds the maximum size that can be received by the machine.
Have the Sender Check and Resend the Data.
When Receiving an I-Fax
The machine cannot receive an e-mail that exceeds 24 MB. Have the sender reduce the size of the e-mail to
24 MB or less and resend it.
#852
The po
wer of the machine turned OFF for some reason.
Make sure the power plug is rmly inserted into an outlet.
#853
Printing or Secur
e Print failed for some reason.
If the operation was canceled when print data was being sent from a computer to the machine, try printing again.
Otherwise, check the following:
Are You Printing a Large Job?
The data volume may have exceeded the processing capacity of the machine. Reduce the number of pages to
print, or print when there is no print data being printed or waiting to be printed.
Is the Data to Be Printed Corrupted?
If the data is corrupted or otherwise damaged, x the data.
Are You Trying to Print a PDF File from a USB Memory Device?
When printing a password-protected PDF le, enter the password before printing.
Touch Panel Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Memory Media Print] select the le to print [Apply] [Set
PDF Details] [Password to Open Document] enter the password [Apply]
Troubleshooting
557
Black and White LCD Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Memory Media Print] [Select File and Print]
select the le to print [<Apply>] [Set PDF Details] [Password to Open
Document] enter the password <Apply>]
Are You Trying to Print with Secure Print?
The machine may be congur
ed not to use the Secure Print function. Try either of the following methods:
● Enable Secure Print.
The machine must be restarted to apply the settings.
Log in to Remote UI in System Manager Mode [Settings/Registration] [Secure Print Settings] [Edit]
select the [Secure Print] checkbox [OK] restart the machine
On the control panel, select [Menu] in the [Home] screen, and then select [Function Settings] to congur
e
the settings.
[Secure Print](P. 388)
● Print without using the Secur
e Print function.
Was the Secure Print Data Left for a While?
If printing of the Secure Print data is not performed after a set period of time, the data is deleted from the
memory automatically. If the save period elapses and the data is deleted automatically, try printing with
Secure Print again.
* You can change the save period (time until the data is deleted).
Changing the Time Period That Print
Data with a PIN (Secur
e Data) Is Saved(P. 208)
#861
Y
ou are using an unsupported printer driver, or the data you are trying to print is corrupted.
Use the printer driver of the machine, and try printing again.
Printing from a Computer(P. 199)
Is the Data to Be Printed Corrupted?
If the data is corrupted or otherwise damaged, x the data.
#863
An err
or occurred, preventing printing.
Restart the Machine, and Then Print the Data Again.
Restarting the Machine(P. 108)
#934
The job was deleted b
y the Auto Delete Suspended Jobs function.
Resolve the Error That Caused the Job to Be Suspended.
Resolve the error, and try printing again.
* Disable the Auto Delete Suspended Jobs function, or change the time until the data is automatically
deleted.
[Auto Delete Suspended Jobs](P. 393)
#995
Receiving of a waiting job was canceled.
T
ry receiving again, as needed.
Troubleshooting
558
If the Problem Persists
9665-0AX
If the pr
oblem persists even after trying the troubleshooting methods, contact your dealer or service representative.
Do not disassemble or repair the machine yourself.
● Disassembling or r
epairing the machine yourself may void the warranty.
Checks Before Contacting Us
● Pr
oduct name (LBP247dw / LBP246dw)
● Dealer purchased from
● Details of the problem (such as operation details and their results)
● Serial number
How to Look Up the Serial Number
Touch Panel Model
[Home] screen on the control panel [Status Monitor] [Device Information] [Serial Number]
Black and White LCD Model
on the control panel [Device Status] [Serial Number]
● Y
ou can also check this information using Remote UI from a computer.
Managing the Machine from a
Computer (Remote UI)(P
. 315)
● You can also check this information on the label on the back of the machine.
Customer Support (U.S.A.)
If you cannot solve a problem by referring to the information in this chapter, for the fastest resolution, please
r
efer to available support materials (including the Knowledgebase FAQs and How to Video material) for your
product at www.usa.canon.com.
Troubleshooting
559
Customer Support (Canada)
If you cannot solve a problem by referring to the information in this chapter, for the fastest resolution, please
r
efer to available support materials (including the Knowledgebase FAQs and How to Video material) for your
product at www.canon.ca/support.
Troubleshooting
560
Appendix
Appendix .............................................................................................................................................................
562
Manuals of the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 563
Using the User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 564
Manual Display Settings ................................................................................................................................... 566
Operation Examples When Using a Computer ................................................................................................ 567
Environmental Information, Regulations, and Standards .............................................................................. 577
Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 584
Trademarks and Copyrights ............................................................................................................................. 585
Third-party Software ......................................................................................................................................... 587
Appendix
561
Appendix
9665-0AY
In this chapter, you can vie
w the manuals of the machine and the basic operations required when using the machine
with a computer.
Manuals of the Machine
Manuals are provided according to your purpose.
Manuals of the Machine(P. 563)
The User
's Guide (this manual) contains information on all functions of the machine and specications as well
as how to maintain the machine. You can search for specic information and change the text size and layout.
Using the User's Guide(P. 564)
Manual Display Settings(P. 566)
Basic Oper
ations When Using with a Computer
You must set up a computer to use the machine from the computer and view information set on the machine
from the computer. The operations are introduced using Windows and macOS operation examples.
Operation Examples When Using a Computer(P. 567)
Other Information
Environmental Information, Regulations, and Standards(P. 577)
Notice(P. 584)
Trademarks and Copyrights(P. 585)
Third-party Software(P. 587)
Appendix
562
Manuals of the Machine
9665-0C0
The manuals belo
w are provided with the machine. Use these according to your purpose.
Click on the icon to display the corresponding manual (PDF).
Important Safety Instructions
This contains required information to prevent injury and accidental damage to property.
Setup Guide
This e
xplains the process from unpacking the machine to setting it up so that it is ready to use.
User's Guide (this manual)
This describes all the functions of the machine in detail. It also contains the specications and describes ho
w
to maintain the machine. The User's Guide is displayed in a Web browser.
Using the User's Guide(P. 564)
● For details about the drivers, softwar
e, and manual of the Application Library, see the online manual site.
https://oip.manual.canon/
Appendix
563
Using the User's Guide
9665-0C1
The User
's Guide (this manual) contains information on all functions of the machine and specications as well as how
to maintain the machine.
You can use the User's Guide to nd useful information through the contents and search function.
* Click [
] or [ ] at the top of the screen to change between contents and search keyword display.
Screens and Illustrations(P. 564)
Symbols(P. 564)
Key and Button Indicators(P. 565)
Search Function(P. 565)
● The User
's Guide describes the various functions of all model series including the machine. You can view a
table indicating which functions and options are supported for each model.
Supported Functions and
Options(P
. 3)
Screens and Illustrations
In the User
's Guide, unless otherwise stated, the following are used in the screens and illustrations.
Model
LBP247dw
Toner Cartridge
Canon Cartridge 070
Computer Operating System
Windows 10
macOS 11
● The screens may vary depending on the model.
● The operations and screens may vary depending on the computer operating system.
● The screens are subject to change due to updates of the drivers and software.
Symbols
The warnings and cautions ar
e also listed in the Important Safety Instructions supplied with the machine. See this for
more information.
Manuals of the Machine(P. 563)
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or serious
personal injury if not performed corr
ectly. To ensure that you use the machine
safely, always observe these warnings.
Indicates a precaution for preventing the risk of personal injury or property
damage other than a pr
oduct fault due to improper use of the machine. To
ensure that you use the machine safely, always observe these cautions.
Appendix
564
Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully,
and mak
e sure not to perform the described operations.
Indicates important requirements and restrictions for security and data
pr
otection as well as precautions that should be observed. Be sure to read these
items to avoid malfunction, fault, or property damage due to incorrect operation.
Indicates a clarication of an oper
ation, or contains additional explanations for a
procedure.
Key and Button Indicators
The contr
ol panel keys and buttons displayed on the screen are indicated as follows:
control panel Keys
Indicated with an icon.
Example: Home key
Buttons Displayed on the control panel and Computer Screen
Enclosed in squar
e brackets [ ].
Example:
[
]
[Cancel] [Yes]
[The memory media can be safely r
emoved.]
Search Function
1
Click [
] at the top of the screen.
➠ The search keyword input eld is displayed at the top left of the screen.
2
Enter a keyword, and click [ ] or press the [Enter] key on the computer.
● Separ
ate multiple keywords with spaces to search for pages that include all keywords.
● Enclose keywords in double quotation marks (") to search for pages that only contain complete matches
including spaces.
3
Click the search result to view the page.
● Click [
] to show or hide the search results.
● Click [ ] to display the contents.
Appendix
565
Manual Display Settings
9665-0C2
Appendix
566
Operation Examples When Using a Computer
9665-0C3
When using the machine fr
om a computer, you must congure the settings of the computer according to the function
you are using. In addition, you may need the computer information to view the information set on the machine.
In this case, use the operation examples below to check the required settings and information on the computer.
Creating a Shared Folder(P. 567)
Enabling Network Discovery(P. 569)
Displaying a Shared Printer in the Print Server(P. 569)
Viewing the System Information of the Computer(P. 570)
Viewing the Network Connection Information of the Computer(P. 572)
Viewing the Printer Port(P. 574)
Viewing Two-way Communication(P. 575)
Printing a Test Page(P. 575)
Creating a Shared Folder
When Using Windows(P. 567)
When Using macOS(P. 568)
◼ When Using Windo
ws
1
Create a folder in any location (such as Desktop).
2
Right-click the created folder, and click [Properties].
3
On the [Sharing] tab, click [Advanced Sharing].
➠ The [Advanced Sharing] scr
een is displayed.
4
Select the [Share this folder] checkbox, and click [Permissions].
5
Congure the access privilege.
Appendix
567
1
In [Group or user names], select [Everyone].
2
In [Permissions], select the [Allow] checkbox in [Change].
3
Click [OK].
6
Click [OK]
[Close].
➠ The cr
eated folder can be used as a shared folder.
◼ When Using macOS
1
Click [
] [System Preferences] [Sharing].
➠ The [Sharing] screen is displayed.
2
Select the [File Sharing] checkbox, and click [+] in [Shared Folders].
3
Create a folder in any location (such as Desktop), and click [Add].
4
Congure the access privilege.
Appendix
568
1
In [Shared Folders], select the created folder.
2
In [Users], select [Everyone] [Read & Write].
5
Close the screen.
➠ The cr
eated folder can be used as a shared folder.
Enabling Network Discovery
1
Right-click [
] (Start), and click [Network Connections].
➠ The [Status] scr
een is displayed.
2
Click [Network and Sharing Center]
[Change advanced sharing settings].
➠ The [Advanced sharing settings] scr
een is displayed.
3
In [Network discovery], select [Turn on network discovery], and click [Save changes].
Displaying a Shared Printer in the Print Server
When Using Windows(P. 570)
When Using macOS(P. 570)
Appendix
569
◼ When Using Windo
ws
1
Right-click [
] (Start), and click [File Explorer].
2
In [Network], select the print server to display the shared printer.
If nothing is displayed in [Network], enable network discovery. Enabling Network Discovery(P. 569)
◼ When Using macOS
1
Click [
] [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
➠ The [Printers & Scanners] scr
een is displayed.
2
Click [+] at the bottom left.
➠ The [Add] scr
een is displayed.
3
Click [
], to display the shared printer.
Viewing the System Information of the Computer
When Using Windows(P. 571)
When Using macOS(P. 571)
Appendix
570
◼ When Using Windo
ws
1
Right-click [
] (Start), and click [System].
➠ The [About] scr
een is displayed.
2
In [Device specications], vie
w the computer name and operating system version.
● The computer name is displayed in [De
vice name].
● The operating system version is displayed in [System type].
If the computer has a 32-bit operating system, "32-bit Operating System" is displayed.
If the computer has a 64-bit operating system, "64-bit Operating System" is displayed.
◼ When Using macOS
1
Click [
] [System Preferences] [Sharing].
➠ The [Sharing] scr
een is displayed.
The name displayed in [Computer Name] on the [Sharing] screen may not be usable on the network. Use
the following procedure to view the computer name used on the network.
2
Click [Edit].
3
In [Local Hostname], view the computer name.
Parts displayed in gray are not included in the computer name.
Appendix
571
4
Click [Cancel].
Viewing the Network Connection Information of the Computer
When Using Windows(P. 572)
When Using macOS(P. 573)
◼ When Using Windo
ws
1
Right-click [
] (Start), and click [Network Connections].
➠ The [Status] scr
een is displayed.
2
View the network connection information.
Viewing the SSID of the Wired LAN
Vie
w the SSID in [Network status].
Viewing the IP Address and DNS Server
1
Click [Properties] for the connected network.
2
In [Properties], view the IP address and DNS server.
Appendix
572
◼ When Using macOS
1
Click [
] [System Preferences] [Network].
➠ The [Network] scr
een is displayed.
2
View the IP address, DNS server, and other information.
For Wired LAN
Appendix
573
For Wireless LAN
● Vie
w the SSID in [Network Name].
● View the IP address in [Status].
● Click [Advanced], and view the DNS server on the [DNS] tab.
Viewing the Printer Port
1
Click [
] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].
➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr
een is displayed.
2
Click the printer driver of the machine
[Manage] [Printer properties].
➠ The printer driver pr
operties screen is displayed.
3
On the [Ports] tab, view the port being used.
Appendix
574
If the IP Address of the Machine Is Changed
● Y
ou must add a new port.
Adding a Port(P. 185)
Viewing Two-way Communication
1
Click [ ] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].
➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr
een is displayed.
2
Click the printer driver of the machine
[Manage] [Printer properties].
➠ The printer driver pr
operties screen is displayed.
3
On the [Ports] tab, check that the [Enable bidirectional support] checkbox is selected.
Printing a Test Page
Required Preparations
● Load Letter size paper in the paper dr
awer.
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 139)
When Using Windows(P. 575)
When Using macOS(P. 575)
◼ When Using Windo
ws
1
Click [
] (Start) [ ] (Settings) [Devices] [Printers & scanners].
➠ The [Printers & scanners] scr
een is displayed.
2
Click the printer driver of the machine
[Manage] [Printer properties].
➠ The printer driver pr
operties screen is displayed.
3
On the [General] tab, click [Print Test Page].
➠ When the print data is sent corr
ectly, a test page is printed from the machine.
◼ When Using macOS
1
Click [
] [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
Appendix
575
➠ The [Printers & Scanners] scr
een is displayed.
2
Select the machine, and click [Open Print Queue].
3
From the [Printer] menu, click [Print Test Page].
➠ When the print data is sent corr
ectly, a test page is printed from the machine.
Appendix
576
Environmental Information, Regulations, and
Standar
ds
9665-0C4
◼ International ENERGY ST
AR
®
program (for USA and Canada only)
The international ENERGY STAR Program is an international program that promotes energy
savings in computers and other oce equipment. The pr
ogram backs the development and
dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption. It is
an open system in which businesses can participate voluntarily.
◼ IPv6 Ready Logo
The protocol stack included in this product has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2
established b
y the IPv6 Forum.
◼ When disposing of used toner cartridges
● T
o protect the environment and make more effective use of resources, Canon promotes the recovery and recycling
of used toner cartridges. Please cooperate in the recovery of toner cartridges (resource reuse). For details on
resource reuse, see the Canon website:
global.canon/ctc
When disposing of toner cartridges, pack them in their original packaging to prevent toner dispersal and dispose of
the cartridges in accordance with your local government instructions.
◼ TERMS OF imageWARE REMOTE SERVICE
If your Canon imageCLASS product is enabled with embedded functions for the imageWARE Remote Diagnostic
Service (“iWR”), or your product is not iWR enabled but it interacts with the iWR Remote Diagnostic System (“RDS”)
Plug-In program of imageWARE Enterprise Management Console (“EMC”) software, then Canon USA, Canon Canada or
their respective authorized independent Canon retail dealers can access Product meter readings and receive
notications of certain automated meter information, device error monitoring and supply replenishment notices
automatically via the internet. You can read more about iWR in Canon published materials available from your dealer
or on the web sites of Canon USA (www.usa.canon.com) or Canon Canada (www.canon.ca). iWR will only collect and
transmit Product specic meter readings and service data, and will not access, collect or transmit your image content
data in the Product.
Your instruction to Canon USA, Canon Canada or your dealer to activate iWR (embedded or Plug-In) for a Product shall
be considered (i) a representation that you have an internal IP network and internet access available on a generally
continuous basis; (ii) authorization by you to establish, and perform during the period of iWR activation, HTTPS
communications using your network bandwidth for transmissions over the internet of use and service data
accumulated by the Product and send iWR notice emails to Canon USA, Canon Canada or your dealer, and (iii)
authorization by you to store, analyze and use this data for purposes related to servicing the Product and for Product
and iWR improvement.
Appendix
577
By so instructing Canon USA, Canon Canada or your dealer, you shall also be considered to acknowledge that (A) the
iWR softwar
e (embedded or Plug-In) is the condential property of Canon USA and its licensor; (B) you have no rights
in such iWR software (except as the Product executes the limited data collection and transmission functions for which
it is congured when delivered and you obtain the benets of iWR as outlined in Canon published materials), (C) you
shall not disassemble, decompile, reverse engineer, disclose or attempt to copy such iWR software, allow any third
party to do any of the foregoing or transfer your limited rights to any other party without the prior written approval of
Canon USA or Canon Canada; and (D) there are many factors outside the control of Canon USA, Canon Canada or their
respective dealers that could affect the accuracy or timing of meter readings or service data harvested by iWR and,
except as expressly provided in the limited warranty statement for the Product or End-User License Agreement for
EMC software, in the case of the iWR RDS Plug-In program, neither Canon USA, Canon Canada nor their respective
dealers shall be responsible for alleged deciencies in, or your dissatisfaction with, iWR or any software used to
provide iWR.
If your dealer ceases to be an authorized Canon USA dealer, it will no longer have access to the use and service data
accumulated by iWR for your Product. In that case, you may request or instruct to Canon USA to recommend to you an
alternative service provider who will have access to this data in order to maintain Product service utilizing iWR
functionality.
◼ UNIVERSAL GATEWAY 2 WEBSITE TERMS OF USE
The Universal Gateway 2 Website (“UGW2”) is operated by the Business Information Communications Group ("BICG,"
“we,” “our” or “us”) of Canon U.S.A., Inc. (“Canon U.S.A.”). These Universal Gateway 2 Website Terms of Use ("Terms of
Use") govern your use of the UGW2 and any of the websites, subsites, interactive features, forms, mobile and social
media pages made available through the UGW2 (collectively “Services”). Please review the Universal Gateway 2
Website Privacy Statement which governs the collection and use of your information.
The Services are intended for business use by business users.
BICG may change or cancel the UGW2 or any of its features at any time without notice.
This is a legally binding contract in electronic form between you, an employee or other representative ("you," "your,"
or "yourself") of the company that has authorized you to use or benet from the UGW2 (“Company”), and BICG.
BY USING THE SERVICES OR REGISTERING WITH ONE OF OUR SUBSITES, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND, WITHOUT
LIMITATION OR QUALIFICATION, TO THESE TERMS OF USE, AND ANY OTHER AGREEMENTS (AS DEFINED BELOW) AND
MAY USE THE SERVICES AS LONG AS YOU COMPLY WITH THESE TERMS OF USE. THESE TERMS OF USE APPLY WHETHER
YOU ARE ACCESSING THE SERVICES OFFLINE OR VIA A COMPUTER, TABLET, MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER
TECHNOLOGY OR DEVICE NOW KNOWN OR HEREAFTER DEVELOPED (EACH A "DEVICE").
1. ELIGIBILITY
In order to use the Services, you need to (a) be 18 or older, or at minimum the legal age of majority in your jurisdiction,
and (b) have the power to enter a binding contract with us and not be barred from doing so under any applicable laws
in your country of residence. You also warrant that any account information that you submit to BICG is true, accurate
and complete.
2. CHANGES TO THESE TERMS OF USE
Occasionally we may, in our discretion, make changes to these Terms of Use. Changes will be effective immediately
(except for material changes) upon the posting of the revised Terms of Use to the Services. In the event we make
material changes to these Terms of Use, we will notify you prior to the changes taking effect. Please note that if you do
not agree to the modied Terms of Use, you may not use the Services. Your continued use of the Services following the
posting of the changes or any applicable notice period will mean that you accept those changes.
3. ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATIONS
Support by Email, Chat. When you use the Services, submit forms or send emails to us, you are communicating with us
electronically. You consent to receive communications from us electronically. We will communicate with you by email,
or by posting notices on the Services. You agree that all agreements, notices, disclosures and other communications
that we provide to you electronically satisfy any legal requirement that such communications be in writing.
4. UNSOLICITED IDEAS
Canon U.S.A. and its parent company, successors, subsidiaries, aliates and related entities (“Canon Group”) have
been actively engaged in research and development in diversied scientic and business areas for many years. In
order to protect the interests of Canon U.S.A. and Canon Group in the ideas and information which have been
Appendix
578
conceived or developed internally, and to avoid possible future misunderstandings with you or others, Canon U.S.A.
does not solicit ideas, inventions, work samples, materials, demos, and the lik
e or agree to receive any condential
information from persons or entities outside the Canon Group. Canon U.S.A. maintains a strict policy of not accepting
or considering any creative ideas, suggestions or materials from the public ("Unsolicited Idea(s)") and therefore you
should not submit any Unsolicited Idea(s) to BICG through the Services or otherwise to Canon U.S.A. Canon U.S.A. does
not wish to receive Unsolicited Idea(s) from you and has expressly advised you not to submit them. If you nonetheless
intend to submit an Unsolicited Idea, Canon U.S.A. strongly recommends that you rst consult an attorney in order to
evaluate the effect that submitting such an Unsolicited Idea would have on any rights that you might otherwise have.
Nonetheless, if you do send Canon U.S.A. an Unsolicited Idea that is not already protected by a United States patent or
is not public information, it immediately becomes the property of Canon U.S.A. By submitting an Unsolicited Idea to
Canon U.S.A., you agree to convey your ownership interest in the Unsolicited Idea to Canon U.S.A., and that Canon
U.S.A. will exclusively own all rights, title and interest therein. Furthermore, Canon U.S.A. and its designees will be free
to use, without any compensation to you whatsoever, any concepts, ideas, know-how or techniques contained in any
Unsolicited Idea for any purpose whatsoever, including but not limited to developing, manufacturing, and marketing
products using such information. Neither Canon U.S.A. nor the Canon Group will be liable for such use or disclosure of
such Unsolicited Idea or for any similarities in the Unsolicited Idea and any future Canon U.S.A. or Canon Group uses
or activities.
5. USE OF THE SERVICES
You agree that your use of the Services will comply with applicable laws, and unless otherwise expressly permitted by
Other Agreements, you agree that your use of the Services will strictly be for your own personal and non-commercial
use. In addition, you agree not to take any steps in connection with your use of the Services that could adversely affect
Canon U.S.A. or the Canon Group, including engaging in or attempting to engage in the following conduct:
• interrupting the operation of the Services in any manner whatsoever, including by imposing an unreasonable load on
the Services;
• deleting or revising any material or other information of any other user, Canon U.S.A., Canon Group or any third
party;
• harvesting or otherwise collecting information about others, including email addresses, without their consent;
• deciphering, decompiling, disassembling, or reverse-engineering any of the software comprising or in any way
making up a part of the Services;
• posting advertisements or solicitations of business other than those explicitly approved by Canon U.S.A.;
• defeating, investigating, or providing information concerning methods of defeating security mechanisms, including
by allowing another person to access the Services using credentials issued to you, or by falsifying, deleting, or
concealing Internet Protocol header, email sender, or other identifying information;
• engaging in conduct that restricts, inhibits or discourages any other person or entity from using or enjoying all or
any portion, features or functions of the Services, or which, in Canon U.S.A.’s judgment, exposes Canon U.S.A. or
Canon Group or any of their users, customers, or suppliers to any liability or detriment of any type;
• engaging in conduct affecting Canon U.S.A. or Canon Group adversely or reecting negatively on Canon U.S.A. or
Canon Group, the Services, Canon U.S.A.’s or Canon Group’s goodwill, name or reputation or causing duress, distress
or discomfort to Canon U.S.A., Canon Group or anyone else, or discouraging any person or entity from doing business
with Canon U.S.A. or Canon Group; or
• taking any other action that could endanger or cause damage to Canon U.S.A. or Canon Group, other users of the
Services, or other third parties.
Canon U.S.A. may take any action that it deems appropriate if it determines, in its exclusive discretion, that you have
engaged in any of these practices or otherwise violated these Terms of Use. Such action may include termination of
your access to the Services or initiation of civil or criminal legal proceedings. Under these circumstances, Canon U.S.A.
may also investigate your use of the Services and provide information about your use to law enforcement.
6. OUR INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS
Copyright: All materials on the Services, including but not limited to documentation, graphics, user interfaces, visual
interfaces, images, software, and any audio, text and video clips (the "Materials"), are protected by copyright under
U.S. copyright law, international conventions and other copyright laws. All Materials are owned or licensed by Canon
U.S.A. or by its third-party licensors. You cannot use the Materials, except as specied herein. Any unauthorized use of
the Materials may violate, without limitation, copyright laws, trademark laws, the laws of privacy and publicity, and
communications regulations and statutes. You may not change the Materials in any way or reproduce, publicly display,
Appendix
579
distribute or otherwise use the Materials for any public or commercial purpose. Any reproduction of the Materials on
any other web site or network
ed computer environment for any purpose is prohibited.
Trademarks: Canon U.S.A. trademarks, logos, and service marks and those trademarks, logos, and service marks
licensed to Canon U.S.A. by Canon Inc. (collectively, the "Trademarks") displayed on the Services are registered and
unregistered marks of Canon U.S.A. or Canon Inc. All other trademarks, trade names, product names, service marks
and all other non-Canon U.S.A. marks are the property of their respective owners. Nothing contained on the Services
should be construed as granting, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right to use any Trademark
displayed on the Services without the written permission of Canon U.S.A. or such third party that may own other
trademarks displayed on the Services. The absence of a product or service name or logo anywhere in the text of the
Services does not constitute a waiver of any trademark or other intellectual property rights concerning that name or
logo.
7. USER IDS AND PASSWORDS
Certain areas of the Services may offer the opportunity to register or create an account. You will be asked to create a
user ID and password in connection with such an account. You are responsible for maintaining the condentiality of
the password and account and are fully responsible for all activities that occur under your password or account. Canon
cannot and will not be liable for any loss or damage arising from your failure to comply with this Section. You agree to
notify BICG immediately of any unauthorized use of your user ID or password, or any other breach of security related
to the Services. Your user ID and password may be cancelled, altered or replaced at any time.
If BICG requests that you provide information about yourself in connection with your creation of an account, you
agree that the information that you provide will be entirely truthful and accurate. If the information that you provide
to BICG changes, you agree to promptly provide BICG with updated information.
8. OTHER AGREEMENTS; SOFTWARE, SOLUTIONS, OR ACCESS
Canon U.S.A. and Canon Group may provide products (such as hardware or software), services and solutions, including
cloud solutions, or access to subsites of the Services under supplemental terms and agreements (“Other
Agreements”). The obligations of Canon U.S.A. or any member of Canon Group with respect to any product, service,
solution, or access that it makes available to you under any Other Agreement shall be governed solely by the Other
Agreements, under which such product, service or solution or access is provided and these Terms of Use shall not be
deemed or construed to alter the terms of such Other Agreements.
9. USE OF SOFTWARE
Any software that is available on the Services ("Software") is the copyrighted work of Canon U.S.A. and/or its licensors.
Copying or reproducing the Software to any other server or location for further reproduction or redistribution is
strictly prohibited, unless such reproduction or redistribution is permitted by a license agreement accompanying such
Software. You may not create derivative works of the Software, or attempt to decompile or reverse-engineer the
Software unless otherwise permitted by law. Use of the Software is subject to the license terms of any license
agreement that may accompany or is provided with the Software. You may not download any Software until you have
read and accepted the terms of the accompanying software license.
WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, THE SOFTWARE IS WARRANTED, IF AT ALL, ONLY ACCORDING TO THE TERMS OF
THE SEPARATE LICENSE AGREEMENT ACCOMPANYING THE SOFTWARE. EXCEPT AS WARRANTED IN SUCH LICENSE
AGREEMENT, CANON U.S.A., CANON GROUP, AND ITS AND THEIR LICENSORS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND
CONDITIONS WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT, TO THE MAXIMUM
EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights: The Software available on the Services and accompanying documentation that is
downloaded from the Services for or on behalf of the United States of America, its agencies and/or instrumentalities
are provided with Restricted Rights. You agree to meet all requirements necessary to ensure that the Federal
Government will honor such rights. Disclosure, use or reproduction of the Software and accompanying documentation
are subject to restrictions set forth at Federal Acquisition Regulation 52.227-14, when applicable, or in the Department
of Defense Federal Acquisitions Regulations Supplement 252.227-7013.
Export Controls: Software available on the Services is further subject to United States Export Controls. No software
available on the Services may be downloaded or exported (i) into (or to a national or resident of) any country to which
the United States has embargoed goods; or (ii) to anyone on the United States Treasury Department's list of Specially
Designated Nationals or using the Commerce Department's Table of Deny Orders. By downloading any Software, you
represent and warrant that you are not located in, or under the control of, or a national or resident of any such
country or on any such list.
10. MOBILE APPLICATIONS
Appendix
580
If Canon U.S.A. offers products and services through applications available on your wireless or other mobile Device
(such as a mobile phone) (the "Mobile Application Services"), these Mobile Application Services ar
e governed by the
applicable additional terms governing such Mobile Application Service. We do not charge for these Mobile Application
Services unless otherwise provided in the applicable additional terms. However, your wireless carrier's standard
messaging rates and other messaging, data and other rates and charges will apply to certain Mobile Application
Services. You should check with your carrier to nd out what plans your carrier offers and how much the plans cost. In
addition, the use or availability of certain Mobile Application Services may be prohibited or restricted by your wireless
carrier, and not all Mobile Application Services may work with all wireless carriers or Devices. Therefore, you should
check with your wireless carrier to nd out if the Mobile Application Services are available for your wireless Device, and
what restrictions, if any, may be applicable to your use of such Mobile Application Services.
11. LINKS TO OTHER WEBSITES AND PRODUCTS
Canon Subsites: You may be required to agree to Other Agreements and user codes of conduct in order to access
certain portions of the Services, which are known as "subsites." If you attempt to access a subsite that requires you to
enter into such a supplemental agreement, the controller of that subsite will advise you and provide you with an
opportunity to review the Other Agreement and agree to it before accessing the subsite or using such subsite’s
services. Both these Terms of Use and the Other Agreements will govern your use of the subsite. In the event of any
inconsistency between these Terms of Use and the Other Agreements, the Other Agreements will control, except that
nothing in the Other Agreements may limit (a) Canon U.S.A.’s disclaimer of warranties, (b) your agreement to
indemnify Canon U.S.A. or Canon Group, or (c) the licenses you grant to Canon U.S.A. or other intellectual property.
Third Party Links: Mention of third party products, companies and websites on the Services is for informational
purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation of such products, companies, or
websites. Canon U.S.A. and Canon Group make no representations, warranties or other commitments whatsoever
regarding any third party products, companies or websites that may be referenced on, accessible from or linked to the
Services, or the quality, safety or suitability of any products offered by third-party companies. Likewise, links to third-
party sites are provided for your convenience only. When you access a non-Canon U.S.A. site, including any site that is
referenced on, accessible from or linked to from the Services, or that contains the Canon U.S.A. logo, please
understand that such site is independent from Canon U.S.A., that Canon U.S.A. does not control that site, and that
Canon U.S.A. is not responsible for the content of that site. Links from the Services to any other site do not mean that
Canon U.S.A. approves, or endorses or recommends that site. Canon U.S.A. disclaims all warranties, express or implied,
as to the accuracy, legality, reliability or validity of any content on any other site. Viewing of all other sites is at your
own risk. It is your responsibility to take precautions to protect yourself from viruses, worms, Trojan horses, and other
potentially destructive programs, and to protect your information.
12. SALE OF PRODUCTS AND SERVICES
Terms of Sale Shall Govern: These Terms of Use govern your access to and use of the Services. You acknowledge and
agree that your rights and responsibilities regarding purchases of products and services offered within the UGW2 will
be governed by such other terms and conditions as provided in the applicable terms of sale. In the event there is a
conict between these Terms of Use and the terms provided in an applicable terms of sale, the terms of sale shall
prevail.
Pricing: We cannot conrm the price or availability of an item until you order. We try to be as accurate as possible.
However, despite our best efforts, a small number of the items available for sale or lease may not be available, the
offer may have been misstated or expired, or an item may be mispriced. The correct price for any item will appear in
your shopping cart before you check out. Please be sure to verify the price for your purchase in your cart before
submitting payment.
Availability of Products and Services: The products and services displayed on the Services may not be available for
purchase in your particular country or locality. The reference to such products and services in the Services does not
imply or warrant that these products or services will be available at any time in your particular location, or at the price
or terms displayed on the Services. We do not warrant that product descriptions or other Services content is accurate,
complete, reliable, current, or error-free.
INFORMATION REGARDING CANON PRODUCTS AND SERVICES, INCLUDING THEIR AVAILABILITY, APPEARANCE, PRICE
AND SPECIFICATIONS IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. SUCH INFORMATION SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE A
REPRESENTATION, WARRANTY OR OTHER COMMITMENT BY CANON WITH RESPECT TO ANY PRODUCT OR SERVICE
AND CANON U.S.A. HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AS TO THE ACCURACY,
MERCHANTABILITY, AND SUITABILITY FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR COMPLETENESS THEREOF.
13. DISCLAIMER
YOUR USE OF THE SERVICES IS SOLELY AT YOUR OWN RISK. THE SERVICES (INCLUDING ALL CONTENT AND FUNCTIONS
MADE AVAILABLE ON OR ACCESSED THROUGH THE SERVICES) ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE.” TO THE
FULLEST EXTENT PERMISSIBLE BY LAW, NEITHER CANON U.S.A. NOR CANON GROUP MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS
OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER (1) FOR THE ACCURACY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
Appendix
581
PURPOSE OR COMPLETENESS THEREOF, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OR ANY
C
ONTENT PUBLISHED ON OR AVAILABLE THROUGH THE SERVICES, (2) THAT THE SERVER THAT MAKES THE SERVICES
AVAILABLE IS FREE OF VIRUSES OR OTHER COMPONENTS THAT MAY INFECT, HARM OR CAUSE DAMAGE TO YOUR
COMPUTER EQUIPMENT OR ANY OTHER PROPERTY WHEN YOU ACCESS, BROWSE, DOWNLOAD FROM OR OTHERWISE
USE THE SITE, (3) THAT CANON U.S.A. WILL CONTINUE TO PROVIDE THE SERVICES OR, IF IT DOES CONTINUE TO
PROVIDE THE SERVICES, THAT THE SERVICES WILL CONTINUE TO PROVIDE THE SERVICES IT CURRENTLY PROVIDES OR
THAT THE SERVICES WILL FUNCTION THE WAY THAT IT CURRENTLY DOES; OR (4) THAT ANY OF YOUR CONTENT OR
COMMUNICATIONS WILL BE RETAINED OR STORED ON THE SERVICES FOR ANY PARTICULAR AMOUNT OF TIME.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, CANON U.S.A.'S NEGLIGENCE OR GROSS
NEGLIGENCE, WILL CANON U.S.A., ANY ENTITY WITHIN THE CANON GROUP, OR ANY OTHER PARTY INVOLVED IN
CREATING, HOSTING OR DELIVERING THE SERVICES, BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF YOUR ACCESS TO OR USE
OF,THE SERVICES, YOUR INABILITY TO ACCESS OR USE THE SERVICES, YOUR RELIANCE ON OR USE OF INFORMATION
OR SERVICES PROVIDED ON OR THROUGH THE SERVICES, OR THAT RESULT FROM MISTAKES, OMISSIONS,
INTERRUPTIONS, DELETION OF FILES, ERRORS, DEFECTS, DELAYS IN OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, OR ANY FAILURE
OF PERFORMANCE, EVEN IF CANON U.S.A. OR SUCH OTHER ENTITY OR PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES. PLEASE NOTE THAT SOME JURISDICTIONS MAY NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, SO SOME OF THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. CHECK YOUR LOCAL
LAWS FOR ANY RESTRICTIONS OR LIMITATIONS REGARDING THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES.
CANON U.S.A. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS AND IMPLIED, TO THE GREATEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW.
CANON U.S.A. ALSO ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY, AND WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR, ANY DAMAGE TO OR VIRUSES THAT
MAY INFECT YOUR COMPUTER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER PROPERTY, OR FOR ANY LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA ON
ACCOUNT OF YOUR ACCESS TO, USE OF, OR BROWSING IN THE SERVICES, OR YOUR DOWNLOADING OF ANY
MATERIALS, DATA, TEXT, IMAGES, VIDEO, OR AUDIO FROM THE SERVICES. NOTWITHSTANDING THE LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY CONTAINED HEREIN, IN NO EVENT SHALL CANON U.S.A.'S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES,
LOSSES AND CAUSES OF ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU,
IF ANY, FOR ACCESSING THE SERVICES.
14. INDEMNIFICATION
You agree to indemnify, defend and hold Canon U.S.A., Canon Group, and all of their respective agents, directors,
ocers, employees, information providers, licensors and licensees (collectively "Indemnied Parties") harmless from
and against any and all liability and costs and expenses (including, without limitation, attorneys' fees and costs),
incurred by the Indemnied Parties in connection with your use of the Services or any claim in connection with or
resulting from any breach by you of these Terms of Use. You agree to cooperate fully in Canon U.S.A.'s defense of any
such claim. You agree that Canon U.S.A. shall be entitled to select its own counsel, at your expense, to defend it in
connection with any claim subject to indemnication by you. You agree that Canon U.S.A., and not you, will have
control over the defense of any such claim. You further agree that you will not in any event settle any matter involving
Canon U.S.A., whether or not the settlement binds or is on behalf of Canon U.S.A., without the written consent of
Canon U.S.A.
15. TERMINATION
Canon U.S.A. may terminate these Terms of Use and/or suspend or terminate your access to the Services for any
reason at any time without notice to you. If you wish to discontinue your access to the Services and cancel any account
that you have been issued, please refer to the supplemental terms of that particular subsite or service. Otherwise,
applicable sections of these Terms of Use shall survive any termination of your account or these Terms of Use. In
particular, because the licenses you grant to us are perpetual, these licenses survive any termination of this
agreement.
16. APPLICABLE LAWS
The UGW2 is administered by BICG from its oces in Melville, New York, United States of America. These Terms of Use
and the Other Agreements are governed and interpreted under the laws of the State of New York. You agree that any
claim or dispute against Canon U.S.A. arising out of or relating to the use of the Services must be resolved by a court
located in the Eastern District of New York, unless otherwise agreed upon by all parties. Any claim or cause of action
arising out of or related to your use of the Services must be led within one (1) year after such claim or cause of action
arose, regardless of any statute or law to the contrary. In the event any such claim or cause of action is not led within
such one (1) year period, such claim or cause of action shall be forever barred.
17. GENERAL PROVISIONS
These Terms of Use and the Universal Gateway 2 Website Privacy Statement set forth the entire understanding and
agreement between you and BICG with respect to the Services. You acknowledge that any other agreements between
you and BICG with respect to the Services are superseded and of no force or effect. If any provision of these Terms of
Use shall be determined to be unlawful, void or for any reason unenforceable by a court or other legal authority of
Appendix
582
competent jurisdiction, then that provision will be severed from these Terms of Use and will be deemed replaced by an
equivalent enfor
ceable provision that, as nearly as possible, reects the intent of the parties. The severance of any
individual provision of these Terms of Use will not affect the validity and enforceability of any remaining provisions.
BY CONTINUING TO USE THE SERVICES, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THESE TERMS OF USE.
© 2021 Canon U.S.A., Inc. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction in whole or part without permission is prohibited.
Appendix
583
Notice
9665-0C5
● The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
● CANON
INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
EXCEPT AS STIPULATED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THEREOF WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PATENT RIGHTS.
CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE,
NOR FOR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MANUAL.
● If you are unable to view the manual in PDF format, download Adobe Acrobat Reader from the Adobe Systems
website (https://get.adobe.com/reader/).
Appendix
584
Trademarks and Copyrights
9665-0C6
◼ T
rademarks
Adobe, Acrobat and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc. AirPrint and the
AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
Mopria®, the Mopria® Logo and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria
Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Google Chrome, Chrome OS, Chromebook, and Android are trademarks of Google LLC.
This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.
UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Oce and may
be registered in certain jurisdictions.
UFST: Copyright © 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, 2014 all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
Copyright © 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Pr
otected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593;
6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems
Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'
implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item
refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed
by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript
language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
All brand names and product names appearing on this document are registered trademarks or trademarks of their
respective owners.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Appendix
585
◼ Cop
yright
Unauthorized reproduction of the contents of this document in whole or in part is prohibited.
V_230207
Appendix
586
Third-party Software
9665-0C7
For details about thir
d-party software, click the following icon:
Third-Party Services
Third-Party Software Included in This Manual
Appendix
587
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,
V
ersion 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:
http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
-----------------------------------------------------------
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007
-----------------------------------------------------------
PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide
development of collaborative font projects, to support the font
creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to
provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and
improved in partnership with others.
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and
redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The
fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,
redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved
names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,
however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The
requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to
any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of les released by the Copyright
Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may
include source les, build scripts and documentation.
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specied as such after the
copyright statement(s).
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software
components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).
"Modied Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,
deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the
components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting
the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical
writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,
modify, redistribute, and sell modied and unmodied copies of the
Font Software, subject to the following conditions:
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
588
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in
Original or Modied V
ersions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,
redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy
contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be
included either as stand-alone text les, human-readable headers or
in the appropriate machine-readable metadata elds within text or
binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font
Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the
corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font
Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any
Modied Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written
permission.
5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole,
must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be
distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any document created using
the Font Software.
TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are
not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
589
1
Third-Party Services
If you use third-party services through the PRODUCT, use of the services are subjected the conditions
below.
When you access and/or obtain some third party content (such as text, images, videos, audios, or
software) through the SOFTWARE, except as expressly permitted by the content owner or by
applicable law, you may not (a) scrape, build databases or otherwise create permanent copies of such
content, or keep cached copies longer than permitted by the cache header; (b) copy, translate, modify,
create a derivative work of, sell, lease, lend, convey, distribute, publicly display or sublicense to any
third party; (c) misrepresent the source or ownership; and (d) remove, obscure, or alter any copyright,
trademark or other proprietary rights notices, falsify or delete any author attributions, legal notices
or other labels of the origin or source of material.
2
The Software Subjected to Other License Conditions
Please refer to Contents of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and
corresponding license conditions.
Contents of Software
Names of Software
1. Adobe PDF Scan Library .............................................................................................................. 3
2. Adobe PostScript 3 ...................................................................................................................... 6
3. expat ........................................................................................................................................ 13
4. HarfBuzz ................................................................................................................................... 14
5. libjingle .................................................................................................................................... 15
6. Lua ........................................................................................................................................... 15
7. LuaSocket ................................................................................................................................. 17
8. LuneScript ................................................................................................................................. 18
9. MD4 ......................................................................................................................................... 19
10. Net-SNMP ............................................................................................................................... 19
11. OpenSSL ................................................................................................................................. 39
3
1.Adobe PDF Scan Library
Portions use software under the following terms:
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org/).
Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please
contact apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their
name, without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION
OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
4
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache
Software Foundation and was originally based on software copyright (c) 1999, International Business
Machines, Inc., http://www.ibm.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation,
please see <http://www.apache.org/>.
______________________________________________________________________________________
March 27, 2003
Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the
"Sablotron XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License
Version 1.1 (the "License"). You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the License.
The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance
are Copyright (C) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems
Incorporated are available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet
from:
http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp
The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:
https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 1997-1999 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any
purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies
5
and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
Silicon Graphics makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It
is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Loki Library
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu . This code accompanies the book:
Alexandrescu, Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied".
Portions Copyright (c) 2001. Addison-Wesley. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell
this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice
appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Wesley Longman make no representations about
the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied
warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at
http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty .
______________________________________________________________________________________
6
2.Adobe PostScript 3
Copyright 2007-2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated and its licensors. All rights reserved.
Portions include software under the following terms:
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions of Pool.c_Copyright 1987 - NeXT, Inc., and portions of Graphics.c_Copyright 1988 NeXT,
Inc. as an unpublished work. All Rights Reserved.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Apache Software License, Version 1.1
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org/).
Portions Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please
contact apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their
name, without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
7
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION
OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache
Software Foundation and was originally based on software copyright (c) 1999, International Business
Machines, Inc., http://www.ibm.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation,
please see <http://www.apache.org/>.
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
8
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 1985, 1986 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by James A. Woods, derived from original
work by Spencer Thomas and Joseph Orost.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright
notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising
materials, and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software
was developed by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Portions Copyright (c) 1993 X Consortium
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEX CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER INAN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR INCONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written
authorization from the X Consortium.
9
______________________________________________________________________________________
NOTICE REGARDING SABLOTRON
March 27, 2003
Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the
"Sablotron XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License
Version 1.1 (the "License"). You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the License.
The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance
are Copyright (C) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems
Incorporated are available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet
from:
http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp
The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:
https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 The Regents
of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
10
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California,
Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu. This code accompanies the book:
Alexandrescu, Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied".
Copyright (c) 2001. Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted
without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-
Welsey Longman make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is
provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions developed by the University of California, Berkeley.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright © 1991-2005 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of
Use in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files
and associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and associated documentation
(the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or
Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided
that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of the Data Files
11
or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in associated
documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified Data File or in the Software as well as
in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that the data or software has been
modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY
SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER
TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE
DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior
written authorization of the copyright holder.
Unicode and the Unicode logo are trademarks of Unicode, Inc., and may be registered in some
jurisdictions. All other trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned herein are the property of
their respective owners.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Adobe shall retain and reproduce, and require its Sublicensees to retain and reproduce JIM's following
copyright notice within each copy of the licensed programs in any form, in whole or in part: "© 1981,
1990 JMI Consultants, Inc. All rights reserved."
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
12
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Loki Library
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu // This code accompanies the book:
Alexandrescu, Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied".
Copyright (c) 2001. Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted
without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-
Wesley Longman make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is
provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at
http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty .
______________________________________________________________________________________
13
3.expat
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
14
4.HarfBuzz
Copyright (C) 2006 Behdad Esfahbod
Copyright (C) 1998-2004 David Turner and Werner Lemberg
Copyright (C) 2008 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies)
Copyright (C) 2004,2007 Red Hat, Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, without written agreement and without license or royalty fees, to use,
copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that the
above copyright notice and the following two paragraphs appear in all copies of this software.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE
AND ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS NO
OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.
15
5.libjingle
Copyright 2004--2007, Google Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
6.Lua
Copyright © 1994–2014 Lua.org, PUC-Rio.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
16
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
17
7.LuaSocket
LuaSocket 2.0.2 license
Copyright © 2004-2007 Diego Nehab
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
18
8.LuneScript
MIT License
LuneScript
Copyright (c) 2018-2020 ifritJP
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
19
9.MD4
"RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm"
"derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm"
10.Net-SNMP
Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate
parts below. Please make sure that you read all the parts.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of
the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written
permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
20
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
21
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,
California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
22
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2003-2013, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
23
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
24
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and
Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
Author: Bernhard Penz <bernhard.p[email protected]>
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries,
brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
25
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 8: Apple Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2007 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of Apple Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
26
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 9: ScienceLogic, LLC copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2009, ScienceLogic, LLC
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of ScienceLogic, LLC nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
27
---- Part 10: Lennart Poettering copyright notice (BSD-like) -----
Copyright 2010 Lennart Poettering
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so,
subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
---- Part 11: IETF copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2013 IETF Trust and the persons identified as authors of
the code. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
28
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Internet Society, IETF or IETF Trust, nor the
names of specific contributors, may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 12: Arista Networks copyright notice (BSD) ----
Copyright (c) 2013, Arista Networks, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Arista Networks, Inc. nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
29
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
---- Part 13: VMware, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2016, VMware, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of VMware, Inc. nor the names of its contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
30
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 14: USC/Information Sciences Institute copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2017-2018, Information Sciences Institute
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Information Sciences Institue nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
31
Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate
parts below. Please make sure that you read all the parts.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of
the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written
permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
32
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
33
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,
California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
34
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2003-2012, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may
35
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and
Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
36
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
Author: Bernhard Penz <bernhard.p[email protected]>
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries,
brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
37
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 8: Apple Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2007 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of Apple Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 9: ScienceLogic, LLC copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2009, ScienceLogic, LLC
38
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of ScienceLogic, LLC nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
39
11.OpenSSL
OpenSSL License
---------------
/*
=============================================================
=======
* Copyright (c) 1998-2018 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* openssl-[email protected].
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
40
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*
=============================================================
=======
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson ([email protected]).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young ([email protected]).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
41
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young ([email protected])"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
42
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
43
OpenSSL License
---------------
/*
=============================================================
=======
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* openssl-[email protected].
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
44
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*
=============================================================
=======
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson ([email protected]).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young ([email protected]).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
45
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young ([email protected])"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
46
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
